Perspectives on Asian Tourism Series Editors: Catheryn Khoo-Lattimore · Paolo Mura

Claire Liu Heike Schänzel Editors Tourism Education and Asia Perspectives on Asian Tourism

Series editors Catheryn Khoo-Lattimore Griffith University Nathan, Queensland, Australia Paolo Mura Taylor’s University Subang Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia While a conspicuous body of knowledge about tourism in Asia is emerging, Western academic ontologies and epistemologies still represent the dominant voice within tourism circles. This series provides a platform to support Asian scholarly production and reveals the different aspects of Asian tourism and its intricate economic and socio-cultural trends. The books in this series are aimed to pave the way for a more integrated and multifaceted body of knowledge about Asian tourism. By doing so, they contribute to the idea that tourism, as both phenomenon and field of studies, should be more inclusive and disentangled from dominant (mainly Western) ways of knowing. More specifically, the series will fill gaps in knowledge with regard to: • the ontological, epistemological, and methodological assumptions behind Asian tourism research; • specific segments of the Asian tourist population, such as Asian women, Asian backpackers, Asian young tourists, Asian gay tourists, etc; • specific types of tourism in Asia, such as film-induced tourism, adventure tour- ism, beauty tourism, religious tourism, etc; • Asian tourists’ experiences, patterns of behaviour, and constraints to travel; • Asian values that underpin operational, management, and marketing decisions in and/or on Asia (travel); • external factors that add to the complexities of Asian tourism studies.

More information about this series at http://www.springer.com/series/15382 Claire Liu • Heike Schänzel Editors

Tourism Education and Asia Editors Claire Liu Heike Schänzel School of Hospitality & Tourism School of Hospitality & Tourism Auckland University of Technology Auckland University of Technology Auckland, New Zealand Auckland, New Zealand

ISSN 2509-4203 ISSN 2509-4211 (electronic) Perspectives on Asian Tourism ISBN 978-981-13-2612-7 ISBN 978-981-13-2613-4 (eBook) https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4

Library of Congress Control Number: 2018961392

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 This work is subject to copyright. All rights are reserved by the Publisher, whether the whole or part of the material is concerned, specifically the rights of translation, reprinting, reuse of illustrations, recitation, broadcasting, reproduction on microfilms or in any other physical way, and transmission or information storage and retrieval, electronic adaptation, computer software, or by similar or dissimilar methodology now known or hereafter developed. The use of general descriptive names, registered names, trademarks, service marks, etc. in this publication does not imply, even in the absence of a specific statement, that such names are exempt from the relevant protective laws and regulations and therefore free for general use. The publisher, the authors, and the editors are safe to assume that the advice and information in this book are believed to be true and accurate at the date of publication. Neither the publisher nor the authors or the editors give a warranty, express or implied, with respect to the material contained herein or for any errors or omissions that may have been made. The publisher remains neutral with regard to jurisdictional claims in published maps and institutional affiliations.

This Springer imprint is published by the registered company Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. The registered company address is: 152 Beach Road, #21-01/04 Gateway East, Singapore 189721, Singapore Foreword

Tourism education as a subject of scholarly work has been a niche area in the gen- eral domain of tourism research. Although most tourism scholars teach, not many allocate their precious time to scholarship of teaching and learning. Some even question the value and quality of such efforts as most tourism scholars do not have academic background in education. However, to be responsible educators, we have to be vigilant of the fast-changing environment and understand the dynamics of its various constituencies. Serving as the Editor-in-Chief of the Journal of Teaching in Travel and Tourism for 15 years and the editor of several tourism education-related books, I am a firm believer of being a reflective educator. Under the leadership of the editors, authors of this compilation collectively reflected upon tourism educa- tion in the context of Asia. It is such a great pleasure to see colleagues devoting their time and thought on this important, yet under-explored area. Hospitality Management Education (1999) edited by Barrows and Bosselman was the first book published related to tourism education, mostly from a North American perspective. Global Tourism Higher Education: Past, Present, and Future (2005), edited by Hsu, and An International Handbook of Tourism Education (2005), edited by Airey and Tribe, offered an international perspective. After a decade of vacuum in terms of book publication on tourism education, several edited books on teaching and learning surfaced in the past few years, which signalled the recognition of the need for more extensive treatments of tourism education as a phenomenon and research topic. These books provided valuable discussion on vari- ous topics central to tourism education from a global perspective. Recognising the unprecedented growth of tourism activities and tourism educa- tion in Asia, the current book uses an Asian lens to investigate critical issues facing Asian students, scholars and higher educational institutions. All authors are either of Asian origin or with extensive experience and understanding of the Asian cultures and perspectives. Their observations are astute and their analyses are insightful, many taking an emic view. This book is extremely valuable as it contains information rarely available in the English language literature, for example, the historical path and current state of tourism education in Bhutan, India, Indonesia, Iran, Nepal and Vietnam. While

v vi Foreword book chapters or journal articles are available about tourism education in China and Thailand, this collection provides an update and additional insights on particular concerns in these countries. The book also addresses the important issues of Asian students studying abroad and transnational education, which are both intraregional and interregional phenomena worthy of in-depth exploration. A focus on Asia does not limit its readership. In fact, the discussion should be of particular interest to educators in the West as a window to the Asian tourism educa- tion landscape. As Western universities try to recruit more Asian students and col- laborate with Asian universities in a variety of formats, an understanding of the history, current status, pertinent issues and challenges, as well as opportunities, is certainly beneficial in guiding their way forward. In an academic world of matrices and citation indices, the editors and authors should be applauded for their commitment in putting this book together. These underappreciated efforts facilitate the documentation of tacit knowledge and our learning about each other. This book will serve as an important reference for future relevant scholarly work as well as practical development activities. My congratula- tions go to the editors and authors of this volume! Finally, I would like to challenge the readers to treat this book as a stimulus to embark on more dialogue and scholarly work in tourism education.

The Hong Kong Polytechnic University Cathy H. C. Hsu Hong Kong, China July 2018 Acknowledgements

We would like to thank all the chapter contributors for their passion, commitment and patience in completing the manuscripts. We have been inspired by the insights of these global tourism educators and researchers while working on the book. Special acknowledgement to our copy editor, Trish Brothers from the Auckland University of Technology, for her hard work and dedication to the editing of the chapter manuscripts. We also thank the Perspectives on Asian Tourism Series editors, Catheryn Khoo-­ Lattimore from Griffith University, Australia, and Paolo Mura from Taylor’s University, Malaysia, for their support and encouragement during the creation of this edited collection.

Auckland University of Technology Claire Liu Auckland, New Zealand Heike Schänzel

vii Contents

Part I Introduction to the Book 1 Intr oduction to Tourism Education and Asia...... 3 Claire Liu and Heike Schänzel

Part II Tourism Education in Asia 2 Differentiating Academic and Vocational Hospitality and Tourism Education: The Milieu of Indonesia...... 15 Hera Oktadiana and Kaye Chon 3 V ocational Education and Training for Hospitality and Tourism Industry in India...... 35 Saurabh Kumar Dixit and Hakamelamphylla Mawroh 4 Situation Analysis of Tourism and Hospitality Management Education in Nepal...... 49 Brijesh Thapa and Smrittee Kala Panta 5 Tourism Higher Education in Iran: Past, Present and Future Directions...... 63 Siamak Seyfi, Adel Nikjoo, and Masoud A. Samimi 6 Review and Assessment of Academic Tourism and Hospitality Programmes in China...... 81 Andreas H. Zins and Se You Jang 7 Hotel and Tourism Management Education in Bhutan: The Creation of the Royal Institute of Tourism and Hospitality...... 107 Paul Strickland 8 Tourism Education in Vietnam...... 125 Erwin Losekoot, Earney Lasten, and Tran Phu Cuong

ix x Contents

9 The Institutional Context for Experiential Learning Investment in Hospitality Education: A Case Study from Thailand...... 143 Karl Basil Dicen, Chachaya Yodsuwan, Ken Butcher, and Nantaporn Mingkwan

Part III Tourism Education of Asian Students Abroad 10 Outcomes and Challenges of a Cooperative and Intercultural Learning Project: A Critical Analysis...... 163 Anya Diekmann, Martin Vincent, and Jyotsna Patwardhan 11 Career Goals of Chinese International Tourism and Hospitality Students in Australia...... 177 Katrine Sonnenschein 12 The Push-Pull Model of Motivation: An Analysis of Chinese Polytechnic Students’ Motivation to Pursue Degree Completion in Canada...... 193 Eugene Thomlinson and Rebecca Wilson-Mah

Part IV Transnational Tourism Education in Asia 13 Resear ch Performance of Tourism Education Quality Accredited Programmes in Greater China...... 211 Libo Yan 14 Patterns of Tourism and Hospitality Education in India and Malaysia: A Critical Reflection...... 227 Sudipta Kiran Sarkar and Babu George 15 Hospitality, Tourism and Global Education in Asia: A Transnational Conundrum? Current Thoughts and Anecdotes...... 243 Andrew Jones

Glossary...... 259 Contributors

Ken Butcher Department of Tourism, Sport and Hotel Management, Griffith Business School, Griffith University, Gold Coast, Australia Kaye Chon The Hong Kong Polytechnic University, Hung Hom, Hong Kong Tran Phu Cuong Vietnam National Administration of Tourism, Hanoi, Vietnam Karl Basil Dicen School of Management, Mae Fah Luang University, Chiang Rai, Thailand Anya Diekmann Research Centre LIToTeS (Laboratoire Interdisciplinaire, Tourisme, Territoires, Sociétés), Université Libre de Bruxelles, Bruxelles, Belgium Saurabh Kumar Dixit Department of Tourism & Hotel Management, North-­ Eastern Hill University, Shillong, Meghalaya, India Babu George Fort Hays State University, Hays, KS, USA Se You Jang Nanjing Tech University Pujiang Institute, MODUL School of Tourism and Hospitality Management, Nanjing, Jiangsu, China Andrew Jones Institute for Tourism Travel and Culture, University of Malta, Msida, Malta Earney Lasten RMIT University Vietnam, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Claire Liu School of Hospitality & Tourism, Auckland University of Technology, Auckland, New Zealand Erwin Losekoot RMIT University Vietnam, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Hakamelamphylla Mawroh Department of Tourism & Hotel Management, North-Eastern Hill University, Shillong, Meghalaya, India Nantaporn Mingkwan School of Management, Mae Fah Luang University, Chiang Rai, Thailand

xi xii Contributors

Adel Nikjoo Shandiz Institute of Higher Education, Mashhad, Khorasan Razavi, Iran Hera Oktadiana James Cook University, Douglas, Australia Bina Nusantara University, Jakarta, Indonesia Smrittee Kala Panta Department of Tourism, Recreation & Sport Management, University of Florida, Gainesville, FL, USA Jyotsna Patwardhan Garware Institute of Career Education and Development, University of Mumbai, Mumbai, India Masoud A. Samimi Shandiz Institute of Higher Education, Mashhad, Khorasan Razavi, Iran Sudipta Kiran Sarkar Sol International Hospitality Management Department, Woosong University, Daejeon, South Korea Heike Schänzel School of Hospitality & Tourism, Auckland University of Technology, Auckland, New Zealand Siamak Seyfi Pantheon-Sorbonne University, Paris, France Katrine Sonnenschein Department of Learning and Philosophy, Aalborg University, Nathan, Australia Paul Strickland La Trobe University, Melbourne, Australia Brijesh Thapa Department of Tourism, Recreation & Sport Management, University of Florida, Gainesville, FL, USA Eugene Thomlinson Royal Roads University, Victoria, BC, Canada Martin Vincent LIToTeS, Université Libre de Bruxelles, Bruxelles, Belgium Rebecca Wilson-Mah Royal Roads University, Victoria, BC, Canada Libo Yan Faculty of Hospitality and Tourism Management, Macau University of Science and Technology, Macau, China Chachaya Yodsuwan School of Management, Mae Fah Luang University, Chiang Rai, Thailand Andreas H. Zins Nanjing Tech University Pujiang Institute, MODUL School of Tourism and Hospitality Management, Nanjing, Jiangsu, China About the Editors

Claire Liu is the head of the Tourism and Event Management Department and a senior lecturer in tourism management at the Auckland University of Technology, New Zealand. Claire serves on the editorial boards of the International Journal of Tourism Cities and the Journal of China Tourism Research. She has published chap- ters in edited books. Claire’s research interests include the Chinese tourism market, tourism quality management, environmental management systems, tourism and hospitality education, quantitative and qualitative methodologies, tourism entrepre- neurship, museum and tourism volunteers and hospitality green marketing.

Heike Schänzel is an associate professor at the Auckland University of Technology in Auckland, New Zealand, and has extensive editorial experience with book publi- cations (Family Tourism and Femininities in the Field: Researching Tourism with Channel View and Children, Families and Leisure with Routledge) and journal spe- cial issues (Annals of Leisure Research and Hospitality & Society). Her research interests include tourist behaviour and experiences; families, children and adoles- cents in tourism; sociality in tourism; innovative educational practices; femininities and paternal masculinities in tourism research; innovative and qualitative research methodologies; and critical theory development in tourism and hospitality.

xiii About the Authors

Ken Butcher is a senior lecturer in the Department of Tourism, Sport and Hotel Management, Griffith Business School, Gold Coast campus, Queensland, Australia, and also a visiting scholar at Mae Fah Luang University in Chiang Rai, Thailand. Ken has an extensive background in corporate planning, human resource manage- ment and organisational change within state and federal governments in Australia and has been teaching management, marketing and research subjects at the univer- sity since 2002. His research interests focus on corporate social responsibility, espe- cially in tourism and hospitality, the hospitality experience and experiential learning.

Kaye Chon (PhD, CHE, FIH) is dean of the School of Hotel and Tourism Management at the Hong Kong Polytechnic University. He holds a chair at the uni- versity as well as being the Walter Kwok Foundation professor in international hos- pitality management. He is currently editor-in-chief of the Journal of Travel & Tourism Marketing and the Asia Pacific Journal of Tourism Research.

Tran Phu Cuong is director general of the International Cooperation Department at VNAT (the Vietnam National Administration of Tourism) in the Ministry of Culture, Sports and Tourism based in Hanoi, Vietnam. He studied economics at the Economics University, Varna, in Bulgaria and completed his MBA at Vietnam National University, Hanoi. Since 2015, he has been working on his PhD at the University of National Economics, Hanoi, Vietnam. He is secretary general of the Pacific Asia Travel Association (PATA) Vietnam Chapter. For 10 years, he was a member of the Vietnam Tourism Certification Board. Mr Cuong has many years of tourism administration in the private and public sector and has a proven track record of managing, monitoring and implementing large-scale projects funded by interna- tional donor organisations such as the EU and ASEAN.

Karl Basil Dicen developed an early interest in hospitality, tourism and manage- ment studies. The service industry has always inspired him. His education back- ground is in culinary arts and tourism and hospitality management. Karl is a former

xv xvi About the Authors hospitality industry management lecturer at Mae Fah Luang University, Thailand, on courses covering kitchen management, food and beverage management and accommodation management. He is interested in hospitality training and hospitality education research.

Anya Diekmann (PhD) is a professor of tourism at the Université libre de Bruxelles, Belgium. Her teaching involves courses on cultural tourism and related aspects including intercultural collaborations. Anya’s research and publications include work on social tourism and cultural tourism with a particular focus on heritage, urban slums and ethnic tourism in Europe and India. Among others, in 2011 she co- authored (with Kevin Hannam) Tourism and India: A Critical Introduction (Routledge), and in 2015 she coedited (with Melanie Smith) Ethnic and Minority Cultures as Tourist Attractions (Channel View).

Saurabh Kumar Dixit is an associate professor and founding head of the Department of Tourism and Hotel Management, North-Eastern Hill University, Shillong (Meghalaya), India. His research interests include consumer behav- iour, gastronomic tourism, service marketing and guest satisfaction in hospi- tality and tourism contexts. He has ten books to his credit including The Routledge Handbook of Consumer Behaviour in Hospitality and Tourism. Presently he is editing The Routledge Handbook of Gastronomic Tourism to be published in early 2019. Saurabh has contributed many research papers to peer-reviewed journals and books. He is an editorial board member, active reviewer and guest editor of many international journals such as the International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management.

Babu George holds a PhD degree in management studies (2004) and a Doctor of Business Administration degree with a focus on marketing and tourism (2016). He is a graduate of Harvard University’s Institute for Educational Management (IEM-­ 2018 batch). For more than 15 years, he has been serving the international higher education sector as professor and as an academic administrator. Currently, he directs the international programmes of Fort Hays State University’s College of Business. In the recent past, he served the Swiss Management Center University as professor of business research methods; University of Nevada, Las Vegas, as a visiting profes- sor; Alaska Pacific University as an associate professor; and the University of Southern Mississippi as an assistant professor. Babu is also associated with various other institutions of higher learning around the world as a visiting professor.

Se You Jang is currently an assistant professor at MODUL University School of Hospitality Management, Nanjing Campus, China. He has been employed at vari- ous universities in Korea, Singapore, Macau China and Mainland China including the Surrey International Institute, Dalian, China. He is a CHE (Certified Hospitality Educator) and a Certified Brand Manager. He has completed more than 20 tourism- and hospitality-related government projects and is currently working on several educational projects sponsored by Chinese local and central government. His About the Authors xvii research targets are hospitality marketing, guest experiences, trends and pedagogi- cal development in tourism and hospitality. He is a consultant, trainer and training designer specialising in hospitality and service subjects.

Andrew Jones is currently an associate professor at the University of Malta. He has also worked for the University of Wales, the Swansea Business School in Wales and the University of Brunei. Andrew has professional experience in planning, environ- mental management and tourism at both international, regional and local levels and has been an enthusiastic contributor for over 30 years to the academic tourism com- munity within Malta, the UK and internationally. Andrew first qualified in urban and regional planning but joined higher education in the late 1980s where he focused his research on tourism, sustainability and environmental planning. In his most recent work, Andrew has focused on the development of transnational education (TNE), working internationally in Europe and in Central, South and South East Asia over the last 10 years.

Earney Lasten has a PhD from Rosen College University of Central Florida and an MA and MSc from the University of Saint Thomas in Minnesota and has consider- able experience in tertiary educational institutions in North America, the Caribbean, the Middle East and Asia. He has worked on the Caribbean Island of Aruba in the public and private sectors, collaborating with the DMO-Aruba Tourism Authority, the Minister of Tourism and others on science and applied research as an IT special- ist, a marketing specialist, an F&B manager, an HR manager, an accountant and a strategic analyst manager. He is currently an associate professor and the discipline leader in tourism and hospitality management at RMIT University Vietnam. Dr Lasten specialises in research that includes strategies and tactics in lodging, guest service management, travel and tourism planning and food service.

Erwin Losekoot (FIH, FRGS, FHEA) graduated in 1990 from the Scottish Hotel School, University of Strathclyde in Glasgow, Scotland. He gained 10 years’ indus- try experience working on P&O Princess cruise ships in Alaska, Mexico and the Caribbean; the Sheraton hotel in Edinburgh, Scotland; and the Crowne Plaza hotel at London Heathrow, all in customer-facing roles, followed by an MBA from Edinburgh University (1995). He started his academic teaching and research career in 1999 back in Glasgow, where he taught undergraduate and postgraduate students in Glasgow but also in Tehran at INSTROCT and in Hong Kong at HKU (SPACE). He completed his PhD (2015) whilst lecturing at the Auckland University of Technology in New Zealand before becoming academic head of tourism and hospi- tality management programmes at the Auckland Institute of Studies. He is currently a senior lecturer at RMIT University in Vietnam.

Hakamelamphylla Mawroh is a doctoral student in the Department of Tourism and Hotel Management, North-Eastern Hill University (NEHU), Shillong, India, under the supervision of Associate Professor Saurabh Kumar Dixit. Her research topic is “Gastronomic Tourism in Meghalaya: A Study on Khasi Food”. xviii About the Authors

Hakamelamphylla is also an assistant professor at Lady Keane College in Shillong, India, in the Department of Tourism and Travel Management teaching on the Bachelor of Tourism and Travel Management (BTTM) programme. Her areas of interest are gastronomic tourism and globalisation, rural and social/community-­ based tourism, eco-tourism and the cultural attributes of a place. Her research has been presented at international conferences and in an edited book, Emerging Paradigms of Hospitality and Tourism: Marketing Perspectives.

Nantaporn Mingkwan has a background in tourism and hospitality industry man- agement. She worked in the hotel industry for a few years before graduating with a Master of Management in Tourism and Hospitality Industry and has turned to the academic field since 2013. Ms Mingkwan works at Mae Fah Luang University, Thailand, as a lecturer in hospitality industry management on courses covering food and beverage service, food and beverage operation management, gastronomic cul- tures and health and spa tourism management. She provides professional service training for local organisations and helps the university to operate a hotel as a student-training­ centre. Her special interests are hotel and restaurant management as well as hospitality training and education development.

Adel Nikjoo is a lecturer in tourism management at the Shandiz Institute of Higher Education in Mashhad, Iran. He regularly teaches courses related to the leisure industry, tourist behaviour and tourism economy. So far, he has conducted some funded research projects in tourism and hospitality. He holds a master’s degree in tourism planning from Sheikh Bahaei University of Isfahan, Iran. A recent article, co-authored by Siamak Seyfi, received the “Valene L. Smith Prize” for best paper at the international tourism conference, Service Quality in Hospitality and Tourism: Experiencing Persian Heritage, in Isfahan, Iran, in 2016. His areas of interest include tourist behaviour, tourist motivation, social media, wellbeing and destina- tion image.

Hera Oktadiana earned her PhD from the School of Hotel and Tourism Management at the Hong Kong Polytechnic University. She qualified as a CHE (Certified Hospitality Educator) with the American Hotel & Lodging Educational Institute. She has been the head of Hotel Management/Hospitality and Tourism Departments at Bina Nusantara (BINUS) University and Bunda Mulia University and deputy manager for the International Hotel and Tourism Programme at the Trisakti Institute of Tourism in Indonesia. She joined James Cook University, Australia, as a visiting scholar (tourism research) in 2017 and then later as an adjunct senior lecturer. She is presently the regional vice president Southeast Asia of the International Tourism Studies Association (ITSA). Her research interests include tourism education and tourist behaviour.

Smrittee Kala Panta received her PhD degree in recreation, parks and tourism from the Department of Tourism, Recreation and Sport Management at the University of Florida. Her research is focused on the promotion of inclusive About the Authors xix

­development in Nepal with a special interest in gender, tourism and sustainable development.

Jyotsna Patwardhan has been teaching tourism since 1985 in the Garware Institute of Career Education and Development at the University of Mumbai where she was programme coordinator till 2017 for the post-graduate programme in tourism. Over the years, she has made a significant contribution to developing tourism training programmes along with BVoc courses for many colleges in India, notably at the Indira Gandhi National Open University. Jyotsna has played a leading role in the Indian intercultural collaboration with Belgian university, Université libre de Bruxelles (ULB).

Masoud A. Samimi is a lecturer and the head of the Tourism Management Department at the Shandiz Institute of Higher Education in Mashhad, Iran. He has been working as a tourism consultant and the operations manager for a local travel agency in Mashhad since 2012. He holds a BSc in tourism management and a mas- ter’s degree in tourism marketing from the University of Semnan, Iran. His research and teaching interests include destination management, tourism marketing and stra- tegic management.

Sudipta Kiran Sarkar has been an academic in the field of tourism and hospitality for more than 17 years. His extensive experience involves teaching, learning and scholarly activities in the countries of India, Malaysia, Hong Kong and currently South Korea. Sudipta completed his PhD in 2015 at the School of Hospitality and Tourism Management, Hong Kong Polytechnic University. He has served as a coor- dinator for the Curriculum Development and Review Unit as well as being acting head of programme for tourism at Berjaya University College of Hospitality, Malaysia, for a considerable period. Sudipta joined Woosong University, South Korea, in December 2016 as an assistant professor in hospitality management and is currently the programme coordinator for the Master of Arts in Culinary Entrepreneurship (MACE).

Siamak Seyfi is a doctoral student in the Department of Geography at the EIREST Research Unit (Interdisciplinary Research Group for Tourism Studies) of Pantheon-­ Sorbonne University, France. He holds a master’s degree in sustainable tourism from the University of Montpellier III, France. His research interests are sustainable tourism, community development, resident attitudes and social innovation in tour- ism. He has recently coedited a book on Tourism in Iran: Challenges, Development and Issues for Routledge. Using primarily qualitative methods as well as mixed methods, he is particularly interested in political ecology and tourism, power and the environment. The latter representing a return to the research he has undertaken for his PhD.

Katrine Sonnenschein is currently working as a research assistant at Aalborg University (Department of Learning and Philosophy), Denmark, where she is xx About the Authors

­supervising master’s students’ theses and written assignments within topics of leadership psychology, organisational learning and learning in multicultural contexts, among others. She completed her PhD thesis in October 2016 at Griffith University (Griffith Business School), Australia. Her dissertation investigates differences and similarities in the perceptions of diverse stakehold- ers concerning the attributes needed by Chinese graduates with an Australian degree entering the Chinese hotel industry. The study enters the contested environment of the role of universities in an increasingly globalised world where geographically mobile students from diverse national backgrounds are seeking tertiary qualifications in foreign higher education institutions.

Paul Strickland is the programme director and a lecturer in Tourism, Hospitality and Event Management at La Trobe University, Australia. Paul has a vast back- ground of job titles in industry including hotel and restaurant management roles globally. Paul has taught in a variety of countries and Australian locations including Bhutan, Singapore, Vietnam, Melbourne, Albury-Wodonga, Bendigo, Beechworth and Mt Bulla. Paul’s approach to pedagogy is to embed work-integrated learning into the curriculum to compliment theory and for students to become ethical global citizens. His research interests include wine marketing, ethnic restaurants, fashion trends, Bhutanese studies and space tourism. Paul is a doctoral candidate specialis- ing in wine marketing and events.

Brijesh Thapa is a professor in the Department of Tourism, Recreation and Sport Management at the University of Florida. Overall, his research theme is within the nexus of tourism, conservation and sustainability. He has been involved in numer- ous projects in various capacities in over 30 countries. Recently, he has been focused on capacity building and institutional development projects through curriculum development, research and training in tourism, nature and cultural heritage conser- vation and natural resources management in several developing countries.

Eugene Thomlinson has approximately 20 years of tourism and hospitality experi- ence in industry and academia. His research interests and experience are focused on sustainable development, experiential marketing, interpretation, persuasive com- munication, image and branding, screen tourism, location and product placements and mega-event sports tourism (e.g. Commonwealth Games, Olympic Games, World Cup). Eugene completed his PhD in tourism through La Trobe University in Australia, focusing on persuasive communications and the effects of film on desti- nation image. He holds a Bachelor of Commerce in finance and small business management from the University of Manitoba. He also has an MBA in tourism and hospitality management from the University of Calgary with his thesis examining the business of ecotourism in Central America.

Martin Vincent is a PhD candidate at the Université libre de Bruxelles, Belgium, where he works as a teaching assistant. He supervises students in tourism manage- ment. His main teaching subjects deal with cultural tourism, tourism geography and About the Authors xxi research methods in tourism. His research interests deal with senior tourism with a special focus on the relationship between health issues and tourist behaviours.

Rebecca Wilson-Mah is assistant professor and a Chartered Professional in Human Resources (CPHR) with the School of Tourism and Hospitality Management, Royal Roads University, Canada. Rebecca’s research interests include transnational edu- cation, experiential learning and faculty learning communities. Rebecca is a board member of the CASE Association and a member of The CASE Journal editorial board. Currently completing her EdD in higher education, Rebecca is engaged in research on the impact of communities of practices in university settings. With a keen interest in case-based teaching, Rebecca has published several cases and con- venes an interdisciplinary community of practice of case researchers. Her teaching areas include research methods, human resource management and career development.

Libo Yan obtained his PhD in tourism management from the Hong Kong Polytechnic University and is an associate professor in the Faculty of Hospitality and Tourism Management, Macau University of Science and Technology. His current research interests are in tourism education, tourist attraction, visitor experience and tourism development in urban and rural areas. He has published in various tourism journals, including Tourism Management, Annals of Tourism Research, Journal of Sustainable Tourism, Current Issues in Tourism, International Journal of Tourism Research, and Asia Pacific Journal of Tourism Research.

Chachaya Yodsuwan has a background in tourism and hospitality management. She has been teaching tourism, hospitality and MICE (meetings, incentives, confer- encing and exhibitions) management for many years and is involved in many local tourism- and hospitality-related projects. Her teaching technique often includes tourism and hospitality experiential learning. Chachaya’s research interests include tourism stakeholder collaboration, MICE management, special interest tourism and tourism and hospitality education. Currently, Chachaya is a lecturer in hospitality industry management and assistant dean at the School of Management, Mae Fah Luang University, Thailand.

Andreas H. Zins is a professor of tourism management and a programme director at the MODUL School of Tourism and Hospitality Management Nanjing (affiliated to Nanjing Tech University Pujiang Institute), adjunct full professor at MODUL University Vienna and associate professor of marketing at the University of Economics and Business, Vienna, Austria. Dr Zins lectures in entrepreneurship, marketing, tourism marketing and consumer and travel behaviour. His research interests are tourism behaviour, marketing research, destination image, social impacts, tourism spending, theme parks and cultural and other leisure attractions. He has published 5 books, edited 4 other books, contributed 30 book chapters, 30 scientific articles in peer-reviewed journals, 50 contributions in refereed conference proceedings, 70 peer-reviewed conference presentations, 21 invited conference pre- sentations and 68 research reports. Part I Introduction to the Book Chapter 1 Introduction to Tourism Education and Asia

Claire Liu and Heike Schänzel

Abstract Tourism and hospitality education programmes have been growing across Asia in the past 20 years. Major countries like China, Taiwan and Korea have highlighted the increasing number of tourism and hospitality education programmes and enrolled students (Kim et al., 2007). A further popular trend is the large number of Asian students attaining tourism and hospitality qualifications overseas due to a lack of adequate education opportunities in their home countries. The challenges facing the tourism industry and tourism educators require a new paradigm for tour- ism education (Sheldon et al., 2011), particularly with regard to a fast growing Asia. There is existing literature documenting the growth, current status and challenges of tourism education in various Asian countries (Hsu, 2015) but not in a combined format. This is the first book compilation to focus on the contemporary Asian tour- ism education market and its associated issues in term of globalisation and consid- erations for the future. This book compilation aims to cover the various aspects of tourism education in a diverse range of Asian countries and the impacts of sustain- able development in tourism education on the Asian student markets. This book and its contributors provide a systematic guide to the current state of knowledge on tourism education and Asia; case studies of educational practices in nine Asian countries including Greater China and India, transnational tourism education in Asia and education case studies of Asian students abroad.

Keywords Tourism education · Tourism programmes · Asian tourism students · Transnational tourism education · Asia · Motivations · Culture and learning styles · International accreditation · Programme articulation · Employability

C. Liu (*) · H. Schänzel School of Hospitality & Tourism, Auckland University of Technology, Auckland, New Zealand e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 3 C. Liu, H. Schänzel (eds.), Tourism Education and Asia, Perspectives on Asian Tourism, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4_1 4 C. Liu and H. Schänzel

1.1 Introduction

Asia constitutes the Earth’s largest and most populous continent. Located primarily in the Eastern and Northern Hemispheres, Asia covers about 30% of Earth’s total land area and 8.7% of the Earth’s total surface area. The continent, which has long been home to most of the human population, was also the site of many of humani- ty’s first civilisations. Asia is notable for not only its overall large size and popula- tion but also dense and large settlements, as well as vast, barely populated regions. Its 4.5 billion people constitute roughly 60% of the world’s population, with China (about 1.4 billion) and India (about 1.3 billion) making up the two biggest countries by population (United Nations World Population Division, 2017). Given its size and diversity, the concept of Asia – its name dating back to classical antiquity – may actually have more to do with human geography than physical geography, as it var- ies greatly across and within its regions with regard to ethnic groups, cultures, envi- ronments, economics, historical ties and government systems. This vast continent with its diverse countries and rapidly growing and changing population is the focus for this book compilation regarding its tourism education needs, both current and future. Admittedly, to give justice to such an undertaking is difficult, given the enormity of the task at hand. What this book and its contributing authors aim to achieve is an up-to-date account of the state of tourism education in at least nine Asian countries, mainly situated in South Asia and Southeast Asia, including the greatest players of China and India; also covered are transnational tourism education in Asia and three educational case studies of Asian students abroad. It is the first publication of its kind available in the English language written by Asian scholars or by scholars with extensive knowledge of higher education in Asia. This, then, is the first book compilation to focus on a large portion of the con- temporary Asian tourism education market, its associated issues in terms of globali- sation in tourism education and possible future directions. Tourism and hospitality education has evolved over the past 40 years. Earlier research has studied tourism and hospitality education at a global and regional level and investigated areas including curricula, international education, teaching, learn- ing and assessment, resources, progression and quality (Airey & Tribe, 2005). An increasing number of studies have been published involving tourism higher educa- tion in Asian countries. Hsu’s collection of works (2005) profiled the past, present and future of tourism programmes in different countries. In particular, it focused on representing tourism-related education models from the Pacific Rim, including Canada, China and South Korea, as well as Turkey and Israel. With the development of the Internet, the travel and tourism industry has experienced opportunities and challenges. Consequently, the impacts of the Internet on tourism education were studied. Williams, Chernish and McKercher (2001) collected studies from a variety of perspectives and considered the macro and micro aspects of the Internet in learn- ing and teaching in their book, The Internet and Travel and Tourism Education. A more recent collection of studies on tourism and hospitality education was the 1 Introduction to Tourism Education and Asia 5

Routledge Handbook of Tourism and Hospitality Education. In this edited book, Dredge, Airey and Gross (2015) provided insightful and authoritative accounts of the various issues that are shaping the higher educational world of tourism, hospital- ity and events education. While this previous literature in tourism and hospitality education has provided comprehensive coverage of the subjects with an interna- tional and interdisciplinary approach, the up-to-date characteristics and practices of tourism education in Asian countries and the demand of students from Asia for tourism education are still underrepresented. Therefore, the purposes of this edited book are to identify the paradigms and recent trends in tourism education in Asia and to demonstrate the unique features of both Asian students and transnational tourism education providers. The book is composed of contributions from specialists in the field and is inter- national in scope through its authorship and content. It is divided into four parts: firstly, an introduction setting the scene of tourism education and Asia; secondly, a focus on case studies of tourism education in various Asian countries; thirdly, case studies of the tourism education of Asian students abroad and their transnational learning experiences; and lastly, issues of broader perspectives on intra-Asian and transnational tourism education. This book aims to provide a systematic guide to the current state of knowledge on tourism education in Asia and its future direction, which could become essential reading for students, researchers, educational practi- tioners and academics in tourism studies and in international education. This introductory chapter sets out to identify the main themes of the edited book: to extend the existing knowledge of tourism education through focusing on case studies of tourism education in emerging Asian countries and the current issues derived from the globalisation of tourism education. Eight of the 14 chapters present the history and development of tourism education in the countries of Indonesia, India, Nepal, Iran, China, Bhutan, Vietnam and Thailand. The motivations, behav- iours, and career inspirations of Asian students studying in countries outside their origins are demonstrated in the case studies of Canada, Belgium and Australia. Additionally, three chapters in the collection are dedicated, respectively, to the anal- ysis of quality accreditation in tourism education and its impacts on teaching and research performance, a critical reflection on the differences in patterns of tourism and hospitality education in India and Malaysia and an evaluation of the growth of tourism and hospitality education programmes offered through transnational and global partnerships.

1.2 Main Findings

This section highlights the key findings of this book in relation to existing knowl- edge in tourism and hospitality education. 6 C. Liu and H. Schänzel

1.2.1 Characteristics of Tourism Education in Asian Countries

Global tourism and hospitality education has developed in three different stages. It started with European programmes, which emphasised practical training and apprenticeship, through US programmes focusing on the management science of the tourism and hospitality industry, to the contemporary Asian emphasis on inno- vation and service quality. For example, tourism and hospitality education in Hong Kong has grown from vocational training courses in the 1970s to a breadth of pro- grammes offered by different institutions in various study modes (Lo, as cited in Hsu, 2005). With the motivation of raising regional profiles and competitiveness, the governments of Hong Kong, Singapore and Malaysia have liberalised their edu- cation polices to become the region’s education hub (Hsu, 2015) and have since grown into global players. The expansion of the tourism industry in developed and less developed countries in Asia has brought about the establishment of tourism and hospitality education programmes. Using in-depth interviews with educators and students from hospital- ity and tourism institutions in Java and Bali, the contributors in Chap. 2 have explored the development of a distinctive curriculum framework for the hospitality and tourism bachelor degree programmes in Indonesia. They found that human resources and employment were seen as a major problem with an inadequate supply of qualified people to fill various occupations in the industry. The industry tends to search for job-ready people, and employers were ignorant about the skill level and education background of bachelor-level applicants when recruiting employees. Through a comprehensive and more holistic exploration and analysis of the key cur- riculum components, this study has filled a gap in the development of undergraduate curricula for Indonesia as they identified that vocational bachelor and academic bachelor programmes require a combination of both knowledge and practical skills. Similarly, the contributors in Chap. 3 have reviewed the current state of vocational education in India – considered a latecomer in establishing formal tourism educa- tion programmes. Their analysis of vocational education and training practices in the tourism and hospitality sector in India indicates that the present education sys- tem does not synthesise general academic and vocational skills, highlighting a need for better trained professionals in India. Using documentary survey methods along with the Delphi technique with 20 stakeholders, the contributors in Chap. 5 have analysed the past, present and future directions of tourism education in Iran. Unlike other developing countries, tourism higher education in Iran was not developed until 1995. The chapter provides a his- torical background of tourism development in Iran and the structure, characteristics and trends in Iranian tourism education. More importantly, the authors have identi- fied a lack of alignment between the current education curriculum and industry needs. Using personal narrative, Chap. 7 presents the case study of hotel and tour- ism management education in Bhutan. The contributor analysed the background of the emerging tourism and hospitality industry in Bhutan since the 1970s and the process of the creation of the Royal Institute of Tourism and Hospitality in 2008. 1 Introduction to Tourism Education and Asia 7

This chapter explains Bhutan’s unique concept of Gross National Happiness (GNH), which is embedded in the country’s vision to ‘foster a heritage, safeguarding sover- eign status of the Nation for significantly contributing to National Happiness’. While the current programmes on offer in Bhutan are vocational, the authors sug- gest there is potential for the development of tourism and hospitality education institutions focusing on the need for formal qualifications in developing countries. Chapter 6 explores the change from an employability focus towards personal growth and values orientation in tourism education in China through an analysis of the content of undergraduate programmes offered by colleges and universities. The study also investigated the supply-side perspective through focus groups compris- ing human resource managers of international hotels in China and Chinese hotel managers to identify the industry expectations of hospitality programmes. The authors conclude that, in order to improve the role and effectiveness of higher edu- cation for hospitality and tourism management in China, it will be necessary to involve multiple stakeholders.

1.2.2 Dynamics of Global Tourism Education and the International Asian Student Market

According to a forecast by the International Development Programme (IDP) in Australia, the global demand for international education will experience a fourfold increase to approximately 7.2 million students by 2025. In particular, Asia will remain the major growth region contributing over 70% of this demand, with China and India emerging as the two leading sources of international students (Bohm, Davis, Meares, & Pearce, 2002). There has been increasing domestic and international competition from other higher education provider countries such as the USA and the UK, and other global environmental issues have led to market segmentation and shifts in inter- national student mobility worldwide (Arambewela, Hall, & Zuhair, 2006). Going beyond Asian countries, the next section of the book explores interna- tional joint programmes in tourism education. Chapter 10 investigates the outcomes and challenges of a cooperative and intercultural learning project shared by master’s degree students in India and Belgium through online communication and virtual presentations. This innovative approach and pedagogy of tourism education has enhanced students’ learning experience and their understanding of different cultures in addition to teaching them teamwork skills. Chapter 11 presents the findings of research into the career goals of Chinese international students studying hospitality and tourism in Australia. While hospital- ity management was recognised as the sixth most popular degree among Chinese international students within business and commerce in 2016, the study found that most students change their career goals during their studies. This chapter empha- sises the importance of collaboration between universities and industry to provide students with realistic insights into work requirements in the tourism and hospitality 8 C. Liu and H. Schänzel industry. Academics can also play a crucial role in assisting students to develop realistic expectations about their future career and employment in line with personal interests. Chapter 12 provides another case study of a joint international tourism education project in Canada. Using a push-pull model of motivations, the authors analysed the factors that support and encourage students from a Chinese polytech- nic to continue their studies in a Canadian university. The research showed that only 10% of the participants have the desire to continue degrees in Canada or China and that these students are not primarily motived to study applied degrees in hospitality and tourism. Chapter 14 describes a comparative study of tourism higher education in two developing countries in Asia – India and Malaysia. The contributors of the chapter reviewed the trends of past, present and future development, curriculum design, pedagogical innovations, popular demand for tourism and hospitality programmes and identified the industry-academia gaps and government higher education polices. The study points out that the common issue for both countries is the lack of an adequately qualified and trained workforce. Some contrasting issues in the two developing countries were also discussed in terms of culture, diversity and develop- ment in tourism, which are influencing the practice of tourism and hospitality edu- cation. Empowered by institutional theory, the contributors in Chap. 9 have analysed the hospitality industry needs and addressed the importance of experiential learning in hospitality education in Thailand as an example. They reviewed the characteris- tics of experiential learning approaches and discussed the distinction between prac- tical and research orientations in the existing Eastern and Western hospitality education systems. The chapter calls for investment in balanced experiential learn- ing in hospitality programmes globally. As Kiser and Partlow (1999) argued, while many global hospitality programmes have implemented new and innovative approaches to experiential learning, there remains the need to balance theory and practice in the hospitality curriculum.

1.2.3 Accreditation in Tourism and Hospitality Education

Quality assurance and international accreditation was recognised as one of the main trends affecting international hospitality and tourism education. Voluntary interna- tional course accreditation has become a much more significant factor for institu- tions and departments offering hospitality and tourism than the issue of registration and mandatory accreditation. The current hospitality and tourism accreditation pro- grammes include the US-based and focused Accreditation Commission for Programmes in Hospitality Administration (ACPHA), the Andorra-based UNWTO’s TedQual Certification, the UK-based Institute of Hospitality and the International Centre for Excellence in Tourism and Hospitality Education (THE-ICE) (Hobson, 2013). Using primary data collected from the TedQual-certified programmes in Greater China (including Mainland China, Hong Kong, Macau and Taiwan), the author of Chap. 13 compared the research performance of the TedQual-certified 1 Introduction to Tourism Education and Asia 9

Chinese programmes and explored the link between staff research productivity and teaching quality. This chapter raises the issue of how research performance can be incorporated into the assessment criteria for the TedQual accreditation system in the future. In Chap. 4, the contributors point out the need for quality assessment, accreditation and standardisation in Nepal as a new field in tourism education and training based on situation analysis. For a country that relies heavily on tourism development, the importance of trained human resources was identified along with practical strategies.

1.2.4 The Challenges of Transnational Tourism Education

An important subset of international students are those engaged in transnational education (TNE). Demand for TNE from Asian countries (excluding China) was estimated to rise to more than 480,000 students by 2020 (Blight & West, 1999). Southwest Asia is considered as a laboratory for the development and regulation of transnational education. The region combines high demand from students with keen competition among providers. TNE includes a significant number of students at both university level and in postsecondary vocational training. It offers opportunities for increasing market expansion and raising international profile for the providers and the possibility for students of obtaining a foreign qualification at a considerably lower cost, compared with travelling abroad (McBurnie & Ziguras, 2001). The contributor in Chap. 15 has reviewed and evaluated the growth of hospitality and tourism programmes through transnational education and global partnerships from ‘exporting’ countries, such as the UK, to countries such as China, Hong Kong, Malaysia, Singapore, Japan and India. Using qualitative data analysis from interna- tional collaborative institutions across Asia, the study found contemporary issues and future challenges for international collaborative provision. In addition, Chap. 8 provides a unique case study of Vietnam where the government-controlled economy has pushed students to study abroad for quality tourism education but recently has seen the development of international education providers at home. With an over- view of the development of current tourism programmes in Vietnam, this chapter outlines the challenges of employing qualified teaching staff and quality education providers. This study also raises the issue of the standardisation of international tourism and transnational education in the future.

1.3 Conclusions and Future Directions

This book compilation untangles the developments and current trends in tourism and hospitality education in a diverse number of Asian countries and investigates the characteristics of the tourism and hospitality programmes and that of Asian stu- dents in the global education market. The purpose of this collection is to link the 10 C. Liu and H. Schänzel development of tourism education to the changing international education market and to contribute up-to-date knowledge of tourism education in Asian countries and beyond to a wider English-speaking audience. It provides a snapshot of the main players in tourism education in Asia – limited by the level of research available at the time – across a wide range of Asian countries, with an impetus for more dia- logue with and research on other Asian markets. It can be concluded that tourism and hospitality education in Asia is still affected by the levels of economic and tourism development in their origin countries. The majority of the case studies covered in this book represent the emerging stage of tourism and hospitality education, focusing more on vocational or functional mana- gerial knowledge. However, it appears that such a narrow emphasis is not sufficient any longer and more generic personal skills, such as creativity, leadership, reflexiv- ity, critical thinking, social responsibility and communication, are valued more by managers in the industry. Building these competencies into the existing curricula is one of the major challenges for higher education in hospitality and tourism along with making a career path in the industry more attractive to students. Fundamental issues as posed by Hsu, Xiao and Chen in 2017, such as the impacts of higher edu- cation learning on the tourism industry and on the learners’ career advancement and their intellectual and personal growth, therefore still need to be addressed in the Asian context. A common theme across the chapters is the divide between the supply and demand side, or the academic-industry skills gap, found in hospitality and tourism education in Asian countries. In addition, the chapters reveal the common issues for global tourism and hospitality education, such as quality assurance, international accreditation and the sustainable management of partnered tourism programmes. However, what is still needed are discussions on the ‘big picture’ topics in higher education that move away from more micro issues of curricula and teaching and learning towards macro issues related to transnational mobility, global citizenship, educational discourse, sustainable development, care ethics and future-oriented policies. This collection has incorporated diverse writing styles from international authors with personal experience as international educators and researchers in Asia or of Asian students abroad. It covers a wide range of countries and higher education programmes – from Nepal, with a high dependency on tourism employment ham- pered by a lack of skilled human resources, to Malaysia, which has moved towards the internationalisation of their higher education system. More research is needed to explore the similarities and differences in tourism and hospitality education across more countries in Asia, including countries such as Japan and South Korea, but also newly emerging tourism countries such as Myanmar. Other issues that need to be focused on by future studies are global and government policies and unpredictable economic environments impacting on the tourism and hospitality education sector. This is a pertinent issue with much of the global order seemingly in disarray through more isolationist and anti-immigration policies affecting Asian hospitality and tour- ism students not just in Western countries but also in their home countries. In line with this, it is important to learn more about the best practices in tourism and 1 Introduction to Tourism Education and Asia 11 hospitality education at a global level. Internationalisation is a powerful tool for developing global human resources and enhancing intercultural understandings of human society. The sustainable development of tourism and hospitality education in Asia and for Asian students, then, depends not only on the integration of the inter- ests of multiple stakeholders and more inclusive international regulations but also on a more general sense of cohesion across all higher education providers in tourism and hospitality in the region and globally.

References

Airey, D., & Tribe, J. (Eds.). (2005). An international handbook of tourism education. Amsterdam, The Netherlands: Elsevier. Arambewela, A., Hall, J., & Zuhair, S. (2006). Postgraduate international students from Asia: Factors influencing satisfaction.Journal of Marketing for Higher Education, 15(2), 105–127. https://doi.org/10.1300/J050v15n02_05 Blight, D., & West, L. (1999, October). Demand for transnational higher education in the Asia Pacific. Paper presented at the global alliance for transnational education conference, access or exclusion? Trade in Transnational Education Services, Melbourne, Australia. Bohm, A., Davis, D., Meares, D., & Pearce, P. (2002). Global student mobility 2025: Forecasts of the global demand for international higher education. Deakin, Australia: IDP Australia Ltd. Dredge, D., Airey, D., & Gross, M. J. (Eds.). (2015). The Routledge handbook of tourism and hospitality education. London, England: Routledge. Hobson, J. S. P. (2013). The trends impacting international hospitality education. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 22(1), 4–7. https://doi.org/10.1080/10963758.2010.10696 963 Hsu, C. H., Xiao, H., & Chen, N. (2017). Hospitality and tourism education research from 2005 to 2014: “Is the past a prologue to the future?”. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 29(1), 141–160. Hsu, C. H. C. (Ed.). (2005). Global tourism higher education: Past, present and future. New York, NY: Haworth Hospitality Press. Hsu, C. H. C. (2015). Tourism and hospitality education in Asia). In D. Dredge, D. Airey, & M. J. Gross (Eds.), The Routledge handbook of tourism and hospitality education (pp. 197–209). London, England: Routledge. Kim, S. S., Guo, Y., Wang, K., & Agrusa, J. (2007). The study motivations and study preferences of student groups from Asian nations majoring in hospitality and tourism management pro- grammes. Tourism Management, 28, 140–151. Kiser, J. W., & Partlow, C. G. (1999). Experiencing learning in hospitality education: An explor- atory study. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 11(2–3), 70–74. https://doi.org/10.1 080/10963758.1999.10685240 McBurnie, G., & Ziguras, C. (2001). The regulation of transnational higher education in Southeast Asia: Case studies of Hong Kong, Malaysia and Australia. Higher Education (Vol. 42, pp. 85–105). Sheldon, P. J., Fesenmaier, D. R., & Tribe, J. (2011). The tourism education future initiatives (TEFI): Activating change in tourism education. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 11(1), 2–23. https://doi.org/10.1080/15313220.2011.548728 United Nations World Population Division. (2017). World population prospects 2017. Retrieved July 10, 2018, from https://esa.un.org/unpd/wpp/DataQuery/ Williams, G., Chernish, W., & McKercher, B. (Eds.). (2001). The internet and travel and tourism education. New York, NY: Haworth Hospitality Press. Part II Tourism Education in Asia Chapter 2 Differentiating Academic and Vocational Hospitality and Tourism Education: The Milieu of Indonesia

Hera Oktadiana and Kaye Chon

Abstract This chapter explores the development of a distinctive curriculum frame- work for the hospitality and tourism bachelor degree programmes within Indonesia’s higher education system. The framework considered and built in this study stresses reflection and action concepts based on integrating established educational philoso- phies. Semi-structured/in-depth interviews with key educational stakeholders informed the application and development of these ideas in the Indonesian context. Although some similar elements may appear in the curricula of both programmes, by differentiating the underpinning educational philosophies – which in turn lead to separate aims and objectives, content, learning and instruction and assessment – the differences between the academic and vocational bachelor degrees can be articulated.

Keywords Academic · Vocational · Tourism · Curriculum · Educational philoso- phy · Indonesia

2.1 Introduction

The chapter presents a curriculum framework for hospitality and tourism education programmes in Indonesia. The approach is underpinned by a philosophical stance to determine the aims and objectives, content, teaching and learning approach and

H. Oktadiana (*) James Cook University, Townsville, Australia Bina Nusantara University, Jakarta, Indonesia e-mail: [email protected] K. Chon The Hong Kong Polytechnic University, Hung Hom, Hong Kong e-mail: [email protected]

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 15 C. Liu, H. Schänzel (eds.), Tourism Education and Asia, Perspectives on Asian Tourism, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4_2 16 H. Oktadiana and K. Chon assessment strategy. The term ‘Komodo Curriculum’ is used in this chapter to pro- vide a symbolic allusion to the context of Indonesia as well as highlight the endur- ing links between the past and present in the philosophy of educational course design. Komodo is the name of the family of dragons that has lived and thrived in Indonesia for millions of years and endured various cycles of change. The modern Komodo dinosaur ancestor evolved 200 million years ago, while its genus is 40 mil- lion years old (Holland, 2014). Here, Komodo is depicted as a philosophy that has existed for thousands of years. The core problem being addressed in the ‘Komodo Curriculum’ model is the current confusion within Indonesia’s higher education offerings in hospitality and tourism. At the undergraduate level, hospitality and tourism programmes in Indonesia are defined as ‘Diploma IV’ (vocational bachelor) and ‘Bachelor’ (aca- demic bachelor). Although the level of study is regarded as equal for both pro- grammes, the aims and content of each programme are often confused, which has generated confusion among stakeholders such as the industry, parents, students and prospective students. Perhaps due to the recent advent of this field of study, the cur- ricula of Indonesia’s hospitality and tourism programmes in both vocational and academic bachelor modes are not yet well defined. The sector is, arguably, domi- nated by a vocational approach and management/business studies. Borrowing and adjusting already well-established educational curricula are commonly found in developing countries such as Indonesia, even though importing such materials may not suit the local needs and culture (Blanton, 1981; Ernawati & Pearce, 2003). It is very likely that many curricula have been established because of local power issues, popularity, pals, precedents and pragmatism (Tribe, 2015). The definition of the term ‘curriculum’ comes in various guises. For the purpose of this analysis, the definition that captures the key points is as follows: a curriculum is an educational plan that constitutes aims and objectives, content, learning and instruction and assessment. The heart of a curriculum should be well grounded in a philosophical position that informs a direction and purposes for a school or a study programme. The chosen philosophy is an initial platform for a curriculum design and development and will assist in defining the aims and objectives, ideology, content, teaching and learning strategies and assessment methods (Chen & Groves, 1999; Tribe, 2015; Tyler, 1949). It can be noted, however, that discourse concerning philo- sophical values is often overlooked in tourism curriculum design (Fidgeon, 2010). This chapter defines a curriculum framework for the Indonesian undergraduate hospitality and tourism programmes that is firmly built on a philosophical base. Indonesia’s hospitality and tourism education programmes are currently delivered in two styles, the vocational and the academic modes. The vocational style has existed for almost half a century. The academic mode has more recent origins. In March 2008, the Indonesian government formally acknowledged and allowed hos- pitality and tourism institutions to offer academic education. A contrast here can be drawn with other countries and regions such as Australia, Hong Kong and the United Kingdom which expanded their offerings from the 1960s to the 1990s (Fidgeon, 2010; Lo, 2005; Weaver & Lawton, 2010, pp. 8–9). The challenge for Indonesia is to develop a home-grown approach to the planning of hospitality and tourism cur- 2 Differentiating Academic and Vocational Hospitality and Tourism Education… 17 riculum. It appears that this challenge has not yet been met. To appreciate the com- plexity of the issues, fundamental points about Indonesian tourism and the study of curriculum design will be considered as the foundation work for this investigation. The value and importance of the approach lie in advancing tourism and hospitality education in a country where so many people depend on the sector for their livelihoods.

2.2 Background Literature

2.2.1 Indonesia’s Hospitality and Tourism Education

The successful development of tourism and the provision of tourism services are heavily dependent on the capabilities of human resources (Baum & Szivas, 2008; Haven-Tang & Jones, 2006). The Indonesian government, as stated by the Minister of Tourism and Creative Economy (now the Minister of Tourism) and the Directorate General of Higher Education, has recognised the need for various occupations (high-level managers, planners, researchers, scholars, technocrats and other profes- sionals) to promote and sustain the Indonesian tourism sector in the global market- place. This can be supported by both academic and vocational education and training and certification programmes (Andriani, 2014; Hernasari, 2014). The first initiative for hospitality education was developed in 1965 by a government-run­ institution, Bandung Institute of Tourism (STP Bandung), which was previously a hotel academy. Various efforts at hospitality training were devel- oped in the next two decades. In-depth discussion about tourism as a field of study was stimulated by Nyoman S. Pendit through his publication in the Bali Post on March 23, 1983. In 1985, scholars from various disciplines attended a seminar con- cerning tourism study in Udayana University, Bali. Tourism study at that time was still regarded as an enrichment of other disciplines. Twenty-three years later, the Directorate General of Higher Education finally approved tourism as a field of study on March 21, 2008. It was marked by the opening of bachelor programmes in tour- ism commencing in the 2008/2009 academic year at Bali Nusa Dua Institute of Tourism (STP Bali Nusa Dua) and the Bandung Institute of Tourism (STP Bandung). The acknowledgement was noted in letters addressed to the Ministry of Tourism and Culture, which runs those two institutions (Kanalsatu.com, 2014). In 2009, a Faculty of Tourism was introduced in Udayana University, Bali. In 2010, the first Indonesian master’s degrees in the subject – Master in Hospitality and Tourism and Master of Science in Hospitality and Tourism – were offered by Trisakti Institute of Tourism. Now, there are approximately 141 hospitality and tourism institutions with more than 200 hospitality and tourism study programmes at all levels of education (i.e. diploma, undergraduate and postgraduate programmes) as listed in the database of Indonesia’s higher education, issued by the Ministry of Education. The majority of the programmes are in hotel management, and many of the programmes are located in Java and Bali. 18 H. Oktadiana and K. Chon

Despite the breakthroughs for this field of study in the last decade, the develop- ment of Indonesia’s hospitality and tourism education still faces various challenges, such as inadequate strategic initiatives, and communication shortfalls among hospi- tality and tourism educators and the industry (Oktadiana & Chon, 2014; Sofia, 2013). Furthermore, few research studies have explored areas of Indonesia’s hospi- tality and tourism education such as curriculum content and its future development (Ernawati & Pearce, 2003). In a preliminary study examining curriculum issues in Indonesia, it was found that the undergraduate curricula of hospitality and tourism at both academic and vocational camps were vocationally oriented, and the content of programmes overlapped. Stakeholders were confused about the distinctions between the offerings and the qualities of the graduates. It also appeared that vari- ous stakeholders should be involved in designing and developing a curriculum.

2.2.2 The Curriculum Components

Scholars focus on different components of curricula. In general, however, the key components of a curriculum should consist of the aims and objectives, content, learning activities and evaluation or assessment procedures (Klein, 1991; Nicholls & Nicholls, 1978). Morris and Adamson (2010) contend that ‘educational aims and other curriculum components reflect a set of images, orientations, conceptions, characterizations or value systems which involve beliefs and assumptions about the learner, knowledge, schooling and society’ (p. 46). The basis of a curriculum is a philosophy that will assist educators in organising classrooms. Four philosophical positions in education (perennialism, essentialism, progressivism and reconstructionism) are rooted in four philosophies, two of which may be described as traditional approaches, while two can be viewed as contempo- rary perspectives. The traditional positions are idealism and realism, while the con- temporary positions are pragmatism and existentialism (Ornstein & Hunkins, 2014). The oldest educational philosophy, perennialism, is rooted in realism. This most conservative philosophy emphasises knowledge building, intellectual development and moral character. Next, essentialism is based upon idealism and realism and promotes an individual’s intellectual growth, mastery of concepts, essential skills and academic subjects. The final two philosophical positions in education, progres- sivism and reconstructionism are both grounded in pragmatism. Progressivism focuses on students’ active learning and interests. It promotes knowledge develop- ment leading to growth and democratic and social living. Reconstructionism stresses social reform and social issues as well as the future trends for society (Ornstein & Hunkins, 2014). Additional concerns can be added to these prominent contemporary philosophi- cal positions in education to further support the goals of tourism and hospitality education. The reflective practitioner, as proposed by Schön (1983), assimilates ­dialectic processes of thought and action through personal experiences, openness to discovery and reflection. Doll’s (1993) postmodern position on how to understand 2 Differentiating Academic and Vocational Hospitality and Tourism Education… 19 the world encourages the concept of self-reflection through critical thinking, explo- ration and discovery. Tribe’s (2002) Philosophic Practitioner promotes tourism stewardship and employment through the balance and integration of the liberal and vocational elements: vocational action, reflective vocational, reflective liberal and liberal action. Dredge et al.’s (2012) curriculum space that was built on Tribe’s Philosophic Practitioner incorporates the Aristotelian domains of knowledge (epis- teme), capabilities (techne) and practical wisdom (phronesis). The integration of concepts (knowing something) and practice (doing something), asserted by Young (2014), can also be seen as essential for knowledge creation as it helps students in explaining a phenomenon and solving problems and promotes critical thinking. Young (2013) also identified the concept of ‘powerful knowledge’, which provides explanation, prediction and generalisation beyond everyday knowledge and enables people to look to the future. Clearly, a philosophical position directs the aims and future strategies of a pro- gramme. Aims assist in the selection of objectives, that is, what students can do at the end of learning. It is important to align aims and objectives closely (Morris & Adamson, 2010). Objectives serve as a source for determining curriculum content. Content encompasses the select knowledge, skills, attitudes and values that learners should attain (Nicholls & Nicholls, 1978). Content can be oriented to liberal con- cerns (a body of knowledge that is pertinent for the society) or have a vocational/ technical orientation (specific knowledge essential for employment; Ben-Peretz & Connelly, 1991). Another key curriculum component is the teaching or delivery method. The choice of instruction is determined by several factors such as objectives, content, school facilities, the students, the teachers and the environment (Nicholls & Nicholls, 1978). The modes of instruction strongly influence the attitude of students and the mastery of content (Eash, 1991). Parsons, Hinson and Sardo-Brown (2001) outline three approaches to learning: cognitivism, behaviourism and neo-­ behaviourism. Rooted in Gestalt psychology, the contemporary cognitive theories acknowledge dual processing theory (visual and verbal learning) and the influence of prior knowledge and experiences (schema theory). Cognitive structuralists main- tain the use of schemata to aid the learning process by linking the existing informa- tion to the new information. This view can be beneficial in promoting expository teaching (e.g. concept mapping) and discovery learning. Cognitive structuralism is conceptualised in metacognition theory and constructivism theory (Parsons et al., 2001). Metacognition is a self-regulated learning that favours thoughtfulness, criti- cal thinking skills and problem solving. Constructivist perspectives (grounded in Jean Piaget’s works) accentuate students’ interests and recognise their autonomy. This conception allows students to explore ideas and acquire knowledge based on their own views embodied in self-questioning/self-reflection, discovery learning and collaborative learning (Parsons et al., 2001). The other view of learning theory, behaviourism, promotes classical and operant conditioning approaches to learning. An extension of the behaviourism approach, neo-behaviourism, lies in the social learning theory that endorses observational learning (modelling and imitation) and cognitive behaviour modification (CBM). 20 H. Oktadiana and K. Chon

The dual system of CBM (neo-behaviourism and metacognition) is beneficial for students’ personal and skills development as well as fostering moral sensitivity in social situations (Parsons et al., 2001). To measure the achievement of the objectives, assessment and evaluation are essential as they provide feedback to teachers and students, which can enhance the learning experiences and students’ development (Eash, 1991; Ratcliff, 1997). Assessment is also important to ensure alignment between the aims and objectives, the content being delivered and the teaching and learning approaches (Kauchak & Eggen, 2011). Assessment is, arguably, a protracted process that involves collecting, interpreting and reporting information regarding students’ performance (Parsons et al., 2001). The more traditional formal assessment approaches are standardised assessment and teacher-made assessment. The other types of formal assessment (performance assessment and product/portfolio assessment) are authentic/alterna- tive assessments that are based on a constructivist perspective (Kauchak & Eggen, 2011; Parsons et al., 2001). The teaching/delivery methods and assessments are highly related to the aims, objectives and content of the curriculum (Cooper, 2002). Ratcliff (1997) recommends that the aims, structure of the curriculum and evalua- tion should be well-connected and constructed on a set philosophical ideal which articulates what should be taught, how it should be being taught and how learning should be evaluated. Moreover, such a philosophical position provides guidance for teachers when devising activities and encourages them to critically think about why they should teach this way (Dunn, 2005). Building on this review of the basic issues structuring the hospitality and tourism education curriculum, the present study seeks to address the following objectives. First, the analysis seeks to identify the graduate profile of the academic and voca- tional bachelor programmes in Indonesia. A second purpose of the study is to iden- tify the aims and objectives for the academic and vocational bachelor programmes based on the educational philosophical positions of the institutions. Third, the research considers how to develop the content of the curricula for the academic and vocational bachelor programmes and, fourth, how to develop the learning and instruction sets for the academic and vocational bachelor programmes. As a fifth aim, the research attempts to develop the classification of assessment for the aca- demic and vocational bachelor programmes. Importantly, and as a sixth aim, the research endeavours to combine the results of this study to develop an integrated Komodo Curriculum framework.

2.3 Study Details

This study adopts an interpretive approach using qualitative means to achieve its aims. The qualitative method is regarded as a valuable way to collect rich data based on a real case or context in order to understand the social world through individual perspectives. This approach allows the researcher to observe and gain specific, nuanced and detailed information (Tribe, 2001, 2010). 2 Differentiating Academic and Vocational Hospitality and Tourism Education… 21

2.3.1 Sampling Strategies and Data Collection

Tribe (2001) contends that the beginning of curriculum design within the interpre- tive approach is derived from the participants or stakeholders. In the present study, the curriculum framework was built from the perspectives of four groups of stake- holders (educators, students, industry people and government representatives). It was considered that different points of view obtained through in-depth interviews and observations would strengthen the study’s objectivity and enrich its interpretations. To choose which hospitality and tourism institutions, educators and students to include, a careful strategy was employed to ensure equal representation of both the vocational and academic bachelor programmes. The 12 institutions selected for this study are the prominent hospitality and tourism education providers listed in the Association of the Indonesian Tourism Tertiary Education Institutions (known as HILDIKTIPARI in Indonesia) and the database of the Directorate of Higher Education of the Republic of Indonesia. Six institutions are located in Greater Jakarta, two in Bandung, West Java, two in Bali and one each in Yogyakarta and Surabaya. There were 36 participants involved in this study, comprising 14 educa- tors, 12 students, 8 industry professionals and 2 government representatives. Purposive and snowball sampling were employed to select the participants. They were chosen based on several criteria such as knowledge and experience in curricu- lum design and development, managerial roles and interest and involvement in hos- pitality and tourism education. The profile of the participant is shown in Table 2.1. Primary data in this study were obtained through an in-depth semi-structured interview with each participant. An interview approach was favoured as it had the potential to deliver rich, nuanced and detailed information which would be helpful in developing the curriculum framework. Semi-structured interviews are useful for an exploratory study where the researcher is attempting to understand the object or field under study (Bernard & Ryan, 2010). The primary data were supported with a close examination of the existing curriculum documents of various hospitality and tourism institutions and articles related to curriculum and education study. The first interviews were conducted in five major cities in Indonesia (Greater Jakarta, Bandung, Yogyakarta, Surabaya and Denpasar-Bali) between October 2014 and February 2015. This initial round of interviews sought information from the stakeholders which could be a basis for the curriculum framework development. A second round of interviews took place in June and July 2015 and was confined to participants in Greater Jakarta due to budget and time constraints. The purpose of this second interview was to confirm the results and seek participants’ agreement on the framework. Nine selected participants involved in the second interview were carefully chosen given their knowledge, experience and availability. They consisted of seven existing participants (three educators, two students, one industry practitio- ner and one government official) and two new participants totalling five females and four males. The two new respondents (one female and one male) were senior hospi- tality and tourism educators who had worked in the hospitality and tourism industry 22 H. Oktadiana and K. Chon

Table 2.1 Profile of the Number (% participants (N = 36) Aspect Category total) Gender Male 14 (39) Female 22 (61) Age 20–29 years 13 (36) 30–39 years 3 (8) 40–49 years 12 (33) 50–59 years 6 (17) >60 years 2 (6) Education Currently studying 12 (33) Diploma 1 (3) Masters 17 (47) PhD/doctoral candidate 6 (17) Work experience <1 year 9 (25) 1–5 years 3 (8) 6–10 years 3 (8) 11–15 years 3 (8) 16–20 years 6 (17) 21–25 years 5 (14) 26–30 years 4 (11) >30 years 3 (8)

and education field for 31 years; their involvement was regarded as essential for gaining fresh views about the findings. The interviews used the Indonesian language mixed with some English. The set of questions were designed in English. Prior to the interview, the list of questions was shared with the participants to ensure that they understood what was being asked. All the participants could speak and understand English well; however, the use of their native language in the interviews made participants able to express their ideas more easily. Many participants used a mixture of English and Indonesian dur- ing the conversations. All participants were asked a similar set of questions. The key questions included: • The perspectives of participants concerning the current state of Indonesian hos- pitality and tourism education and industry and future major challenges • The occupations needed to promote Indonesia’s tourism and how well the aca- demic and vocational bachelor’s degrees provide for those occupational needs • The aims and objectives that suit each bachelor programme • The knowledge and skills required for the graduates of each programme • The focus of the curriculum content • The range of learning and teaching activities • Lecturers’ educational background and characteristics needed to teach in each bachelor programme • The range of assessment approaches 2 Differentiating Academic and Vocational Hospitality and Tourism Education… 23

Adjustments were made to the questions concerning employment/occupation to suit the participants’ interests. The interviews were tape recorded with the partici- pants’ consent.

2.3.2 Data Analysis

Content analysis was adopted as it is a useful method to observe themes, patterns and trends in the data. Data were organised using NVivo10 software to aid the pro- cess of coding and categorising the material. Drawing on Berg (2007), Elo and Kyngäs (2008) and Hsieh and Shannon (2005), the data analysis was performed in three stages: preparation, organisation and reporting. The preparation stage included the full transcription of interview conversations, selection of the unit of analysis, summarised accounts of interview content and information and field notes of the researcher’s observations and reflections. All transcriptions were done by the researcher, and this process took more than 1 month. The second phase, the organ- isation stage, started with a thorough reading of all data to develop the initial codes that captured the key concepts. The codes were then sorted into categories based on the relationships between the codes. Abstraction, or a general description of the research topic, was built following the coding and generation of categories. This can be explained as follows: abstraction (e.g. the content of academic bachelor degrees in this study) was formed from the main categories (e.g. subjects and characteristics of the content) and constructed upon several subcategories (e.g. tourism subjects, humanities subjects, concept and knowledge focus). The last stage (the reporting stage) develops the results of the study by linking findings to relevant theories. The credibility of this study was strengthened by various means, such as: • The development of rapport between researchers and respondents • Data source and site triangulation (diversity of respondents and the use of vari- ous documents and research sites to enhance the confidence of the results) • Members’ checking or participant validation (to verify the interviews and to pro- vide rich interview data) • Iterative questioning (using probes and rephrased questions) • Academic review and feedback (Maxwell, 2013; Rubin & Rubin, 2005; Shenton, 2004)

2.3.3 Findings

The results obtained from the perspectives of the interview participants suggested that the curriculum components of the academic and the vocational bachelors can be identified as indicated in Table 2.2. 24 H. Oktadiana and K. Chon

Table 2.2 Stakeholder perspectives for the Komodo Curriculum framework Aspect Academic bachelor Vocational bachelor Graduate Tourism planner and developer (concept Managerial (for service/operation profile development, planning and strategy for and management strategic) tourism) Researcher and academic (research and Operational/front liners (for service teaching, theory and concept development) and [immediate] problem solving) Managerial (for service/operation and management strategic) Scope of Hospitality and tourism sector (back of the Hospitality and tourism sectors work house, tourism government, education and (emphasis on specific/service area training institutions, strategic management) operation and administration) Aims and Promote tourism knowledge and Applied, practical, technical, objectives Indonesia’s tourism development operational Research, concept, theory focus Industry career (work-ready) Relate to: Relate to: Analysis, planning, problem solving, Operational and technical work in conceptualising, creating, proposing ideas, specific areas, immediate problem strategic thinking, strategic management, solving, operational managerial work holistic tourism knowledge, applying theory Emphasis Theory and knowledge focus, less applied/ Practical, applied and skills-based of content practical Subjects related to: Subjects related to: Management and business Management and business Tourism and events Hospitality- and tourism-specific subjects (applied) Social science Hospitality and tourism (general knowledge) Hospitality- and tourism-specific subjects Personal development Natural and applied science Humanities Personal development General subjects Humanities Social science Learning Case study Simulation and demonstration and Simulation and demonstration Case study instruction Internship Internship Field trip/field study Field trip/field study Discussions, brainstorm Project Project Discussions, brainstorm Presentation Lecture Lecture Presentation Guest lecture Others (guest lecture, seminar, PBL) PBL (problem-based learning) Strong emphasis on demonstrations, Other (seminar, workshop, essay) simulations, field trips, projects, Strong emphasis on case studies, work experience discussions, presentations (continued) 2 Differentiating Academic and Vocational Hospitality and Tourism Education… 25

Table 2.2 (continued) Aspect Academic bachelor Vocational bachelor Assessment Formative and summative assessment Formative and summative assessment Varieties of assessment approaches can be Varieties of assessment approaches applied can be applied Written test, quiz, paper/essay, cases Written test, quiz, paper/essay, cases (traditional assessment) (traditional assessment) Performance assessment: presentation, Performance assessment: simulation, problem solving demonstration, role play, presentation, problem solving, practical work performance evaluation Product/portfolio assessment: project and Product/portfolio assessment: sample report, essay, research-based report of product, lab report, project-/ experimental-based report Academic setting and non-academic setting Academic setting and non-academic setting Complex knowledge, concept and theories Expert (technical) skills Process focus Fundamental concept Procedural Product focus

2.4 Discussion

2.4.1 The State of the Hospitality and Tourism Industry and Higher Education in Indonesia

To support the development of the curriculum framework, it was deemed necessary to systematically assess the current state, challenges and needs of the hospitality and tourism industry in Indonesia. The participants agreed that Indonesia’s tourism is booming and expanding. Such growth, however, is facing serious obstacles related to human resources, tourism planning and development, research, marketing and promotions, coordination among stakeholders, infrastructure and community awareness of the benefits of tourism. Human resources and employment were seen as a major problem with an inadequate supply of competent and qualified people to fill various occupations in the industry. It was found that the industry simply searches for job-ready people and employers are ignorant about the skill-level and education background of bachelor-level applicants when recruiting employees. Additionally, many people working in the various hospitality and tourism sectors do not hold hospitality and tourism degrees or diplomas. At the same time, hospitality and tour- ism graduates appear to favour working in other service industries, such as banks and insurance companies. The human resources-related issues were still viewed by the participants as a major challenge in the next 5 years. The lack of competency in speaking English/communicating with foreign visitors and the shortage of good infrastructure in Indonesia have been considered for some time as negative factors 26 H. Oktadiana and K. Chon in Indonesia’s tourism development (Indonesia-Investments, 2014). A study by Krisnawati, Tobing and Sjarief (2017) on the competitiveness of tourism human resources at two major locations in Indonesia – Jakarta and Bali – found that, although Indonesian human resources are friendly and helpful, they tend to have low self-esteem, a lack of education, limited technology skills and a lack of experi- ence and adaptability.

2.4.2 Components of the Komodo Curriculum Framework

The first objective is to identify the graduate profile of the vocational and academic bachelor programmes. In response to the rapid expansion of the tourism sector, the participants proposed that Indonesia needs two categories of human resources. The first category is people who can execute hospitality and tourism plans or pro- grammes, provide the services and deal with immediate problems (e.g. frontline staff, operational managers). The second one is people who are proficient in plan- ning and concept development and possess generic skills that incorporate knowl- edge and conceptual thinking (e.g. strategic-level managers, tourism planners, policymakers, educators/scholars and researchers). The participants suggested that the demand for these two categories can be satisfied by both the vocational and the academic bachelor programmes. While the first type can be fulfilled by the voca- tional bachelor graduates, the demand for the second type can be met by the aca- demic bachelor graduates. The second objective of this study deals with the identification of aims and objectives for the academic and vocational bachelor modes. To better identify and clarify the aims and objectives of the two programmes, key educational philoso- phies were considered. They included essentialism, progressivism, reconstruction- ism and postmodernism. Such underpinning philosophies aid the classification of content, teaching and learning approaches and assessment (Oktadiana & Chon, 2016). Participants stated that the vocational bachelor degree should be designed to develop practical skills and knowledge for tourism services and operations to satisfy the industry’s need for ‘front liners’. The academic bachelor programme should attend to the theories, concepts and knowledge aspects to generate the second type of human resources (e.g. tourism planners, tourism scholars/researchers). Both pro- grammes, however, require a combination of both knowledge and practical skills. It can be argued that the central education philosophy of the academic bachelor course is in the amalgamation of the progressive and essentialist positions, incorpo- rated with the reconstructionism approach, as this camp emphasises the role of tour- ism within its society. The focus of essentialism is at the academic core of the discipline and stresses knowledge and concepts, cognitive development, problem solving and essential skills. This is supported by the progressivist approach that concerns concrete experience, students’ interests, and student-centred learning and the reconstructionism approach that stresses social issues (Kauchak & Eggen, 2011). The combination of the essentialist and progressivist positions was seen as 2 Differentiating Academic and Vocational Hospitality and Tourism Education… 27 suitable for the vocational bachelor programme as it intends to groom students for industry careers and employment. Drawing upon the discourse of contemporary philosophical positions, the groundwork of the academic and the vocational bachelor curricula in Indonesia can be built by synthesising the following concepts. The academic strand that underpins knowledge and concepts, cognitive development, creativity and critical thinking, essential skills and an understanding of social issues and aspects of the tourism phenomenon should largely focus on liberal reflection and action and complex knowledge (episteme) acquisition. The vocational style that reinforces specific skills and knowledge (mainly technical), transferable skills for employment and real experiences, should primarily emphasise vocational action and reflective vocational ideas that equip students with expert practice/capabilities (techne).This separation, however, cannot stand alone. The academic strand also needs to be supported by some components of vocational action and reflection, while the vocational mode requires some liberal reflection and action. Both bachelor modes should have the elements of episteme and techne. Students need to know and be able to do some- thing by applying the concepts to describe a phenomenon or to solve problems. Students also need to develop a practical wisdom or phronesis that cultivates good actions and moral virtue (Oktadiana & Chon, 2016). The third objective of this study was to consider the curriculum content. The findings identified that curriculum content is broadly related to other disciplines and requires a wide range of subjects. As argued by Pearce (1993), hospitality and tour- ism content is soft/unrestricted and mostly concerned with a phenomenon. This field of study needs a range of approaches, such as multidisciplinary, interdisciplin- ary and business interdisciplinary approaches (Jafari & Ritchie, 1981; Pearce, 1993; Tribe, 1997). By linking to these aims and objectives, the academic bachelor’s con- tent should stress the knowledge and skills leading to higher-order thinking through the understanding of theories, exploration, self-reflection and experience. The voca- tional bachelor’s content should reinforce transferable skills and knowledge leading to growth and employment through concrete experience, exploration and self-­ reflection. The results suggest that the content of both bachelor programmes may comprise tourism subjects, hospitality subjects, management and business subjects and complementary academic subjects/liberal arts. It can be maintained, however, that tourism subjects should be the core of the academic bachelor programme, while hospitality subjects are at the centre of the vocational degree. Regardless of the type of programme, personal development subjects and sub- jects related to Indonesian values and ideology should always be embedded in the content. The latter subjects are deemed important as they equip students with an ethical perspective that favours the local values and culture. In addition, the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) common curriculum of hotel and travel services (front office, housekeeping, food production, food and beverage ser- vice, travel agencies and tour operation), which have been agreed within the ASEAN countries, could be integrated in the vocational mode, as these subjects require applied competencies. The agreement, known as a Mutual Recognition Agreement for Tourism Professionals (MRA-TP), was signed by the ASEAN member countries 28 H. Oktadiana and K. Chon on November 9, 2012, in Bangkok, Thailand, to enhance the international mobility of tourism professionals as well as to increase tourism competitiveness across the ASEAN country members (ASEAN, 2012; Hefner, 2013). To satisfy the fourth objective (the development of learning goals and instruction for the academic and vocational bachelor programmes), the manifestation of the learning theories (constructivism, critical pedagogy, neo-behaviourism and cogni- tive behaviour modification) promotes learning that is based on the notion of reflec- tion and action. In the context of this study, constructivism and critical perspectives can be connected to the teaching and learning strategies of the academic bachelor mode, supported by the neo-behaviourism and CBM perspectives. The constructiv- ism position, which incorporates metacognition, is highly relevant to the aim of the academic bachelor programme, although this type of learning is indispensable for the vocational bachelor course. The critical view approach in learning directs aca- demic bachelor students to study social issues related to tourism (e.g. the impact of tourism on society and the economy). The strategies can include brainstorming and discussion, case study, field trip/field study, presentations and projects. Neo-­ behaviourism and CBM approaches in the service of constructivism may well assist the teaching and learning experiences of the vocational style. The observational learning style of neo-behaviourism can be applied to hospitality and tourism practi- cal subjects (e.g. food and beverage service and guiding) that contain demonstration and simulation exercises. This pragmatic approach is valuable as it promotes the development of functional skills through modelling processes and imitation. CBM strategies can be used in a project, a field trip/field study or an internship. In teach- ing tourism subjects that favour cognitive and pragmatic elements, Stergiou (2005) suggests that students should be given autonomy in their learning and be challenged to think creatively and critically. The fifth objective deals with assessments related to the hospitality and tourism curriculum. The findings revealed that the combination of traditional and construc- tivist authentic assessments, that is, teacher-made assessments, performance assess- ment and product/portfolio assessment, can be applied to both bachelor programmes. The teacher-made assessments, such as written test, quiz, paper/essay, interviews/ dialogues and cases, are considered applicable to both programmes. The emphasis on performance assessment can be applied to both process and products (Parsons et al., 2001). A process may consist of problem solving that leads to a solution or preparation that produces a product; a product may include performance at work. Performance assessment for academic bachelor students can take the form of pre- sentations, simulations and problem solving. For vocational bachelor students, it can include role play, demonstration, practical work performance evaluation, prob- lem solving and external assessment from the industry. Product/portfolio assess- ment can be designed as a product creation and a lab report for the vocational bachelor mode (e.g. foods that are produced in the kitchen spaces) or an essay for the academic bachelor style. 2 Differentiating Academic and Vocational Hospitality and Tourism Education… 29

2.4.3 The Integrated ‘Komodo Curriculum’ Framework

The sixth objective of the study was to develop an integrated curriculum framework, as shown in Table 2.3. The Komodo framework indicates ideologies underpinning the programmes’ aims and objectives, which are reflected in the content, teaching and learning approaches and assessment methods.

Table 2.3 The integrated ‘Komodo Curriculum’ for the academic and vocational bachelor programmes Academic mode bachelor Vocational mode bachelor Underpinning Progressive essentialist position, Essentialist progressivist position philosophies incorporated with the reconstructionism approach Supported by Tribe’s (2002) philosophic practitioner; Dredge et al.’s (2012) curriculum space; Schön’s (1983) reflective practitioner; Doll’s (1993) postmodernism; Young’s (2013) powerful knowledge Aims and To promote tourism stewardship and To endorse essential knowledge and objectives tourism knowledge based on reflection skills for employability built upon and action the notions of action and reflection Graduates can demonstrate higher-order Graduates can demonstrate thinking skills, equipped with complex knowledge and transferable skills knowledge, essential skills and practical for employment, equipped with wisdom expert capabilities/skills, essential concepts and practical wisdom Focus of Emphasis on the knowledge and skills Emphasis on the knowledge and content and leading to higher-order thinking skills transferable skills leading to growth subjects through the application of theories, and employment through (real experience, exploration and reflection world) experience, exploration and reflection Tourism subjects as the core of the Hospitality subjects as the core of content, complemented with some the content, fortified by some hospitality subjects tourism subjects Management and business subjects Academic subjects/liberal arts (more wide-ranging ideas for the academic mode) Personal development subjects General subjects (Indonesian values and ideology) Learning and Constructivism and critical approaches Neo-behaviourism and cognitive instruction focus behaviour modification (CBM) focus Manifested in self-reflection and Strongly manifested in collaborative self-regulated learning (metacognition), learning, observation learning discovery learning, collaborative (modelling and imitation), concrete learning, active and hands-on experiences/real-tasks learning exploration, social criticism Assessment Stresses the complex knowledge Stresses the expert skills/ (metacognitive knowledge), essential capabilities (procedural skills and the process knowledge), essential knowledge and the product 30 H. Oktadiana and K. Chon

2.5 Conclusion

This study has attempted to identify the key components of curricula for the aca- demic and vocational bachelor programmes in Indonesia. The approach was underpinned by considering the philosophical orientation of the degrees followed by a review of aims and objectives, content, learning and instruction and assess- ment. The results from interviews with 36 key informants indicated that hospital- ity and tourism curricula can be seen through two lenses: reflection and action and theories and practices. The differences in curriculum components for the two bachelor camps were articulated, although there were some overlapping elements of mutual value. This study provides theoretical and conceptual contributions to tourism study and education in three ways. First, the work integrates a number of concepts to develop the ‘Komodo Curriculum’ framework: educational philosophical positions, learning theories and the multidisciplinary, interdisciplinary and business interdis- ciplinary epistemologies in hospitality and tourism content and assessment meth- ods. Second, it provides a more comprehensive and holistic exploration and analysis of the key curriculum components, rather than just emphasising one single compo- nent as much previous research in this field has done (Eash,1991 ). Third, this study assists in the development of undergraduate curricula for Indonesia’s hospitality and tourism education as work on such issues in Indonesia does not currently exist. The limitations of this study can be identified as the following. First, the partici- pants involved in this study were limited to the educators and students from repu- table hospitality and tourism institutions in Java and Bali. Second, this study could use a different approach to address some degrees of unfamiliarity in discussing curricula with the students. As the students were selected based on the judgement of the school management, an extra effort was taken to introduce the students to the study, because it was felt that the methods of recruitment may not have given them a complete understanding of the purpose of the work. Third, constant follow-up in scheduling interviews with the participants was required due to the cultural style of the Indonesian people who are reluctant to give direct answers, although they were willing to be involved in the study. This issue caused long delays in the data collec- tion process. This study could be expanded by involving a larger number of participants and using a written survey to gain more specific data on the curriculum components. Such an approach offers flexibility and potential comparisons among groups of respondents. Future study could also include hospitality and tourism institutions in other cities or regions beyond Java and Bali. Another prospect is to upscale the study through collaborative research with neighbouring ASEAN countries, such as Malaysia and Singapore, in order to reveal any similarities or differences between the curriculum patterns in other regions. 2 Differentiating Academic and Vocational Hospitality and Tourism Education… 31

References

Andriani, D. (2014). Kebutuhan terus meningkat, program pendidikan pariwisata akan diper- banyak [Tourism programmes need to expand due to the increase in demand]. Bisnis.com. Retrieved January 12, 2015, from http://m.bisnis.com/quick-news/read/20140216/255/203203/ kebutuhan-terus-meningkat-program-pendidikan-pariwisata-akan-diperbanyak. Association of Southeast Asian Nations. (2012). Guide to ASEAN mutual recognition arrangement on tourism professionals. Retrieved December 19, 2017, from https://www.mekongtourism. org/guide-to-asean-mutual-recognition-arrangement-on-tourism-professionals/ Baum, T., & Szivas, E. (2008). HRD in tourism: A role for government? Tourism Management, 29, 783–794. Ben-Peretz, M., & Connelly, F. M. (1991). Curriculum design. In A. Lewy (Ed.), The international encyclopedia of curriculum (pp. 158–160). Oxford, UK: Pergamon Press. Berg, B. L. (2007). Qualitative methods for the social sciences (6th ed.). Boston: Pearson Education. Bernard, H. R., & Ryan, G. W. (2010). Analyzing qualitative data: Systematic approaches. Thousand Oaks, CA: SAGE. Blanton, D. (1981). Tourism training in developing countries: The social and cultural dimension. Annals of Tourism Research, 8(1), 116–133. Chen, K., & Groves, D. (1999). The importance of examining philosophical relationships between tourism and hospitality curricula. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 11(1), 37–42. Cooper, C. (2002). Curriculum planning for hospitality and tourism education. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 2(1), 19–39. Doll, W. E. (1993). A post-modern perspective on curriculum. New York: Teachers College Press. Dredge, D., Benckendorff, P., Day, M., Gross, M. J., Walo, M., Weeks, P., et al. (2012). The philo- sophic practitioner and the curriculum space. Annals of Tourism Research, 39(4), 2154–2176. Dunn, S. G. (2005). Philosophical foundations of education: Connecting philosophy to theory and practice. Hoboken, NJ: Pearson Education. Eash, M. J. (1991). Curriculum components. In A. Lewy (Ed.), The international encyclopedia of curriculum (pp. 67–69). Oxford, UK: Pergamon Press. Elo, S., & Kyngäs, H. (2008). The qualitative content analysis process. Journal of Advanced Nursing, 62(1), 107–115. Ernawati, D. B., & Pearce, P. L. (2003). Tourism courses at the higher education level in Indonesia. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 3(2), 1–18. Fidgeon, P. R. (2010). Tourism education and curriculum design: A time for consolidation and review? Tourism Management, 31, 699–723. Haven-Tang, C., & Jones, E. (2006). Human resources management in tourism businesses. In J. Beech & S. Chadwick (Eds.), The business of tourism management (pp. 89–114). Harlow, UK: Pearson Education. Hefner, M. (2013). What is the ASEAN mutual recognition arrangement for tourism profession- als? City News Chiang Mai. Retrieved May 16, 2014, from http://www.chiangmaicitylife.com/ news/what-is-the-asean-mutual-recognition-arrangement-for-tourism-professionals/ Hernasari, P. R. (2014). Ilmu pariwisata makin eksis di Indonesia [Tourism study is expand- ing in Indonesia]. Detik Travel. Retrieved July 26, 2017, from https://travel.detik.com/ travel-news/d-2496200/ilmu-pariwisata-makin-eksis-di-indonesia. Holland, J. S. (2014). Komodo dragons. Retrieved December 19, 2017, from http://ngm.nationalgeographic.com/2014/01/komodo-dragon/ holland-text?_ga=2.64189286.895727226.1513645784-14839438.1513645784. Hsieh, H., & Shannon, S. E. (2005). Three approaches to qualitative content analysis. Qualitative Health Research, 15(9), 1277–1288. 32 H. Oktadiana and K. Chon

Indonesia-Investments. (2014). Tourism in Indonesia: Terrorism, infrastructure and ASEAN common visa. Retrieved December 19, 2017, from https://www.indonesia-investments.com/ news/news-columns/tourism-in-indonesia-terrorism-infrastructure-and-asean-common-visa/ item1785? Jafari, J., & Ritchie, J. B. R. (1981). Toward a framework for tourism education problems and prospects. Annals of Tourism Research, 8(1), 13–34. Kanalsatu.com. (2014). Menparekraf tegaskan eksistensi ilmu pariwisata penting [Tourism and Creative Economy Minister stated the importance of tourism study]. Retrieved July 26, 2017, from http://kanalsatu.com/id/post/17787/menparekraf-tegaskan-eksistensi-ilmu-pariwisata-penting. Kauchak, D., & Eggen, P. (2011). Introduction to teaching: Becoming a professional (4th ed.). Hoboken, NJ: Pearson Education. Klein, F. M. (1991). Curriculum design. In A. Lewy (Ed.), The international encyclopedia of cur- riculum (pp. 158–160). Oxford, UK: Pergamon Press. Krisnawati, N., Tobing, R., & Sjarief, R. (2017). Competitiveness development of tourism human resources facing the ASEAN Economic Community in 2015: A case study on hotel human resources in Jakarta and Bali. Australian Academy of Business and Economics Review, 3(2), 76–87. Lo, A. (2005). The past, present, and future of hospitality and tourism higher education in Hong Kong. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 5(1–2), 137–166. Maxwell, J. A. (2013). Qualitative research design: An interactive approach (3rd ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: SAGE Publications. Morris, P., & Adamson, B. (2010). Curriculum, schooling and society in Hong Kong. Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press. Nicholls, A., & Nicholls, H. (1978). Developing a curriculum: A practical guide for teachers at primary, secondary and tertiary levels (2nd ed.). London: George Allen & Unwin. Oktadiana, H., & Chon, K. (2014). A review of programs and program directions of the Indonesia’s hospitality and tourism study at the undergraduate level. In V. Nair, K. Hussain, P. Mura, K. H. K. Hui, & N. A. Ragavan (Eds.), Proceedings of the 12th Asia Pacific CHRIE (APacCHRIE) Conference 2014: Breaking barriers shifting gears (pp. 1–12). Subang Jaya, Selangor: Taylor’s University Sdn Bhd. Oktadiana, H., & Chon, K. (2016). Educational philosophy: Grounding the tourism curriculum. Annals of Tourism Research, 57, 236–239. Ornstein, A. C., & Hunkins, F. P. (2014). Curriculum foundations, principles, and issues (6th ed.). Boston: Pearson Education. Parsons, R. D., Hinson, S. L., & Sardo-Brown, D. (2001). Educational psychology: A practitioner-­ researcher model of teaching. Belmon, CA: Wadsworth Thomson Learning. Pearce, P. L. (1993). Defining tourism study as a specialism: A justification and implications. Teoros International, 1(1), 25–32. Ratcliff, J. L. (1997). What is a curriculum and what should it be? In J. G. Gaff & J. L. Ratcliff (Eds.), Handbook of the undergraduate curriculum (pp. 5–29). San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. Rubin, H. J., & Rubin, I. S. (2005). Qualitative interviewing, the art of hearing data. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. Schön, D. A. (1983). The reflective practitioner: How professionals think in action. New York: Basic Books. Shenton, A. K. (2004). Strategies for ensuring trustworthiness in qualitative research projects. Education for Information, 22, 63–75. Sofia, H. (2013). Perkembangan ilmu pariwisata stagnan [The development of tourism is stagnant]. Antara News. Retrieved September 17, 2017, from http://www.antaranews.com/berita/378297/ perkembangan-ilmu-pariwisata-stagnan Stergiou, D. (2005). Teaching. In D. Airey & J. Tribe (Eds.), An international handbook of tourism education (pp. 285–297). Oxford, UK: Elsevier. Tribe, J. (1997). The indiscipline of tourism. Annals of Tourism Research, 24(3), 638–657. 2 Differentiating Academic and Vocational Hospitality and Tourism Education… 33

Tribe, J. (2001). Research paradigms and the tourism curriculum. Journal of Travel Research, 39(4), 442–448. Tribe, J. (2002). The philosophic practitioner. Annals of Tourism Research, 29(2), 338–357. Tribe, J. (2010). Tribes, territories and networks in the tourism academy. Annals of Tourism Research, 37(1), 7–33. Tribe, J. (2015). The curriculum: A philosophic practice? In D. Dredge, D. Airey, & M. J. Gross (Eds.), The Routledge handbook of tourism and hospitality education (pp. 17–29). New York: Routledge. Tyler, R. W. (1949). Basic principles of curriculum and instruction. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press. Weaver, D., & Lawton, L. (2010). Tourism management (4th ed.). Milton, Australia: Wiley. Young, M. (2013). Overcoming the crisis in curriculum theory: A knowledge-based approach. Journal of Curriculum Studies, 45(2), 101–118. Young, M. (2014). What is a curriculum and what it can do? The Curriculum Journal, 25(1), 7–13. Chapter 3 Vocational Education and Training for Hospitality and Tourism Industry in India

Saurabh Kumar Dixit and Hakamelamphylla Mawroh

Abstract The future economic growth rate and employment generation capacity of any nation depend on the knowledge and skill of its local workforce. In India, the tourism and hospitality industry continues to experience a critical shortage of a qualified and skilled workforce. Currently, only 2.3% of the Indian workforce has undergone skills training, resulting in the need for a substantial investment in voca- tional education and training. The Skill India initiative of the Government of India seeks to provide the institutional capacity to train a minimum of 300 million people by 2022, with a total outlay of USD 234 million. This chapter aims to offer an insight into the present scenario, latest developments and future potential of voca- tional education and training in the context of the Indian hospitality and tourism industries. The chapter analyses the existing system of hospitality and tourism voca- tional education and the skill development initiatives of both public and private sector organisations.

Keywords Tourism · Skill · Vocational education · Workforce · Training · India

3.1 Introduction

The travel and tourism industry is highly diverse in terms of its subsector mix, occu- pations and talent requirements. Its subsectors range from hotels to air transport, while occupations range from concierges to pilots. A relatively high proportion of the travel and tourism workforce is employed in elementary, low-skilled occupa- tions, e.g. cleaners and waitresses. The sector has a below-average proportion (at least in comparison to advanced economies) of its workforce employed in

S. K. Dixit (*) · H. Mawroh Department of Tourism & Hotel Management, North-Eastern Hill University, Shillong, Meghalaya, India

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 35 C. Liu, H. Schänzel (eds.), Tourism Education and Asia, Perspectives on Asian Tourism, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4_3 36 S. K. Dixit and H. Mawroh higher-­skilled professional occupations (World Travel & Tourism Council, 2015). The travel and tourism industry in India has experienced enormous growth over the last decade, and the future holds impressive potential. It has evolved into a highly competitive, complex and global business that offers exciting career opportunities. The tourism and hospitality industry continues to experience a critical shortage of qualified and skilled labour. Employment forecasts of future workforce requirement for Indian tourism industry strongly indicate that this pattern will continue. As the industry continues to grow, strategic planning is required to enable businesses to access appropriately skilled staff in requisite numbers to ensure operations remain productive and sustainable and are able to meet rising consumer expectations (Government of India, 2014). There is a saying by Jean Piaget (Duckworth, 1964, p. 499) that ‘The principal goal of education is to create men and women who are capable of doing new things, not simply of repeating what other generations have done – men [sic] who are cre- ative, inventive and discoverers’. This quote completely sums up the need for and importance of education. The growing significance of professional and specialised knowledge in many emerging fields has allowed people, particularly youth, to opt for something that enhances their interests and passion. One such field is the hospi- tality and tourism industry. Industry employment records show that the specialised workforce in the field is one of the fastest growing in the world because of its high revenue returns. There is a general recognition of tourism as a major job generator especially for youth and women (Yunis, 2009). Since this industry demands a spe- cialised workforce, many youths are motivated and encouraged to take up hospital- ity and tourism educational programmes and training. A formal education system does not necessarily equip a person with the practical skills needed for the employment market. In India, a minimum entry level desired for vocational education/qualification prescribed by such training institutes excludes most potential students – who could otherwise have gained sufficient practical skills for gainful employment. Vocational training is about imparting certificate-level training pertaining to the tourism and hospitality sector, which in India is mostly provided by the ITI (Industrial Training Institute) and industrial training centres at universities. These courses are normally aimed at school dropouts in grades 8–12 or the age group of 12–18 years old (Government of India, 2015). The delivery of hotel and tourism training has a number of unique features in that the training environ- ment must attempt to match as closely as possible the ‘real work environment’ that students will face when entering the industry. Vocational education and training (VET) is an important element of any nation’s education system. In order for vocational education to play its part effectively in the changing national context and for India, there is an urgent need to redefine the criti- cal elements of imparting vocational education and training to make them flexible, contemporary, relevant, inclusive and creative. According to Kaushik (2014), ‘vocational education’ can be defined as education that is based on occupation and employment; it is also sometimes referred to as ‘career and technical education’ or ‘technical vocational education and training’. VET is the education and training that equips young people with the specialised 3 Vocational Education and Training for Hospitality and Tourism Industry in India 37 knowledge and skills in a particular field for the purpose of occupation and career. Vocational training, to be effective, should serve as a bridge between employer needs and those of work seekers, and this can only be achieved through effective partnerships between the vocational training centres and industry stakeholders. It is through this partnership approach that vocational training can add real value to development efforts within the tourism industry. Understanding this interplay between the economy, the labour market and educa- tion and training is one of the prerequisites for effective government policy responses. To identify the potential areas of growth, types and levels of qualifications and skills and competencies needed and to provide education and training that is relevant to the labour market require the cooperation of the education and training and employment sectors, social partners and third sector organisations (which are neither public nor private organisations but voluntary and community organisations, such as charities). This is important to ensure that VET gives people the opportunity to acquire a mix of skills that combines theory and practice, allowing them to perform a specific occupation but also giving them the opportunity to progress later in their careers by returning to education and training to upgrade and complement their skills. Collaboration and support structures are needed to help small and microenterprises engage in training. The Indian Government is aware of the important role of voca- tional education and has already taken many important initiatives in this area. This chapter aims to offer an insight into the present scenario, latest develop- ments and future potential of vocational education and training in the context of the Indian hospitality and tourism industry. The chapter will, therefore, throw light on the existing system of hospitality and tourism vocational education and the skill development initiatives of both public and private sector organisations.

3.2 Evolution of Tourism and Hospitality Education in India

According to Airey (2005), tourism as an activity has shown continuous global growth since 1945. This has led to the emergence of major airline companies and international tour operators and hotel corporations. These companies have created a demand for professional tourism suppliers, prompting educational institutions to cater to these demands and opportunities. As a result, there is a growing vocational emphasis on tourism and hospitality education. Tourism education programmes have developed within the context of the general development of vocational educa- tion. Vocational education programmes have been one of the key themes underlying educational developments throughout the western world during the past 50 years (Airey, 2005). Governments have encouraged vocational education through the emergence of successful business schools, which have diversified and extended their teaching into journalism, housing studies, leisure management and tourism. Furthermore, in the views of Morgan (2004), tourism education was a product of vocational education in Europe wherein students were trained in significant areas of hospitality and business. As the tourism industry evolved, tourism educators started 38 S. K. Dixit and H. Mawroh to redefine tourism education to include the skills necessary for employability in the industry (Inui, Wheeler, & Lankford, 2006; Tribe, 2001, 2002). Tribe (2002) argued that tourism education should be flexible enough to enable a balance between satis- fying the demands of business and those of the wider tourism society and world. Even though tourism is a latecomer to India (Singh, 1997), its practices and prin- ciples have been witnessed from times immemorial (Singh & Singh, 2005). In the mid-1950s in Mumbai, the government introduced a hospitality course with the funding support of the United Nations. In the year 1962, the Government of India began an education programme in the fields of hotel management, catering technol- ogy and applied nutrition under the Department of Food in the Ministry of Agriculture. In the 1970s, tourism research commenced in India when the first known authoritative study of tourism as an industry was published (Singh, 1975). Singh (1997) and Jithendran and Baum (2000) have investigated and documented the evolution of hospitality and tourism education and training in India; they have identified the Centre for Vocational Studies, University of Delhi, established in 1972, as pioneering the first tourism study programme. In 1976, the Centre for Tourism Research and Development, Lucknow, was established for the purpose of publishing the academic journal Tourism Recreation Research in order to further the cause of tourism education and research in India (Singh & Singh, 2005). In 1982, the Ministry of Tourism, Government of India, established the National Council of Hotel Management and Catering Technology. The establishment of the Indian Tourism Development Corporation has helped set up training institutions for young people in order to attain the skilled and semi-skilled workforce needed for the prom- ising industry (Singh & Singh, 2005). According to Jithendran and Baum (2000), in 1983, the Indian Institute of Travel and Tourism Management was established, which marked the beginning of tourism (non-hospitality) education in the country. The Indira Gandhi National Open University (IGNOU) was established to provide tourism programmes through distance education, which has an impressive outreach across the country (Singh & Singh, 2005). Since 1994, IGNOU has offered certifi- cate to PhD-level programmes in hospitality and tourism and currently has more than 20,000 students enrolled in them (IGNOU, 2017). India started tourism courses about three decades ago. Earlier tourism education in India was limited to diploma and postgraduate diploma courses; degree and higher levels of tourism education were not started until the 1980s. Once the degree and higher degree tourism education courses were started by a few visionary leaders and academics, they gradually came to be known as mostly professional courses. The courses became multidisciplinary in nature, including varied subjects from courses such as management, economics, commerce, finance, history, geography and geol- ogy, to meet the curriculum expectations of the tourism industry (Bansal, 2006; Kukreti, 2007). In 1982, the Ministry of Tourism, Government of India, with the necessary infrastructural support, endeavoured to put in place a system of training and professional education to meet the needs of the tourism and hospitality industry. As a result, with the financial support of the Ministry of Tourism, 41 Institutes of Hotel Management comprising 21 central IHMs, 8 state IHMs, 12 private IHMs and 5 Food Craft Institutes following the National Council’s course curriculum are pres- 3 Vocational Education and Training for Hospitality and Tourism Industry in India 39 ently operating as autonomous societies with a specific mandate to impart/conduct education/training in hospitality skills. In addition to this, a number of central-/state- funded universities are also offering hospitality and tourism courses at undergraduate and postgraduate level in various parts of the country (Chand & Dahiya, 2008). Over recent years, course contents have shifted from hotel and catering manage- ment to include ‘hospitality’. The change in title opens a wider conceptual frame- work. Hospitality comprises a number of different disciplines, such as tourism, hotel business operations, transport business and leisure activities. It is clear that ‘vocational orientation remains at the core of the curriculum’ (Airey & Tribe, 2000, p. 292). A key point of focus for the industry is the Vocational Education and Training in Schools (VETiS) programme. VETiS is seen as a critical area for action as it is perceived as being a significant source of future talent. It is widely held that the provision of vocational and professional courses in tourism and hospitality has to be carried out by sector-dedicated institutions and programmes, as these have the most prominent role in meeting the industry’s human resource needs. It can contrib- ute to the training, development and skilling of unemployed youths through short-­ term courses relating to the trade. Due to increased tourism, there has been a remarkable growth in the hospitality industry in India in recent years, and this has attracted hospitality investors. Hotels are the most prominent part of the country’s infrastructure, and the hotel industry is closely linked to the tourism industry. These sectors have contributed a significant amount to the country’s economy. To support the development of these sectors, professional guidance and training are required. A diagram of the hospitality management courses currently available in India is pre- sented in Fig. 3.1.

18-month diploma programme PhD 4-year programme degree programme Hospitality Manageme nt courses in India 3-year 3-year degree diploma programme programme 2-year master's programme

Fig. 3.1 Hospitality management courses in India (Adapted from Kumar, 2014) 40 S. K. Dixit and H. Mawroh

3.3 Vocational Education and Training (VET) System in India

In today’s world, VET is becoming highly significant because of rapid advance- ments in every field, especially in the technology and service sectors. For the all-­ round growth of any country, education and training are vital, enabling students to become employable and thus able to contribute to the country’s development. Imparting skills and knowledge is thus the central task of vocationally orientated education. In India, VET is highly endorsed by the government because, being the second most populous country in the world, with youth accounting for the largest percentage of the population (more than 65% of people in India are below the age of 35 years; Kumar, 2017), specialised skills and training are necessary to provide this large, young population with employment opportunities. According to Kaushik (2014), vocational education involves practical courses which impart the skills and experience appropriate to future employment. This has seen the emergence of VET as a crucial provider of job-ready, highly qualified graduates to work in areas as diverse as hospitality, information technology, business and health care. VET is no longer seen as an alternative study system. It is a central part of the modern approach to post-school education, offering a variety of pathways for people of all ages and backgrounds to get their dream jobs. Employers seek VET graduates because they have the practical and technical skills for a seamless transition from study to work. At an aggregate level, barely 2% of the Indian workforce have gained skills through vocational education, and only another 2.4% workers have some technical education (Klynveld Peat Marwick Goerdeler [KPMG], 2016). The graduates who are trained in vocational education also lack the skills required in the labour market. Thus, the employability of graduates continues to be a major concern, and there is no formal link between general education and vocational training in the country. The Indian education system recognises the role of education especially in terms of vocational education. Vocational training in India consists of two types: full-time training and part-time training. Full-time training is offered through ITIs (Industrial Training Institutes), and the nodal agency for these is the National Council for Vocational Training (NCVT) which is under the Ministry of Labour, Government of India. Part-time training is offered through state technical education boards or uni- versities, which also provide full-time courses. The Technical and Vocational Education and Training system in India is divided into three parts/levels: • Graduate and postgraduate students (e.g. Indian Institute of Technology, National Institute of Technology and engineering colleges) trained as engineers and specialists • Diploma-level graduates who are trained at polytechnics as technicians and supervisors • Certificate-level education for higher secondary students in the vocational stream and crafts where people are trained through formal apprenticeships as semi-­ skilled and skilled workers 3 Vocational Education and Training for Hospitality and Tourism Industry in India 41

There are many private institutions in India that offer vocational education and training, but most of them have not been recognised by the government. The govern- ment recognises the urgent need to make vocational education and training flexible, contemporary, relevant, inclusive and creative. India is a developing country, but it has come a long way to boost and implement vocational education (Kaushik, 2014). There has been a long-felt need to align Indian higher education with the emerg- ing needs of the economy to ensure that graduates have adequate knowledge and skills for employment and entrepreneurship. The higher education system has to incorporate the requirements of various industries in its curricula in innovative and flexible ways while developing a holistic and well-groomed graduate. In India, the National Vocational Education Qualification Framework developed by the Ministry of Human Resource Development provides a descriptive framework for linking various qualifications in order to set common principles and guidelines for a nation- ally recognised qualification system. The framework covers schools, vocational education and training institutions, technical education institutions, colleges and universities (University Grants Commission [UGC], n.d.).

3.4 Regulation of Vocational Education in India

The Indian vocational educational framework is quite centralised. Two ministries – Human Resource Development and Labour and Employment – are the key decision makers for vocational education and training in India. Seventeen ministries of the Government of India, ranging from the Ministry of Labour and Employment to that of Human Resource Development, Tourism and the Food Processing Industries, are presently engaged in undertaking various training initiatives with the combined tar- get of skilling 350 million people by 2022 (KPMG, 2016). ‘The NSDC (National Skill Development Corporation) was also set up to enable skills-related training through its private-sector partners with the intention of skilling 150 million people by 2022 to contribute to the prime minister’s vision of skilling half-a-billion Indians’ (Infrastructure Development Finance Company [IDFC], 2013, p. 201). The Ministry of Human Resource Development controls the vocational higher education including polytechnics and graduates in engineering through the All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE). The AICTE prepares curriculum designs, certification and the standardisation of syllabi and monitors the entire vocational higher educational structure. The ministry also controls vocational education in sec- ondary schools. This is done through the National Council for Education Research and Training, which prepares the curricula and certification for vocational education at secondary school level. The Ministry of Human Resource Development, in conjunction with the SSCs [Sector Skill Councils] being set up by the NSDC, has launched the National Vocational Education Qualification Framework (NVEQF) to allow seamless migration from vocational to formal education. The All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE) has also launched a scheme under the NVEQF. Given that these efforts are parallel in nature, efforts are to align them and bring about a uniform framework. (IDFC, 2013, p. 201) 42 S. K. Dixit and H. Mawroh

The Ministry of Human Resource Development, Government of India, issued an Executive Order in September 2011 for a National Vocational Education Qualification Framework (NVEQF). Subsequently, the Ministry of Finance, in pur- suance of the decision of the Cabinet Committee on Skill Development in its meet- ing held on December 19, 2013, issued a notification for a National Skills Qualifications Framework (NSQF), which superseded the NVEQF. Similarly, the Ministry of Labour and Employment regulates and monitors the lower end of voca- tional educational training, such as ITIs, through the National Council for Vocational Training (NCVT). The NCVT is mandated to design, develop and maintain curri- cula and monitor ITIs across the country. The same ministry also regulates appren- tice programmes for those who pass out from ITIs and others through its Craftsmen Training Scheme. After successful apprentice training, the trainees are expected to sit an All India Trade Test; the NCVT provides certificates for those who pass these exams. Another training scheme done under the ministry is the Skills Development Initiative Scheme. The scheme is targeted at workers seeking to upskill or gain cer- tification of skills acquired informally through courses run by Modular Employable Skills. The trainees who complete such a training scheme are also provided with certificates by the NCVT. States also play a part in this process through the State Council for Vocational Training. Steps are being undertaken to strengthen the NCVT structure. As part of the National Policy on Skill Development 2009, the NSDC has been given the responsibility of setting up Sector Skill Councils to define standards for the segments they represent (IDFC, 2013, p. 201). A third component of the regulatory framework came into being with the estab- lishment of the Prime Minister’s National Council on Skill Development in 2009. This body later (in June 2013) became known as the National Skill Development Agency with autonomous status and a parliament mandate. The agency is expected to coordinate and harmonise skill development in India and foster cooperation between the government and the private sector to meet the skill needs. In addition to the vocational education activities existing under various central ministers, the agency supports NSDC skill initiatives in various ways. It is also expected to anchor the National Skills Qualifications Framework (NSQF) and facilitate the setting up of professional certifying bodies in addition to the existing ones (Mehrotra, Raman, Kalaiyarasan, & Kumra, 2014). The National Skill Development Corporation (NSDC) India, established in 2009, is a not-for-profit company set up by the Ministry of Finance, under Section 25 of the Companies Act, 1956, corresponding to Section 8 of the Companies Act, 2013. The present equity base of NSDC is Rs. 10 crore (approximately 1 million USD), of which the Government of India through the Ministry of Skill Development and Entrepreneurship (MSDE) holds 49%, while the private sector has the balance of 51% (NSDC, 2017). The NSDC aims to promote skill development by catalysing the creation of large, quality and for-profit vocational institutions. Further, the organisation ­provides fund- ing to build scalable and profitable vocational training initiatives. Its mandate is also to enable a support system that focuses on quality assurance, information systems and train-the-trainer academies, either directly or through partnerships. The NSDC 3 Vocational Education and Training for Hospitality and Tourism Industry in India 43 acts as a catalyst in skill development by providing funding to enterprises, compa- nies and organisations that provide skill training. It also develops appropriate models to enhance, support and coordinate private sector initiatives. The differentiated focus on 21 sectors under NSDC’s purview and its understanding of their viability will make every sector attractive to private investment (NSDC, 2017).

3.5 Vocational Education and Training in the Tourism and Hospitality Sector in India

Tourism is a specialised service industry. Globally, tourism has become one of the largest and fastest-growing economic sectors (Daniel, Costa, Pita, & Costa, 2017). At present, tourism contributes to about 4.1% of GDP, 5.9% of employment and 21.3% of service exports of the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development economies (OECD, 2016). According to Daniel et al. (2017), the tour- ism sector has a significant impact on labour markets because it is labour-intensive, and, hence, it accounts for more employment opportunities. These authors further added that, despite the association of tourism sector workers with low levels of education and limited entrepreneurial skills, the employment scenario has been changing. Advanced knowledge and skills are now needed in the sector, and the tourism and hospitality industry has signalled the need for education that would meet these new requirements. Therefore, tourism higher education, as a major plat- form for human capital development for the industry (Ladkin, 2005), has a close link with its economic development (Biswakarma, 2016). This applies to Indian tourism and hospitality education and industry as well. According to Biswakarma (2016), tourism education is much needed to develop and improve the human resources in tourism which relate to work and employment. Being updated on the trends in skills within tourism can be achieved through voca- tional education. For example, in order to develop the tourism sector, skilled work- force such as airline managers and ticketing officers, having different levels of skill competencies, are required. The National Skills Qualifications Framework (NSQF) in India has defined ten levels of competency. Some school boards are providing Level 4 certificate training which is being considered as equivalent to Class XII. The University Grants Commission (UGC), the regulatory body in higher education, has written to all universities that students coming out with Level 4 certificates in vocational educa- tion may be considered for admission into degree courses as those who have attained the traditional secondary school qualification requirements. The UGC has laid down diploma, advance diploma and B.Voc. (Bachelor of Vocation) degree programmes under the NSQF, which are considered equivalent to Levels 5, 6 and 7 of NSQF, respectively. Although academic higher education courses (such as academic degrees) are not covered in the NSQF, it may be broadly aligned with the prevailing framework for higher education qualifications, allowing levels of acquired compe- tency to be compared with the academic degrees as suggested in Table 3.1. 44 S. K. Dixit and H. Mawroh

Table 3.1 National Skills Qualifications Framework (NSQF) level of competency and academic equivalence Level Proposed academic expected Level of competency as defined under NSQF equivalence Level 1 No responsibility, always works under continuous instruction Pertains to and close supervision school-level education Level 2 No responsibility, works under instruction and close Pertains to supervision school-level education Level 3 Works under close supervision. Some responsibilities for Pertains to own work within defined limit school-level education Level 4 Responsibility for own work and learning Pertains to school-level education Level 5 Responsibility for own work and learning and some Diploma responsibility for other’s work and learning Level 6 Responsibility for own work and learning and full Advanced diploma responsibility for other’s works and learning Level 7 Full responsibility for output of group and development Graduation Level 8 Exercise management and supervision in the context of Honours at work/study having unpredictable changes, responsible for undergraduate level development of self and others Level 9 Responsible for decision making in complex technical Masters activities, involving unpredictable study/work situations Level 10 Responsible for strategic decisions in unpredictable complex Doctorate situations of work/study Source: Skill Development Bureau (2015)

In order to make education relevant and create an ‘industry-fit’ skilled work- force, the institutions recognised under the Community Colleges/B.Voc. degree pro- gramme and DDU Kaushal Centres offering skill-based courses will have to be in constant dialogue with the industry and their respective Sector Skill Council(s) so that they remain updated on the requirements of the workforce for the local econ- omy. There are credit-based modular programmes, wherein banking of credits for skill and general education components is permitted to enable multiple exits and entries. This enables the learner to seek employment after any level of award and join back as and when feasible to upgrade her/his qualification/skill competency either to move higher in her/his job or in the higher educational system. This pro- vides the learner an opportunity for vertical mobility to second year of B.Voc. degree programme after 1-year diploma and to third year of B.Voc. degree ­programme after a 2-year advanced diploma. The students may further move to master’s and research degree programmes (NSQF Level 8–10). Some of the top 3 Vocational Education and Training for Hospitality and Tourism Industry in India 45 institutes in India offering programmes and courses in tourism and hospitality (source: Dewra, n.d.; ‘List of hospitality tourism colleges,’ n.d.) are as follows: 1. Indian Institute of Tourism and Travel Management situated at multiple cam- puses – Gwalior, Madhya Pradesh, Noida, Goa, Bhubaneshwar and Nellore. It offers a Postgraduate Diploma in Management in international tourism business, tourism and travel, services, tourism and leisure and tourism and cargo. 2. Amity School of Hospitality situated on campuses at Noida, Jaipur, Lucknow and Dubai. It offers a Bachelor of Hotel Management, a Diploma in Front Office, Food Production and Food and Beverage Service, an MBA in Hospitality Management and a Postgraduate Diploma in Hospitality. 3. Bharati Vidyapeeth College of Hotel and Tourism Management Studies situated at Mumbai. It offers a B.Sc. (Bachelor of Science) Degree in Hospitality Studies. 4. National Institute of Tourism and Hospitality Management situated at Hyderabad. It offers a Postgraduate Diploma in Tourism Management, an MBA in Tourism and Hospitality, a Bachelor of Business Administration (BBA) in Tourism and Hospitality and so on. 5. National Council for Hotel Management and Catering Technology with head- quarters at Noida offers diplomas in food production, bakery and confectionery, housekeeping and so on. 6. Bundelkhand University situated at Jhansi (Uttar Pradesh). It offers a BBA in Tourism. 7. North-Eastern Hill University at Shillong (Meghalaya) is one of the pioneering education institutes of North-Eastern India. It offers postgraduate and doctoral degrees in tourism and hotel management.

3.6 Challenges of Vocational Education and Training in India

According to Kaushik (2014), vocational training has been successful only in indus- trial training institutes teaching trades. The initiative of private institutes to imple- ment VET remains futile because of the lack of government recognition. The author (Kaushik, 2014) further emphasised the problems of VET in India as follows: Most employers want to engage young workers who have strong basic academic skills and not just vocational skills. The present system does not synthesise general academic and vocational skills together. Vocational education is presently offered in schools that is equivalent to secondary school 11th and 12th grade standard. Students reaching these grades meet the entry requirements for higher education. However, since the present system does not recognise the grade equivalence of the vocational education in schools, the skills obtained are lost because these students cannot 46 S. K. Dixit and H. Mawroh access the higher education needed for them to become employable. Further prob- lems include: • The lack of consultation between industry and private education providers • A high dropout rate at secondary school level • Inadequately trained faculty at vocational training institutes • The lack of identification of new sectors of vocational education and skills training • Less continuous skill upgrading opportunities • A huge gap in supply of skills to meet current demand because the education system prohibits the contribution of vocational education in schools to the entry requirements for higher education Rigid structures, outdated syllabi and the absence of a monitoring committee in most vocational education training institutes in India are other important issues that need to be addressed.

3.7 Conclusions

The industrial and labour market trends clearly indicate the need to strengthen voca- tional education and training in India. The introduction of vocational education at secondary school level through bivalent schools and Sector Skill Councils (voca- tional) will enable India to broaden its vocational education base. A clear pathway for vocational students to enter higher education streams is also the way to move forward. The vocational qualification framework, the introduction of vocational degrees and the setting up of a vocational university with polytechnics, community colleges and DDU Kaushal Centres are some of the recommendations that require further deliberation at national and state level. This chapter is an endeavour to highlight the existing scenario of vocational edu- cation in India. A picture has been revealed of room for further development in this sector, because it remains poor not only in rural areas but also in urban areas. The Government of India is stressing the development of the vocational education sector in India because of the large percentage of youth in the country’s population, with most of them only achieving the education level of a 10th grade standard pass or less. This low level of educational achievement leaves these young people with scant opportunities for employment. The government is tackling this problem by enhancing and developing vocational education in India. In this endeavour, the gov- ernment and many private institutions also see the opportunity to promote education in the tourism and hospitality sector, as, with the boom in both tourism and hospital- ity in India, there is a great need for trained professionals. Vocational education in the tourism and hospitality sector solves two problems at once: the large number of Indian undereducated, underemployed youth and the need for trained tourism and hospitality professionals. Vocational education in the tourism and hospitality sector in India is seen progressing in the departments of food production, food and 3 Vocational Education and Training for Hospitality and Tourism Industry in India 47

­beverage services, bakery and confectionery and travel and tourism, among others. The government is also planning to expand vocational education to new emerging areas which are more specialised and catering for special interest tourism activities and services and modern, environmentally friendly hospitality services.

References

Airey, D. (2005). Growth and development. In D. Airey & J. Tribe (Eds.), An international hand- book of tourism education (pp. 13–24). Oxford, UK: Elsevier. Airey, D., & Tribe, J. (2000). Education for hospitality. In C. Lashley & A. Morrison (Eds.), Search of hospitality: Theoretical perspectives and debates (pp. 285–297). Oxford, UK: Butterworth-Heinemann. Bansal, S. P. (2006). Tourism education in India: A qualitative and quantitative analysis. In D. S. Bharadwaj, K. K. Kamra, & M. Chaudhary (Eds.), Tourism education: An emerging essential (pp. 63–84). New Delhi, India: Kanishka Publishers. Biswakarma, G. (2016). Relationship of tourism academic, employability abilities & skills and human resource development in Nepalese tourism industry. International Journal of Research in Business Studies and Management, 3(2), 20–35. Chand, M., & Dahiya, A. (2008). Hospitality education and advisory committees in Indian uni- versities: An analysis of academic success. Asian Journal of Transfusion Science, 3, 115–128. Daniel, A., Costa, R., Pita, M., & Costa, C. (2017). Tourism education: What about entrepreneurial skills? Journal of Hospitality and Tourism Management, 30, 65–72. Dewra, S. (n.d.). Top institutions of hospitality and tourism management educa- tion in India. Retrieved January 19, 2018, from https://www.careerguide.com/ask/t/ top-institutions-of-hospitality-and-tourism-management-education-in-india Duckworth, E. (1964). Piaget rediscovered. The Arithmetic Teacher, 11(7), 496–499. Government of India. (2014). Demand responsive vocational training. New Delhi, India: Directorate General of Employment and Training, Ministry of Labour & Employment. Government of India. (2015). Skill development in India. New Delhi, India: Konrad Adenauer Stiftung and Federation of Indian Chambers of Commerce and Industry. Retrieved August 26, 2017, from http://www.kas.de/wf/doc/kas_42848-1522-2-30.pdf?151016072126 Indira Gandhi National Open University. (2017). School of Tourism and Hospitality Service Management (SOTHSM): Introduction. Retrieved January 26, 2018, from http://www.ignou. ac.in/ignou/aboutignou/school/sothssm/introduction Infrastructure Development Finance Company. (2013). India infrastructure report 2012: Private sector in education. New Delhi, India: Routledge. Inui, Y., Wheeler, D., & Lankford, S. (2006). Rethinking tourism education: What should schools teach. Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sport and Tourism Education, 5(2), 35–36. Jithendran, K. J., & Baum, T. (2000). Human resources development and sustainability: The case of Indian tourism. International Journal of Tourism Research, 2, 403–421. Kaushik, K. (2014). Vocational education in India. International Journal of Education and Information Studies, 4(1), 55–58. Klynveld Peat Marwick Goerdeler. (2016). India soars higher [Report]. India: Author. Retrieved August 10, 2017, from https://home.kpmg.com/in/en/home/insights/2018/01/make-in-india- soars-ease-of-doing-business-fdi.html Kukreti, M. (2007). Determining the responsibility for quality HR development in tourism sector. In S. C. Bagri, S. K. Gupta, & R. K. Dhodi (Eds.), HRD practices in travel & tourism sector (pp. 69–85). Dehradun, India: Winsar Publishing House. Kumar, A. (2017). What is the percentage of youth in India. Retrieved January 10, 2018, from https://www.quora.com/What-is-percentage-of-youth-in-India 48 S. K. Dixit and H. Mawroh

Kumar, M. (2014). Hospitality education in India: Present status, challenges and opportunities. African Journal of Hospitality, Tourism and Leisure, 3(2), 1–12. Ladkin, A. (2005). Careers and employment. In D. Airey & J. Tribe (Eds.), An international hand- book of tourism education (pp. 437–450). Oxford, UK: Elsevier. List of hospitality tourism colleges in India. (n.d.). In Careers 360: A career is a life. Retrieved January 19, 2018, from https://hospitality.careers360.com/colleges/ list-of-hospitality-tourism-colleges-in-India?page=1&sort_filter=pop Mehrotra, S., Raman, R., Kalaiyarasan, & Kumra, N. (2014). Vocational education and training reform in India: Learning from good practices at home and abroad, IAMR Report No. 1/2014. New Delhi, India: Institute of Applied Manpower Research. Morgan, J. (2004). From production line to drama school: Higher education for the future of tour- ism. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 16(2), 91–99. National Skill Development Corporation India. (2017). About us. Retrieved August 18, 2017, from https://www.nsdcindia.org/about-us Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development. (2016). OECD tourism trends and policies 2016. Paris: OECD Publishing Retrieved June 7, 2017, from https://www.oecd.org/ industry/tourism/Tourism2016-Highlights_Web_Final.pdf Singh, S. (1997). Developing human resources for the tourism industry with reference to India. Tourism Management, 18(5), 299–306. Singh, S., & Singh, T. V. (2005). India. In D. Airey & J. Tribe (Eds.), An international handbook of tourism education (pp. 191–210). Oxford, UK: Elsevier. Singh, T. V. (1975). Tourism and tourist industry of U.P. New Delhi, India: New Heights. Skill Development Bureau. (2015). Academic equivalence. New Delhi, India: University Grants Commission Retrieved August 15, 2017, from http://www.ugc.ac.in/skill/Academic_equiva- lance.html Tribe, J. (2001). Research paradigms and the tourism curriculum. Journal of Travel Research, 39, 442–448. Tribe, J. (2002). The philosophic practitioner. Annals of Tourism Research, 29, 338–357. University Grants Commission, India. (n.d.). Guidelines for introduction of Bachelor of Vocation (B.Voc.) programme in universities and colleges under the National Skills Qualifications Framework (NSQF). Retrieved August 18, 2017, from https://www.ugc.ac.in/ pdfnews/8083296_B-Vocation-ver-0.4-Final.pdf World Travel & Tourism Council. (2015). Global talent trends and issues for the travel & tourism sector [Report]. London: Author. Retrieved August 10, 2017, from https://www.wttc.org/-/med ia/382bb1e90c374262bc951226a6618201.ashx Yunis, E. (2009, March 30–April 2). World Tourism Organization statistics and tourism satellite account. Paper presented at the 5th UNWTO International Conference on Tourism Statistics, Tourism: An Engine for Employment Creation, Bali, Indonesia. Chapter 4 Situation Analysis of Tourism and Hospitality Management Education in Nepal

Brijesh Thapa and Smrittee Kala Panta

Abstract Tourism is a major industry in Nepal and is viewed as a tool for economic development especially in rural regions that depend on parks and protected areas. The country’s natural and cultural resources are major assets that further develop and promote tourism, but the lack of skilled human resources remains as a major barrier. There is a critical need to prepare individuals to become leaders, decision-­ makers and entrepreneurs in the private and public sectors. Tourism and hospitality management education is a new field and gaining in importance as various institu- tions become involved in training and degree programmes. The purpose of the research described in this chapter was to conduct a situational analysis of tourism and hospitality management education in Nepal based on four categories: availabil- ity, affordability, accessibility and accountability. Thematic analysis was used to explore the educational content, skills and employment prospects for human resource development. The analysis revealed that formal education, training and capacity-building programmes in Nepal were limited to a small number of higher-­ education institutions with restricted enrolment quotas, located in only a few cities. Also, programmes were largely offered by private institutions, which limited acces- sibility and affordability for poor and marginalised individuals, notably in rural areas. A system for national quality assessment, accreditation and standardisation of curricula was absent. In such a context, coordination between the national govern- ment, tourism industry and academic institutions for modification of curricula and training could aid in building and strengthening the human resources that will be necessary to meet Nepal’s goals for tourism development.

Keywords Tourism · Soft infrastructure · Education · Vocational training · Nepal

B. Thapa (*) · S. K. Panta Department of Tourism, Recreation & Sport Management, University of Florida, Gainesville, FL, USA e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 49 C. Liu, H. Schänzel (eds.), Tourism Education and Asia, Perspectives on Asian Tourism, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4_4 50 B. Thapa and S. K. Panta

4.1 Introduction

Tourism is a dynamic phenomenon that stimulates wider socio-economic and envi- ronmental changes in the destination (Liu & Wall, 2006; Stone & Nyaupane, 2016). Tourism in today’s globalised world has become a sophisticated and complex sys- tem, with benefits beyond the creation of low-skilled jobs (Baum, 2015). The grow- ing tourism industry demands both professional employees and employers with managerial, technical and vocational skills (Baum, 2015; Ruhanen & Cooper, 2009; Thapa, 2012; Zagonari, 2009). While tourism is considered an applied discipline, higher education aims to develop world-class leaders with critical thinking along with relevant managerial skills that can promote the sustainability of the tourism system (Airey, Tribe, Benckendorff, & Xiao, 2015; Inui, Wheeler, & Lankford, 2006; Tribe, 2002). Additionally, researchers advocate the embedding of five values within tourism education: ethics, mutuality, stewardship, knowledge and profes- sionalism (Sheldon, Fesenmaier, & Tribe, 2011). The integration of such values within tourism education and training curricula could enhance the quality of human resources. However, as curriculum design is influenced by multiple stakeholders with different priorities and competing interests, educational institutions struggle to produce graduates and trainees that can respond to the changing needs of the indus- try (Baum, 2015). In the case of least developed and developing countries, the tourism and hospital- ity management sector is viewed as a vehicle for socio-economic development (Telfer & Sharpley, 2015). In addition, given the projected prospects for future tour- ist influxes, policies and resources for hard and soft infrastructure development will be critical to manage and sustain growth. Soft infrastructure refers to the human resources necessary to provide quality services to tourists and support tourism development (Thapa, 2012). In the Asia-Pacific region, international tourist arrivals are increasing, and visitor exports are expected to grow by 4.4% per annum from 2017 to 2027 (United Nations World Tourism Organisation [UNWTO], 2017). The least developed countries (LDC) within this region receive a smaller proportion of tourism arrivals and receipts, despite their unique attractions. Moreover, the contri- bution of travel and tourism to LDC’s employment and GDP remains significantly low (World Travel & Tourism Council [WTTC], 2017). Structural constraints in these countries limit tourism-induced development, most notably in the lack of a skilled labour force, which has long been an impediment for tourism development (Liu & Wall, 2005; Shakeela, Breakey, & Ruhanen, 2012; Sharpley, 2009; Thapa, 2012). Tourism is a labour-intensive industry where success depends heavily on the quality of services and experiences offered to visitors. The significance of preparing professionals with relevant training and education cannot be understated (Foster, McCabe, & Dewhurst, 2010; Liu & Wall, 2005; Shakeela et al., 2012). With rapid advances in technology and globalisation, the nature of work in the tourism and hospitality sector is changing (Baum, 2007, 2015). There is an urgent need to develop human capital and ensure tourism’s positive multiplier effect in the local 4 Situation Analysis of Tourism and Hospitality Management Education in Nepal 51 and national economies of LDCs in Asia and beyond (Liu & Wall, 2005, 2006; Thapa, 2012). Tourism and hospitality management education and training is in its infancy in many developing countries. Additionally, the curricula for higher education and training in tourism are inadequate (Manwa, Chipfuva, & Mahachi, 2011; Mayaka & Akama, 2007; Pandey, 2011) and have been found to focus more on vocational aspects than on managerial and knowledge-based learning (Kaplan, 2004; Liu & Wall, 2006; Shakeela et al., 2012). This aspect is to be expected, since vocational training provides transferable skills for immediate employment within a short period of time (Thapa, 2012; Zagonari, 2009). Assessing the current state of higher education and training is the first step in planning for improved human resource development (Gu, Kavanaugh, & Cong, 2007; Semrad, Donohoe, Thapa, Tasci, & Stepchenkova, 2012; Stepchenkova, Lane, Pennington-Gray, & Thapa, 2011). In the context of developing countries, Thapa proposed four categories – referred to as 4As – within which to identify existing gaps in human capital development for the tourism and hospitality industry: availability, affordability, accessibility and accountability. This framework offers a tool for conducting a situational analysis in order to assess the status and issues of tourism and hospitality management educa- tion and training within a country (Thapa, 2012). Utilising the thematic 4As categories, the purpose of this chapter was to conduct a situational analysis of tourism and hospitality management education in Nepal. This examination promotes a timely discussion, as the need to build human resources capacity via education and training has been highlighted by a tourism employment study conducted by the Nepalese government (Ministry of Culture, Tourism & Civil Aviation, 2014). Correspondingly, lack of skilled human resources has also been identified by stakeholders as one of the major barriers faced by the sector. A leading newspaper declares: Hospitality leaders say Nepal will have to produce more than 15,000 skilled manpower over the next five years to cater to the growing demand from the sector. (Prasain, 2013) Currently, Nepal ranks in 99th position among 136 countries with respect to human resources and labour markets in the Travel and Tourism Competitiveness Index (World Economic Forum, 2017). With the additional demands faced by the sector due to a major recent earthquake (April 25, 2015), the need for skilled human resources poses a dire challenge. Concomitantly, the tourism sector has not gener- ated enough jobs, as for every six tourists that visit the country, only one additional job is created (Ministry of Culture, Tourism & Civil Aviation [MoCTCA], 2014). This is very low, compared to other tourism destinations. However, in 2016, the travel and tourism sector generated 427,000 jobs directly, which is expected to increase by 2.9% per annum to 604,000 by 2027 (WTTC, 2017). This has posed both challenges and opportunities to existing higher-education and training institu- tions in Nepal. Based on a literature review and a thematic analysis of current tour- ism and hospitality curricula, this chapter will assess the status of professional tourism education and hospitality management training in Nepal, based on the aforementioned 4As categories (Thapa, 2012). 52 B. Thapa and S. K. Panta

4.1.1 Tourism Context in Nepal

Nepal is a LDC in South Asia and a well-known mountain tourism destination. The majestic Himalayan ranges along with a plethora of wild flora and fauna, cultural diversity, hospitable people and its geographical location between two rapidly developing neighbouring countries (India and China) has placed Nepal at a com- parative advantage (Baral, Hazen, & Thapa, 2017; Bhattarai, Conway, & Shrestha, 2005; Nyaupane & Thapa, 2004; Thapa, 2004). Protected areas are the major tour- ism destinations in the country, as 71% of international tourists visit one of its national parks and wildlife reserves (MoCTCA, 2016). However, Nepal’s history of tourism is relatively short as international visitors were only allowed entry into the country in the early 1960s. Tourism growth was sustained for several decades; how- ever, stagnation and a decrease in visitor arrivals have been evident in recent years due to political instability and a decade-long armed domestic insurgency (see Bhandari, 2010; Bhattarai et al., 2005; Thapa, 2004). Although endowed with abundant natural and cultural resources, Nepal ranks 103rd among 136 countries on the Travel and Tourism Competitiveness Index (World Economic Forum, 2017). Tourism is recognised as one of the main sectors that promote sustained growth and development, yet its total contribution to Nepal’s economy is only 7.5% of GDP (Crotti & Misrahi, 2017). Consequently, the govern- ment has formulated a plan ‘Tourism Vision 2020’, which aspires to increase visitor flow to two million (from 753,000 in 2016) and tourism employment to one million jobs by 2020. Tourism Vision 2020 states that ‘Tourism is valued as the major con- tributor to a sustainable Nepal economy, having developed as an attractive, safe, exciting and unique destination through conservation and promotion, leading to equitable distribution of tourism benefits and greater harmony in society’ (MoCTCA, 2009, p. 5). Similarly, the national tourism policy has also emphasised the role of tourism in stimulating socio-economic development and environmental conservation as well as the potential benefits to communities in rural areas (MoCTCA, 2009). The policy further aims to diversify tourism products especially by promoting new tourism destinations and activities through community participation, encouraging private sector involvement and developing integrated tourism infrastructure. Rural tourism, community-based tourism and homestays are particularly given priority in the plan. Despite advocating for homestays as an alternative tourism product (Acharya & Halpenny, 2013), nearly one third of the employees in homestays are unskilled. In addition, while trekking is an important aspect of the industry, it also suffers from an inadequate supply of trained and skilled human resources. Furthermore, employ- ers, especially in the accommodations and airline sectors, perceive the lack of a clear vision or management policy and a shortage of skilled workers as key con- straints to improving the quality of services (MoCTCA, 2014). 4 Situation Analysis of Tourism and Hospitality Management Education in Nepal 53

4.1.2 Institutions for Higher Education and Training in Nepal

Higher education in Nepal was initiated with the establishment of Tribhuvan University in 1959. The country’s sole university until 1990, it is based in the capital city, Kathmandu, but provides wider access via affiliated colleges in various regions of the country (Asian Development Bank [ADB], 2015). Since 1990, six public universities and three medical schools in various regions of the country have come into operation. There has also been a significant increase in the number of private colleges, from 132 in 1988 to over 600 in 2010. The private colleges are all affiliated to one of the major public universities with respect to academic degrees (ADB, 2015). In fact, the majority of the country’s higher-education students are enrolled in different colleges either in branch campuses or affiliated to the oldest and largest university, Tribhuvan University. The total combined enrolment among public uni- versities and affiliated units is approximately 450,000 students (ADB, 2015). Universities in Nepal are self-governing autonomous bodies under the monitor- ing and regulation of the Ministry of Education and the University Grants Commission. Each institution has a university council, executive council, academic council and faculties. Although about 65,000 students graduate annually, the role of higher education as compared to primary and secondary level education in eco- nomic growth (GDP) is significantly low (Nowak & Dahal, 2016). Moreover, the educational system faces major challenges such as equality of access, quality, gov- ernance and innovation capacity (ADB, 2015). Also, the curricula in higher educa- tion institutions have been developed with a traditional discipline-centric approach, rather than cross-disciplinary. In order to supplement higher education with the aim of producing technical and skilled citizens, the Council for Technical Education and Vocational Training (CTEVT) was established in 1989. CTEVT is a national-level, autonomous body composed of a council chaired by the Minister of Education. Its main functions are to formulate policy, prepare curricula, control quality and assess training needs. CTEVT has been the primary centre for providing short-term training, diploma and certificate level courses in various disciplines. It has networks across the country through its 17 institutes and 160 affiliated private institutions to award technical school leaving certificate programmes (TSLC) and diploma and certificate level qualifications in disciplines such as agriculture, construction, health, food and dairy technology, tourism and sanitation. The total national enrolment capacity in the CTEVT is about 12,000 (Katuwal, 2011).

4.2 Method

Data collection and analysis involved two phases. In the first phase, secondary sources such as journal articles, reports, organisational web pages and policy docu- ments were reviewed to gain an understanding of the broader context of tourism and 54 B. Thapa and S. K. Panta human resource development issues. This information was compiled and catego- rised within each of the four questions devised by Thapa (2012, p. 1709): 1. What are the tourism and hospitality training and education programmes being offered? 2. Are the training and education programmes affordable? 3. Are the training and education programmes accessible? 4. Are the training and education programmes accountable? Since this was an exploratory study, a descriptive and thematic approach based on the 4As was conducted for an initial assessment, as the findings could be further utilised to develop specific indicators to monitor and evaluate (Thapa, 2012). In the second phase, a compilation of existing curricula for the bachelor’s degree was con- ducted. Most curriculum information was found within university websites, while more and/or missing information was secured via direct email communications with the appropriate officials. Only degree-based curricula were analysed in this study. Upon receipt of all documents, a thematic analysis of the curricula was conducted. Thematic analysis is a process used in qualitative research to enable and identify key concepts and ideas (see Marshall & Rossman, 1999).

4.3 Findings

4.3.1 Higher Education and Training in Tourism and Hospitality Management

The beginning of a planned effort for human resource development in the hospital- ity and tourism industry was via the establishment of the Nepal Academy of Tourism and Hotel Management (NATHM) in 1972, with technical assistance provided by the United Nations Development Programme/International Labour Organisation. Initially, the emphasis was on providing craft and supervisory-level skills training to generate a capable workforce for the industry; however, it evolved into offering formal education in 1999 – a 3-year bachelor programme in hotel management. Additional options, such as an undergraduate programme in travel and tourism management, began in 2003, with both programmes (tourism and hospitality man- agement) affiliated to Tribhuvan University. Currently, four major universities offer degree programmes in tourism and hos- pitality management. Tourism and hospitality management degree programmes are generally offered under the Faculty of Management (Business Administration) at all universities. The academic programmes at the bachelor and master’s levels encom- pass courses in travel, tourism and hotel and hospitality management. The academic programmes and curricula vary among the universities and are focused on produc- ing middle and upper-management-level employees for the national and interna- tional markets (see Tables 4.1 and 4.2). 4 Situation Analysis of Tourism and Hospitality Management Education in Nepal 55

Table 4.1 Higher education institutions and tourism and hospitality management programmes in Nepal Tourism and hospitality management # of colleges Programme duration Total University programmes affiliated (semesters) credits Tribhuvan Bachelor in Travel and Tourism 3 8 126 University Management (BTTM) Bachelor in Hotel Management (BHM) 6 8 120 Bachelor in Mountaineering Studies 0 8 129 (BMS) Masters in Hospitality Management 1 4 63 (MHM) Masters in Travel and Tourism 1 4 63 Management (MTTM) Kathmandu Bachelor in Hospitality and Tourism 2 8 132 University Management (BHTM) Purbanchal Bachelor in Travel and Tourism Studies 1 6 117 University (BTTS) Bachelor in Hotel Management (BHM) 6 8 123 Bachelor in Hospitality and Catering 1 8 138 Management (BHCM) Master in Tourism Studies (MTS) 1 4 66 Pokhara Bachelor in Business Administration – 1 8 123 University Travel and Tourism (BBA-TT) Bachelor in Hotel Management (BHM) 5 8 122

Table 4.2 Course titles in tourism and hospitality management programmes in Nepal Covered frequently (≥2 universities) Covered less frequently (<2 universities) Fundamentals of travel & tourism Contemporary issues in travel & tourism Tourism economics Tourism in Nepal Travel services operations management Ecotourism Airlines operations management Sustainable tourism development Hospitality accounting Alternative forms of tourism Hospitality management Tourism product development Tourism marketing Event management Tourism geography Cultural heritage and religion tourism Tourism policy, planning and development Tourism and environment Destination development management Entrepreneurship in travel and tourism Entrepreneurship Languages (English, French) Tourism legislation Mountain tourism Airlines operations management E-tourism Air cargo operations Crisis and disaster management Computer applications in tourism Nepalese society and culture Research methods and statistics Intercultural communications Languages (English) 56 B. Thapa and S. K. Panta

In the case of vocational education, only a few tourism and hospitality manage- ment programmes are offered by CTEVT: TSLC in culinary arts, TSLC in hotel management and diploma in hotel management. The duration of the TSLC pro- gramme is 15 months including 3 months of on-the-job training. The TSLC pro- gramme aims to produce entry-level human resources for the hospitality sector. Apart from this, short-course training is also offered in commercial cooking/baking, waiter/waitressing and saving and credit mobilising. The 3-year diploma in hotel management is offered by only 2 constituent institutions with an established enrol- ment quota of 80 and 1 partnership institution with a quota for 40 under CTEVT’s supervision. The cost for this diploma programme is NRs. 84,100 (US$1 = NRs.105, approximately US$800) with scholarships offered to women and other marginalised groups based on merit and socio-economic qualifications (CTEVT, 2017). Short (weeks/months) courses are also offered by private tourism and hospitality colleges in different parts of the country with varying fees. Such colleges provide short-term training based on topics in demand by the private and public sectors. Given the importance of mountaineering and adventure tourism, government organ- isations, namely, Nepal Mountain Academy and NATHM, provide specialised ­training to produce skilled citizens for certain jobs (e.g. mountain and trekking guides). National parks and other conservation organisations frequently organise nature-­guide, cooking and language training in their adjacent communities. Additionally, non-governmental organisations (NGOs) are also periodically involved in capacity-­building programmes for local people by offering short courses. It has been suggested that training needs to be oriented towards rural tourism with timely revisions responding to the changing needs of stakeholders. Collectively, the training offered and delivered by different organisations can be categorised into six groups (Pandey, 2011): 1. Trekking, mountaineering and tour guide 2. Travel/tour and hospitality management 3. Food/lodge (accommodation) services 4. Destination planning, development and management 5. Tourism interpretation, promotion and marketing 6. Enterprise/entrepreneurship/leadership development and management Finally, given the separation of higher education from skill-based training in the country, an initiative to combine both aspects was advocated and implemented. In 2002, the Nepal Mountain Academy (http://www.man.gov.np) was established as a centre for research and teaching on mountaineering and tourism. This centre is unique as it brings together industry professionals and representatives from various government ministries (i.e. education, tourism, science and technology, national planning commission and finance) under one platform. The centre currently ­provides training for trekking guides and is scheduled to offer an undergraduate degree pro- gramme (mountaineering studies) in 2018. 4 Situation Analysis of Tourism and Hospitality Management Education in Nepal 57

4.3.2 Existing Curricula of Tourism Education and Training Programmes at the Global Level

The analysis of curricula for undergraduate programmes in tourism and hospitality management at the global level indicated that course content could be categorised into four major areas: (1) general discipline, (2) tourism/hospitality discipline, (3) specialisation discipline and (4) internship. Under general discipline, core courses were diverse, covering sociology, psychology, economics, organisational behaviour, computer and information technology, food science and nutrition and human resource management. Some variations in degree programmes among universities occurred in terms of types of courses offered and total credit requirements. Also, the tourism curricula required more credits in basic courses than the hotel management programme, which is focused on developing specialised operational skills for hos- pitality management. Furthermore, some of the skill sets that are in high demand within the global industry – such as leadership, integrated communication and tech- nology, marketing and technical writing (Baum, 2007, 2015; Sheldon, Fesenmaier, Woeber, Cooper, & Tribe, 2007; Sigala & Baum, 2003), along with community development, sustainability, entrepreneurship, crisis management, public speaking and communication – could be included to strengthen the curriculum. Similarly, in the tourism/hospitality discipline, core courses consisted of tourism economics, tourism and hospitality accounting, sustainable tourism development, tourism marketing, air travel operations, housekeeping operations, front office oper- ations and food and beverage services. Programmes with an emphasis on hotel and hospitality management aspects required significantly more credits in the curricula than travel and tourism-focused programmes. This reflects academic institutions’ need to impart both operational skills and middle-level managerial knowledge for the former. While a balance between industry-oriented skills and a basic knowledge of the tourism system can create a workforce to fulfil the immediate needs of the industry, this might limit students’ capacity to lead and adapt to a dynamic tourism labour market (Liu & Wall, 2006). The nature of tourism demands multidisciplinary courses that contribute to holis- tic understandings of tourism components and their interrelatedness with the wider society (Horng & Lee, 2005; Inui et al., 2006; Mayaka & Akama, 2007; Sheldon et al., 2007). Courses that are in demand – such as tourism and aviation, tourism for peace and progress, ecotourism, meetings and convention management and event management – are offered as electives under the specialised discipline (ranging from 3 to 18 credits). These courses need to be continually revised based on the changing needs of the national and international tourism and hospitality sectors. The emphasis on internship (practical experience/training) is common across tourism academia worldwide, but caution needs to be taken that the unique contri- bution of the programme compared to vocational education is retained (Zagonari, 2009). Given the importance of practical experience, it was evident that all pro- grammes offered opportunities for experiential learning through internships and projects during the 6th, 7th or 8th semester (3rd and 4th year). The duration varied 58 B. Thapa and S. K. Panta from 4 months to 1 year depending on the university and type of programme. As employers seek to hire an experienced workforce, such provisions in the curriculum make students more employable. The effectiveness of internships and industrial practice can be enhanced if a student’s skill, experience and area of specialisation are matched to their placement (Hawkins & Weiss, 2004; Zagonari, 2009). This matching up requires close partnerships between industry and academic institu- tions, which is still evolving and needs to be further strengthened in Nepal.

4.4 Discussion

Based on the situational analysis of tourism and hospitality management education in Nepal, it is evident that higher education and vocational training are constrained due to general availability, affordability, accessibility and accountability issues. Programmes are offered by few higher education and training institutions, have lim- ited availability and are concentrated in only a small number of cities and regions. This was an expected finding and reflects student demand, as tourism and hospital- ity management education is relatively new. Hence, the programmes are only avail- able in and around major population centres, which creates accessibility issues for those who live outside these urban areas and regions. Additionally, specialised short-term courses are also less accessible to rural citizens as all relevant training institutions are located in four major cities. Also, there are limited enrolment quotas for diploma and TSLC programmes further restricting their accessibility as well as creating competition. Recently, there has been a trend for private institutions and public universities to initiate opportunities for tourism and hospitality management education and train- ing in other underserved areas and regions (e.g. the far-west and mid-west regions). In addition, educational pursuits are relatively affordable, especially in public insti- tutions when compared with higher-education degree programmes in other disci- plines offered by private institutions. Also, training programmes and diploma courses are cheaper than courses in disciplines such as agriculture, health and engi- neering. Furthermore, limited scholarships are available for disadvantaged students. Besides government approval for implementation, a system for national quality assessment, accreditation and the standardisation of curricula is absent in Nepal. Consequently, tourism and hospitality management educational programmes are not held accountable due to the absence of national quality management. This results in inconsistencies in curricula, credits, internship and research requirements and evaluation criteria. Essentially, universities are responsible for monitoring the quality of their programmes as well as for those of affiliated institutions. Quality control management is lacking as well because the universities have not demon- strated their willingness to engage and be effective. This is a serious issue as national standards and quality assurances are vital to ensure consistency between curricula, credits, internship and research requirements and evaluation criteria (see Gu et al., 4 Situation Analysis of Tourism and Hospitality Management Education in Nepal 59

2007; Mayaka & Akama, 2007). Currently, most academic programmes in tourism and hospitality management in Nepal are not uniformly accredited nationally or internationally – hence universities are not accountable due to the absence of national quality standards. Moreover, universities are solely responsible for moni- toring the quality of the curriculum delivery in their affiliated institutions/colleges but are not effective in this role. The current programmes are inadequate for the development of a workforce with the range in vocational skills and intellectual capacity needed for a specialised sec- tor such as ecotourism and other forms of sustainable tourism growth in Nepal. Further, the training needs assessment that should precede the development and delivery of training packages is fundamentally lacking (Pandey, 2011); in-depth research is required for a skills-gap inventory analysis (Foster et al., 2010; Semrad et al., 2012). The noted issues in Nepal are in alignment with various least devel- oped and/or developing countries based on the 4As, along with the lack of any and/ or coherent tourism education policies and resource allocation as part of a national agenda (Liu & Wall, 2006; Manwa et al., 2011; Mayaka & Akama, 2007; Pandey, 2011; Shakeela et al., 2012). However, the opportunities in Nepal can be further capitalised given the important role of tourism for the national economy and employment prospects. The experience of several Asian countries that have wit- nessed major growth in tourism and educational opportunities could be closely reviewed (Gu et al., 2007; Horng & Lee, 2005; Sangpikul, 2009) and replicated and/ or adapted to the Nepalese context. It should be noted that there are several tourism and hospitality management education programmes that operate through an affiliation (joint degree programmes) with external institutions (e.g. the United Kingdom, Austria and Switzerland) and are based in Kathmandu. Such institutions are exempt from the major governmental regulations that are mandatory for institutions that offer the complete degree within the country. Recently, there has been a major growth in such international partner- ships, but these lack quality control and effective monitoring by the government. However, these institutions do have international accreditations, as the final degree is awarded by the partner institution. Additionally, these institutions are located only in Kathmandu and have strict enrolment quotas. Also, they are very expensive in comparison to local institutions and are mainly attended by students from affluent backgrounds.

4.5 Conclusion

This chapter highlights the critical need to invest in reforming tourism education and hospitality management training in Nepal to meet the targets of Tourism Vision 2020. Higher education in tourism and hospitality management is struggling to find a middle ground that can fulfil both the academic and professional human resource needs of the industry. While the recently formulated higher-education policy empha- sises tourism as a priority sector and recommends producing human capital that 60 B. Thapa and S. K. Panta meets the industry needs, some level of incongruence between policy and the educa- tion system is evident. Collectively, coordination between the national government, the tourism industry and academic institutions leading to the revision of Nepal’s curricula and training programmes could aid in building and strengthening the human capital needed to meet the country’s tourism development goals. More specifically, the human resource division under the Department of Tourism (Ministry of Culture, Tourism and Civil Aviation) could take a leadership role. For example, the findings of this study offer an initial assessment with regard to the status of educational content, skills and employment prospects for human resource development. Since this is the first basic evaluation, its findings can be built upon through additional assessments (e.g. a skills-gap inventory, policy review and pri- mary survey data) and used to facilitate collaboration among national tourism stake- holders. Some practical strategies that could be used to address the issues in Nepal are as follows: • Establish a national-level tourism council for human resource planning and development. • Liaise between government, industry, NGOs and private and public education institutions to create diverse opportunities for relevant curriculum development and training programmes. • Create a feedback loop between industry, government and academic institutions. • Create quality assurance and an educational accreditation board for this sector. • Enhance student experiential learning and industry engagement. • Increase accessibility through distant learning (online) programmes. • Increase international exposure through student exchange and study-abroad programmes.

References

Acharya, B. P., & Halpenny, E. A. (2013). Homestays as an alternative tourism product for sus- tainable community development: A case study of women-managed tourism product in rural Nepal. Tourism Planning & Development, 10(4), 367–387. Airey, D., Tribe, J., Benckendorff, P., & Xiao, H. (2015). The managerial gaze: The long tail of tourism education and research. Journal of Travel Research, 54(2), 139–151. Asian Development Bank. (2015). In Asian Development Bank (Ed.), Innovative strategies in higher education for accelerated human resource development in South Asia: Nepal. Mandaluyong City, Manila, Philippines. Baral, N., Hazen, H., & Thapa, B. (2017). Visitor perceptions of World Heritage values at Sagarmatha (Mt. Everest) National Park, Nepal. Journal of Sustainable Tourism, 25(10), 1494–1512. Baum, T. (2007). Human resources in tourism: Still waiting for change. Tourism Management, 28(6), 1383–1399. Baum, T. (2015). Human resources in tourism: Still waiting for change? – A 2015 reprise. Tourism Management, 50, 204–212. 4 Situation Analysis of Tourism and Hospitality Management Education in Nepal 61

Bhandari, K. (2010). Tourism in Nepal: Post-monarchy challenges. Journal of Tourism and Cultural Change, 8(1–2), 69–83. Bhattarai, K., Conway, D., & Shrestha, N. (2005). Tourism, terrorism and turmoil in Nepal. Annals of Tourism Research, 32(3), 669–688. Council for Technical Education and Vocational Training. (2017). Diploma curriculum. Retrieved October 8, 2017, from http://ctevt.org.np/page.php?page=568 Crotti, R., & Misrahi, T. (2017). The travel and tourism competitiveness index 2017. In Travel and tourism competitiveness report: Paving the way for a more sustainable and inclusive future (pp. 3–33). Geneva, Switzerland: World Economic Forum. Retrieved from http://www3.wefo- rum.org/docs/WEF_TTCR_2017_web_0401.pdf Foster, C., McCabe, S., & Dewhurst, H. (2010). Management development skills in the hospital- ity and tourism sector: Needs and issues from a regional perspective. Tourism Planning & Development, 7(4), 429–445. Gu, H., Kavanaugh, R. R., & Cong, Y. (2007). Empirical studies of tourism education in China. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 7(1), 3–24. Hawkins, D. E., & Weiss, B. L. (2004). Experiential education in graduate tourism studies: An international consulting practicum. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 4(3), 1–29. Horng, J., & Lee, M. (2005). Tourism and hospitality higher education in Taiwan: Past, present, and future. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 5(3), 167–196. Inui, Y., Wheeler, D., & Lankford, S. (2006). Rethinking tourism education: What should schools teach? Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sport & Tourism Education, 5(2), 25–35. Kaplan, L. (2004). Skills development in tourism: South Africa’s tourism-led development strat- egy. Geo Journal, 60(3), 217–227. Katuwal, S. B. (2011). Global financial crisis and higher education in Nepal. International Journal of Business Management, Economics and Information Technology, 3(1), 39–45. Liu, A., & Wall, G. (2005). Human resources development in China. Annals of Tourism Research, 32(3), 689–710. Liu, A., & Wall, G. (2006). Planning tourism employment: A developing country perspective. Tourism Management, 27(1), 159–170. Manwa, H., Chipfuva, T., & Mahachi, D. (2011). Tourism education in Botswana: A contested issue. Journal of Tourism, 12, 1–22. Marshall, C., & Rossman, B. (1999). Designing qualitative research (3rd ed.). London: Sage. Mayaka, M., & Akama, J. S. (2007). Systems approach to tourism training and education: The Kenyan case study. Tourism Management, 28(1), 298–306. Ministry of Culture, Tourism & Civil Aviation. (2009). Tourism vision 2020. Retrieved October 5, 2017, from http://www.tourism.gov.np/downloadfile/1Tourism-Vision-2020-Final2.pdf Ministry of Culture, Tourism & Civil Aviation. (2014). Tourism employment survey. Retrieved October 5, 2017, from http://www.tourism.gov.np/downloadfile/Tourism_Employment_ Study_Draft_Report_integrated.pdf Ministry of Culture, Tourism & Civil Aviation. (2016). Nepal tourism statistics. Retrieved October 5, 2017, from http://www.tourism.gov.np/downloadfile/Nepal%20Tourism%20statistic_Final- 2016_1498990228.pdf Nowak, A., & Dahal, G. (2016). The contribution of education to economic growth: Evidence from Nepal. International Journal of Economic Sciences, 5(2), 22–41. Nyaupane, G., & Thapa, B. (2004). Evaluation of ecotourism: A comparative assessment in the Annapurna Conservation Area Project, Nepal. Journal of Ecotourism, 3(1), 20–45. Pandey, R. J. (2011). Capacity building and human resource development initiatives: Community based tourism development in Nepal. Nepal Tourism and Development Review, 1(1), 83–101. Prasain, S. (2013, September 15). A bright future in hospitality management. The Kathmandu Post. Retrieved October 5, 2017, from http://kathmandupost.ekantipur.com/printedition/news/2013- 09-15/a-bright-future-in-hospitality-management.html 62 B. Thapa and S. K. Panta

Ruhanen, L., & Cooper, C. (2009). Tourism labour market in the Asia Pacific region. In Fifth UNWTO international conference on tourism statistics – Tourism: An engine for employment creation. Madrid, Spain: UN World Tourism Organization Retrieved October 1, 2017, from http://sta- tistics.unwto.org/event/techincal-session-session-iv-tourism-labour-market-asia-pacific-region Sangpikul, A. (2009). Internationalization of hospitality and tourism higher education: A perspec- tive from Thailand. Journal of Teaching in Travel and Tourism, 9(1–2), 2–20. Semrad, K., Donohoe, H., Thapa, B., Tasci, A., & Stepchenkova, S. (2012). Educating the next generation of tourism & hospitality managers: What core competencies will a globalized indus- try require from them? In C. Schott & M. Fesenmaier (Eds.), Proceedings from the tourism education futures institute 6th meeting: Transformational leadership for tourism education (pp. 103–107). Milan, Italy. Shakeela, A., Breakey, N., & Ruhanen, L. (2012). Tourism education’s roles in sustainable tour- ism development: A case study of SIDS introduction. Journal of Hospitality and Tourism Education, 24(1), 35–43. Sharpley, R. (2009). Tourism and development challenges in the least developed countries: The case of the Gambia. Current Issues in Tourism, 12(4), 337–358. Sheldon, P. J., Fesenmaier, D. R., & Tribe, J. (2011). The tourism education futures initiative (TEFI): Activating change in tourism education. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 11(1), 2–23. Sheldon, P. J., Fesenmaier, D. R., Woeber, K., Cooper, C., & Tribe, J. (2007). Tourism education futures, 2010–2030: Building the capacity to lead. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 7(3), 61–68. Sigala, M., & Baum, T. (2003). Trends and issues in tourism and hospitality higher education: Visioning the future. Tourism and Hospitality Research, 4(4), 367–376. Stepchenkova, S., Lane, C. W., Pennington-Gray, L., & Thapa, B. (2011). Strategic partner- ship to improve tourism education: University of Florida, USA and the State University of Nizhni Novgorod, Russian Federation. In F. Hummel (Ed.), Proceedings of the 2011 annual International Society of Travel and Tourism Educators (ISTTE) conference (Vol. 23, pp. 265– 272). St. Clair Shores, MI: ISTTE. Stone, M. T., & Nyaupane, G. P. (2016). Protected areas, tourism and community livelihoods link- ages: A comprehensive analysis approach. Journal of Sustainable Tourism, 24(5), 673–693. Telfer, D., & Sharpley, R. (2015). Tourism and development in the developing world (2nd ed.). New York: Routledge. Thapa, B. (2004). Tourism in Nepal: Shangri-La’s troubled times. Journal of Travel & Tourism Marketing, 15(2–3), 117–138. Thapa, B. (2012). Soft-infrastructure in tourism development in developing countries. Annals of Tourism Research, 39(3), 1705–1710. Tribe, J. (2002). The philosophic practitioner. Annals of Tourism Research, 29(2), 338–357. United Nations World Tourism Organisation. (2017). Tourism highlights. Retrieved October 1, 2017, from https://www.e-unwto.org/doi/pdf/10.18111/9789284419029 World Economic Forum. (2017). The travel & tourism competitiveness report: Paving the way for a more sustainable and inclusive future. Retrieved October 1, 2017, from http://www3.wefo- rum.org/docs/WEF_TTCR_2017_web_0401.pdf World Travel & Tourism Council. (2017). Travel and tourism economic impact – Nepal. Retrieved October 1, 2017, from https://www.wttc.org/-/media/files/reports/economic-impact-research/ countries-2017/nepal2017.pdf Zagonari, F. (2009). Balancing tourism education and training. International Journal of Hospitality Management, 28(1), 2–9. Chapter 5 Tourism Higher Education in Iran: Past, Present and Future Directions

Siamak Seyfi, Adel Nikjoo, and Masoud A. Samimi

Abstract This chapter presents an overview of tourism higher education and its structure in Iran and probes challenges facing tourism training in the Iranian higher education system. The study underlines the importance of tourism education in delivering the quality of service that is necessary for Iran, particularly in the wake of a rapid growth of inbound tourism following the relaxation of sanctions in the light of landmark nuclear agreement of 2015 known as the Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action (JCPOA). This study used the documentary survey along with the Delphi technique conducted with 20 stakeholders including tourism academia, practitioners and government representatives as well as current tourism students and graduates to obtain in-depth information describing the challenges facing tourism higher education in Iran along with its future directions. Thematic analysis was then used for the data analysis. The results of the study suggest that without an appropri- ate tourism education policy, along with cooperation between stakeholders and structural reforms in curricula, the desired economic and social benefits of tourism will not be realised. Finally, the study concludes with policy recommendations for overcoming tourism’s higher education challenges and future directions for improv- ing the quality of higher education in tourism in Iran.

Keywords Tourism higher education · Human resource management · Service quality · Developing countries · Delphi technique

S. Seyfi *( ) Pantheon-Sorbonne University, Paris, France e-mail: [email protected] A. Nikjoo · M. A. Samimi Shandiz Institute of Higher Education, Mashhad, Khorasan Razavi, Iran e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 63 C. Liu, H. Schänzel (eds.), Tourism Education and Asia, Perspectives on Asian Tourism, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4_5 64 S. Seyfi et al.

5.1 Introduction

In some service industries, such as travel, tourism and hospitality, the delivery of high-quality services to consumers is increasingly sought as a key factor in con- sumer satisfaction (Attallah, 2015; Baum, 2002; Dhar, 2015) and in the effective- ness and flexibility of the entire company in the competitive global tourism environment (Eraqi, 2006). The contribution of human resources, as reflected in the quality of service and consumer experiences, is a key element in the delivery of a high-quality tourism product (Baum, 2015). Consequently, investment in human resources emerges as a crucial aspect of tourism development. Given the globalisa- tion of the tourism and hospitality industry and its labour-intensive nature (Thompson, 2016), the delivery of quality customer service requires improved training for the workers in both small- and medium-sized (SMEs) and large tourism and hospitality enterprises. It has been argued that tourism education holds the potential to enhance customer satisfaction and also to improve the competitiveness of tourism businesses and regions (Baum, 2012). It has even been asserted that the education of qualified tourism professionals is the most important factor affecting the development of the tourism industry (Du, 2003). While in the developed world, training provision is readily available and well-resourced, in the developing world, facilities, resources and training traditions often remain limited and ineffective (Baum, 2012; Hai-yan & Baum, 2006). In recent decades, the momentum in tourism and hospitality higher education has been accelerating (Airey, 2008), as evidenced by the range and diversity of training programmes available at various levels, especially in countries where tourism has become a major socio-economic phenomenon (Mayaka & Akama, 2007). As tour- ism plays an important role in the sociocultural and economic life of many develop- ing countries (Hall & Page, 2017), tourism education at all levels plays a key role in securing and maintaining sustainable tourism development. Within this context, this chapter focuses on Iran. Unlike other developing countries, where tourism higher education has a relatively long history, tourism higher education in Iran was not developed until 1995 (Ziaee, Saeedi, & Torab Ahmadi, 2012). Yet its growth has been quite rapid since its modest beginning, which is arguably associated in signifi- cant ways with the phenomenal expansion of the country’s tertiary-level educational opportunities in general. With the rapid economic development in Iran after the relaxation of sanctions following the nuclear agreement of July 2015, known as the Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action (JCPOA), the influx of international tourists and businesspersons into this untapped market has increased significantly (Khodadadi, 2016). Iran has long been under sanction for its disputed nuclear programme, its ballistic missiles programme and its human rights violations (Khodadadi, 2016; Morakabati, 2011). In the aftermath of the landmark nuclear deal, and since sanctions were eased, it is anticipated that the growth will continue; in particular, the country is hoping to attract some 20 million tourists by 2020, as called for in its Fifth Five-Year Plan for National Development (Porter, 2015). In 2017, Iran attracted more than five million 5 Tourism Higher Education in Iran: Past, Present and Future Directions 65 international tourists (World Travel & Tourism Council [WTTC], 2017). The major- ity of foreign visitors to Iran have been religious pilgrims (Shia tourists). In Iran there are many Shi’ite Shrines, the two main ones being Imam Reza Shrine in Mashhad and Fatimah al-Ma’sūmah Shrine in Qom. Each year, millions of pilgrims from Shi’ite countries visit these holy places. However, since the softening of sanc- tions in 2015, changing the image of Iran to an emerging tourism destination, the number of western tourists visiting Iran has considerably increased. Given both the tourism development policy in the country and the ongoing attention to Iran as an emerging tourism destination, an analysis of tourism higher education in Iran is long overdue. This chapter commences with a brief commentary on tourism development in Iran. It then turns to address how tourism is shaped in Iranian higher education and discuss the current structure and characteristics of tourism at higher education level in Iran. The latter section of the chapter sheds light on the themes arising from the challenges for the development of contemporary tourism higher education in the Iranian context. Furthermore, implications and prospects for the further develop- ment of tourism higher education in Iran, particularly in the wake of the relaxation of sanctions, are also explored, and recommendations are proposed for tourism planners, educational institutions and tourism establishments.

5.2 Tourism Development in Iran

Iran is located in south-western Asia and covers a land area of more than 1,648,000 km2 with a population in excess of 80 million. Known as Persia until 1935, the country is rich in the history of humanity (with historical and urban settle- ments dating back to more than 5000 BCE) and has a high concentration of archaeo- logical sites (Zendeh Del, 2001). Iran’s location at the intersection of major Asian, Middle Eastern and European countries and trade routes (e.g. the Silk Road) has shaped its diverse cultures and history (Alavi & Yasin, 2000). There are thousands of historical places in Iran, and many are yet to be discovered. As of early 2018, 21 historical sites and 1 natural site are listed under the UNESCO World Heritage list, while 56 more sites are tentatively listed (UNESCO, 2018). According to O’Gorman, McLellan and Baum (2007), Iran’s archaeology, cultural heritage, traditions and natural characteristics are among the main factors attracting inbound tourists. Moreover, Iran is one of the world’s foremost oil producers, and oil along with gas accounts for over 80% of its export earnings, indicative of a heavy reliance on hydrocarbons, which has resulted in efforts at diversification (Cordesman,2016 ). Although the ancient Zoroastrian religion originated in Iran, the country is mainly known as a centre for Shia pilgrimage in terms of religious tourism (Zamani-­ Farahani & Henderson, 2011). Moreover, the tourism sector in the country benefits from substantial domestic demand (Ghaderi, 2011). Despite this wealth of tourism resources, Iran has failed to gain a comparable share of the world tourism industry, especially when compared with similar countries in the region. 66 S. Seyfi et al.

Although Iran was considered to be the Middle East’s top tourist destination dur- ing the period 1967–1977 (Morakabati, 2011), in the post-1979 era after the Islamic Revolution of Iran, the aftermath of the Iran-Iraqi war and nuclear dispute, interna- tional travel to Iran was substantially restricted. However, Iran’s negative image in many countries disguises its long history of tourism and its rich cultural and natural heritage. The Iranian tourism industry, despite enormous potential, has therefore suffered severely over the past three decades; its challenges include negative imag- ery in tourism-generating markets, political tensions with the West as a result of Iran’s nuclear programme and human rights issues, over-reliance on oil revenues, political instability and conflicts in the Middle East region and poor management (Baum & O’Gorman, 2010; Ghaderi & Henderson, 2012; Khodadadi, 2016; Khodadadi & O’Donnell, 2015; Morakabati, 2011). Strengthening inbound tourism and its role as an economic and cultural pursuit has been a common goal favoured by various state systems and administrations in Modern Iran. During the Pahlavi monarchy, in the wake of strengthening relations with the West and particularly the USA, tourism was considered as an important strategy for introducing Iranian history and culture. In this period, Western Europe and North America were Iran’s most important tourism markets. With the increase of inbound tourism, tourism facilities and services along with the first tourism master plan were developed. However, the steady development of tourism and the increasing flow of visitors were interrupted by the Islamic Revolution in 1979 and the establishment of the theocratic Islamic Republic in its aftermath (Bahaee & Pisani, 2009). Consequently, inbound tourism faced a sharp decline, and the industry experienced significant negative socio-economic impacts as a result of the dramatic change in the political system from a monarchy to an Islamic Republic. Following the lifting and softening of sanctions on Iran by western countries, the country is attempting to leave behind years of conflict and international isolation and to turn itself into an emerging tourist destination. According to the WTTC (2017), the direct contribu- tion of the travel and tourism industry to Iran’s GDP was approximately USD 11.9 billion (2.9% of total GDP) in 2016, and it is expected to rise to USD 16.6 bil- lion (7.5% of total GDP) by 2027. With the increasing focus on the development of the tourism industry in the country following the nuclear accord, its expansion is likely to create further employment. In order for Iran to penetrate the global tourism market and obtain a bigger slice of this growing industry, the country needs to improve the quality of its tourism and hospitality services. Given the intensifying, constantly changing and competitive tourism environment, it is critical to under- stand human resource training issues in the Iranian tourism industry. This knowl- edge would be helpful in identifying the major issues relating to the delivery and provision of professional training and higher education in tourism, as the develop- ment of human resources can create lasting competitive advantages. 5 Tourism Higher Education in Iran: Past, Present and Future Directions 67

5.3 History of Tourism Higher Education in Iran

The developmental history of tourism education varies according to the character of the sponsoring institution and the education and tourism industry framework sup- porting it (Baum & Devine, 2007).The origin of tourism education in the Iranian context traces back to the 1930s and the establishment of the Jalbe-Sayahan tourism office (Ziaee et al., 2012). One of the most important measures of the pre-­ revolutionary period was the establishment of the Hospitality Management Higher School in 1963 and the Hotel Management School in 1966. In 1970, Iran’s Educational Centre of Tourism Organisation signed a cooperation agreement with the International Labour Organisation (ILO) with the aim of recruiting international tourism and hospitality experts to train local employees working in hotels, as well as revising the training plan for tourism services. Following this agreement, in 1971, a hospitality school was temporarily founded in Shiraz in order to train the city’s hotel employees. In that year, the Higher Institute of Tourism Services was founded by the Iran Ministry of Intelligence and Tourism. In 1975, the first group of 25 hos- pitality instructors and distinguished graduates was sent to Italy for a 3-month internship. There was significant growth of provision for tourism in both further and higher education after the Islamic Revolution in 1979 (Ziaee, 2004). At the higher education level, the first tourism undergraduate programme was offered in 1995 and the first graduate programme in 2004, along with a hospitality undergraduate pro- gramme in the same year at the Allameh Tabataba’i University (ATU) in Tehran. Since then, there has been a substantial increase in the number of universities and colleges offering tourism programmes. Starting from 1995, ATU has played a key role in tourism higher education in Iran. The professors of this university as well as the first graduates contributed to Iranian tourism higher education and the national tourism literature, although their writings were generally published in Persian in national journals and comprised conceptual work on tourism economics, tourism development and planning, mar- keting and human resources (Farzin, 2005; Kazemi, 2004; Zahedi, 2006; Zargam, 2004). Starting from the late 1990s and early 2000s, other universities and higher education institutes began offering undergraduate and graduate degree programmes in tourism. At the graduate level, following the first graduate programme in tourism marketing in 2004, new subjects such as ‘Ecotourism’ and ‘Religious Tourism’ have also been offered over recent years. The first PhD programme in tourism was offered by the ATU and the University of Science and Culture in 2012. The develop- ment of tourism in Iran along with the shortage of qualified staff for lower, middle and senior positions in tourism organisations led to a further increase in demand for degree programmes in the field. Coinciding with this trend, vocational training insti- tutes and private universities were founded to further expand higher education. Along with some positive and promising outcomes, the opening of so many pro- grammes has resulted in a number of problems and challenges that will be examined in this chapter. 68 S. Seyfi et al.

5.4 The Current Status, Structure, Characteristics and Trends in Iranian Tourism Education

Tourism programmes at higher education institutions in Iran have been offered over the past two decades and have been developed in an effort to comply with the tour- ism industry’s growth and labour demands (Heydari Chianeh, Nasrollahzadeh, & Abdollahi, 2012). There are three levels of tourism education offered at Iranian universities and higher education institutions: 2-year associate degrees, 4-year bachelor degrees and two postgraduate (master’s and PhD) degrees. Tables 5.1 and 5.2 provide some statistical data on the number of students studying tourism at postgraduate level at higher education institutions in Iran. The 2-year associate degree programmes aim to provide graduates for lower and middle management-level positions in tourism and hospitality organisations and are offered at universities as well as vocational schools. There are no precise published statistics about the total number of associate degree students in Iran. However, by 2016, it is estimated that more than 6000 students were studying on 2-year associate degree programmes (Ministry of Science, Research and Technology of Iran [MSRT], 2018). Secondary school graduates are required to pass the national university entrance exams conducted by the National Organisation of Educational Testing (Sazman-e Sanjesh-e Amuzesh-e Keshvar) every June if they want to continue their education in state universities. Students who want to study in private universities like Islamic Azad University and the University of Applied Science and Technology are exempted from passing the national entrance exams. The students can be selected based on their performance in high school. However, they need to pay for tuition and other expenses. Generally, the curriculum in these 2-year programmes consists of four major fields: general requirements, basic courses, major and specialised courses and internships. Some programmes specialise in certain areas, such as tour- ism services, but most of the associate degree programmes have a broad and general focus on tourism management. An associate degree (Kardani) is awarded after the

Table 5.1 Tourism disciplines with master’s programmes and number of students enrolled in 2016 No of No of % of total tourism master’s Discipline universities students students Tourism Marketing 11 197 17.2 Tourism Development 10 167 14.5 Planning Geography and Tourism 26 498 43.4 Planning Ecotourism 11 181 15.7 Religious Tourism 3 60 5.2 Tourism Planning 2 45 4 Total 63 1148 100 Author’s own compilation derived from http://www.sanjesh.org and https://sanjesh2.iau.ac.ir/ 5 Tourism Higher Education in Iran: Past, Present and Future Directions 69

Table 5.2 Universities with No of doctoral programmes in Institution students tourism in 2016 Allameh Tabataba’i University (ATU) 10 University of Science and Culture 7 Total 17 Author’s own compilation derived from http://www. sanjesh.org/ successful completion of a 2-year period of study that normally lasts four semesters (MSRT, 2018). The 4-year degree programmes are designed to prepare students to enter the tour- ism industry at management-level positions and to train them to improve the quality of service. The first school to offer a 4-year degree in tourism was the ATU estab- lished in 1995 in Tehran. The most established tourism programmes are at the ATU, the University of Semnan and the University of Mazandaran. Most of the remaining programmes, particularly in the non-profit universities, have opened over the last decade and are still in the development stage. As a result of the establishment of other similar schools, there are presently more than 30 bachelor degree programmes in tourism and hotel management offered by both public and private universities in Iran. More specifically, 4-year programmes offer education in the areas of tourism management and hospitality management. As of 2016, it is estimated that nearly 5000 students were enrolled in these 4-year tourism degree programmes. Students need to study over 40 subjects and obtain over 132 credits to graduate. A bachelor’s degree (Karshenasi) is awarded after the successful completion of a 4-year period of study that normally lasts eight semesters (MSRT, 2018). The master’s degree programmes offer advanced education to students interested in deepening their knowledge of the tourism industry in order to enter careers in either the industry or education. Generally, two types of students enrol in these pro- grammes: those seeking academic careers at universities and headed for doctoral programmes and those interested in advancing their careers to get a better job in the tourism public or private sector. The first master’s degree programme was launched by the ATU in 2004. For the 2015–2016 academic year, according to the list pro- vided by the National Organisation of Educational Testing, 63 universities offered master’s programmes in tourism-related areas. Table 5.1 presents some statistics about the number of universities offering master’s programmes and the number of students in respective tourism disciplines. There are two types of master’s pro- grammes: those requiring a dissertation and those not requiring a dissertation. The first programme requires 32 credits, while the students in the latter programme are encouraged to pass some seminars instead of completing a dissertation. The aim of these programmes is to develop both senior managers for tourism organisations and academics for tourism programmes. A master’s degree (Karshenasi Arshad) is awarded after the successful completion of a 2-year period of study. State-run uni- versities that offer master’s programmes advertise their quotas for each programme annually through the National Organisation of Educational Testing (MSRT, 2018). 70 S. Seyfi et al.

Doctoral programmes generally provide advanced education to students inter- ested in academic careers or in developing their research skills in order to advance in the private or public tourism sectors. Doctoral programmes in tourism were offered for the first time at the ATU and the University of Science and Culture in Tehran in 2012. For the 2016–2017 academic year, these two universities offered doctoral programmes in tourism. These programmes consist of required and elec- tive courses for 39 credits, a qualifying comprehensive exam, a dissertation pro- posal and a dissertation. The doctoral programmes are normally 4 to 5 years in duration. Compared with the USA, UK and other western countries, the master’s and doctoral dissertations in Iran tend to focus on macro areas of tourism, such as tourism planning, tourism economics, tourism marketing and tourism organisations and their management practices.

5.5 Prospects for Tourism Higher Education in Iran

Formal education plays a critical role in the development of a skilled and competent workforce (Baum, 2015). However, the nature of the tourism industry and its many different kinds of work at a variety of organisational levels requires different types of skills. Therefore, the development of a qualified workforce capable of satisfying all human resource needs in the tourism industry is an extremely challenging task for many countries. ‘Many countries face a problem of matching the suitability of education and training to the needs of the industry, and qualified tourism instructors are in short supply’ (Esichaikul & Baum, 1998, p. 1). These challenges have been addressed by a number of researchers, for instance, in Latin American countries (Pizam, 1999), in China (Qiu Zhang & Wu, 2004), in Turkey (Okumus & Yagci, 2005; Yeşiltaş, Ozturk, & Hemmington, 2010), in Thailand (Chaisawat, 2006), in Israel (Reichel, 2006) and in Cyprus (Katircioğlu, 2010). With respect to Iran, part of the country’s failure to achieve the potential economic and social benefits avail- able to it from tourism is due to the lack of efficient and trained human resources, which has affected product and market development, infrastructure and investment (Heydari Chianeh et al., 2012; Zargam, 2004; Ziaee et al., 2012). Moreover, a large part of the need for human resources is met by staff members who lack the neces- sary skills and expertise (Heydari Chianeh et al., 2012; Khodaee & Kalantari, 2012). According to Ziaee (2004), tourism training programmes conducted by public and private sector departments in Iran still do not have a suitable local model; the skills being taught often do not meet real and predictable conditions and needs. In light of the rapid growth of inbound tourism following the softening of sanc- tions on Iran, and in view of the continuous support from the Rouhani administra- tion in developing the tourism industry as one of the major pillars of Iran’s economy during the post-sanctions era (Mozaffari, Karimian, & Mousavi, 2017), it is expected that tourism in Iran will grow at a rapid pace and the demand for professionally trained people will thus continue to increase over the next decade. With the lifting of sanctions on Iran and the changing image of Iran from a pariah destination into 5 Tourism Higher Education in Iran: Past, Present and Future Directions 71 an emergent destination, alongside the forecast from the WTTC (2017), more opportunities are available for Iranian people who are interested in developing a career in the field of hospitality and tourism. Therefore, the numbers of hospitality and tourism vocational programmes are expected to grow.

5.6 Study Method

A document survey and the Delphi technique were the major research techniques used in this study. Background information was first collected via a survey of Iranian tourism higher education records sourced from various official and unofficial data- bases in both Persian and English languages (e.g. Ministry of Science, National Organisation of Educational Testing and Azad University Testing Organisation). Then, the Delphi technique was employed to obtain in-depth perspectives from 20 tourism stakeholders on the higher education challenges in tourism and hospitality in Iran; stakeholders surveyed included tourism academics, industry practitioners and government representatives as well as current tourism students and graduates. A description of the participants is provided in Table 5.3. Discussions revolved around the following questions: • What gaps exist between the demand and supply of tourism and hospitality workforce training in Iran? • What are the challenges faced in providing effective tourism and hospitality at higher education level in Iran? • What are the future tourism and hospitality higher education needs of Iran and how might they best be met? A thematic analysis – a widely used ‘method for identifying, analyzing and reporting patterns within data’ (Braun & Clarke, 2006, p. 79) – was then used in order to explore the challenges facing tourism higher education in Iran. Seven

Table 5.3 Participants in the Delphi survey Tourism academics Academics from five universities offering higher education tourism programmes plus a representative from the ACECR Institute for Tourism Research Industry practitioners Representatives from associations for hotels, apartment hotels, travel agencies and cafés and restaurants Managers of four- and five-star hotels Managers of large travel agents Government A representative from Iran’s National Tourism Administration (ICHTO) representatives A representative from the Ministry of Science Current tourism Representatives from current tourism undergraduate and graduate students students + two postgraduate students Tourism and Three tourism graduates hospitality alumni 72 S. Seyfi et al. themes emerged, around which the findings are presented in the rest of this section.

5.6.1 Lack of Cooperation Among Tourism Stakeholders

First, there is a lack of cooperation between tourism higher education programmes and the tourism industry in spite of their role as the main supplier to the industry’s labour pool (Hsu, 2005). Tourism programmes at undergraduate level are not diverse enough with only two having a particular focus – one on tourism management and the other on hotel management. However, most curricula are similar and have no differentiating content or requirements. Specialisations, including airlines and travel agency management, food and beverage management and event management, are being neglected in higher education. There is evidence of a lack of communication between tourism enterprises and training institutions, making it difficult for training institutions to encourage students to enhance their learning in a real service environ- ment, such as a hotel. While tourism and hospitality education has a short history in Iran, the lack of qualified professors and trainers, as well as an absence of the required equipment, provides a less-than-ideal education. This lack of cooperation and communication has also resulted in a lack of trust from the private sector towards the graduates due to the fact that they have ineffectual practical knowledge, as the tourism professors in Iran focus mainly on theoretical approaches. Therefore, when new graduates enter a professional working environment, they either fail to make use of what they were taught or they adapt ineffectively to the working situa- tion. As a result, many students have insufficient skills and opportunities to get a job. Greater acknowledgement of the role of stakeholders in the education process may assist the process of adaptation to the rapidly changing environment.

5.6.2 Location

In terms of the location of faculties and departments where tourism programmes in associate degree and undergraduate programmes are offered, most are based either in remote or small cities. The Islamic Azad and Payame Noor universities, as the largest private universities in Iran, have branches in nearly all cities across the coun- try. Although the driving idea was to evenly distribute training across the entire country, the majority of these institutions, as in other developing countries, were opened without any feasibility studies or strategic planning that investigated the appropriateness of locations or the availability of human and financial resources (Okumus & Yagci, 2005). The location of their studies hinders tourism and hospital- ity students in terms of developing and maintaining good connections and working relationships with tourism organisations in their region and in neighbouring regions. 5 Tourism Higher Education in Iran: Past, Present and Future Directions 73

Consequently, the students typically graduate without encountering many tourism and hospitality organisations or domestic and international tourists.

5.6.3 Lack of Qualified Teaching Staff

The lack of qualified teaching staff has been a major problem for all programmes in tourism. In the early days, due to a lack of qualified academics in the field, some academics from other disciplines, particularly from geography, economics, man- agement and linguistics, moved into the tourism field and occupied key positions. The lack of qualified staff in these programmes has had a negative impact on the teaching of practical and hands-on subjects. Moreover, it is also widely known that many of the teaching staff in these tourism-related programmes have no or insuffi- cient working experience in the industry. Moreover, the number of enrolled students and universities’ capacities are not consistent with the number of teaching staff, particularly at graduate levels in private universities.

5.6.4 Insufficient Facilities and Equipment

When many universities decided to offer undergraduate and more recently graduate programmes in tourism, mainly in higher education institutions, the requirements for training facilities and equipment were often ignored or underestimated. The majority of these programmes still face difficulties in providing good training facili- ties and equipment. The main teaching method in all programmes is still purely lectures. It is often the case that practical subjects are taught without any, or with limited, practical hands-on training, due to a lack of equipment and facilities.

5.6.5 Curricula

The curricula for tourism have not been updated since its establishment in 1995. Criticisms had been raised about the curricula used in tourism programmes in higher education. There have been ongoing debates and discussions among academics as well as between academics and industry practitioners about the improvement of the curricula used in tourism degree programmes. At all universities, the medium of instruction is Persian. In addition to English, students are expected to learn a second foreign language (either French or German, but mainly French); however, some essential language skills in keeping with inbound tourism demand (like Arabic or Turkish) are being neglected despite this fact that most of Iran’s international tour- ism market consists of Arabic-speaking religious tourists, mainly Shia tourists 74 S. Seyfi et al. coming from the Middle East along with the Turkish-speaking tourists from Turkey and Azerbaijan. Moreover, the main teaching method, like in other developing countries, is lec- tures presented with limited discussion, and the main assessment method is written exams that often force students to memorise facts and theories rather than to achieve deeper learning by applying, synthesising and evaluating theories and issues (Okumus & Yagci, 2005, p. 109).

5.6.6 Industrial Placements

Students studying tourism in associate degree programmes are required to complete 480 hours of internship as part of their formal training. Many universities and higher education institutions are based in areas far from the main tourism destinations and often face difficulties in building relationships with appropriate tourism organisa- tions in order to arrange students’ industrial placements. Furthermore, the tourism organisations, particularly hotels, often regard students as cheap labour and expect them to work long hours with low wages. Students are not prepared for this, which disappoints both parties. For example, many student interns complain of a poor attitude from managers who do not have formal academic training. Finally, due to resource limitations and unwillingness, it is often difficult for instructors to visit the students during their internships in tourism organisations. A partnership created between the different stakeholders can underpin the achievement of better outcomes in terms of practice-based training needs.

5.6.7 Difficulty Keeping Graduates in the Industry

There is evidence that students who graduate from university tourism programmes often leave the industry for a number of reasons. As stated above, most of the stu- dents choose tourism programmes without having any clear understanding of the working conditions and career paths in the industry. When they start their intern- ships or begin working as full-time employees, tourism organisations do not always treat them well or pay a sufficient salary. These poor working conditions do not help to keep graduates in the industry. At the same time, industry practitioners claim that graduates from tourism programmes lack essential practical skills, language skills and a positive attitude. Because of the above reasons, it is estimated that more than half of the graduates from tourism programmes do not work in the industry after they graduate from associate degree tourism programmes or undergraduate pro- grammes (Ziaee et al., 2012). 5 Tourism Higher Education in Iran: Past, Present and Future Directions 75

5.7 Conclusions and Implications

This chapter has sought to discuss and evaluate the development of and challenges facing tourism higher education in Iran. Based on this discussion, a number of con- clusions can be drawn. Tourism higher education in Iran is undertaken at three lev- els: the associate, bachelor and postgraduate degree levels. As tourism higher education started in 1995, it is still a relatively new phenomenon and has a short history in Iranian higher education. The development of tourism education in Iran has so far been ad hoc and unplanned. Iranian educational institutions have been unable to meet the human resource needs of the tourism industry in terms of either quality or quantity, which has led into an inappropriate development with long-term ramifications. At various levels, the tourism educational institutions have a number of problems that need to be addressed. The 2-year associate degree and bachelor degree pro- grammes are all characterised by insufficient training, equipment and facilities, which are compounded by the lack of alignment between the curriculum and indus- try needs. The postgraduate programmes face problems due to a lack of qualified academic staff, particularly those active in high-quality and internationally recog- nised academic research and publications. Furthermore, the Iranian tourism indus- try is struggling to provide favourable work conditions and appropriate career opportunities for graduates of tourism programmes. At the same time, students who experience harsh work conditions and low-paying jobs even briefly as part of their practical training or internship requirements develop negative attitudes towards long-term employment in the tourism industry. Tourism employers also appear to have negative perceptions of the quality of education provided by tourism schools and believe that tourism instruction is not sufficiently relevant to the industry and does not adequately prepare students to meet industry needs. However, the landmark nuclear accord of July 2015 and the lifting of sanctions on Iran have created a new environment for the development of the tourism industry. This has brought both promising opportunities and unprecedented challenges, and now that the embargoes have been lifted, substantial growth in tourism to and from the country is being experienced. As a consequence of Iran’s rapid growth in inbound tourism, the need to develop required human resources in various segments of the industry has become imperative. It is widely accepted that the education of qualified tourism professionals is the most important factor affecting the develop- ment of the industry. Since higher educational institutions are the main locus of tourism education in Iran, the demand for re-evaluating tourism education in the country and exploring possible ways to further reform and develop it has become an issue of great importance and urgency. In terms of the strategic implementation of tourism product development, tourism education and training institutions should be the catalysts and have a coordinating role with all stakeholders in each region or destination. 76 S. Seyfi et al.

The results of this study conducted with various stakeholders, including tourism teaching staff, industry partners, current students and graduates as well as govern- ment officials, have provided the following recommendations: • Practical industry experience in the form of a more supervised practicum and internship should be integrated into all tourism education as a requirement. Students are likely to develop a greater level of understanding of hospitality and tourism concepts and much-needed work experience during industry engage- ment than through theoretical teaching and learning. • Tourism practitioners and educational institutions should work together closely in order to improve curriculum design and provide proper training, with the aim of aligning tourism curricula with industry needs so that they provide education tailored to meet the needs of the hospitality and tourism industry in terms of the professional skills required. Moreover, this cooperation would facilitate improved internship and practical training programmes that will be mutually beneficial to the industry and students. • Greater awareness needs to be created among students entering into tourism edu- cation regarding the positive and negative aspects of having a career in the tour- ism industry. This can be achieved by establishing a ‘Career Development Department’ within the institution. Improved awareness is likely to eliminate unrealistic expectations regarding a career in tourism and reduce the number of unsuitable and uncommitted students. • Gaining and demonstrating industry experience as well as strong academic train- ing and experience should be indispensable for those involved with teaching in universities and vocational schools. Those lecturers who lack significant industry experience should be encouraged to participate in industrial training programmes as part of their professional development. • The traditional selection process through entrance exams for associate degree and bachelor degrees needs to be restructured to include a personal interview (which is already a requirement for doctoral programmes). The interview can serve as a screening process to select those appropriately motivated candidates whose personality traits would fit the working environment in the tourism indus- try and can be helpful in terms of informing students about industry work condi- tions and career opportunities (Yeşiltaş et al., 2010). • Foreign language education should be a significant part of tourism curricula. In addition to English, a second foreign language should be shifted from French or German to Arabic or Turkish as reflected in the demographic profile of the Iranian inbound market, which are mainly Shia tourists coming to Iran to visit important pilgrimage sites in Mashhad and Qom. • In addition to the traditional classroom delivery mode, e-learning through the Internet and other information technologies should be encouraged. E-learning will allow more student-centred learning rather than faculty-centred instruction. It also encourages interactive discussions involving all students. It can provide more flexibility for students to learn at their own pace and be geared more to the practice of continuous education and lifelong learning. 5 Tourism Higher Education in Iran: Past, Present and Future Directions 77

• In the wake of the lifting of sanctions and a changing relationship with the West, universities in Iran need to fully support involvement in faculty and student exchange programmes with regional or international universities. By doing this, academic staff will have opportunities to build professional relationships with colleagues at academic institutions in other countries; academic staff will gain international experiences that will enrich their lectures, broaden their perspec- tives and ultimately help improve standards at their own institutions; students will gain invaluable experience through student exchange programmes; and by building strong professional and institutional relationships, Iranian academics and educational institutions can improve their international visibility. The findings of the current study contribute to the growing literature on tourism higher education in developing countries. This discussion has been set within the context of the Iranian tourism sector but may also be relevant for other countries at the same stage of development and where similar challenges occur. The findings also provide tourism planners, educational institutions, as well as tourism establish- ments with insights into the resources, attitudes and expertise needed to overcome tourism training challenges at higher education level. Despite the contributions made and the analytical and qualitative approach adopted, the findings of this study should be viewed in light of a number of limitations that also provide opportunities for further research. First, the lack of statistics and appropriate data in some areas of the study could be seen as a limitation of the study. Nevertheless, the researchers attempted to gather all the relevant information available. Some of the data used in this study were mainly collected from secondary sources, such as government reports. The validity of these reports and the information abstracted from them could be questioned. Secondly, as is the case with all qualitative research, the respondents cannot be considered representative of the whole body of tourism aca- demia and industry practitioners. Therefore, further quantitative study is crucial to further validate the results of the study.

References

Airey, D. (2008). Tourism education life begins at 40. Téoros: Revue de recherche en tourisme, 27(1), 27–32. Alavi, J., & Yasin, M. M. (2000). Iran’s tourism potential and market realities: An empirical approach to closing the gap. Journal of Travel & Tourism Marketing, 9(3), 1–22. Attallah, N. F. (2015). Evaluation of perceived service quality provided by tourism establishments in Egypt. Tourism and Hospitality Research, 15(3), 149–160. Bahaee, M., & Pisani, M. J. (2009). Iranian consumer animosity and US products: A witch’s brew or elixir? International Business Review, 18(2), 199–210. Baum, T. (2002). Skills and training for the hospitality sector: A review of issues. Journal of Vocational Education and Training, 54(3), 343–364. Baum, T. (2012). Human resource management in tourism: A small island perspective. International Journal of Culture, Tourism and Hospitality Research, 6(2), 124–132. 78 S. Seyfi et al.

Baum, T. (2015). Human resources in tourism: Still waiting for change? A 2015 reprise. Tourism Management, 50, 204–212. Baum, T., & Devine, F. (2007). Skills and training in the hotel sector: The case of front office employment in Northern Ireland. Tourism and Hospitality Research, 7(3–4), 269–280. Baum, T. G., & O’Gorman, K. D. (2010). Iran or Persia: What’s in a name, the decline and fall of a tourism industry? In W. Suntikul & R. Butler (Eds.), Tourism and political change (pp. 175– 185). Oxford, UK: Goodfellow. Braun, V., & Clarke, V. (2006). Using thematic analysis in psychology. Qualitative Research in Psychology, 3(2), 77–101. Chaisawat, M. (2006). Travel and tourism education in Thailand. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 5(3), 197–224. Cordesman, A. H. (2016). New estimates of Iran’s petroleum exports and income after the nuclear implementation day and reductions in sanctions. Washington, DC: Center for Strategic and International Studies. Retrieved August 27, 2017, from https://www.csis.org/analysis/new- estimates-iran%E2%80%99s-petroleum-exports-and-income-after-nuclear-implementation- day-and-0 Dhar, R. L. (2015). Service quality and the training of employees: The mediating role of organiza- tional commitment. Tourism Management, 46, 419–430. Du, J. (2003). Reforms and development of higher tourism education in China. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 3(1), 103–113. Eraqi, M. I. (2006). Tourism services quality (TourServQual) in Egypt: The viewpoints of external and internal customers. Benchmarking: An International Journal, 13(4), 469–492. Esichaikul, R., & Baum, T. (1998). The case for government involvement in human resource devel- opment: A study of the Thai hotel industry. Tourism Management, 19(4), 359–370. Farzin, M. (2005). Studying the position and fields of activity of tourism cooperatives in the world and Iran [in Persian]. Tourism Studies Journal, 3(8), 1–21. Ghaderi, Z. (2011). Domestic tourism in Iran. Anatolia, 22(2), 278–281. Ghaderi, Z., & Henderson, J. C. (2012). Sustainable rural tourism in Iran: A perspective from Hawraman village. Tourism Management Perspectives, 2, 47–54. Hai-yan, K., & Baum, T. (2006). Skills and work in the hospitality sector: The case of hotel front office employees in China. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 18(6), 509–518. Hall, C. M., & Page, S. (2017). Developing tourism in south and Central Asia. In C. M. Hall & S. Page (Eds.), The Routledge handbook on tourism in Asia (pp. 223–240). Abingdon, UK: Routledge. Heydari Chianeh, R., Nasrollahzadeh, M., & Abdollahi, M. (2012). An evaluation of tourism higher education in Iran based on SWOT model. Tourism Planning and Management, 1(1), 129–152. Hsu, C. (Ed.). (2005). Global tourism higher education: Past, present and future. Binghamton, NY: Haworth. Katircioğlu, S. T. (2010). International tourism, higher education and economic growth: The case of North Cyprus. The World Economy, 33(12), 1955–1972. Kazemi, M. (2004). Investigation of economic and cultural effects of tourism development [in Persian]. Tourism Studies Quarterly, 1(3), 1–16. Khodadadi, M. (2016). A new dawn? The Iran nuclear deal and the future of the Iranian tourism industry. Tourism Management Perspectives, 18, 6–9. Khodadadi, M., & O’Donnell, H. (2015). UK press and tourist discourses of Iran: A study in mul- tiple realities. Leisure Studies, 36(1), 53–64. Khodaee, Z., & Kalantari, H. (2012). Tourism development with emphasis on the role of workforce training [in Persian]. Urban Studies Quarterly, 4(12), 48–59. Mayaka, M., & Akama, J. S. (2007). Systems approach to tourism training and education: The Kenyan case study. Tourism Management, 28(1), 298–306. 5 Tourism Higher Education in Iran: Past, Present and Future Directions 79

Ministry of Science, Research and Technology of Iran. (2018). Full list of tourism disci- plines. [in Persian]. Retrieved January 9, 2018, from https://www.msrt.ir/fa/grid/283 /%D9%84%DB%8C%D8%B3%D8%AA-%DA%A9%D8%A7%D9%85%D9%84- %D8%B1%D8%B4%D8%AA%D9%87-%D9%87%D8%A7?GridSearch%5BpageSize%5D =25&GridSearch%5Bsearch%5D=&page=218&per-page=25 Morakabati, Y. (2011). Deterrents to tourism development in Iran. International Journal of Tourism Research, 13, 103–123. Mozaffari, A., Karimian, R., & Mousavi, S. (2017). The return of the ‘idea of Iran’ (2005–2015). In R. Butler & W. Suntikul (Eds.), Tourism and political change (2nd ed., pp. 186–199). Oxford, UK: Goodfellow Publishers. O’Gorman, K., McLellan, L. R., & Baum, T. (2007). Tourism in Iran: Central control and indige- neity. In R. Butler & T. Hitch (Eds.), Tourism and indigenous peoples: Issues and implications (pp. 251–280). Oxford, UK: Butterworth-Heinemann. Okumus, F., & Yagci, O. (2005). Tourism higher education in Turkey. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 5(1–2), 89–116. Pizam, A. (1999). The state of travel and tourism human resources in Latin America. Tourism Management, 20(5), 575–586. Porter, L. (2015, July 15). Iran hopes to welcome 20 million tourists a year following nuclear deal. The Telegraph. Retrieved August 27, 2017, from https://www.telegraph.co.uk/travel/ destinations/middle-east/iran/articles/Iranians-more-than-eager-to-welcome-tourists/ Qiu Zhang, H., & Wu, E. (2004). Human resources issues facing the hotel and travel industry in China. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 16(7), 424–428. Reichel, A. (2006). Tourism and hospitality higher education in Israel. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 5(1–2), 61–88. Thompson, H. (2016). Tourism demand and wages in a general equilibrium model of production. Tourism Economics, 22(1), 81–91. United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO). (2018). Iran (Islamic Republic of). Retrieved January 9, 2018 from, http://whc.unesco.org/en/ statesparties/ir. World Travel and Tourism Council. (2017). Travel & tourism: Economic impact 2017 Iran. London: Author. Yeşiltaş, M., Ozturk, Y., & Hemmington, N. (2010). Tourism education in Turkey and implications for human resources. Anatolia, 21(1), 55–71. Zahedi, S. S. (2006). Tourism and sustainable development: An environmental perspective [in Persian]. Tourism Studies Journal, 4(11), 1–21. Zamani-Farahani, H., & Henderson, J. C. (2011). Iran: Shia pilgrimage and tourism. In World Tourism Organisation (Ed.), Religious tourism in Asia and the Pacific (pp. 163–174). Madrid, Spain: United Nations World Tourism Organisation. Zargam, H. (2004). Career path and the need for manpower training in the hospitality and tourism industry. Tourism Studies Quarterly, 2(6), 1–18. Zendeh Del, H. (2001). Iran at a glance. Tehran, Iran: Irangardan. Ziaee, M. (2004). Education and human resource condition in tourism segment (emphasis upon Tehran province). Tourism Studies Quarterly, 2(6), 19–37. Ziaee, M., Saeedi, A., & Torab Ahmadi, M. (2012). Exploring the state of tourism in Iran’s higher education (in Persian). Tourism Studies Journal, 7(17), 61–86. Chapter 6 Review and Assessment of Academic Tourism and Hospitality Programmes in China

Andreas H. Zins and Se You Jang

Abstract Over the past 30 years, the Western world has experienced the transition of higher tourism and hospitality education from vocational to a broader social-­ science orientation. This chapter investigates whether this shift away from a narrow focus on employability towards a personal growth and values orientation has mate- rialised in China as well. A content analysis of undergraduate programmes in Chinese colleges and universities is used to identify the variability and emphasis of curricula within the limited autonomy of higher education institutions in China. It emerged that the transparency of programme designs is low, study programmes lack a clear profile and positioning and teaching volume in classrooms is at least 80% higher than the average of bachelor programmes in Western countries. Personal and social skills such as problem-solving, critical thinking, creativity, teamwork and liberal reflection capacities are neglected components. This supply side perspective is complemented by focus group discussions with the HR managers of internation- ally branded hotels in China. Participants considered emotional intelligence, an out- going personality and personal endurance capabilities as more important assets than technical skills. The third empirical study involved the reflections of more than 400 HR managers – mainly from the hospitality industry – on the contribution of broader curricula components to the employability of graduates. These – mainly Chinese – managers most appreciated extended language capabilities and experiences from mindful internships. However, generic personal skills, such as communication, cre- ativity, social responsibility, leadership and reflective, critical thinking, are valued more than specific industry or functional managerial knowledge. Overall, a shift in the perception of the service industry, innovation in new curriculum designs, more transparency and competition as well as higher leadership competencies in the industry will be required to foster a competitive edge for stakeholders, institutions and educational beneficiaries in China.

A. H. Zins (*) · S. Y. Jang Nanjing Tech University Pujiang Institute, MODUL School of Tourism and Hospitality Management, Nanjing, Jiangsu, China e-mail: [email protected]

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 81 C. Liu, H. Schänzel (eds.), Tourism Education and Asia, Perspectives on Asian Tourism, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4_6 82 A. H. Zins and S. Y. Jang

Keywords Curricula structure · Educational insight · Perceptual disparities · Transition · China

6.1 Introduction

In their recent review of research into education in hospitality and tourism, Hsu, Xiao and Chen (2017) screened and summarised a total of 644 articles published in 13 different English-language journals over the period of 2005–2014. The research activities of these publications were grouped into five broad areas: (1) teaching and learning, (2) student development, (3) curriculum and programme, (4) education environment and (5) faculty development. While the authors conclude that many things have changed since Tribe published the seminal article on principles of reor- dering the curriculum of tourism study programmes (2002) and that the hospitality and tourism sector faces new challenges in the meantime, it remains rather unclear whether the reported progress applies to China unequivocally. Tourism development in China has been growing at an astonishing rate for more than 25 years (Gu, Kavanaugh, & Cong, 2007; Lin & Zins, 2016; World Tourism Organisation, 2017). Consequently, China’s higher education (HE) in tourism has expanded at a similarly stunning pace (Bao, 2017; Wang, Huyton, Gao, & Ayres, 2010). Yet international publications on areas of tourism education (cf. Hsu et al., 2017) with a focus on China are 10–20 years old. Over the past 30 years, the Western world has experienced a transition in higher tourism and hospitality education from vocational to a broader social-science orientation. This chapter investigates whether this shift away from a narrow focus on employability towards personal growth and value orientation has materialised in China as well. To contribute to Hsu et al.’s (2017) third research domain of ‘curriculum and programme’ and to update the scarce academic literature with a focus on China, the following research questions (RQ) were developed: RQ 1: In what respects do hospitality and tourism management programmes differ between colleges and universities? RQ 2: Do hospitality and tourism management programmes have much in common or show distinct profiles? RQ 3: What role does skills development and practical training play in these programmes? RQ 4: Do these programmes follow the ideas of a balance between the liberal vs. vocational and action vs. reflection components of a curriculum, as outlined in the vision of ‘the philosophic practitioner’ (Tribe, 2002)? A content analysis of the curricula tables of a sample of undergraduate pro- grammes enabled their structure to be screened against criteria identified in the rel- evant literature, such as subjects regulated by the universities, compulsory internship and practical vs. theoretical courses (e.g. Wang et al., 2010; Zhang, 2005; see Fig. 6.1). 6 Review and Assessment of Academic Tourism and Hospitality Programmes in China 83

• Analysed curriculum contents of tourism and hospitality majors from 20 universities and 20 vocational colleges CONTENT throughout 17 provinces of Mainland China ANALYSIS

• Conducted 2 focus group interviews at Shanghai and Nanjing, China FOCUS GROUP • Expected results for 4 main focus group interview questions INTERVIEW

• Collected 155 survey questionnaires for a complete analysis EMPIRICAL • Derived perceived benefits for employability ANALYSIS

Fig. 6.1 Roadmap of the empirical components of this study

Socially controversial entrepreneurs are often encountered in communities, regardless of nationality or ethnic background. Mr. Li Peiying, a chief of the Beijing Airport holding company, appeared in a Chinese newspaper in 2016 for the embez- zlement of 80.5 million Yuan from a public funds account to repay his gambling debts and a further 26.61 million Yuan used to offer a bribe (Yu & Hong, 2016). When we look at this kind of unconscionable individual antisocial aberration by a business person, we tend to criticise it a lot, rather than find out what is causing this behavioural misconduct. Wondering about the cause of the behaviour immediately raises the question of what kind of education this person has received and how this education may have influenced the individual’s departure from social norms. Ultimately, this questioning leads to the premise that the purpose of education is not only to convey knowledge and skills but also to qualify graduates as responsible and ethical members of a society. Since the supply side perspective of studying curricula content has turned out to be very limited in identifying more general educational goals and value-driven prin- ciples, it was decided to listen to HR managers during focus group discussions first. These focus groups were conceived (1) to gain an understanding of hotel HR man- agers’ needs, motivations or experiences about college or university graduates’ employability and (2) to develop a questionnaire that could be used to quantitatively measure HR managers’ perceptions of college and university graduates’ employability. In view of the lack of curricula-related studies in China with an emphasis on the job market and employability perspective, the following research questions are to be 84 A. H. Zins and S. Y. Jang answered by this third part of the study, contributing to the second broader area of ‘student development’ mentioned above (Hsu et al., 2017): RQ 5: Which curriculum components of bachelor study programmes contribute to what degree to improving the employability of graduates? RQ 6: Are there differences in the perceived benefits of the components between the different programme majors: hospitality vs. tourism management? RQ 7: Are there any recruiter characteristics influencing the employability assess- ment of hospitality and tourism management graduates?

6.2 Literature Review

6.2.1 Sketch of Higher Education Studies

A comprehensive review of the state of higher tourism education in China was pub- lished about 10 years ago (Gu et al., 2007). The authors screened a sample of 67 tourism education institutions in 2004. The history and scale of the programmes, profiles of their students and faculty sociodemographics were topics covered by this empirical study. The article also addressed a couple of current issues related to cur- riculum design and positioning. Penfold, Wei and Ladkin (2012) arrived at similar critical topics in their study about recent developments in China. Their study, in contrast, was based on an assessment of the achievements of one particular institu- tion from the perspective of its students and faculty. Among others, both studies mention the problems related to undergraduate employability and turnover in hotels, the prevailing gateway function to a job in a ‘higher-status’ industry and no lifetime career commitment from graduates and the low attractiveness of jobs in the hotel industry (low rate of hospitality graduates starting their career in the hospitality sector). Other critical issues address the opera- tional and training perspective: practical and technical interests must be integrated into a curriculum (Tribe, 2001), but also business interests dominate overall (Tribe, 2001), too little attention is made to skill development (Lam & Xiao, 2000) and practical training is not sufficiently provided for students. Related to these deficien- cies are aspects in conjunction with the available instructors: limited experience of most of the faculty and limited laboratory facilities (Zhou, 1991), insufficient cur- riculum design and faculty qualifications, lack of international scope and experience of faculty and teaching programme limited to current faculty experience. Gu et al. (2007) have already called for various measures to improve the quality of higher education in hospitality and tourism management in China; among other measures, they ask for more investigation by students, including themes such as ‘mindful managers’ (Moscardo, 1997), critical skills, reflective practice (Schön, 1983) and liberal reflection (Gross & Manoharan, 2016); for written learning out- comes and module descriptors; for programmes to be backed by an industry advi- sory board; and for schools to provide career direction and guidelines to their 6 Review and Assessment of Academic Tourism and Hospitality Programmes in China 85 students. It was also criticised that the level and position of hospitality and tourism programmes are not clear, which leads to unclear positioning of graduates in the marketplace; teaching material should be of better quality; special attention should be given to foreign languages, information technology, practical skills and personal development; and internship networks need to be strengthened to facilitate students’ future work in the tourism industry. A recent summary of these concerns can be found in Li and Li (2013), in which they appraise a new curriculum at South China University of Technology, which has been implemented in close cooperation with Shangri-La Hotels and Resorts Guangzhou. The following problems have been addressed there and in related articles: 1. Low reputation and recognition of the tourism discipline within the current edu- cational system (Cheuk, 2005). 2. Faculty do not have sufficient essential experience and industry relations to effectively educate students (Cheuk, 2005; Li & Li, 2013). 3. Unclear educational objectives and confusing curriculum systems (Wu, 2004). 4. Zhang and Wu (2004) urge the development of a market-oriented curriculum for China’s tourism and hospitality educational system. 5. Graduates from top-tier universities show no intention to work in the industry (Lu & Zhou, 2007). 6. Tourism-related jobs are short-lived professions (Jiang & Tribe, 2009). 7. Internship trainings influence students negatively with respect to their overall experience in the programme (Richardson, 2008; Zopiatis, 2007). Regarding the fourth broad research area of ‘education environment’ referred to in the introduction section (cf. Hsu et al., 2017), it was recommended that the hotel industry’s recruitment system should be reformed together with the present pay system; that industry, education and research should develop a uniform model through industry cooperation; and, lastly, that the education system needs a more international orientation (Gu, 2003).

6.2.2 Curriculum Composition and its Assessment

Curriculum designs are complex decision-making processes with a variety of con- tingent factors, such as overall programme objectives, learning outcomes and avail- able resources within the school, industry and other networks between the different stakeholders, educational competitors and regional contexts (Morgan, 2004; Smith & Cooper, 2000; Tribe, 2002). Ring, Dickinger and Wöber (2007, p. 107) sum- marised the requirements of a balanced curriculum into seven main areas: 1. Understanding of a wider tourism world and tourism society 2. Transferable skills, creativity and critical and flexible thinking 86 A. H. Zins and S. Y. Jang

3. The future of tourism, including personal responsibility and the ability to take part in the creation and shaping of the future of tourism 4. Sustainability 5. Preparation for the industry – the vocational part of an education 6. Management skills 7. Information technology, eCommerce and eTourism The authors ran a survey among academics, tourism and hospitality industry profes- sionals and other experts to assess the importance weights of the different knowl- edge, skills and experience components of an ideal academic undergraduate programme by applying an Adaptive Conjoint Analysis technique. For their empiri- cal study, eight such components were defined out of which ‘internship’ ranked highest with double the weight derived for the tourism knowledge domain. General management and business administration subjects together with language skills ranked next. Then, generic skills such as problem-solving, creativity, reflection, entrepreneurship and ethics followed in terms of importance. For academics, the latter competencies ranked significantly higher than for industry professionals, which means that faculties value these competencies higher than practitioners. A more recent study in Korea (Kim, Park, & Choi, 2017) investigated perceived differences in the importance of the core competencies of tourism graduates by industry practitioners using the technique of an analytic hierarchy process. Competencies can be understood as personal attributes or characteristics that enable the delivery of a role/job (Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development, 2018). Hence, this perspective is outcome oriented and different to a curriculum component analysis, which is much more input oriented. Relative importance scores across five core competence factors did not show large differences. Yet the three higher-ranking factors were ‘job-specific competency’, ‘social responsibility’ and ‘global competency’, while ‘creative competency’ and ‘administrative competency’ turned out be lower in importance. The use of different factors and labels and a dif- ferent number of criteria make a direct comparison impossible. However, if we acknowledge that internships directly serve to improve job-specific competencies, and language skills support global competencies, we find some converging results. In both studies, generic skills (creative competencies) were assessed as playing a subordinate role. In contrast, general management and administrative competencies diverged substantially. A related study on the perceptions of essential entry-level management compe- tencies in the hospitality industry in the USA (Jiang & Alexakis, 2017) considered 19 skill and competency factors and their perceived importance in preparing for a good management position. These factors were regressed on an overall satisfaction score for the undergraduate programme. The highest impact on satisfaction was found from ‘analytical skills’ and ‘problem-solving skills’ with ‘flexibility and adaptability’ in third place. ‘Knowledge of the hospitality industry’ had the least influence out of only five significant factors that remained in the regression. Comparing the latter results to the previous two studies, contradicting rather than converging outcomes can be concluded. 6 Review and Assessment of Academic Tourism and Hospitality Programmes in China 87

Such controversies are not surprising given the complexity of curriculum design tasks and the assessment of its effectiveness. Tribe (2002) developed guiding prin- ciples for the design of curricula for higher tourism education, which he defined as ‘a whole educational experience packaged as a degree program’ (p. 340). He pro- posed that the aim for such tourism degree programmes is educating ‘philosophic practitioners’, which entails the promotion of a ‘balance between satisfying the demands of business and those of the wider tourism society and world’ (p. 340). Its value is embedded in the integration of knowledge from various fields ‘to encourage vocational competence balanced by ethical competence’. He calls this value ‘stew- ardship’. In the meantime, Tribe’s (2002) critical review of the role and design of higher tourism and hospitality education spans a period of over 20 years and across continents. The BEST Education Network (www.besteducationnetwork.org, BEST-EN, 2018) emerged from this endeavour committed to furthering the creation and dissemination of knowledge within the field of sustainable tourism. In 2007, BEST EN launched the Tourism Education Futures Initiative (TEFI, 2018; see also Sheldon, Fesenmaier, Wöber, Cooper, & Antonioli, 2008, Sheldon, Fesenmaier, & Tribe, 2011), which seeks to provide vision, knowledge and a framework for tour- ism education programmes to promote global citizenship and optimism for a better world. In China, this discussion and critical reflection either has not yet started or sim- ply is not visible in international publications. In the academic literature, other con- cerns prevail mainly addressing the lack of industry orientation in academic programmes (Du, 2003; Li & Li, 2013; Zhang & Wu, 2004). However, the third China Tourism Education Association Annual Conference and International Forum on Tourism Education held in November, 2017, at Sun Yat-sen University in Guangzhou brought the discussion to a wider audience by inviting many interna- tional scholars to China to present their experience and visions of a better tourism education to more than 500 participants. Interestingly, it was the representative of the Ministry of Education in China, Mr. Feng Chen, who drew a picture of a future-­ oriented education that integrates not only practical training but also the wider per- spective of people’s happiness and the whole industry’s contribution to society (Chen, 2017).

6.3 Study Design and Methods

6.3.1 Curriculum Analysis

A list of the programmes in hospitality and tourism management currently being offered by colleges and universities in China was compiled using queries on the official website about student admissions through the Gaokao (the centralised col- lege and university entrance) system. Appendix A summarises the programme offers differentiated by type of institution (college vs. university), by main emphasis 88 A. H. Zins and S. Y. Jang

(hospitality vs. tourism management) and by province. Combining type of institu- tion and course emphasis creates a matrix of four groups: college hospitality, col- lege tourism, university hospitality and university tourism. It was decided to draw a disproportional, clustered (by selected provinces) sample of 10 programme curri- cula (Mertens, 2005, p. 316) in each of the four groups with a medium scale of regional dispersion: 17 out of 30 provinces were represented with at least one cur- riculum. Hence, the sample data cannot claim to be strictly representative. However, it provides variation across several different types of provinces and across different types and sizes of colleges and universities. The consecutive content analysis of 40 study programmes delivers the necessary data to answer research questions 1–4. In a first step, all the courses listed in the curriculum tables were compiled and grouped by their leading subject areas. Due to the immense array of variation and options within and across curricula, it was reasonable to focus on a comparison of only the compulsory components of these curricula. The attempt to structure and condense these compulsory components followed a pragmatic approach to address the research questions raised in the previous section. Components were grouped into eight subject areas (SA 1–8; see Table 6.2). Each subject area was seen as hav- ing a gravity towards (i.e. a pull towards with no sharp boundaries) one of the four quadrant combinations of the two dimensions of the philosophic practitioner span: action vs. reflection and vocational vs. liberal; thus action-vocational, action-liberal, reflection-vocational and reflection-liberal. One group (SA 1) comprised all the generic functional areas that commonly define Business Administration core sub- jects: these include management, human resource management, marketing, account- ing, finance, economics and statistics, classified as mainly vocational-action. Similarly, we grouped sector-specific knowledge, concepts and skill development courses into either the hospitality or tourism management groups (SA 2 and SA 3, respectively). Communication and personal skills (SA 4) can be seen as purely skills develop- ment and technical training. These subjects frequently open the door to reflection and personal development, which is why they were considered as having a greater gravity towards (compatibility with) the reflection-action dimension of a curricu- lum. A similar line of thought underpinned the grouping of career- and internship-­ related courses (SA 5), as these subjects carry an ambiguous valence between action and reflection. In contrast, the next group of subjects, labelled as Creativity and Innovation (SA 6), carry a clear dominance towards reflection development. Any innovation-, development-, planning- and research-related course subjects were gathered into this category. Courses not limited to the narrow boundaries of a subsector (such as the hotel or resort industries or the tour operator or airline industries), and following a multidis- ciplinary approach, were considered to contribute to a broader, liberal-reflective capacity building. Subjects such as the regional economy, geography, anthropology and culture were therefore grouped into this cluster (SA 7). For courses that open the mind to improving the wellbeing of stakeholders other than company owners, a separate group was created under the label of Liberal Action (SA 8). 6 Review and Assessment of Academic Tourism and Hospitality Programmes in China 89

6.3.2 Focus Group Discussions

Focus group interviews in this study had two main aims: (1) to accumulate a better understanding of hotel HR managers’ needs, motivations or experiences about col- lege or university graduates’ employability and to note their suggestions; and (2) to use focus group results to develop a questionnaire that would enable HR managers’ perceptions of college and university graduates’ employability to be quantitatively measured. Two focus groups with hotel HR managers were conducted (n = 2 and 4, one male and five females) in Shanghai on October 27, 2017, and in Nanjing Wanda Hilton hotel lobby bar on November 13, 2017. There were four focused questions employed: Q1: ‘How does what you are doing now relate to what you have learned? How does what you have learned from your university help in your real work?’ Q2: ‘Can you share one of your best and worst experiences with any of your col- leagues concerning work performance or work attitude? What are the most criti- cal aspects when you evaluate their performance?’ Q3: ‘If you were to post a job call for a particular position in your hotel, what would be a must-have attribute or competence you would list?’ Q4: ‘If there was only one thing you could change about your current employees, what would that be?’

6.3.3 Online Survey Among Managers

To answer research questions 5–7 (how important are different curriculum compo- nents for the employability of graduates from bachelor programmes in hospitality or tourism management), an adaptive conjoint design seemed appropriate (Dubas and Mummaleneni, 1997; Ring et al., 2007). It is a method of preference measurement that constrains choice alternatives. Choosing or rating the favourability of two options with partial or full profiles at the same time provokes trade-offs among the defining characteristics of the entire profile (here: educational profile of graduates) and prevents an unrealistic preference inflation. While this study followed the same method as the authors above applied in their research, the framing was different. Ring et al. (2007) tried to find the ideal composition of a bachelor curriculum. This perspective is deemed appropriate when asking stakeholders involved in the design and delivery of a particular study programme. In this study, the target criterion is the comparative advantage of employability judged from the perspective of future employers. The selection and grouping of curriculum components were informed by the results of the curriculum analysis and the outcome of the expert focus group discussions and, finally, guided by the dimensions outlined for the concept of the philosophic practitioner (Tribe, 2002). Following the principle ideas of Ring et al.’s study (2007), but adapting the research questions to reduce the cognitive burden for respondents, the following 90 A. H. Zins and S. Y. Jang five subject areas were defined (Appendix B): business administration and manage- ment, insights into either the hospitality or the tourism industry, generic skills, internship and languages. In total, 14 different curriculum component options, across all five subject areas, were outlined (Appendix B). Respondents (HR manag- ers from hospitality and tourism sectors) were able to familiarise themselves with these options before expressing their individual preference when hiring a fresh graduate. Right from the beginning, respondents could choose either to hire a gradu- ate from a hospitality management or a tourism management programme: the two main and visible study programme options in China. After the familiarisation exer- cise, respondents had to rate their preference for hiring one of two graduates with differing educational profiles; in total, nine pairs were presented. This task was fin- ished by a calibration or validation question with three different profiles generated automatically, based on the respondent’s answers and similar to the pairs previously generated (adaptive conjoint technique). The questionnaire was developed with SSI Web from Sawtooth Inc. and put online (Couper, 2000) in English and Mandarin language for about 3 weeks (between December 2017 and January 2018). Potential respondents’ names and email/WeChat addresses had been collected beforehand by contacting companies listed on intermediary websites such as booking.com and TripAdvisor. In total, 454 managers were invited to participate in this study. Most were affiliated to the hotel sector (440) with only 12 working in travel and tour operator businesses. Overall, 17 different provinces (as the managers’ place of work) were covered. After a second reminder message was sent out, a gross response rate of 77% was registered. However, only 155 completed questionnaires (or 34% net) could be used for a com- plete analysis. Questionnaires had been answered using either a mobile phone or a computer. The individual preference or utility values were derived by applying hier- archical Bayesian parameter estimation procedures (Sawtooth Software, 2006). From the differences between utility scores within each factor (or here, curriculum components), it was possible to calculate the relative importance of each factor for the favourability of a complete profile (Sawtooth Software, 2018). Next to the esti- mation of importance and utility values for each component, respondents were also asked how satisfied they were with already hired graduates with respect to the five main curriculum elements. The following section reports on the results for each of the study components introduced in this method section. The different findings and their interpretation in answering the proposed research questions are dependent on the selected methods, concepts, data generation and preparation steps outlined here. The final concluding section reviews these findings synoptically and gives directions for further research. 6 Review and Assessment of Academic Tourism and Hospitality Programmes in China 91

6.4 Results and Discussion

6.4.1 Characteristics of Curricula

6.4.1.1 Types and Volume on Offer

The results of the programme content analysis show that there are different options for studying hospitality or tourism management in a higher education institution in China. In terms of numbers, colleges offer the most, with their 664 tourism manage- ment and 482 hospitality management programmes representing two thirds of the entire range. At universities, 443 tourism and 114 hospitality management pro- grammes can be found. While at colleges the hospitality programmes take a 42% share of the hospitality-tourism total, at universities, the hospitality proportion is as low as 20% (80% tourism). Colleges commonly offer 3-year programmes, awarding a diploma to their graduates. Universities run bachelor programmes under the broader category of business studies lasting for 4 years; graduates are awarded a bachelor certificate. Until recently, institutions of higher education were not able to offer hospitality and tourism management programmes with different majoring sub- jects because only one unified curriculum framework had been developed and approved by the government (Gu, 2017). Within this official framework, only a small number of subjects and courses were compulsory (General Education Courses; Wang et al., 2010). Institutions could define their own detailed curriculum based on guidelines that specified only the larger subject domains, such as Subject Base Courses, Major Base Courses, Major Core Courses, Concentrated Practice Courses and Elective Courses. Students interested in joint programmes offered in cooperation with foreign institutions have a number of different options in China. About 30 different joint or double-degree programmes are available with an overwhelming majority offered in Chinese and English or English language only (Chinese Education Department, 2017). The following countries offer programmes in conjunction with Chinese insti- tutions: the USA (7 programmes), the UK (4), France (4), Austria (2), Russia (2), Hong Kong (2) and Australia, Korea, Ireland, Denmark and Switzerland (1). Joint programmes vary in structure: either 4 + 0, which means the entire study programme is offered in China, or 2 + 2 or 3 + 1, which means that part of the programme must be finished at the partner institution abroad. Most of these programmes offer dual degrees: a Chinese bachelor and a foreign bachelor certificate. However, some offer a Chinese bachelor’s degree only, while others only award the foreign degree. Finally, there are a few programmes open to foreigners and Chinese nationals who want to study outside the Chinese educational framework. The latter two study options are not considered in this review. These curricula are not included in Appendices A and B and were not screened or commented on. College programmes with a duration of 3 years follow a similar pattern irrespec- tive of the subject major (see Table 6.1): teaching hours average at about 2100, which is equivalent to about 28 hours per week each semester (excluding semesters 92 A. H. Zins and S. Y. Jang

Table 6.1 Overall scope of teaching and practical education in hospitality and tourism programmes at colleges and universities Colleges Universities Aspect HM TM HM TM Sample size 10 10 10 10 Average teaching/credit hours 2094 2096 2723 2526 Minimum 1635 1794 2208 2208 Maximum 2566 2387 3343 3475 Average weekly teaching hours per semester (excluding 28 28 27 23 internship semesters) Average internship hours (1 week = 30 h) 668 630 704 489 Average proportion of internship hours 24% 23% 20% 16% Minimum 9% 13% 1% 2% Maximum 41% 35% 38% 26% Average proportion of practical teaching hours/supervised 40% 38% 25% 17% learning Minimum 14% 20% 12% 6% Maximum 56% 59% 54% 59% HM Hospitality management, TM Tourism management with internships); however, the variation is substantial with a minimum of 1635 and a maximum of 2566 h. Internships can be found in about 50% of the curricula in only one semester, and the other 50% require internships in two semesters, yet not fully occupying the entire semester workload. On average, internships last for about 650 h. Taking these working hours as equivalent credit hours, these internships comprise about 24% of the curriculum; however, the internship share can be as low as 9% and in other programmes as high as 41%. In addition, the screening of the curricula data tried to identify courses with practical training components (RQ 3). Considering such courses (including electives and practical language courses), the practical training share is about 40% with the total hours of supervised (classroom) teaching as the reference. Since the analysis did not take the credit weight of each course into consideration, it can be expected that the reported share is somewhat lower since practical training courses usually take fewer weekly hours. The varia- tion among the different programmes is substantial: from a minimum of 14% practi- cal training (Yunnan Tourism Vocational School, Hospitality Management) to a maximum 59% (Qingdao Vocational School, Tourism Management; Wuchang Vocational School – Hospitality Management). University bachelor programmes, in contrast, show total teaching hours of around 2600 h with a large variation ranging from 2200 (Shanghai Normal University, Anhui Normal University) to 3500 h (Jiangxi University of Finance and Economics). The average weekly teaching hours per semester (excluding internship semesters) are 23 (in tourism management programmes) and 27 (in hospitality man- agement). This average is a rough approximation since many programmes shift the internship activities of their students to multiple semester breaks. These internship requirements vary substantially across different programmes. In tourism 6 Review and Assessment of Academic Tourism and Hospitality Programmes in China 93

­management curricula, compulsory hours are substantially lower (489 on average) with a share of only 16% within the entire curriculum. The absolute duration as well as the share is much lower compared to college programmes. Moreover, the share of internship periods can be close to zero in some programmes. In hospitality pro- grammes, the internship hours (704 h) are slightly above the average of those in college curricula. However, the share of 20% of the complete study programme is still lower. Here as well, some universities prescribe only 1 or 2 weeks ‘work experi- ence’ in companies (e.g. Beijing International Studies University, Southeast University Nanjing). Together with other practical learning opportunities embedded within regular course work, the total programme share of practical experience ranges between 17% (TM) and 25% (HM), which is much lower than the share calculated for college programmes (RQ 3). However, some programmes put much emphasis on such practical training opportunities where the weight (in terms of number of courses) is even higher than 50% (e.g. Changzhou Institute of Technology, Hospitality Management; Jiangxi University of Finance and Economics – Tourism Management).

6.4.2 Course Structure

The following structural analysis of the sampled study curricula is mainly based on the compulsory part and excludes those mandatory subjects common to every study programme such as Contemporary History of China, Introduction of Mao Zedong Thought, Moral Character Cultivation, Principles of Marxism, Military Education and Physical Education. In college programmes, the elective part of the curricula appears to be limited: less than 5% of the total curriculum on average. In contrast, at universities, students have multiple options: 1. Many universities offer further specialisations within the large domain of tour- ism management majors: one option is hotel or hospitality management; others are event management, sports management, tour operation and tour guiding. 2. Curricula frequently offer groups or blocks of courses among which students must choose one complete or several blocks with a minimum number of credits and courses within each chosen block. 3. Further flexibility is granted through the opportunity to select elective courses from a restricted or sometimes unrestricted list. Table 6.2 summarises the variety (# of different) of courses found in the sampled curricula as well as the density or weight (average # of courses) given to the respec- tive group of subjects and helps to answer particularly RQ 1 and 2. The spread (minimum and maximum # of courses) reflects the differences in curriculum struc- ture, which is due to the individual design and profile of each institution’s study programmes. The percentages express the approximate weight of the respective subject group taking only the compulsory parts of the curriculum into account. 94 A. H. Zins and S. Y. Jang

Table 6.2 Density and variation of compulsory curriculum courses in eight subject areas Colleges Universities Subject area (SA 1–8) HM TM HM TM Sample size 10 10 10 12 1. Business administration 15% 10% 44% 33% # different 9 7 30 31 Average # 3.2 2.2 11.0 6.3 Min./max./mode # 0/5/4 1/5/1 7/16/10 2/14/2 2. Hospitality management 48% 6% 25% 8% # different 34 7 25 11 Average # 10.2 1.2 6.3 1.6 Min./max./mode # 5/14/8 0/4/0 2/9/8 0/7/1 3. Tourism management 7% 53% 15% 26% # different 8 33 15 62 Average # 1.4 11.4 3.8 5.0 Min./max./mode # 0/5/1 8/14/11 1/10/2 0/10/5 4. Communication, personal skills 15% 18% 9% 8% # different 11 11 15 11 Average # 3.2 4.0 2.2 1.6 Min./max./mode # 1/7/2 0/8/4 0/9/1 0/9/1 5. Career, internship preparation 9% 5% 3% 4% # different 4 4 1 2 Average # 1.9 1.0 0.7 0.8 Min./max./mode # 1/3/2 0/2/1 0/1/1 0/2/0 6. Creativity, innovation, research 0% 0% 2% 9% # different 0 1 3 16 Average # – 0.1 0.5 1.8 Min./max./mode # 0/0/0 0/1/0 0/2/0 0/4/1 7. Geography, culture 1% 7% 1% 10% # different 2 5 1 12 Average # 0.2 1.5 0.3 1.8 Min./max./mode # 0/1/0 0/4/2 0/1/0 0/3/3 8. Liberal action 0% 1% 0% 2% # different 0 2 1 2 Average # – 0.2 0.1 0.3 Min./max./mode # 0/0/0 0/1/0 0/1/0 0/1/0 HM Hospitality management, TM Tourism management, # Number of courses within the compul- sory part of the curriculum

The results of content analysis show that tourism and hospitality programmes at colleges do not put much emphasis on a comprehensive management and business administration education (SA 1). At some institutions, it is not even a compulsory element. On average, only two to three courses on these subjects are mandatory with a significantly lower weight given to them within the tourism management pro- grammes. In contrast, bachelor programmes at universities offer not only a much 6 Review and Assessment of Academic Tourism and Hospitality Programmes in China 95 larger variety of business administration topics but also three times more compul- sory courses on these topics compared to college education programmes. Hospitality curricula put much more emphasis on elementary managerial knowledge (with sub- jects such as Principles of Accounting, Financial Management, Principles of Management, HR Management, Fundamentals of Law, Economics) compared to tourism management programmes. In the hospitality management subject area (SA 2), colleges focus most on the different functional (e.g. marketing, sales, HR, information management) as well as service areas (e.g. front office, food and beverage, housekeeping, banquet) in their curricula. On average, they dedicate about ten courses to hospitality management. As can be expected, this subject group plays a minor role in their tourism manage- ment programmes. This pattern is similar in university bachelor programmes, yet with only six courses, on average, within the hospitality curricula. A different structure can be seen in the supposedly core subjects of the tourism management group of courses (SA 3). These subjects play a subordinate, almost negligible role within Hospitality Management programmes. However, they are very pronounced within the college curricula in Tourism Management with 11 courses on average. Surprisingly, some bachelor curricula at universities offer a huge variety of courses (60 different subjects) but with less than 50% weight (only five compulsory courses on average) compared to colleges. Some universities do not even prescribe compulsory courses in tourism management (Jiangxi University of Finance & Economics and Nanjing University of Finance and Economics with only one course). The next group of subjects (SA 4) mainly cover the development of (spoken) language capabilities with English dominating and Mandarin in second rank. No other verbal communication skills such as presentation techniques, group discus- sions, negotiations or business communication can be found in the curricula. At colleges, three to four courses on average are dedicated to improving – mainly – language capabilities. At universities, only half of this emphasis can be found. Moreover, there are programmes without any such courses (e.g. Sun Yat-Sen University, Nanjing University of Finance & Economics, Anhui University). In most of the college and university programmes (78%), some preparation courses for internships and/or career planning (SA 5) are made compulsory. At uni- versities, there is a slightly reduced emphasis on guiding and helping students towards future careers. Courses that explicitly foster creative thinking and problem-­ solving capabilities (SA 6) can be rarely found. Within college programmes, they are not present at all. At universities, most courses are research related. Only one among 16 courses explicitly focuses on innovation and entrepreneurship. Complementary subjects (SA 7), which add different disciplinary perspectives, are also rare. They are more pronounced in Tourism Management programmes (with a share of 7–10%) and mainly cover geographic and cultural topics. The last group of course topics (SA 8) cover the liberal-action quadrant of the concept of the philosophic practitioner. In this quadrant, courses discuss and develop knowledge related to policy and planning for ‘a better world’. Courses fitting into this category are seldom found in hospitality and tourism curricula in China (RQ 4). 96 A. H. Zins and S. Y. Jang

6.4.3 Focus Group Interview Results

In this second step of the study, it was possible to contextualise some of the informa- tion derived from the literature review, from conference presentations and the ongo- ing curricula screening. HR managers considered what students learned from their universities and colleges being only partially or indirectly helpful in becoming employable. In contrast, emotional intelligence, outgoing personality and personal endurance capabilities are more important assets for being a hotelier than opera- tional skills. HR managers in these focus groups unanimously perceived that dis- playing a proactive and self-disciplined work attitude contributes to a more positive evaluation of a potential employee, regardless of the candidate’s previous work placements or personal background. Other participants expressed that being passionate, exhibiting a kind of ‘hotel DNA’ in the genes and a guest-oriented mind-set can result in an outstanding employability evaluation. On the other hand, the participants agreed that lack of independence and poor communication skills may result in a negative evaluation. In general, warm-heartedness towards human beings, effective communication skills, clear career plans in the hotel sector and fluent language skills were on the manag- ers’ priority list. In contrast, selfishness and lack of team orientation must be avoided, they stated. All participants admitted that punctuality tells many things about a job applicant, especially in the hotel industry. Few participants highlighted the role of colleges and universities as an important partner to the industry. To sum it up, there seems to be a difference in the definition of talented graduates between what the industry wants to get and what the higher education institutions want to create. Therefore, it is necessary for higher education institutions to reflect on the content of current curricula and the way they are delivered and for the indus- try to seriously consider participating in a process of programme evaluation and change.

6.4.4 Managers’ Perspective on Curricula

In this section, results from the third empirical study, the survey questionnaire, are summarised. Respondents who completed survey questionnaires were either less than or equal to 30 years old (n = 71) or in the age bracket of 31–40 years (n = 73); 56% were male. Because of the way contact addresses were obtained, 80% worked in the hotel sector, 60% of those in international hotel companies. Almost 60% of these managers preferred graduates with a hospitality management background. The rest were either undecided or explicitly opted for tourism management gradu- ates. Those respondents working in the hospitality industry preferred taking gradu- ates with a hospitality management education. Table 6.3 shows the average utility scores for the 14 curriculum component options used in this study. Utility scores were derived from the nine individual 6 Review and Assessment of Academic Tourism and Hospitality Programmes in China 97

Table 6.3 Average zero-centred utilities of subject areas/competencies for future graduate employees Subject major Subject area Options HM TM p level Business administration Basic – selective −0.25 −0.38 n.s. Comprehensive 0.25 0.38 n.s. Industry insights Basic skills 0.25 0.02 < 0.05 Interdisciplinary −0.15 −0.01 n.s. Including planning, development −0.09 −0.01 n.s. Generic personal skills Individual −0.14 −0.38 < 0.05 Team-oriented, creative 0.05 0.10 n.s. Socially oriented, ethics 0.09 0.28 < 0.05 Language No foreign language −1.48 −1.50 n.s. English 0.13 0.16 n.s. English + another 1.33 1.34 n.s. Internship No internship −1.22 −1.26 n.s. < 6 months: skills 0.23 0.25 n.s. < 6 months: skills and reflection 0.99 1.01 n.s. HM hospitality management, TM tourism management, p level probability, n.s. not significant

­pairwise comparisons of graduate profiles and then calibrated to sum up to zero within each subject/competence area (= zero-cantered). Utilities are separated by the two major options: HM for hospitality management and TM for tourism man- agement (RQ 6). The biggest employability benefit is gained by graduates with extended language proficiency (cf. Table 6.3): English and a second foreign lan- guage (around 33%). Managers from international hotels put more emphasis on the language component compared to those working in other types of hotels. The sec- ond most important domain was internship experiences, with a score of about 27%. Training for up to 6 months in a company or organisation, including reflexive tasks and managerial problem-solving, was recognised as a valuable curriculum component. Generic skills comprising basic communication and presentation skills, problem-­ solving and critical thinking, teamwork, creativity techniques and reflective capaci- ties turn out to have a similar contribution to employability as knowledge and skill components. The latter are directly related to the applied field – either hospitality industries or the wider domain of tourism-related sectors (cf. Table 6.4) – with an average importance weight of 16%. Surprisingly, these industry insights are reverse ordered: basic skills and knowledge in the applied field are appreciated more than advanced and multidisciplinary competencies. Obviously, it is more important to dedicate time and effort to curriculum components other than a detailed and differ- entiated understanding of industry specificities. However, differences only show up for Hospitality Management graduates (utilities vary between −0.15 and 0.25) and not for Tourism Management graduates (utilities vary between −0.01 and 0.02). The lowest benefit is attributed to educational efforts in the field of general management and business administration subjects. No significant differences emerged between 98 A. H. Zins and S. Y. Jang

Table 6.4 Relative importance values (percentage of the whole) of five subject/competence areas from a manager’s perspective Subject/competence area Manager Business administration Industry Personal Foreign background management insights skills language Internship Hospitality 10% 16% 16% 32% 27% management Tourism 11% 13% 15% 33% 28% management Significant n.s. < 0.05 n.s. n.s. < 0.01 difference Working with int. 9% 14% 14% 34% 29% hotels Working with 11% 16% 16% 30% 26% other hotels Significant n.s. n.s. n.s. < 0.05 n.s. difference Note: All five subject areas differ pairwise (horizontally) significantly, except industry insights – personal skills Int International the two major options, HM vs. TM (RQ 5). In the similar study by Ring et al. (2007), who interviewed mainly Western academics and industry practitioners, the internship component turned out to have the highest perceived benefit within a bachelor programme followed by foreign language capabilities. General manage- ment knowledge and generic skills followed narrowly behind and knowledge com- ponents from the graduates’ field (the tourism domain) played the weakest part. Overall, no significant differences in importance weights and utilities could be detected between males and females, between the two different age groups or between the different employment sectors of the responding managers (RQ 7). Respondents were also asked to rate the importance to industry HR managers of the five competence areas differentiated in the hiring task. On a 6-point rating scale, personal, social and communication skills ranked highest with an average score of 4.2, followed by language capabilities almost at the same level. Practical skills fol- lowed in third place with a score of 4.0. Competencies in the field of general man- agement and business administration were considered weaker at 3.9 followed by insights into the hospitality/tourism industry. These performance ratings are uncor- related with the individual benefit weight derived for the respective curriculum components with one exception: managers attributing a better performance to grad- uates for their personal skills gave slightly more emphasis to this curriculum component. 6 Review and Assessment of Academic Tourism and Hospitality Programmes in China 99

6.5 Conclusion

In China, the curriculum frameworks for any academic degree (called ‘major’) are centrally developed by the government. Until recently, it was only possible to offer a hospitality management programme under a tourism management major. Tourism management is exclusively classified as a business management major, irrespective of the real structure and shape of the study programme, which is mainly designed following the available resources and strengths of particular colleges, schools or faculties. There is no differentiation between a bachelor of science, a bachelor of arts or a bachelor of business administration orientation of the study programme. Neither mission statements, study objectives, competence profiles of graduates nor detailed curricula information are transparent in China. It is quite uncommon for universities to release details about their study programmes. In most cases, the information provided on their websites is limited to a list of the undergraduate and graduate programmes they offer. Curricula differ substantially between the two types of institutions and pro- grammes screened in this study. Yet the variation of subject emphasis and variety within the respective institutions is so large that a clear and distinct profiling is not easy to establish. Practical orientation and skill development seem to be more pro- nounced at colleges. More choice and flexibility in choosing from elective courses prevail at universities. When comparing the hours dedicated to supervised instruc- tion (mainly teaching in classrooms), it is striking that university bachelor pro- grammes need 165 semester hours on average to complete a 4-year programme. In many Western countries, bachelor programmes require 3 or 4 years of study with a classroom input of 70–85 semester hours in total (Ring et al. 2007; Wang et al. 2010). The differences can have various reasons and implications: • Chinese students must mainly learn while present in the classroom and not out- side it (independent study). • In China, learning materials are not available that allow students to study inde- pendently (outside the classroom). • Chinese students are not trained and prepared to study independently. • Chinese instructors use inefficient teaching styles. • The learning outcomes of Chinese bachelor graduates are of much higher quality than those of the graduates of Western universities. However, no comparative studies have addressed these questions so far. While it would not be a trivial task to run comparisons about the effectiveness of different teaching styles and approaches, this could be an interesting field of pedagogical and didactic research. In terms of a balance of liberal vs. vocational and action vs. reflective orientation, the current curricula in China are still some distance from a more even mix. Exact 100 A. H. Zins and S. Y. Jang data for curricula from Western countries on this (im-)balance are either not avail- able or outdated. Ring et al. (2007) reported that subjects with a liberal focus com- prised 6% in their sample of Western tourism management curricula. In China, most efforts are dedicated to vocational action-related subjects and teaching. Different studies with a focus on employability and industry expectations show diverging results: analytical skills, problem-solving capabilities, flexibility and global competencies are ranked rather highly. HR managers in the tourism industry in China were most appreciative of languages and experiences from mindful intern- ships, including small managerial tasks, problem-solving and reflection. However, generic personal skills, such as communication, creativity, social responsibility, leadership and reflective, critical thinking, were valued more than specific industry or functional managerial knowledge. In this respect, the results from managers working in China do not differ much from judgements analysed and interpreted from Western practitioners. Yet those competencies are still highly underrepresented in the existing curricula in China. It appears that the narrow emphasis on even more practical skill training in higher education programmes is not the solution anymore. Of course, pure theoretical knowledge without practical application experience has already been much criticised. Graduates are expected to provide problem-solving, critical reflection and creativity competencies in the applied field together with a high work ethos and self-discipline. To improve the role and effectiveness of the higher educational system for hos- pitality and tourism management in China, it is necessary to involve multiple stake- holders: the educators and administrators from higher educational institutions, government agencies and their representatives, industry associations, company owners and managers, opinion leaders and parents and students. Curricula reforms alone, which are decreed top-down, will not be sufficient. Increasing practical train- ing hours for students without building capacities for self-directed learning and reflective synthesising will not satisfy the industry needs nor students’ motivation to follow a career in this sector. Keeping entrance salaries below average combined with poor HR management practices in prospective employment sectors will not change the existing mind-set of students who are not interested in working in the hospitality and tourism industry. Only a joint and multidimensional initiative towards more transparency, more efficiency and more attractive employability will be able to solve the rising divide between the supply and demand side of higher education in hospitality and tourism education in China.

6.6 Limitations

For this research, it was not possible to collect reliable and insightful information about the details of the official ‘major’ programmes from institution websites. Details about curricula structure, internship requirements, course titles, instructors, learning outcomes and targeted graduates’ profiles could not be collected in a sys- tematic manner. Most contacted faculty members – and even deans – refused to deliver this kind of information. In this respect, there were no differences between 6 Review and Assessment of Academic Tourism and Hospitality Programmes in China 101 colleges and universities. Hence, it is highly questionable whether prospective stu- dents, parents and even future employers can evaluate the various study programmes on offer. The convenience sampling of curricula causes some limitations to the scope of the results. While the authors are convinced that the current sample showed a real- istic picture of the huge level of variety, a different method of analysis would enhance insights and understanding substantially. Instead of extending the sample size, multiple case analyses including the development of programmes over a larger period of the time and an analysis of programme objectives, syllabi and module descriptions could deliver much richer material. We conducted focus group interviews with HR managers. However, the voices of front office, food and beverage and other department managers should have been reflected as well. What HR managers pointed out about their expectations may not fully cover the field’s real needs. HR managers’ evaluation of employees could be partially based on standardised and fully structured forms. The industry perspective is probably strongly biased towards the voice and views of managers working in the hospitality industry. A more inclusive sample of repre- sentatives from other tourism industries and service sectors within the supply chain of the hospitality and tourism industry could come to different conclusions. Finally, the perspective of students, graduates and faculty directly working in this educa- tional field would greatly complement this review, which is fractional in its current approach.

Acknowledgement The authors are grateful for the vast support in this research project offered by their colleagues: Miranda Jiang, Helen Yan, Rick Li Xion, Shirley Gao and Nancy Zhang.

Appendix A: Hospitality and Tourism Undergraduate Programmes at Vocational Colleges and Universities in China in 2017

Hospitality Management major Tourism Management major University College University College Provinces Total # Sample # Sample # Sample # Sample 湖北 Hubei 108 8 34 1 23 43 1 河南 Henan 105 6 36 25 48 江苏 Jiangsu 105 10 2 31 2 23 3 41 1 山东 Shandong 96 4 22 1 19 51 1 安徽 Anhui 87 5 1 33 12 2 40 四川 Sichuan 87 4 20 23 40 广东 Guangdong 87 5 2 19 30 1 33 1 湖南 Hunan 83 7 22 29 25 河北 Hebei 80 0 24 1 15 41 1 102 A. H. Zins and S. Y. Jang

Hospitality Management major Tourism Management major University College University College Provinces Total # Sample # Sample # Sample # Sample 江西 Jiangxi 68 3 22 13 1 30 广西 Guangxi 62 3 28 13 28 浙江 Zhejiang 61 2 19 1 14 16 1 黑龙江 58 2 17 16 23 Heilongjiang 陕西 Shaanxi 55 1 15 19 20 辽宁 Liaoning 57 4 16 15 1 22 福建 Fujian 56 7 2 11 1 13 25 1 重庆 Chongqing 50 6 1 13 18 1 13 山西 Shanxi 50 3 21 1 13 13 1 贵州Guizhou 45 4 13 1 10 18 北京 Beijing 39 4 1 6 15 14 内蒙古 37 1 15 7 14 Neimenggu 吉林 Jilin 36 3 9 15 9 新疆 Xinjiang 31 1 7 11 12 云南 Yunnan 31 2 8 1 10 11 1 海南 Hainan 31 4 11 5 11 甘肃 Gansu 25 4 1 5 7 9 天津 Tianjin 24 5 2 11 6 上海 shanghai 20 6 1 12 1 1 1 青海 Qinghai 6 0 1 3 2 宁夏 Ningxia 6 0 1 2 3 西藏 Xizang 4 0 0 2 2 Total 1703 114 10 482 10 443 10 664 10 Source: Beijing Xueersi Training School (2017)

Appendix B: Curricula Components and Optional Characteristics for the Adaptive Conjoint Task

Theme; number of Subject area options Options Business Basic business 1. Only max. three subjects: e.g. marketing, administration administration accounting, management subjects; two options 2. Comprehensive, six or more subjects such as HR management, organisational behaviour, accounting, business law, economics, marketing research and e-commerce 6 Review and Assessment of Academic Tourism and Hospitality Programmes in China 103

Theme; number of Subject area options Options Hospitality Insights into the 1a. Basic knowledge and applied training: e.g. domaina or tourism tourism industry; three food and beverage management, housekeeping and domaina options front office management, hotel sales, cooking 1b. Basic knowledge and applied training: e.g. destination marketing, travel agency management, attraction management, event management 2. Interdisciplinary aspects and impacts: Economic, ecological, global, historical, sociocultural and geographical perspectives of the hospitality/tourism industry 3. Hospitality and tourism policy, planning and development: role, function and responsibilities of governments and other stakeholders Generic skills Personal and social 1. Individual personal skills: goal setting, skills; three options presentation skills, problem-solving, effective and intercultural communication, teamwork 2. Team-oriented personal kills: creativity, reflection and entrepreneurship, creative and critical thinking, problem-solving, ability to reflect on oneself, teamwork 3. Socially oriented personal skills: ethics, creativity, reflection and entrepreneurship, personal development, creative and critical thinking, ability to reflect on oneself and impact on social environment Language Foreign language; 1. No foreign language training three options 2. English and Chinese language training 3. English, Chinese and another foreign language training Internship Internship training in 1. No internship training company or 2. Up to 6 months training of technical/operations organisation; three skills options 3. Up to 6 months training: skills and operations including managerial problem-solving, reflection on internal processes, debriefing and feedback aFor hospitality major graduates, the hospitality subject area was chosen; for tourism major gradu- ates, the tourism subject area was chosen

References

Bao, J. (2017, December 1). China tourism education. In Global tourism education: Changes, challenges and prospects, Guangzhou. Beijing Xueersi Training School. (2017). List of colleges and universities in China. Retrieved December 9, 2017, from http://college.gaokao.com/schlist 104 A. H. Zins and S. Y. Jang

BEST-EN. (2018). Building excellence in sustainable tourism education network. Retrieved February 25, 2018, from http://www.besteducationnetwork.org Chen, F. (2017, December 1). Education, tourism, reform. Paper presented at global tourism edu- cation: Changes, challenges and prospects. Sun Yat-sen University, Guangzhou, China. Cheuk, E. (2005). A study of tourism education reform in China. In Proceedings of China tourism forum (pp. 127–135). Hong Kong: China Tourism Forum. Chinese Education Department. (2017). Chinese-foreign cooperation in running schools. Retrieved November 20, 2017, from http://www.crs.jsj.edu.cn/index.php/default/index//sort/1006 Couper, M. P. (2000). Web surveys: A review of issues and approaches. Public Opinion Quarterly, 64, 464–494. Du, J. (2003). Reforms and development of higher tourism education in China. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 3(1), 103–113. Dubas, K. M., & Mummaleneni, V. (1997). Self-explicated and full-profile conjoint methods for designing customer-focused courses. Marketing Education Review, 7(1), 35–48. Gross, M. J., & Manoharan, A. (2016). The balance of liberal and vocational values in hospital- ity higher education: Voices of graduates. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 28(1), 44–57. Gu, H. (2003). Famous schools of tourism education. China Tourism Hotels, 9, 18–23. Gu, H. (2017, December 1). China’s hospitality education. Paper presented at global tourism edu- cation: Changes, challenges and prospects, sun Yat-sen University, Guangzhou, China. Gu, H., Kavanaugh, R. R., & Cong, Y. (2007). Empirical studies of tourism education in China. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 7(1), 3–24. Hsu, C. H. C., Xiao, H., & Chen, N. (2017). Hospitality and tourism education research from 2005 to 2014: “Is the past a prologue to the future?”. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 29(1), 141–160. Jiang, B., & Tribe, J. (2009). Tourism jobs – Short lived professions: Student attitudes towards tourism careers in China. Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sports and Tourism Education, 8(1), 4–19. Jiang, L., & Alexakis, G. (2017). Comparing students’ and managers’ perceptions of essential entry-level management competencies in the hospitality industry: An empirical study. Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sport & Tourism Education, 20, 32–46. Kim, N., Park, J., & Choi, J. (2017). Perceptual differences in core competencies between tour- ism industry practitioners and students using analytic hierarchy process (AHP). Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sport & Tourism Education, 20, 76–86. Lam, T., & Xiao, H. (2000). Challenges and constraints of hospitality and tourism education in China. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 12(5), 291–295. Li, L., & Li, J. (2013). Hospitality education in China: A student career-oriented perspective. Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sport & Tourism Education, 12, 109–117. Lin, S., & Zins, A. H. (2016). Intended destination image positioning at the sub-provincial admin- istration level in China. Asia Pacific Journal of Tourism Research, 21(11), 1241–1257. Lu, A., & Zhou, L. (2007). A study on the matching of the undergraduates of tourism management and hotel industry. Journal of Southeast University, 9(5), 60–67. Mertens, D. M. (2005). Research and evaluation in education and psychology: Integrating diver- sity with quantitative, qualitative, and mixed methods (2nd ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage. Morgan, M. (2004). From production line to drama school: Higher education for the future of tour- ism. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 16(2), 91–99. Moscardo, G. (1997). Making mindful managers. Journal of Tourism Studies, 8(1), 16–24. Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development. (2018). Definition and selection of competencies (DeSeCo). Retrieved February 25, 2018, from http://www.oecd.org/education/ skills-beyond-school/definitionandselectionofcompetenciesdeseco.htm Penfold, P., Wei, L., & Ladkin, A. (2012). Developing hospitality education in China: A case study of Guilin Institute of Tourism. Journal of China Tourism Research, 8(1), 61–77. 6 Review and Assessment of Academic Tourism and Hospitality Programmes in China 105

Richardson, S. (2008). Undergraduate tourism and hospitality students’ attitude toward a career in the industry: A preliminary investigation. Journal of Teaching in Travel and Tourism, 8(1), 23–46. Ring, A., Dickinger, A., & Wöber, K. (2007). Designing the ideal undergraduate program in tour- ism. Journal of Travel Research, 48(1), 106–121. Sawtooth Software. (2006). The ACA/Hierarchical Bayes v3.0 technical paper. Retrieved March 9, 2018, from http://www.sawtoothsoftware.com/support/technical-papers/ sawtooth-software-products/acahb-technical-paper-2006 Sawtooth Software. (2018). Interpreting the results of conjoint analysis. Retrieved March 9, 2018, from http://www.sawtoothsoftware.com/download/techpap/interpca.pdf Schön, D. A. (1983). The reflective practitioner. London, England: Temple Smith. Sheldon, P., Fesenmaier, D. R., & Tribe, J. (2011). The tourism education futures initiative (TEFI): Activating change in tourism education. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 11(1), 2–23. Sheldon, P., Fesenmaier, D. R., Wöber, K., Cooper, C., & Antonioli, M. (2008). Tourism education futures – 2010–2030: Building the capacity to lead. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 7(3), 61–68. Smith, G., & Cooper, C. (2000). Competitive approaches to tourism and hospitality curriculum design. Journal of Travel Research, 39(1), 90–95. Tourism Education Futures Initiative. (2018). TEFI values. Retrieved February 25, 2018, from http://tourismeducationfutures.org/tefi-values/ Tribe, J. (2001). Research paradigms and the tourism curriculum. Journal of Travel Research, 39(4), 442–448. Tribe, J. (2002). The philosophic practitioner. Annals of Tourism Research, 29(2), 338–357. Wang, J., Huyton, J., Gao, X., & Ayres, H. (2010). Evaluating undergraduate courses in tour- ism management: A comparison between Australia and China. Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sport & Tourism Education, 9(2), 46–62. World Tourism Organisation. (2017). UNWTO tourism highlights. Retrieved March 12, 2018, from https://www.e-unwto.org/doi/pdf/10.18111/9789284419029 Wu, Q. (2004). Viewing some noticeable problems of talent-cultivation in tourism institutions of higher learning from the disequilibrium of supply and demand. Tourism Tribune, S1, 22–25. Yu, B., & Hong, X. (2016). Beijing airport chief executed for corruption. Retrieved March 9, 2018, from http://politics.people.com.cn/n1/2016/0507/c1001-28332757.html Zhang, H. Q., & Wu, E. (2004). Human resources issues facing the hotel and travel industry in China. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 16(7), 424–428. Zhang, X. S. (2005). An analysis of courses offered in applied universities: Taking the major of hotel management as an example. Tourism Tribune, S1, 81–85. Zhou, J. L. (1991). A current look at hospitality and tourism education in China’s colleges and universities. International Journal of Hospitality Management, 10(4), 357–367. Zopiatis, A. (2007). Hospitality internships in Cyprus: A genuine academic experience or a con- tinuing frustration? International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 19(1), 65–77. Chapter 7 Hotel and Tourism Management Education in Bhutan: The Creation of the Royal Institute of Tourism and Hospitality

Paul Strickland

Abstract The Kingdom of Bhutan is an isolated country that prides itself on cul- ture, heritage, religion, the natural environment and the concept of Gross National Happiness (GNH) among others. GNH was introduced to the teaching curriculum in the year 2000 to increase the happiness and satisfaction of the people, rather than just focusing on monetary value or gain. Tourism plays an important role in being one of the main contributors to Bhutan’s gross domestic product (GDP) by utilising a unique visa tariff system in which international tourists pay a minimum of US$250 per day. In the past, exit studies conducted at the airport have highlighted the dis- satisfaction of many tourists who were paying a high daily tariff and not receiving the perceived quality products or services anticipated by international travellers from developed societies. The government responded in 2004 by creating the Royal Institute for Tourism and Hospitality (RITH) and offering a Diploma in Hotel Management or Tourism Management and a Middle Management Programme to educate Bhutanese tourism and hospitality employees to meet western expectations and standards. Tourism education is currently delivered in Bhutan, rather than send- ing Bhutanese nationals to foreign countries for training. This chapter focuses on discussing the creation of RITH and highlights the future direction of tourism and hospitality education in the Kingdom of Bhutan.

Keywords Education · Tourism · Hospitality · Kingdom of Bhutan · Royal Institute for Tourism and Hospitality

P. Strickland (*) La Trobe University, Melbourne, Australia e-mail: [email protected]

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 107 C. Liu, H. Schänzel (eds.), Tourism Education and Asia, Perspectives on Asian Tourism, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4_7 108 P. Strickland

7.1 Brief History of Education in Bhutan

Bhutan is an independent country land-locked in the Himalayas. Bhutan, also referred to as the Kingdom of Bhutan, is governed by a constitutional monarchy currently ruled by the fifth King, His Majesty, the Druk (Dragon King), Gyalpo Jigme Khesar Namgyel Wangchuck; the Queen, Her Majesty, the Druk (Dragon Queen), Gyaltsuen Jetsun Pema Wangchuck; and the incumbent Prime Minister, Tshering Tobgay. Together with other government ministers and officials, these leaders give guidance to the modern education systems and programmes as cur- rently there is no legal framework or education act in Bhutan. However, ‘education is recognised as a basic right and a pre-requisite for achieving the wider social, cultural and economic goals’ and is viewed as an important aspect for Bhutan’s future (International Bureau of Education, 2004, p. 1). To ensure that basic educa- tional facilities are provided, the Ministry of Education was established to maintain schools, facilities, sporting equipment and teaching supplies. The 11 years of pri- mary and secondary education are all fully subsidised by the Bhutanese government with all children having access to education (Worden, 1993). Additionally, public schools have been established in remote locations, although some children may still have to walk long distances to reach a school (Ritchie, 2008). The first ‘modern’ school in Bhutan was opened in 1914, although much of its teaching content was based on Buddhism principles. Prior to this school opening, the overwhelming majority of education content was provided by monasteries to a select number of Bhutanese. Monastic education continued until the late 1950s, when ‘western-style’ education was introduced (Dukpa, 2016, p. 39). Western-style education included teaching English, world history, global geography, modern sci- ence and western customs. Currently, the Bhutanese system educates children for 7 years at primary level and 6 years at secondary level. A selected number of stu- dents continue at tertiary level at one of the two universities: the Royal University of Bhutan or Khesar Gyalpo University of Medical Sciences of Bhutan, selected by application. Other students may be sponsored to study abroad in sectors such as medicine, engineering, agriculture or business (Dorji & Kinga, 2005). Formal edu- cation is taught in English in the hope of remaining progressive and competitive with other nations; however, there are at least 24 dialects of the local language called Dzongkha (Strickland, 2012). Dzongkha is generally spoken at home and socially with friends. Additionally, Nepali is spoken in the northern areas of Bhutan (van Driem, 1994). Bhutan has a growing tourism sector, and employees new to the sector require training to meet the expectations of visitors. However, compared to other nations, tourism is still in its developing stages and operates differently with its tariff system and inclusions. The following information was obtained from the annual Bhutan Tourism Monitor, which is the main document the Bhutanese government uses to keep track of historical tourism data and predict future trends on which to base future industry decisions. The findings assist in the development of tourism, hospi- tality and event programmes and the products and services that are offered in Bhutan. 7 Hotel and Tourism Management Education in Bhutan: The Creation of the Royal… 109

7.2 Emerging Tourism and Hospitality Industry Since the 1970s

The first official tourists into Bhutan occurred in 1974 at the coronation of the fourth King, His Majesty, Jigme Singye Wangchuck, with 274 invited foreign dignitaries. Although other foreign nationals had previously visited Bhutan, the coronation was credited as the first large-scale tourist event/s with accommodation and hospitality being provided on mass (Dorji, 2007). The construction of the international airport in Paro began in 1968 and was further expanded in 1983. Paro is approximately a 1-hour drive from the capital city, Thimphu (Ritchie, 2008). Excluding Indian citi- zens, 93% of international tourists arrive by airplane, with the remainder via land (Tourism Council of Bhutan, 2016a). Druk Air is the official airline for tourists, and the airport is reputed to be one of the world’s ten most dangerous landing strips due to the limited landing space and mountainous terrain (Zimba, 1996). The first tourist hotels, built in 1974 for the King’s coronation, were the Hotel Druk in the town square of Thimphu and the Olathang Hotel set in 28 acres of forest in Paro. Since then, a plethora of hotels and guesthouses have been opened in a variety of locations throughout Bhutan. The Royal Government of Bhutan (RGoB) implements a 5-year plan for tourism policies. The most recent policies are published in the Tourism Monitor 2016–2020. Tourism policy is formed on the principle of ‘High Value, Low Impact tourism which serves the purpose of creating an image of exclusivity and high-yield for Bhutan’ (Tourism Council of Bhutan, 2016a, para. 2). For US$250 per day, a visitor receives a double or twin share room in accommodation with a minimum of three stars, a daily guide, entrance fees, a designated driver and three main meals per day in preselected restaurants. Bhutan’s vision is ‘to foster a vibrant industry as a posi- tive force in the conservation of environment, promotion of cultural heritage, safe- guarding sovereign status of the Nation for significantly contributing to NH [National Happiness]’ (Tourism Council of Bhutan, 2016b, para. 3). The idea of GNH suggests that if the people are happy, the flow-on effects will help stimulate economic development and environmental conservation, promote culture and meet the spiritual and emotional needs of the people (Ministry of Finance, 2000). Today, Bhutan attracts over 90,000 international visitors annually with a pro- posed cap set at 100,000 foreign visitor visas issued annually by 2020 (Fig. 7.1; Johns & Namgyal, 2017). When domestic tourists travelling within Bhutan for rec- reation were added to the 100,000 international visitors, 205,575 was the official number of tourists recorded by the Tourism Council of Bhutan in 2016. The visitor cap is to ensure that tourism is controlled and the principles set out in the govern- ment’s tourism policy are adhered to. In essence, the policy means that Bhutan has a sense of exclusivity and attracts high-yield tourists (based on the visa tariff sys- tem) rather than long-term or budget travellers. The visa tariff system is unique to Bhutan and an ideology for tourism sustainability. Unfortunately, the weather con- ditions in Bhutan are not consistent year-round; therefore the majority of tourists visit in the summer months when the weather is warmer and when the main festivals 110 P. Strickland

120,000 105,407 100,000 100,000

80,000

60,000 40,873 40,000 arrivals 13,626 20,000 6,393 0

Number of international vistor 2000 2005 2010 2015 2020 Year

Fig. 7.1 International visitor arrivals in Bhutan (2001–2020) (Source: Tourism Council of Bhutan (2016a)) take place. The challenge for Bhutan is to attract visitors in the off-peak months and in winter (Strickland, 2012).

7.3 Tourism and Hospitality as a Contributor to Gross Domestic Product

Tourism is a major contributing industry to Bhutan’s GDP. In fact, tourism repre- sents the third largest sector contributing to the GDP of Bhutan (see ‘services’ in Fig. 7.2). Tourism is also the leading source of royalties providing approximately 75% of government royalties in 2016–2016, exceeding the royalties gained from mines (15%), hydropower (6%) and forestry (3.5%) (Ministry of Finance, Royal Government of Bhutan, 2017). This shows the importance of tourism to the nation’s economy and to employment in Bhutan. It is important to understand the international tourism markets for Bhutan in order to know where to target promotional and advertising campaigns (Fuchs, 2017). In 2015–2016, Chinese nationals were the largest market of international visitors, followed by the USA, Japan, Thailand, the UK, Singapore, Germany, Malaysia, Australia, Taiwan, France, Vietnam, Canada and Switzerland (Ministry of Finance, Royal Government of Bhutan, 2017). Indian nationals make up the largest number of visitors to Bhutan but are excluded from these results as they are consid- ered regional tourists and do not require a visa if their stay is less than 7 days. Consequently, many Bhutanese guides specialise in international languages such as German, Japanese, Thai, Spanish and Mandarin in order to cater to non-English-­ speaking tourists. In 2015–2016, 68% of international visitors were part of packaged tours, and 85% were on holiday. Most visitors travelled with other family members, and only 6% were travelling to Bhutan for business. The report also highlighted that most 7 Hotel and Tourism Management Education in Bhutan: The Creation of the Royal… 111

Composition of Sectorial Revenue 1.9% 2.6% Primary Manufacturing

Trade 25% 37.9% Hydro-electricity

9% Finance

Services 23.7%

Fig. 7.2 Composition of sectorial revenue of Bhutan (Source: Ministry of Finance, Royal Government of Bhutan (2017))

Table 7.1 Details of total Amount in $US earnings from international Type of revenue (millions) tourists to Bhutan in 2016 Gross earnings 73.74 Royalties 20.28 Visa fees from tourists 2.15 Visa fees from family tourists 0.04 Two percent tax deduction at source 1.02 Tour operator’s net 49.75 Source: Tourism Council of Bhutan (2016a, b) people travelled to Bhutan at a time that suited their own work and personal com- mitments and 25% chose the timing of their visit based on advice from family and friends who had previously visited Bhutan (Ministry of Finance, Royal Government of Bhutan, 2017). Although Bhutan’s GDP is relatively low compared to other developed coun- tries, the contribution from the tourism sector is significant. Table 7.1 shows the particulars of the total earnings from international visitors to Bhutan in 2016. This is further evidence that the tourism sector is vital for the long-term sustainability of the Bhutanese economy and an area that has the potential to expand even further in the future. Employment in the tourism sector is highly valued as it pays more than the tradi- tional agriculture sector (Strickland, 2012). The government is acutely aware of the 112 P. Strickland shift in preferred employment opportunities in each industry sector, especially for the younger generation. This generation is drawn to the perceived improved life- style gained by residing in the expanding cities and towns. Social activities such as ten-pin bowling, public swimming pool, pubs, nightclubs, restaurants and super- markets, among others, are available in the capital, Thimphu, and are appealing to the youth. Additionally, most tourists stay at least one night in this city; therefore, occupancy in Thimphu in the peak months is high, which creates more employment opportunities.

7.4 Government Response to the Tourism and Hospitality Sector

The government of Bhutan is very aware of the country’s world renown for unique tourism experiences. Today, the Tourism Council of Bhutan’s vision is ‘to promote Bhutan as an exclusive travel destination based on (GNH) values’ (2016a, b, p. 3). The Tourism Council of Bhutan’s mission is to develop and promote high-value, low-impact tourism, to create an enabling environment for a vibrant tourism indus- try, to promote Bhutan as a year-round destination and to foster the regional spread of tourism. The Tourism Council of Bhutan’s mandate is to develop and promote the tourism industry; formulate tourism policies, plans and programmes; and imple- ment relevant policies, laws, regulations and programmes (Tourism Council of Bhutan, 2016b). The government is committed to the long-term sustainability of tourism and to the attraction of international visitors. The foreword to the 2016 Bhutan Tourism Monitor by the director of the Tourism Council, Chhimmy Pem (Tourism Council of Bhutan, 2016a, p. 1), highlighted the continuing government support for the sector: Bhutan continues to gain impetus in the international tourism community as a developing tourism destination that is evident from the growing popularity resulting in increasing arriv- als annually. While the growth in visitor arrivals present opportunities for further growth and benefits, it also requires us to work on proper visitor management and related interven- tions that would enhance visitor experience and promote greater spread of visitation and benefits across regions and seasons. As a destination with emphasis on sustainability at the core of its development agenda, it is important that appropriate interventions are put in place to further sustainable growth and development of tourism.

To this end, it is only imperative that we continue to make concerted efforts to develop and promote sustainable tourism in Bhutan for greater benefits. For this, emphasis will be placed on better visitor management to enhance visitor experiences and spread tourism benefits to wider sections of the population through innovation, service excellence, strong and diversified product portfolio. The tourism policies are based on the current economic conditions of Bhutan and are expected to continue; however, tourism policy has been developed over time. It was in 1982 that the fully government-funded Bhutan Tourism Corporation (BTC) 7 Hotel and Tourism Management Education in Bhutan: The Creation of the Royal… 113 was formed, which was 8 years after the first arrival of official tourists (Ritchie, 2008). The BTC was responsible for all travel arrangements including guides, visas, transport, tours, etc. In 1991, the BTC was privatised and became known as the Bhutan Tourism Corporation Limited with 33 private travel providers. Further changes saw the regulating body become the Tourism Authority of Bhutan and then the Department of Tourism in 1991 (Ritchie, 2008). Currently the Tourism Council of Bhutan is positioned within the Ministry of Trade and Industry portfolio with over 400 licensed travel providers. With so many licences issued, the Tourism Council of Bhutan enforces a mini- mum hotel standard of three stars. For example, to combat the lack of standards regarding facilities, Bhutan created a national star rating system from 1–5 stars that specifically details what is required at each star level and classifies accommodation into four distinct categories: farmstays, homestays (guesthouses), hotels and resorts. Hotels and resorts must offer a minimum of three stars to international visitors, including a bedroom, separate bathroom, television, the Internet, room service, fit- ness centre and restaurant. Homestays have a slightly different rating system but include a separate bedroom and a home-cooked meal. Farmstays have no minimum accommodation standard but must provide a home-cooked meal and are generally located away from large cities and towns. Failure to comply with these strict stan- dards and policies usually meant the cancellation of the travel provider licence, and from 2011 the unlicensed provider could no longer accept international visitor bookings until minimum standards were achieved and the licence was reinstated. These compulsory standards forced large financial investments by the private sector and hotel owners to upgrade their facilities. Subsequently, these investments improved the overall experience reported by international visitors, with a satisfac- tion rate for accommodation in 2016 of 76.44%, which is the highest ever and up from 30.52% in 2000 (Tourism Council of Bhutan, 2000, 2016a). The government continues to monitor accommodation facilities to make sure standards are adhered to, guided by the national star rating system. This is essential for Bhutan’s interna- tional reputation and for new and repeat visitation. Having hotel standards that can be benchmarked through a rating system also assists in service standards that are expected by international tourists and justifies having educational programmes in the hotel and tourism sector in Bhutan. Although the standards regarding accommodation facilities have improved, the first exit polls exposed major concerns in service standards in the tourism sector in general. This included the process of booking trips, itinerary creation, visa pro- cesses, tour guides’ knowledge, levels of English and service standards in hotels and restaurants. The first tourism education programme created in response was the Middle Management Programme currently offered at the Royal Institute for Tourism and Hospitality (RITH) (see section ‘Current Programmes Offered at the Royal Institute for Tourism and Hospitality’). However, the programme content was first delivered in 2008 and operated out of the Royal Institute of Management (RIM) until RITH was established. Prior to this, there were no formal tourism and hospital- ity qualifications for employees’ in Bhutan. Staff were simply trained on the prem- ises, therefore having no real understanding of international service standards in a 114 P. Strickland hotel or tour guide expectations. The more senior management of Bhutanese hotels may have studied abroad to receive a formal qualification, and often the general managers of hotels were recruited from other countries due to the lack of qualified talent in Bhutan.

7.5 Creation of the Royal Institute of Tourism and Hospitality

The Royal Institute for Tourism and Hospitality (RITH) was established to bridge the gap between the service standards and expectations of foreign countries and Bhutan. RITH’s campus offers a boarding house for students, a training school for chefs and housekeeping, a hotel, banquet hall and a library. RITH is perceived as a solution to the lack of formal qualifications in a rapidly advancing tourist economy (Guillaumont, 2017). The RITH website describes the campus as: A modern tourism and hotel management institute jointly funded by the governments of Austria and Bhutan. It is situated in one of the best campus in Thimphu. It is located in Upper Motithang, Thimphu, and has a beautiful and serene environment befitting for learn- ing activities. It has modern state-of-art facilities and aspires to be the regional centre of excellence where tourism and hospitality studies are concerned (RITH, 2017a, ‘Home’, para. 1). The facilities are state-of-the-art in hospitality management, hotel, tour and spa management operations. As this is the first dedicated training facility for the tourism and hospitality sector in Bhutan, the campus is very proud to boast a training kitchen, restaurant, banqueting hall, climate-controlled teaching rooms, simulated travel agency and a library with Internet access. Although these are standard mini- mum requirements in other training institutions, for Bhutan, this is very modern. As a comparison, the Royal Institute of Management has no climate control or reliable Internet access. During winter, it is extremely cold, and classes were often cancelled due to impending weather conditions that would impede students walking home safely. The study programmes are designed to prepare students for a long-term career in the field of their choice and offer management progression over time. After com- pleting entry-level qualifications, students may continue on to middle management training at RITH. Currently, students who wish to study an undergraduate degree in hospitality or tourism must travel abroad to an international institution. Students that study an undergraduate degree are generally sponsored by universities, by non- government organisations or through government scholarships in a variety of coun- tries including Austria, Switzerland, the Netherlands, Canada, China and Australia (Sinha, 2009). 7 Hotel and Tourism Management Education in Bhutan: The Creation of the Royal… 115

7.6 Current Programmes Offered at the Royal Institute for Tourism and Hospitality

The Royal Institute for Tourism and Hospitality (RITH) offers two distinct courses that apply to the tourism and hotel sector. Firstly, RITH offers students a Diploma in Hotel Management or a Diploma in Tourism Management. Both are 2-year pro- grammes offering foundation subjects that combine practical training with theoreti- cal content based on the most important aspects of the tourism and hospitality industry. The first two terms include foundation theory, global concepts and practi- cal training in the on-site restaurant, kitchen and banquette hall. Some students will also experience the laundry and spa divisions. After completing the foundation subjects, students are required to specialise in a specific field, being either Hotel or Tourism Management. The reason for this is to make sure that graduates enter the two different sectors with their associated differ- ing employment opportunities but also to target the career directions of individuals. Students that select Hotel Management will operate hospitality businesses such as hotels, restaurants and guesthouses. The skills students will have developed include communication and language, food and beverage management, human resources, accounting and eTourism concepts. Students that choose Tourism Management as a career path have options in travel and ticketing, tour guiding, itinerary creation, group bookings, finance and sustainability concepts including encouraging visita- tion in off-peak times. Once a Diploma in Tourism Management or Hotel Management is completed, up to 30 applicants can be accepted for the Middle Management Programme. This is a unique programme designed solely for tourism and hospitality employees working in Bhutan. This course is intended for thirty young male and female Bhutanese who have already gained some work experiences in the tourism and hospitality industry and are currently employed. The participating hotels recognize that these employees have the potential to move up to managerial positions in midlevel positions in their hotels. This opens the door to a promising future for these young Bhutanese and helps the country to develop. (RITH, 2017b, ‘For Whom is this Program Intended?’, para. 1) Through foreign tourist exit surveys that started in the year 2000 and were autho- rised by the Bhutanese government, it was identified that ‘many employees in the hotel industry lack proper training and education to meet the increasing demand of today’s tourism industry’ (RITH, 2017b, ‘Middle Management Training’, para. 7). These quantitative surveys were conducted in English at Bhutan’s only international airport; participants were asked to rate their experience on a variety of topics related to their visit. The information gleaned from the visitor surveys was deemed critical by the Bhutanese government, as tourism is one of the country’s main sources of income. The concept of RITH was entrenched as a way to improve visitors’ experiences. 116 P. Strickland

The Middle Management Programme was started in 2008 with funding from a variety of sources including the Bhutanese government and donations from interna- tional foundations. Funding is provided in 10-year cycles to secure the programme’s longevity and provide security to its staff and future students. A Board of Directors moderates the programme to ensure its quality and that standards are being met. Classes are held in the tourism low season to allow students to leave their place of employment and study full time for 2 months twice a year. Employers still pay stu- dents a percentage of their wage and provide lunch, which offsets some of the costs associated with the programme. After 2 years, qualified students will be awarded with a ‘Diploma in Advanced Studies in Hotel Management’ certified by both the HWZ University of Applied Sciences based in Zurich, Switzerland, and the Bhutan Royal Institute of Tourism and Hospitality. The lecturers, teachers and mentors associated with the programme come from a variety of sectors and locations. In each programme cycle, the staff include up to nine international lecturers from western countries; nine local teachers of specialist subjects such as English, infor- mation technology and facility management; and six Bhutanese mentors from the hospitality and tourism industry. These talents, combined, write and deliver the intensive programmes. This is a cost-effective method with the majority of the teaching staff volunteering their time and expertise in return for reimbursement of all their expenses. Visiting teachers are also asked to donate books to the RITH library to save on purchasing and shipping costs. As there are a limited numbers accepted into the Middle Management Programme, other alternatives have emerged. These include short courses of training in tourism and hospitality offered by The Service Division Under the Tourism Council of Bhutan or via a private education provider titled the Bhutan International School of Tourism and Hospitality (BISTH). The BISTH was created in 2010 by the Wangchuk Group, which owns three hotels in Bhutan and had also identified shortcomings in the skills of their employees. The Wangchuk Group, in collaboration with the Hospitality Institute IAM in Kolkata, offers certificate and diploma programmes. The courses offered by BISTH are summarised in Table 7.2.

Table 7.2 Bhutan Type and length of course Programme title International School of Certificate – 2 ½ months Cultural Tourist Guide Course Tourism and Hospitality qualifications and length of Certificate – 6 months Bakery time to complete each course Food and Beverage (BISTH, 2017) Front Office Food Production House Keeping Spa Management Diploma – 2 years Diploma in Culinary Skills Diploma in Travel and Tourism Diploma in Hotel Management Diploma in Restaurant Operation 7 Hotel and Tourism Management Education in Bhutan: The Creation of the Royal… 117

To give some perspective regarding the number of students, in 2017, 179 RITH students graduated with a Diploma in Tourism and Hospitality, and all 30 students enrolled in Middle Management Training are expected to graduate in 2018. Conversely, BISTH has a significantly less number of students enrolled perhaps due to the cost, whereas the programmes at RITH are heavily subsidised by external foundations or the hotels at which the students are employed. This allows Bhutanese hospitality and tourism sector employees the opportunity to obtain formal qualifica- tions in Bhutan.

7.7 Teaching Tourism and Hospitality in Bhutan: A Personal Reflection

The first international academics and specialists were recruited in 2008 to teach on a 2-year course initially titled Bhutan Hotel Middle Management Programme. The programme accepted 30 students and was funded by nongovernment organisations being the Jacobs Foundation, Hochschule für Wirtschaft Zürich in Switzerland and the Elysium Foundation in California. Academics from around the globe were invited to submit their résumés, and the successful applicants were selected based on their particular tourism and hospitality expertise. The recruitment process con- sidered the overall course structure and the applicant’s availability, preferred dates teaching in Bhutan, teaching experience, expertise and formal education. After suc- cessfully obtaining a position, the finer details of the programme were released. Academics teaching on the programme were required to create all lecture content, assessment tasks and final exams, provide assessment feedback for students and administer results; afterwards, they were required to surrender all intellectual prop- erty to the programme director for use on future courses. Funding was provided for 7 years with the anticipation that the academics would train local Bhutanese staff to eventually take over the teaching of the programme, so as to not rely solely on inter- national funding. The RITH website (2017b, ‘Type of Studies’, para. 4) states, ‘local course lecturers are trained by international experts working side by side. International experts are working “pro bono”, implying travel costs and accommo- dation are paid by the project’. This still occurs, and most of the international aca- demics decide to stay longer as tourists to travel the countryside at their own expense. I first started teaching into the Bhutanese Hotel Middle Management Programme (BHMMP) at RIM in 2012. The BHMMP programme was delivered in the off- peak tourist season. I was scheduled to teach in January, during Bhutan’s winter months. Temperatures varied between 5 and 15 degrees centigrade but immedi- ately plummeted around 3:00 pm when the sun moved behind the mountains. As most students walked vast distances to get to RIM, students were released from classes at 2:00 pm to be able to walk home before the chilling cold set in. Students were required to continue their classes at home with homework set by the teacher. 118 P. Strickland

Fig. 7.3 Classroom at the Royal Institute of Management (RIM) (Source: Paul Strickland)

Additionally, RIM had no heating, so inside the classrooms was almost as cold as outside; however, the classrooms were well insulated and not being exposed to the wind helped the staff and students to remain warm. The teaching areas were basic, and the academic staff provided their own laptops to plug into the data projector. Classes were supposed to be from 9 to 12 am and 1 to 4 pm with a 1-hour lunch break. This did not always occur as the weather had a strong influence on travelling to and from the campus. Lunch was generally provided by the hotels in which the students were employed, and hot food could be purchased on campus for a reason- able price. Figure 7.3 shows a classroom in RIM, and Fig. 7.4 depicts the lawn where the students enjoyed their lunch in the sunshine. After the early classroom departures, students were ­encouraged to continue to practise their English and complete any homework to be assessed when they returned the following day. The students varied in age from 18 years to nearly 50. Students were selected for the programme based on their current position in a hotel and promotion potential. All students had full-time employment in a hotel that subsidised their student fees and food and continued to pay their wages during their study periods. The philoso- phy behind this seemingly generous gesture by hotel management was that the stu- dent would learn from leading academics and then return to their place of employment to apply the knowledge gained and teach other entry-level employees. It was envisaged that, over time, employee and customer satisfaction rates would increase and the hotels rewarded with higher revenues and lower customer dissatis- faction rates encouraging repeat business and positive word of mouth. The BHMMP (now referred to as Middle Management Training) was relocated from RIM to RITH, and the funding arrangements changed in 2014. Since the pro- gramme’s inception, only 30 students have been accepted, which is still the case. 7 Hotel and Tourism Management Education in Bhutan: The Creation of the Royal… 119

Fig. 7.4 Female students having lunch (Source: Paul Strickland)

This enrolment cap is due to budget and staffing capacities as well as limitations in the overall campus construction, which has not yet been fully realised. Figure 7.5 depicts the students who were the 2012 Bhutan Hotel Middle Management pro- gramme intake at RIM, whilst Fig. 7.6 highlights the Middle Management Training at RITH in 2014. Both pictures show sunshine; however, Fig. 7.5 was photographed during Bhutan’s winter, and Fig. 7.6 was taken in Bhutan’s summer. As can be seen, there is no difference in the traditional Bhutanese clothing worn during school hours in summer and winter, although warm coats were worn after lessons were finished for the day. From a decree by the fourth king, Bhutan’s government enforces that traditional clothing must be worn within certain sectors such as education, tourism and services, finance and government roles. This is to ensure the longevity of Bhutan’s traditional textile industry and to maintain cultural continuity (Strickland, 2014). From the beginning, most of the teaching staff were global hospitality scholars or high-achieving hotel professionals with little exposure to Bhutan. This meant customs, traditions, religions and daily interactions had to be learnt, respected and incorporated into the syllabus. Concepts such as preservation of the environment, cultural diversity and Gross National Happiness were encouraged. Gross National Happiness considers more than financial prosperity to include lifestyle and environ- mental and spiritual philosophies as collectively making individuals more happy 120 P. Strickland

Fig. 7.5 Students studying at the Royal Institute of Management (RIM) in 2012 (Source: Paul Strickland)

(Bates, 2009). It is a philosophy that must be incorporated into all levels of teaching from primary school onwards. The first challenge for visiting academics was to learn the first names of students. Figure 7.7 depicts a classroom set up for Middle Management Training with each student’s first name displayed facing the teaching staff at the front of the classroom. Viewing the names assisted in identifying individuals without causing offence when questions and answers were exchanged. As students accepted academics over time, personal conversations regarding family and work-life emerged. After even more time, further intimate discussions regarding personal upbringings, culture and spiri- tuality occurred (Fig. 7.8). The RITH campus is located near the top of a mountain and set in dense forest. Access is limited to one road, and many students and teaching staff car pool as most Bhutanese do not own vehicles due to the expensive purchasing and operating costs of fuel and annual registration. Taxis are also available. Many locals choose to walk, as trekking up and down mountains is common; the journey to the campus on foot takes approximately an hour and a half from the bottom of the mountain. The impli- cations of these transportation choices include students being late or not showing up at all, personal cars used as a taxi service or long days due to travel on foot. Additionally, every Tuesday is ‘environmental day’, meaning no cars are permitted on the roads after 9:00 am except for taxis and cars used for tourism; therefore on Tuesdays all students travelling by car must arrive early. 7 Hotel and Tourism Management Education in Bhutan: The Creation of the Royal… 121

Fig. 7.6 Students studying at the Royal Institute for Tourism and Hospitality (RITH) in 2014 (Source: Paul Strickland)

7.8 Future Direction of Tourism and Hospitality Education in Bhutan

In 2016, tourists reported 80% satisfaction with the service they received from Bhutanese hotel and restaurant staff and 87% satisfaction with tour guides (Tourism Council of Bhutan, 2016b), an increase from 35% to 58%, respectively, in 2013 (Tourism Council of Bhutan, 2013). This indicates that the tourism and hospitality industry is improving, which can be attributed to the increase in education, training and attitudes of the Bhutanese tourism and hospitality employees. RITH was cre- ated to bridge the shortfall in tourism and hospitality skills and formal qualifica- tions. RITH will continue to offer tourism and hospitality courses, and it is anticipated that most, if not all, future employees will receive some kind of formal training through the various programmes offered at RITH by the government and other private providers. Although international teaching staff are still required in the programmes, eventually Bhutanese nationals will be the primary providers of tour- ism and hospitality education. Continuous funding is not guaranteed from interna- tional organisations, although current funding is offered in 10-year cycles so that RITH will have some warning if funding is to cease. Because of the possibility of funding being withdrawn, RITH has constructed a hotel, spa centre and function rooms for paying guests to generate additional income. These are in operation and 122 P. Strickland

Fig. 7.7 Classroom at RITH (Source: Paul Strickland) international visitors and locals can make reservations. It is also a training environ- ment for students that will continue to grow in occupancy and ideally become a financially viable facility. The challenge for Bhutanese tourism and hospitality education is the capacity of RITH as there are more applicants than places available. This is partly due to employment in the tourism and hospitality sector earning a greater wage than tradi- tional farming work and the influx of young Bhutanese citizens moving to cities and larger towns in search of employment and the desire for a better standard of living. There is also the possibility that formally trained Bhutanese could move interna- tionally in search of employment, different experiences and greater wages, which is not the intent of RITH. The future of the tourism and hospitality sector is financially strong and will continue to grow. Government policy will continue to dictate the number of visitor arrivals with the option of increasing the visitor tariff to yield an even greater con- tribution to Bhutan’s GDP. It will be interesting to see how many more hotels will be permitted to be established in the future, especially in remote locations. However, this will be determined based on regional accessibility, as creating and maintaining roads is a major cost to the Bhutanese government. The demand for tourism and hospitality education in Bhutan will continue to grow. There will be a stronger appeal for industry to hire qualified employees, and this can only be achieved through formal qualifications. 7 Hotel and Tourism Management Education in Bhutan: The Creation of the Royal… 123

Fig. 7.8 Main entrance at RITH (Source: Paul Strickland)

This chapter has examined the creation of RITH and the tourism and hospitality education programmes offered in Bhutan. The need for local tourism and hospitality education was highlighted by evidence-based research commissioned by the Bhutanese government regarding the expectations of international visitors. The findings resulted in the introduction of a star rating system for hotels and subsequent service standards for Bhutanese employees. This initiated the construction of a des- ignated tourism and hospitality education facility, RITH. To ensure education ­quality and international standards, programmes were designed based on western visitor expectations and consequent required qualification levels. Although funding for RITH is currently through a combination of the Bhutanese government and for- eign investment, eventually RITH will be self-sufficient. This case study adds to the overall literature on Asian tourism and hospitality education cementing the need for formal qualifications in developing countries. Bhutan is a small country with inherent unique concepts such as Gross National Happiness and tourism tariff systems for international tourists. Future research should focus on the expansion of RITH and the development of an undergraduate hospitality and tourism programme for senior management. This may entice gradu- ates to remain in Bhutan and accept senior management roles in hotels, travel agen- cies and tour companies. 124 P. Strickland

References

Bates, W. (2009). Gross national happiness. Asian-Pacific Economic Literature, 23(2), 1–16. Bhutan International School of Tourism and Hospitality. (2017). Introduction. Retrieved August 6, 2017, from http://www.bisht.bt/index.html Dorji, L., & Kinga, S. (2005). Youth in Bhutan: Education, employment and development. The Centre of Bhutan Studies, 14, 4–126. Dorji, P. (2007). International tourism monitor Bhutan 2006. Thimphu, Bhutan: Department of Tourism, Royal Government of Bhutan. Dukpa, Z. (2016). The history and development of monastic education in Bhutan. In M. J. Schuelka & T. W. Maxwell (Eds.), Education in Bhutan (pp. 39–55). Singapore: Springer. Fuchs, C. (2017). Social media: A critical introduction. London, UK: Sage. Guillaumont, P. (2017). Vulnerability and resilience: A conceptual framework applied to three Asian countries – Bhutan, Maldives, and Nepal. Manila, Philippines: Asian Development Bank. International Bureau of Education. (2004). The national report on the development of education, Bhutan. Retrieved June 8, 2017, from http://www.ibe.unesco.org/National_Reports/ICE_2004/ bhutan.pdf Johns, R., & Namgyal, T. (2017). Wellbeing through travel: High value-low impact tourism in the developing country, Bhutan. In S. K. Roy, D. S. Mutum, & B. Nguyen (Eds.), Services mar- keting cases in emerging markets: An Asian perspective (pp. 159–168). Basel, Switzerland: Springer International Publishing. Ministry of Finance, Royal Government of Bhutan. (2000). Development towards gross national happiness: D. o. A. a. D. management. Thimphu, Bhutan: Author. Ministry of Finance, Royal Government of Bhutan. (2017). National revenue report 2015–2016. Thimphu, Bhutan: Author. Ritchie, M. (2008). Tourism in the Kingdom of Bhutan: A unique approach. In J. Cochrane (Ed.), Asian tourism: Growth and change (pp. 273–283). Oxford, UK: Elsevier. Royal Institute for Tourism and Hospitality. (2017a). Home. Retrieved August 9, 2017, from http:// rith.edu.bt/ Royal Institute for Tourism and Hospitality. (2017b). Middle management programme. Retrieved August 9, 2017, from http://rith.edu.bt/index.php/programs/middle-management-training Sinha, C. (2009). Effects of education and ICT use on gender relations in Bhutan. Information Technologies and International Development, 5(3), 21–34. Strickland, P. (2012). Hotel management education in Bhutan: Teaching sustainable principles). In P. Sloan, C. Simons-Kaufman, & W. Legrand (Eds.), Sustainable hospitality and tourism as motors for development: Case studies from developing regions of the world (pp. 312–326). New York: Routledge. Strickland, P. (2014). The benefits of national dress and fashion trends of a Royal Bhutanese wed- ding. In K. M. Williams, J. Laing, & W. Frost (Eds.), Fashion, design and events (pp. 57–68). New York: Routledge. Tourism Council of Bhutan. (2000). Bhutan tourism monitor: Annual report 2000. Thimphu, Bhutan: Author. Tourism Council of Bhutan. (2013). Bhutan tourism monitor: Annual report 2013. Thimphu, Bhutan: Author. Tourism Council of Bhutan. (2016a). Tourism policy. Retrieved May 18, 2018 from https://www. tourism.gov.bt/about-us/tourism-policy Tourism Council of Bhutan. (2016b). About TCP. Retrieved May 19, 2018 from https://www.tour- ism.gov.bt/about-us/about-tcb van Driem, G. (1994). Language policy in Bhutan. In M. Aris & M. Hutt (Eds.), Bhutan: Aspects of culture and development (pp. 87–105). Gartmore, Scotland: Paul Strachan – Kiscadale. Worden, R. L. (1993). Bhutan. In A. M. Savada & H. G. Lawrence (Eds.), Nepal and Bhutan coun- try studies (pp. 251–341). Washington, DC: Library of Congress. Zimba, D. Y. (1996). Bhutan: Three decades of planned development. In Ramakant & R. C. Misra (Eds.), Bhutan: Society and polity (2nd ed., pp. 166–185). New Delhi, India: Indus Publishing Company. Chapter 8 Tourism Education in Vietnam

Erwin Losekoot, Earney Lasten, and Tran Phu Cuong

Abstract This chapter outlines the political history of Vietnam and the importance of tourism and hospitality to its continued development. It describes the growth of tourism and hospitality education provision and how that fits in with the develop- ment of a thriving tourism sector of the economy. Vietnam’s control economy has impacted on the ability of the tourism and hospitality industry to respond to cus- tomer demands. Many parents felt there was no choice but to send their children overseas for a quality tertiary education, but that is changing with an increasing number of high-quality providers based in Vietnam. Challenges remain in terms of finding enough qualified staff to teach, finding sufficient resources to pay those staff and ensuring that unscrupulous and sub-standard education providers are not allowed to proliferate and damage the reputation of Vietnam’s tourism and hospital- ity education providers. Students also need to be exposed to current industry stan- dards and experiences and be allowed to develop soft skills which are increasingly important for future development of the industry.

Keywords Vietnam · Education · Tourism · Hospitality · Challenges · Employment

8.1 Introduction

Vietnam is a country which is often associated with war and refugees but also with awesome tourism experiences. This chapter provides a brief history of the country and its education system before going on to explain the importance that tourism can play in the development of communities and the role of tourism education to make that happen.

E. Losekoot (*) · E. Lasten RMIT University Vietnam, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected] T. P. Cuong Vietnam National Administration of Tourism, Hanoi, Vietnam e-mail: [email protected]

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 125 C. Liu, H. Schänzel (eds.), Tourism Education and Asia, Perspectives on Asian Tourism, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4_8 126 E. Losekoot et al.

Vietnam is officially called the ‘Socialist Republic of Vietnam’ and was part of China for over 1000 years before being a French colony in the nineteenth century. In the twenty-first century, it has developed at an extremely rapid pace, moving from an agricultural economy to one where manufacturing and the service economy dominate. Tourism has become increasingly important to the country, and a number of major government-led projects are underway. Many international hotel compa- nies are also seeking to expand within Vietnam, not just in the main cities of Hanoi in the north and Ho Chi Minh City in the south. In 2017, Vietnam welcomed 12.9 million international visitors (a 29% increase on 2016), with 84% arriving by air. Neighbouring Asian countries accounted for 75% of those visitors and Europe 15%, with the remaining 10% from other coun- tries. Largest individual source countries were (in order of size) China, Korea, Japan, Taiwan, the USA and Russia (Vietnam National Administration of Tourism [VNAT], 2018a, 2018b). People come to Vietnam to see sights such as the natural beauty of Ha Long Bay, the Thien Mu Pagoda in Hue, Hoan Kiem Lake in Hanoi, the fishing village of Hoi An, the beaches of Phu Quoc, the much photographed Sa Pa Terraces and the Cu Chi Tunnels used by the Viet Cong (Chinese supported) army during the war against the American-backed South Vietnamese army. Domestic tourism in 2017 stood at 62 million, an 8.8% increase on 2016. As a result, it is perhaps not surprising that tourism and hospitality education in Vietnam has long been of concern to scholars. The December 1992 issue of Tourism Management carries a conference notice by Kaye Chon (then based at the University of Nevada – Las Vegas) promoting a conference in Da Nang that focused on: a broad range of topics that are related to tourism and hotel industry development opportu- nities in Vietnam, including: Growth potential of tourism in Vietnam; Education and Training Needs Assessment; and other topics related to the potential impact of tourism. (Tourism Management, 1992) Hobson (1994) noted that any successful tourist attraction was dependent on a steady pool of ‘skilled and trained manpower’ (p. 154) if the destination was to see long-term development in a sustainable manner. He warned that the number of hotel and tourism projects was outstripping the number of places available for tourism and hospitality training. By 2018, VNAT (2018b) identified 156 tourism and hospi- tality training providers in Vietnam, including 48 universities, 43 colleges, 40 voca- tional schools and 25 training companies. Back at the start of the millennium, there were a number of notable scholars interested in and writing about tourism education. Smith (2002) suggested that tour- ism’s education origins stem from anthropology and that “anthropology with its emphasis on cross-cultural assessments and specific interests in ethnicity and heri- tage should be integral in all hospitality curricula …” (p. 47), a view supported more recently by Cohen and Cohen (2012). Smith argued it should make us ask questions about our qualities as hosts, the values and motivations of our guests and how we can best serve both parties. This became particularly important as the arrival of jet aircraft made travel quicker, cheaper and therefore more accessible. It also meant that a wider variety of people could become tourists (Smith, 2002). Vietnam is a 8 Tourism Education in Vietnam 127 country about which relatively little is known. Because of this, it attracts many young people eager to visit somewhere ‘different’, or a little bit ‘off the beaten track’. That was fine when getting to Vietnam was a challenge, but with modern, relatively cheap travel options with budget airlines and plentiful information online, as well as the availability of online visa applications, many more people are coming. Not all of these are necessarily well-prepared independent travellers, although the backpackers’ district in Ho Chi Minh City’s District 1 shows many are self-sufficient. Tribe (2002) made the point that tourism education was gaining credibility at this time, evidenced by the appearance of three specialist journals in the field of tourism education. Tribe identified that historic tourism education (largely from the USA) was very vocational but that there were signs of an increasing level of maturity, sophistication and conceptualisation. He noted the importance of broadening the conversation and the field of study to include academics and industry from ‘devel- oping countries’ and to move from what to teach to consider how to teach tourism. The significance of this book is that it comes at a time when Vietnam is starting to realise that, while the industry certainly needs people with food and beverage and customer service skills on the front line, it will also increasingly need supervisory, management and strategic staff who can plan and co-ordinate the tourism offering in Vietnam. In a one-party, top-down hierarchical and planned economy, tourism and hospitality organisations will be looking for empowered staff who can co-create memorable experiences for their guests. Such staff will need to be well-educated independent thinkers with the confidence to make decisions in the best interest of tourists. This chapter in the book sets out the history of education and tourism education in Vietnam and identifies some of the reasons why Vietnamese tourism and hospital- ity education is what it is today. Following on from a brief introduction to the coun- try of Vietnam, it reviews the history of tourism education in Vietnam, considers the current key players and proposes some future opportunities.

8.2 Background on Vietnam

Vietnam is a country at the centre of Asia. It borders China, Laos and Cambodia and has a long s-shaped coastline along the Pacific Ocean and a surface area of 331,000 sq. km (Nguyen & Nguyen, 2008). While Vietnamese are the majority, Vietnam is host to 54 different ethnic groups. According to Countrymeters (2018), Vietnam’s population is 96,446,271, of which 49.4% are male and 50.6% are female; 33% of the population live in urban areas while 44% of the country is forested. Life expec- tancy in Vietnam is 72.2 years (69.7 for men and 74.9 for women). The economy is growing at an annual average GDP growth rate of 6.8%. Adult literacy is 97%, with 95.5% of the population completing primary school while 49.2% of the tertiary level students are female (United Nations, 2013). These statistics hold their own against many other countries and provide an excellent base for developing a highly 128 E. Losekoot et al.

Fig. 8.1 Vietnam in South East Asia skilled and productive tourism sector. This suggests that tourism educators are building on a strong foundation of literate students of both genders. Lattman (2013) claimed that the first university in Vietnam, known as ‘The Temple of Literature’, was constructed in 1070, so Vietnam really does have a long history of tertiary edu- cation (Fig. 8.1).

8.3 Tourism Employment in Vietnam

The Vietnam National Administration of Tourism (VNAT) is part of the Vietnamese Ministry of Culture, Sports and Tourism. Tourism is seen as an important area for employment in Vietnam and has been studied by the Ministry of Labour, Invalids and Social Affairs. There is a recognition by the authorities that human resources working in the area of tourism need to acquire the right knowledge and skills, 8 Tourism Education in Vietnam 129

Table 8.1 Hotel Number of Number of accommodation in Vietnam Hotel rating hotels rooms in 2017. (VNAT, 2018b) 5 star 118 34,400 4 star 262 34,400 3 star 490 34,200 2 star 1264 46,000 1 star 3649 67,000

including foreign languages (in addition to English) and information technology, but also need the spirit of attentive service and be ready to serve guests. VNAT also identifies a requirement for tourism planning and brand management expertise and that tourism has great potential for improving the quality of life of Vietnamese fami- lies and the community they live and work in. The 2018 Vietnam Tourism Annual Report (VNAT, 2018b) records 25,600 tourist accommodation providers in December 2017. Table 8.1 shows the breakdown of hotels of different star ratings. This is an excellent base from which to prepare Vietnam for a tourism boom. Companies such as Accor and IHG are already well-established in Vietnam, and the merger in 2016 of Sheraton and Marriott hotels has given the combined group sev- eral properties in key destinations, with more being planned. Five-star hotels have fewer hotels but the same number of rooms as four and three-star hotels, suggesting that five-star hotels are larger, with more rooms and therefore able to offer more facilities in terms of food and beverage and leisure services. The report identifies a further 84,039 rooms in 7113 establishments ranging from campsites and home- stays to cruise ships and tourism villages. Promoting these facilities and creating demand for them are 1600 travel agencies, 52 international airlines and 4 domestic airlines. The Vietnamese government has worked hard to develop Vietnam’s labour force to meet the demands of the tourism industry. VNAT (2018b) estimates that there are 2.25 million people in the tourism workforce in Vietnam, of whom 750,000 are directly employed. Total direct and indirect tourism employment is forecast to rise to 3,850,000 by 2020, leading to a number of development plans (Vietnam Tourism Development Strategy 2020; Vision 2030; and Development Plan for Vietnam’s Tourism Labour Force 2011–2020). The government ran a National Conference on Tourism Development in August 2016, at which a number of targets were set and challenges identified. In the annual tourism report (VNAT, 2018b), hotel staff made up 44% of the working population in Vietnam’s tourism industry, 12% were in tour operations and 36% were in sales and marketing and other support services, with the remainder in government management. University graduates made up over 65% of tour guides, marketing staff and reception staff. Tourism employers claim 60% of staff have some foreign language skills, English being the most popular followed by Chinese and French. The report also identifies that 68% of the tourism workforce have computer skills (VNAT, 2018b). While the report suggests that there is prog- ress in meeting the skill needs of the tourism industry and that there is considerable 130 E. Losekoot et al. interest from the Vietnamese people to work in the tourism industry, there are still a number of challenges. These were identified as a lack of foreign language skills, ICT skills, communication and other soft skills and a general lack of confidence in dealing with international visitors. The report recommended closer ties between training centres and tourism companies (VNAT, 2018b). Improved educational resources and support for management development was considered essential, in particular a need for management experience in larger, international companies.

8.4 Historical Background of Tourism Education in Vietnam

Several authors (e.g. Cooper, 1997; Lattman, 2013; Van Binh & Van Minh, 1997) discuss the history of education in Vietnam. They all acknowledge the impact of Confucianism. This belief system or political ideology focuses on the importance of a number of aspects of society – family relationships, respect, the importance of rituals and ceremonies, the value of restraint and a strong belief in the power and benefits of education as way to improve oneself. Some have described it as being about ‘humanism’ and about the greatest good for the greatest number of people. Both rulers and teachers are expected to conduct themselves morally and ethically and are seen as important role models for the day-to-day way in which people live. Respect and worship of ancestors is also highly valued. Confucianism believes that those who have the opportunity to study should then seek to use that knowledge to help the community they came from. This should resonate with all those who see tourism development as a tool for regional development – a claim that Cohen and Cohen (2012) appear to be somewhat sceptical about. The arrival of the French as a colonial power (mid-nineteenth to twentieth centu- ries) led to the creation of three universities, but most of the population still had no access to education. This changed in 1945 when Vietnam gained its independence from France and its new President, Ho Chi Minh, used the slogan ‘an illiterate nation is a powerless one’ (Lattman, 2013, p. 2) and recruited 96,000 teachers to tackle the literacy problem. The Vietnam War (or ‘American War’ as it is often referred to in this region) ran from 1955 to 1975, with the North being supported by the former Soviet Union and China and the South by the United States, South Korea, Thailand, Australia and France. After the surrender and reunification in 1975 fol- lowing the fall of Saigon, Russian influence led to Vietnam adopting some of the Soviet approaches to education. London (2011) suggests that creating an education system compliant with a Leninist political system is challenging if the aim of educa- tion is to prepare the population to be productive members of a market economy and for social mobility. Furthermore, he argues that ‘Vietnam’s education system may be thought of as a vast social field in which aspirations and constraints collide’ (p. 3). Tourism is arguably at the forefront of this, or ‘where the rubber hits the road’, and this is precisely why this is an interesting and suitable topic for academic discussion. Figure 8.2, below, demonstrates the history of education in Vietnam. 8 Tourism Education in Vietnam 131

Fig. 8.2 Brief history of Vietnam. (Source: https://www.slideshare.net/vietnam1234/ vietnam-2409279)

The impact of the ‘Doi Moi Reform’ on education has been significant (Cooper, 1997; Lattman, 2013; Van Binh & Van Minh, 1997). To explain, in the 10 years after reunification, the economy suffered from centralisation of decision-making, high inflation and low levels of exports, so by 1986 a period of ‘renovation’ or ‘recon- struction’ (the usual translation of ‘Doi Moi’) was announced. This aimed to retain the socialist goals of the nation but to allow a more market-led economy to develop. Trines (2017) describes this process as moving from a command-style economy to a more open system – but without relaxing political control. The result is a very vibrant and innovative group of individuals operating with an extremely rigid bureaucracy, resulting in many complaints, frustrations and accusations of corrup- tion and nepotism, as government officials are required to sanction everything (e.g. delegates attending an international conference in Vietnam must submit a biography demonstrating they are an expert in their field). However, as Trines (2017) points out, this change to a more open economy has moved the country from ‘an impover- ished, war-ravaged country’ to ‘one of the most dynamic economies in the world’ (Trines, 2017, p. 1). He claims Vietnam’s GDP grew 3.3% between 1990 and 2016 (second only to China). Van Binh and Van Minh suggest that this change, together with the lifting of US sanctions and the increase in demand for travel globally led to 132 E. Losekoot et al. unprecedented opportunities in Vietnamese tourism. One major impact of this change was more funding for education and the opportunity to operate privatised educational establishments, especially in vocational subjects (Nguyen & Nguyen, 2008). This was seen as one way of addressing the shortage in trained personnel for the Vietnamese tourism and hospitality industry. In a report for the World Education Service’s World Education News and Reviews publication, Kelly provides an overview of the Vietnamese higher education system as it was at the start of the year 2000. Kelly (2000) reported that 25% of the Vietnamese population is either teaching or being taught and therefore claimed that ‘education is an important part of the society. It is a major preoccupation of govern- ment and is a highly valued and respected activity in Vietnamese society’ (p. 1), with almost 18 million students and 500,000 teachers and instructors. She claims this shows a serious commitment to education compared to the situation under French colonial rule when only the elite had the opportunity to study. However, she did warn that, while this is the case in larger conurbations such as Ho Chi Minh City and Hanoi, there are differences in regions and mountainous provinces, where women and ethnic minorities are under-represented in the school-going population. In Vietnam’s tertiary education system, government regulation changes have encouraged the private sector to deliver education, particularly in pre-school, voca- tional and tertiary education, and suggests the creation of a single ministry (the Ministry of Education and Training – MOET) in 1990 led to more co-ordination in the education sector, although there was still relatively little linkage between research and teaching (Kelly, 2000). Moving from a centrally planned economy means that graduates are no longer guaranteed employment, even with a tertiary qualification, and this has led to a more general education rather than job-specific training. There is criticism that the requirement to include Marxist-Leninist content alienates students and does little to provide graduates with relevant skills in the workplace (Trines, 2017). MOET has also reorganised existing institutions as shown by the following list (Clark, 2014; Kelly, 2000): • Vietnam National University, Hanoi, was formed in 1993 from three different local institutions. • Vietnam National University, Ho Chi Minh City (originally the Ho Chi Minh City National University), was founded in 1995 from nine different universities and technical training colleges. • Da Nang University (1994) was formed from a combination of four older institutions. • Hue University and Thai Nguyen University were both formed in 1994. This list suggests that for over 20 years, Vietnam has been organising and reor- ganising its tertiary education offering in order to better match the provision of education with the needs of the market. A 2014 report (Clark, 2014) noted that enrolment at tertiary level has seen significant increases from 10% in 2000 to 16% in 2005 and 25% in 2013. It quotes 2014 statistics that compulsory education lasts for 9 years and that at the time of the Clark (2014) study, there were 419 universities 8 Tourism Education in Vietnam 133 and colleges (185 at university and 234 at college level), with over 2 million stu- dents in tertiary education. Diplomas take up to 2.5 years of study, associate degrees up to 3.5 years and bachelor degrees up to 4–6 years of study to achieve 180–320 credits, depending on the combinations of subjects taken. A ‘credit’ is considered to require 15 hours of classroom instruction, or 45–60 hours of research and writing. Often there is a foundation of general education (3–4 semesters) followed by a spe- cialisation of 4–8 semesters. These descriptions should be familiar to readers with experience in educational systems in the USA, Europe, Hong Kong and Australia or New Zealand and perhaps explain why Vietnamese students studying overseas gen- erally seem to do well academically. In Vietnam, postgraduate courses are still relatively rare, with doctorates initially only available from the University of Hanoi. A significant number of students (106,000 according to Clark, 2014) chose to study abroad in 2012, mostly through their own finances (Clark, 2014 estimates 90%). Scholarships from the Vietnamese Ministry of Education predominantly supported students choosing to study in Russia (Trines, 2017). Of these international students, 36% study in the USA, and Asia accounts for 34%. This indicates a change from 2000 and reflects the price sensitivity of students and improved offerings and recruitment from Asian countries such as Singapore and Taiwan. By 2016, Vietnamese students made up 10% of international student enrolments to US universities. Vietnamese studying in the USA tend to choose business or engineering courses, perhaps because these are established disciplines that students (and their parents) can see lead to a clear career path. Clark (2014) suggests that this exodus will continue as 1.8 million candidates registered for the Vietnamese centralised university entrance exam in 2012, when the places available were less than 600,000. Students take three examinations in one of five groups, depending on the subjects they wish to specialise in. Tourism and hospitality fall into one of the following two (Clark, 2014, p. 9): • Group C: history, geography and literature (for specialisation in humanities and social sciences) • Group D: foreign languages, literature, mathematics (for specialisation in for- eign languages and foreign trade) This is perhaps one of the challenges that tourism education faces in Vietnam – where does it best fit? Having said that, in the West, tourism and hospitality are often moved between business schools and arts, humanities or social science facul- ties, so perhaps Vietnam’s situation is no different. What is perhaps different is the rigid, centralised university entrance examination system, whereas in many other countries students complete a generic first year of tertiary studies before then choosing their specialisation(s). 134 E. Losekoot et al.

8.5 Current Situation in Tourism Education

Vietnam’s higher education system is succinctly described by Trines (2017) who explains that ‘it includes an intermediate college degree, a four-year standard bach- elor’s degree and a two-year master’s degree followed by a terminal research doc- torate’ (p. 21). In more detail, the system offers qualifications in four categories. Associate degrees/diplomas take 2–3 years, are usually 90 credits and are focused on applied subjects with large practical components. Associate degrees can be used as cross-credits into bachelor’s degrees and therefore need to be academically rigor- ous as well as industry relevant. Bachelor degrees are normally 4 years (although some engineering degrees are 5 years). They comprise 120–140 credits and usually require students to have achieved a GPA over 2.0 to graduate. In Vietnam, they are often made up of general education subjects plus specialisations and at the latter end often include a thesis, project or internship as a capstone course. Some bachelor degrees are increasingly being offered in a part-time format to allow students to fit their education around their family or work commitments. Master’s degrees require a bachelor’s degree as a prerequisite, as well as an entrance examination. They can take 2–3 years, can be taken part-time and usually require a thesis. For a doctorate (PhD), students need to hold a master’s degree; it requires an entrance examination and takes 2–3 years but, like in other countries, can take longer. Most doctorates in Vietnam have a coursework and a research dissertation component (Trines, 2017) (Table 8.2).

8.6 Issues in Tourism Education in Vietnam

A lack of qualified staff is blamed for the shortage of places for students on tourism and hospitality courses in Vietnam, although according to Clark (2014), the govern- ment has also started to question the need for so many university graduates. One reason is that Vietnamese postgraduates holding higher qualifications from overseas universities are not coming back to Vietnam to teach because of the poor employ- ment conditions in domestic universities. There is also a lack of focus on research and little opportunity to conduct research and publish in academic journals for those returning to the Vietnamese tertiary education sector. As of 2012, the private sector provided 15% of total enrolments at tertiary level, but Clark (2014) warns that ‘gen- erally speaking, private higher education is perceived to be of a lower quality than that offered at public institutions’ (p. 10). Vietnam’s workforce needs more service sector education as an estimated one million agricultural workers leave that sector each year (Trines, 2017). A 2005 gov- ernment directive called ‘Comprehensive Reform of Higher Education in Vietnam, 2006–2020’ aims to address this through greater enrolment in higher education. Initiatives include requiring instructors in this sector to hold master’s degrees or doctorates by 2020. English language teaching is being promoted through 8 Tourism Education in Vietnam 135

Table 8.2 Colleges and universities in Vietnam with a tourism and hospitality component (HCMC, Ho Chi Minh City) Location/ College or university founded Concentrations (info mostly about undergraduates) Industrial University Go Vap Mechanical, technology, engineering, electronics, of Ho Chi Minh City District, automobile, fashion, accounting, politics, banking, HCMC science and trade and tourism Founded: 2004 National Economics Hanoi Eight majors in economics, management and business University Founded: administration with 45 minors. Department of Tourism 1956 and Hospitality University of District 3, Economics, management, international business with Economics Ho Chi HCMC marketing, public finance, banking, accounting, Minh City Founded: statistics, information technology, political theory, law, 1976 state management, foreign languages economics, Institute of Tourism, physical education Ho chi Minh City Binh Thanh Social sciences and humanities, law, tourism and University of District hospitality, bio-food technology and environment, Technology Founded: vocational training, foreign language, civil engineering, (HUTECH) 1995 architecture and arts, mechanical, electrical and electronic engineering, accounting, finance and banking Ho Chi Minh City District 1 Social science and behaviour, humanities, science University of Social HCMC education and teacher training, press information, Sciences and Founded: business and management, social sciences, hotel, Humanities 1955 tourism, sports and personal services Vietnam University of Hanoi Faculties: post-graduation, international training, Commerce Cau Giay / in-service training, business administration, hospitality Phu Ly, Ha (tourism) (was public cuisine), marketing, accounting Nam (auditing), international trade and economics, economics Founded: (law), finance (banking), economic information system 1960 and E-commerce, English, human resource management, political theory Hanoi University of Bac Tu Faculties: Mechanical engineering, chemical technology, Industry Liem, Minh automobile technology, information technology, Khai Bac Tu, electrical engineering technology, electronics Hanoi engineering technology, accounting (auditing), foreign Founded: languages, garment technology and fashion design, 1898 fundamental sciences, law and political science, tourism, physical education RMIT University District 7 Economics and finance, international business, logistics Vietnam HCMC and and supply chain management, management, tourism Hanoi and hospitality management, digital marketing, design (Australian studies, design (digital media), fashion (merchandise brand) management), professional communication, languages, Founded: information technology, electrical and electronic 2000 engineering (Honours), robotics and mechatronics engineering (Honours), software engineering (honours), MBA/MIB/EMBA, PhD (continued) 136 E. Losekoot et al.

Table 8.2 (continued) Location/ College or university founded Concentrations (info mostly about undergraduates) University of Finance District 7, Business administration, banking and finance, and HCMC accounting, marketing, valuation, real estate trading, Marketing(directly Founded: international business, hospitality management, under the Ministry of 1976 management information system, business English, etc. Finance) Students: ±20,000 Hanoi University Thanh Xuan, Information technology, business administration, Hanoi accountant, finance (banking), international studies, Founded: corporate communications. Associated foreign 1959 programmes: Students: Administration in Finance and Marketing (La Trobe ±29,000 University, Australia) Travel and tourism management (IMC KREMS, Austria) Applied accounting (Oxford University, UK) Economics (Sannio University, Italy) Vinh University Nghe An National defence, Vietnamese, accounting, finance and Province banking, business administration, economics, Founded: agricultural economics, electrical and electronic 1959 techniques, electronic and communication techniques, electronic and automation techniques, construction techniques, traffic work building techniques, food processing techniques, chemical technique technology, information technology, agronomy, aquaculture, environmental science, natural resource and environmental management, land management, agricultural extension, political science, culture management, tourism, education management, social work, journalism, law, education, English language, etc. Ho Chi Minh City District 10, Foreign languages, information technology, oriental University of Foreign HCMC languages and culture, international business, tourism Languages and Founded: management, international relations, secondary Information 1994 education, political theory, economics (finance), law Technology Dong Thap University Dong Thap Political education and social work, literature, history, of Education Province geography, physical education and defence security, Founded: education department (kindergarten), mathematics and 2003 informatics, chemistry, biology, state audit, education management and educational psychology, economics and business administration, arts, resources and environmental sciences, foreign languages, culture (tourism) (continued) 8 Tourism Education in Vietnam 137

Table 8.2 (continued) Location/ College or university founded Concentrations (info mostly about undergraduates) Da nang University of Ngu Hanh Accounting, business administration, commerce and Economics Son, Da tourism, finance and banking, economics, statistics and Nang informatics, political economics Founded: 1975 College of Foreign Phu Nhuan, Import-export business, international logistics, business Economic Relation HCMC administration, petroleum BA, commercial marketing, District 5, 9 hospitality business administration, E-commerce Binh Thuy business, management informatics, corporate District, Can accounting, corporate finance, business English Tho City Founded: 1997 Ho Chi Minh City Tan Phu, Chemistry, business administration and tourism, University of Food HCMC engineering technology, electrical and electronics, Industry Founded: biotechnology and environmental engineering, finance 1982 (accounting), information technology, fisheries, garment technology (footwear and fashion design), food service Source: Authors’ compilation of internet sources, April 2018

­partnerships with Australia, France, the USA, Japan and Germany. Study abroad programmes are strongly encouraged and financially supported by the government and between 1999 and 2016 grew by 680% (China’s growth was 549% and India’s 360% in the same period). While this could be seen as a good thing, Trines (2017) argues that one reason for this increase in the number of students choosing to study overseas is actually widespread dissatisfaction with an education system “character- ised by international isolation, a lack of high-quality universities, inadequate for- eign language training, bureaucratic obstacles, and curricula that do not prepare students for entry into the labor force” (p. 4). This quote succinctly addresses the concerns of the authors of this chapter, and while much is being done to address these, others have made similar comments. London (2011) speaks of ‘entrenched interest, bureaucratic rigidities and ideological factionalism [that] seem only to pro- mote continued organizational inertia’ (p. 3). Another issue that arises regularly in any discussion around Vietnam is corrup- tion. Trines (2017) makes the point that in the Transparency International 2016 Global Corruption Perceptions Index, Vietnam was ranked as the 33rd most cor- rupted out of 176 countries. He suggests this is due to a number of factors including the extremely rapid economic development, a considerable amount of ineffective and inefficient bureaucracy and a very poorly paid public sector. Foreign companies regularly cite corruption as a challenging issue when operating in Vietnam. Furthermore, in Trines (2017), after the police, education is cited as the most cor- rupted sector, leading to accusations of plagiarism, fraudulent degree certificates and ‘leakage’ from budgets, particularly in the public sector. The Vietnamese gov- ernment is attempting to address this issue, and their action has included the use of 138 E. Losekoot et al. the death penalty on at least one occasion, so it is being taken very seriously, but overseas institutions contemplating a move to Vietnam should consider this issue carefully. While well-known international education providers may see this situa- tion as an advantage for them, bringing a highly reputed education brand to Vietnam, others may be put off by the fact that their presence in a country so high up on the Global Corruption Perceptions Index may tarnish their image.

8.7 Transnational Education in Vietnam

Private universities have been a feature of Vietnam’s tertiary education sector since 1988, when the first ‘private’ university to open in 1988 in Vietnam was Thang Long University, Hanoi. Private for-profit educational institutions were not permitted until 2005, although by 2015 there were as many as 88 private providers of higher education. The establishment of foreign universities in Vietnam is known as ‘Transnational Education’. Nguyen and Nguyen (2008, p. 153) state, In response to the Vietnamese Government’s policies, a relatively large number of foreign partners have stepped in to Vietnam to establish 100% foreign-funded education institutions or to co-operate with Vietnamese counterpart institutions on undergraduate training, voca- tional training, distance education, short-term training courses, etc. This has been heralded as an opportunity for Vietnamese students to gain an overseas education without leaving Vietnam, clearly a very valuable asset in the tourism and hospitality field. However, the government is conscious of avoiding dubious institutions or ‘diploma mills’ setting up in Vietnam, and there have been examples of foreign institutions offering qualifications in Vietnam that they were not licenced to deliver in their own country. The government has therefore announced that foreign education establishments require a minimum investment of US$45m, presumably on the assumption that only the best and most credible would be able to commit to such an investment (Nguyen & Nguyen, 2008). One example of such a foreign education establishment is RMIT University Vietnam. Trines (2017, p. 6) reports that Australia’s RMIT University is among the few foreign-owned universities in Vietnam. Other foreign-backed universities include the Vietnamese-German University, Vietnam-­ Japan University, and the Fulbright University Vietnam, a non-profit university recently set up by Harvard University. RMIT University offers a Bachelor of Tourism and Hospitality Management degree from July 2017 from two campuses – in Ho Chi Minh City and in Hanoi. It is regarded by many as the most prestigious tourism and hospitality management course in Vietnam. Tourism and Hospitality Management students study within the School of Business and Management for the first year before choosing specialist tourism and hospitality subjects such as Rooms Division Management, Facilities Development and Management, Tourism Planning and Sustainability for Tourism and Hospitality. 8 Tourism Education in Vietnam 139

Other recent developments have included the Vin Group of companies (property developers and operators of hospitals, primary and secondary schools and a medical college) partnering with Cornell University of the USA to develop a tourism and hospitality offering in Hanoi through Vin University, with enrolments scheduled to start in 2020. The Ho Chi Minh University of Technology (HUTECH) claims to be the first university with approval from the Ministry Of Education and Training (MOET) to run a master’s programme in Tourism Service and Travel Management. They have been offering hospitality management and tourism service and travel management since 1999, but in May 2015, they were given authority to run a master’s programme (HUTECH, 2016). Nguyen Tat Thanh University (with the NTT Institute of International Education) offers a Bachelor in Hospitality Management (top-up) degree to those students who already have a Diploma in Hospitality Management. This is offered in association with the University of Gloucester, UK, and is a 1-year top-up qualification. Students are offered the opportunity to complete an internship in Ho Chi Minh City, Singapore, Malaysia or Thailand. Graduates will be awarded a bachelor degree in Strategic Hospitality Management. The Imperial International Hotel School (IIHS) launched its hotel management programme in November 2017 in the city of Vung Tau under the Dean, Prof. Dr. Karl D Brandmeir, in association with Niagara University in New York, USA. They have already run a number of short courses in Hospitality English and Housekeeping and run an exchange programme for students of their two establishments (IIHS, 2018). At the time of writing, Hoa Sen University has just announced it is launching an assessment centre for ‘Vietnamese Tourism Occupational Skills Standards’ in asso- ciation with the Vietnamese Tourism Certification Board (VTCB) in December 2017. It is a collaboration with Institute Vatel and offers the ‘Bachelor Vatel – International Hotel Management (State Level II degree)’. Its stated aim for the assessment centre is to develop human resources for the tourism sector with four courses addressing industry protocol, restaurant service, tour management and travel agencies, with the VTCB responsible for assessment and certification of suc- cessful students. This was offered along with the Vatel Saigon Restaurant and Lounge facility (Vatel Hotel and Tourism Business School, n.d.). This appears to be an attempt to create a facility for training operational staff in front-line tourism and hospitality roles within an existing higher education provider. A final example of a hospitality provider is the Saigontourist Hospitality College (STHC) which was formed in 1989 with support from the Saigon Tourism Holding Company and which became a nationally recognised tourism school in 1997, with financial support from a number of European governments. It has links with hospi- tality and tourism colleges in China and Canada and currently offers certificate short courses and a 2-year diploma in tourism and hospitality. It has up to 3500 students enrolled at any one time (Saigontourist Hospitality College, 2016). The above half a dozen examples demonstrate that there is certainly a great deal happening in the tourism and hospitality education space within Vietnam. Each of these establishments have been developed with financial or pedagogical support 140 E. Losekoot et al. from players external to Vietnam, showing that the government recognises that there is much work to be done to bring Vietnam’s tourism and hospitality industry up to an international standard. International standards enable the industry to consistently give tourists memorable experiences, which will encourage them to come back and tell others what a great place Vietnam is to visit.

8.8 Future Developments

Nguyen and Nguyen (2008) warn that at the time of their study for the World Bank, Vietnam still had issues such as examples of low educational quality and efficiency leading some to call for further educational reforms. They further highlight that, ‘Universities and research institutes have lacked close linkages with reality; training quality and efficiency have been poor; teaching and learning methods have been out of date; resources have been very limited and resource utilization has been ineffi- cient’ (p. 139). VNAT (2018b) reports that the tourism education network in Vietnam has seen many improvements and developments, including both full-time and part-time offerings and that it is increasingly spread across the country. The Ministry of Education and Training has launched a ‘National Action for Tourism’ strategy resulting in 22,000 students entering tourism training each year in Vietnam (a 22% increase on 2010). The report estimates that 80% of students graduating from tourist colleges or universities find suitable work in the tourism sector. VNAT also claims to now have 2000 lecturers, teachers and management staff in tourism education at all levels, of which 29% are under 30 years of age and 60% are 31–50 years old. There are two full professors, 36 hold doctorates and 210 hold master’s degree qualifications. While no definitive statistics were found for comparison, this seems a small number for a country with 90 million people and over 12 million tourists. However, they also point out the challenge Vietnam faces in trying to deliver higher-quality education at a time of increasing student numbers but declining resources. Wages and salaries for tourism educators continue to be a reason for the best staff to move out of the sector or overseas. This is a problem that higher educa- tion institutions across the world will be familiar with. The Vietnamese government has sought to address this by signing educational partnerships with over 60 coun- tries, as well as increasing scholarships both for international students to study in Vietnam and for Vietnamese students to experience overseas education. International aid budgets have assisted in this (VNAT, 2018a). VNAT (2018b)) notes that particularly vocational education is still not evenly available across the country, meaning that where education and training is needed most, it is least likely to be available. The increase in foreign businesses operating in Vietnam has increased the need for qualified staff, and the current education sys- tem is not keeping up with demand from tourism businesses for qualified staff. Khoung (2015) observes that international tourism to Vietnam is growing strongly, particularly from China, South Korea, Japan and the USA. However, she suggests 8 Tourism Education in Vietnam 141 that ‘the tourism sector lacks an adequate workforce of professionally skilled, glob- ally literate and interculturally competent staff’ (p. xiv). While Vietnam has several excellent building blocks and a strongly developing tourism industry creating a welcome demand for qualified staff, there are some issues the authors believe need to be addressed as a matter of urgency. Existing government education providers need to have the space and flexibility in their cur- ricula to create courses that will be intellectually stimulating and teach both the soft and hard skills that the industry requires. Industry needs to work more closely with education providers to support learning with site visits, case studies, data for proj- ects, etc. Institutions should seek accreditation from internationally recognised cen- tres of excellence such as the UK’s Institute of Hospitality (IoH). Industry needs to take a longer-term view and seek to develop Vietnamese staff for management posi- tions instead of relying on expatriate staff to fill the skills gap. Finally, Vietnam needs to have a clear strategy for dealing with transnational education providers – are they a stop-gap solution until the Vietnamese tourism and hospitality manage- ment higher education providers can take over, or are they seen as long-term partners? It should also be noted that a limitation of this chapter is that it was written by three people actively involved in education and tourism at a senior level in Vietnam but that time did not allow for primary research, and therefore much of this chapter relied on secondary data, both from academic and industry sources. It would be very useful to gather primary data from hotel and tourism operators to identify their human resources challenges and requirements, from educators in the public and private sectors covering both domestic and international providers and also to give a voice to students and recent graduates to evaluate their experiences of tourism and hospitality education in Vietnam in 2018. In conclusion, this chapter has provided an overview of Vietnam, its history and current situation, its tourism and hospitality sector, its education sector and some of the key players in it. While its socialist history and ideology perhaps make it an unusual educational environment compared to many Western countries with a more capitalist approach, many of the issues raised by the authors in this chapter will be familiar to tourism and hospitality management academics the world over – recruit- ing students to a career that parents are dubious about compared to more established professions, making sure that education providers are academically rigorous and industry relevant, developing soft as well as hard skills, finding the right quality and quantity of academic staff to support qualifications and ensuring that industry understand that what they are receiving are individuals with the enthusiasm to suc- ceed but with a need for mentoring, support and lifelong learning opportunities if they are to develop into valued senior management material. 142 E. Losekoot et al.

References

Clark, N. (2014, May 5). Higher education in Vietnam. eWENR. Retrieved from https://wenr.wes. org/2014/05/higher-education-in-vietnam Cohen, E., & Cohen, S. A. (2012). Current sociological theories and issues in tourism. Annals of Tourism Research, 39(4), 2177–2202. Cooper, M. (1997). Tourism planning and education in Vietnam: A profile 1995–2010. Pacific Tourism Review, 1(1), 57–63. Countrymeters. (2018). Vietnam population. Retrieved from http://countrymeters.info/en/Vietnam Ho Chi Minh City University of Technology. (2016, March 23). Tourism service and travel man- agement programs evaluated by HUTECH. Retrieved from https://www.hutech.edu.vn/english/ index.php/news/training-news/14556668-tourism-service-and-travel-management-program- of-vietnam-universities-and-colleges-evaluated-by-hute Hobson, J. S. P. (1994). Growth of tourism in East Asia and the Pacific. Tourism Management, 15(2), 150–156. Imperial International Hotel School. (2018). IIHS. Retrieved from http://imperialhotelschool.edu. vn Kelly, K. (2000, May 1). The higher education system in Vietnam. eWENR. Retrieved from https:// wenr.wes.org/2000/05/ewenr-mayjune-2000-the-higher-education-system-in-vietnam Khoung, T. H. C. (2015). Internationalising tourism education in Vietnam: An evaluation of the Work-Integrated-Learning process in tourism training programmes. Unpublished PhD thesis. RMIT University, Melbourne, Australia. Lattman, K. (2013). Education in Vietnam: A case study. Retrieved May 27, 2018, from http://sites. miis.edu/educationinvietnam/historyofvietnam/history-of-education London, J. D. (2011). Education in Vietnam. Institute of Southeast Asian Studies. Singapore: Pasir Panjang. Nguyen, Q. K., & Nguyen, Q. C. (2008). Education in Vietnam: Development history, challenges and solutions. In B. Fredriksen & J. P. Tan (Eds.), An African exploration of the East Asian education experience (pp. 109–154). Washington, DC: The World Bank. Saigontourist Hospitality College. (2016). Introduction. Retrieved from www.sthc.edu.vn Smith, V. L. (2002). Tourism education 2002: Rethinking anthropology. Acta Turistica, 14(1), 47–59. Tourism Management. (1992, July). Meetings. Tourism Management, p. 438. Tribe, J. (2002). Research trends and imperatives in tourism education. Acta Turistica, 14(1), 61–81. Trines, S. (2017). Education in Vietnam. Retrieved from https://wenr.wes.org/2017/11/ education-in-vietnam United Nations. (2013). Basic statistics: Selected statistics about Vietnam. Retrieved May 13, 2018, from http://www.un.org.vn/en/about-viet-nam/basic-statistics.html Van Binh, N., & Van Minh, L. (1997). Vietnamese tourism: Current state and prospect. Pacific Tourism Review, 1(2), 173–175. Vatel Hotel and Tourism Business School. (n.d.). Home. Retrieved from http://www.vatel.vn/en Vietnam National Administration of Tourism. (2018a). International visitors to Viet Nam in December and 12 months of 2017. Retrieved from http://vietnamtourism.gov.vn/english/index. php/items/12453 Vietnam National Administration of Tourism. (2018b). Vietnam tourism annual report. Hanoi: VNAT. Chapter 9 The Institutional Context for Experiential Learning Investment in Hospitality Education: A Case Study from Thailand

Karl Basil Dicen, Chachaya Yodsuwan, Ken Butcher, and Nantaporn Mingkwan

Abstract Forecasts for travel to and from South East Asia in the next 20 years indicate large growth in tourists and hotel infrastructure but a shortage of skilled personnel. Fast-track training solutions together with competences to handle digital economies and global mobilities are required. This chapter attempts to understand the institutional context for university investment in hospitality experiential learn- ing by developing a theoretical framework of the decision-making process. An anal- ysis of literature, university documents and selected interviews with key stakeholders were undertaken. The study draws from institutional theory and the isomorphic behaviour of institutional members. This framework encompasses the many forms of experiential learning, including fully captive hospitality facilities; limited service on-campus facilities; internships, work-based placements; simulations and case studies. A typology has been developed that depicts four main approaches to expe- riential learning investment. The results suggest that South East Asian countries, such as Thailand, may adopt isomorphic behaviours to fit the global institutional context or could stand firm on their approach to experiential learning. The frame- work further provides a benchmark for future studies to compare current activities with other regions, best practice suggestions and future timeframes within an insti- tutional context.

Keywords Hospitality education · Experiential learning · Training centres · Institutional theory

K. B. Dicen · C. Yodsuwan (*) · N. Mingkwan School of Management, Mae Fah Luang University, Chiang Rai, Thailand e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected] K. Butcher Department of Tourism, Sport and Hotel Management, Griffith Business School, Griffith University, Gold Coast, Australia e-mail: [email protected]

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 143 C. Liu, H. Schänzel (eds.), Tourism Education and Asia, Perspectives on Asian Tourism, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4_9 144 K. B. Dicen et al.

9.1 Introduction

Given the expected growth in travel and associated new hotel projects, to accom- modate a rise in tourist numbers within South East Asia, the World Travel and Tourism Council (WTTC, 2015) forecasts that the hotel industry faces serious risk from human capital issues over the next decade. In some countries, such as Thailand, a fast-growing hospitality industry faces significant challenges in recruiting quali- fied employees to provide the required standard of service (Chaisawat, 2008). These growth trends exacerbate the current long-standing industry difficulty in attracting, motivating and retaining quality employees in hospitality. In previous decades, higher education institutions have responded to market forces. At the same time, as travel and tourism growth has accelerated, so has the demand for and supply of tourism- and hospitality-related courses within the higher education sector, especially in Asian countries (Hsu, 2014). Indeed, in many coun- tries the proliferation of tourism and hospitality courses has been substantial. In the Australian context, Patiar, Ma, Kensbock, and Cox (2017) reported that at the time of publication, over 300 tourism- and hospitality-related courses were offered by institutions nationally. Similarly, there are also large numbers of courses being developed in China. Drivers of such growth are often supported by government incentives or the relaxation of constraints. Singapore, Hong Kong and Malaysia have been flagged as tourism education hubs by their respective governments (Hsu, 2014). Likewise, hospitality/tourism programmes have been fast growing in the Thai higher education sector for a decade (Chaisawat, 2008). Such growth in stu- dent numbers corresponds with substantial growth in international hotel brands that have expanded in Thailand and require a large, qualified and ready-for-work employment pool (Hsu, 2005). Despite a well-established history of hospitality education at universities, there is scepticism from industry stakeholders about the efficacy of many training pro- grammes. Numerous scholars over the past two decades have highlighted deficien- cies in the ability of hospitality training to meet industry needs and expectations. Likewise, the higher hospitality and tourism education sector in Thailand has expanded rapidly, but some programmes were established in haste, and curriculum design did not align with practical demands from the industry (Chaisawat, 2008). Consequently, when hospitality operations acquire new employees trained at uni- versities, often these formally educated graduates come fundamentally equipped with inert knowledge (i.e. definitions, principles and concepts) about the hospitality industry (Feinstein & Mann, 1998). This long-standing issue remains a core prob- lem requiring attention. Indeed, Dredge, Airey, and Gross, (2014) acknowledge that for many in the industry, there should be a ‘paradigm shift’ in the way tourism/ hospitality education is delivered that places more attention on the mix between vocational skill building and ‘higher-order’ thinking. However, these authors take an even broader view that multiple paradigms should be explored to fully under- stand the educational opportunities available in tourism and hospitality education. 9 The Institutional Context for Experiential Learning Investment in Hospitality… 145

A core problem for universities resides in the fundamental issue of what should be taught, or even more fundamentally, what can be taught at a university. This divi- sion of theory and practice in hospitality training preoccupies academic thinking on appropriate course work structures (Lin, Kim, Qiu, & Ren, 2017; Ruhanen, 2005). Most scholars agree on certain aspects: hospitality programmes should meet indus- try needs, provide a balance between practical and theoretical perspectives and be contemporary. To fulfil these objectives, most universities offer some form of expe- riential training as part of a hospitality degree programme. What is not clear is what level or intensity of practical training should be provided that aligns with core insti- tutional values, goals and objectives. This chapter explores this issue and attempts to understand the drivers of experiential learning in the higher education sector. It aims to provide some theoretical grounding in ‘institutional theory’ as a starting point for the analysis. An examination of the various approaches to an investment in experiential learning is undertaken through an analysis of literature, university doc- uments and selected interviews with key stakeholders. Key characteristics of par- ticular categories are described, and this categorisation then provides the framework for understanding the key roles of institutions.

9.2 Understanding Industry Needs for Hospitality Education

The institutional context for higher education has embraced the shift in training of hospitality employees from on-the-job to specialised training institutions outside the workplace. In turn, this institutional training has further evolved from vocational or community-college-level education to higher education in the form of under- graduate and postgraduate university degrees. Despite this training specialisation, upgrading of training providers and the evolution of training content from purely practical to theoretical, numerous scholars, such as Raybould and Wilkins (2005), believe that most institutions aim to meet industry expectations for job-ready gradu- ates. Universities recognise their primary role is to prepare students for workplace entry. Furthermore, authors, such as Dale and Robinson (2001), assert that an indus- try focus is still the dominant aspect of the tourism and hospitality curriculum in general. In recent times, employability has become an even more crucial issue for many educational institutions and their perceived competitiveness in the market place. Accordingly, universities appear to seek to understand the needs of industry as a key stakeholder group. Various studies have been undertaken to determine industry needs in tourism and hospitality, what students need to learn and the kinds of knowledge and skills they should acquire (e.g. Dopson & Tas, 2004; Oktadiana & Chon, 2017; Pearce, 1993). The notion of what constitutes ‘employability’ is a contested issue. The idea includes the gaining of entry-level employment, together with the ability to stay in employment with either the same or a new employer. Employability also includes the capacity for self-employment at some stage of a person’s career. The debate about curriculum content to deliver salient competences for employability is an 146 K. B. Dicen et al. enduring one (Oktadiana & Chon, 2017). Competency is the ability of the employee to perform a job and is perceived as the skills that a student must acquire to get a job. Employers expect fundamental knowledge and skills from their newly hired gradu- ates (Wang & Tsai, 2014). According to Kay and Russette (2000), the fundamental competencies for hospitality graduates include food and beverage (F&B), front desk and sales. Similarly, Patiar et al. (2017, p. 3) argue that ‘on-campus practical train- ing is still essential to help students build a comprehensive understanding of the industry’. Corresponding to this notion of practical training is the term ‘vocational training’. Over decades, vocational training has been associated with trade, techni- cal or professional training (e.g. accountancy, engineering, nursing) and largely been viewed as part of the post-secondary or lower end of the higher education sec- tor. Such training is specifically designed to deliver job-ready graduates for specific vocations. However, Munar and Montaño (2009) argue that generic competencies are also relevant for most organisations and that tourism/hospitality graduates generally must have such soft skills to meet the overall expectations of employers. Rimmington (1999) identified the generic skills of communication, problem solving, teamwork, personal values and creativity as the most important. Often these desired competen- cies are articulated by educational institutions in a normative manner, rather than by employers. For many scholars, the idea of a liberal education is also critical for a well-rounded graduate. A liberal education is a more holistic approach to preparing students to deal with a range of issues, but not necessarily in a specific discipline area. Higher education should provide students with a theoretical base and critical inquiry skills (Dredge et al., 2014). Furthermore, Dredge et al. (2012) state that required competencies bridge vocational and professional knowledge and skills and provide a balance between specific business requirements and the wider world of work. A fourth set of generic skills is directed at the student’s potential management capacity, and skills identified include recognising customer problems, portraying enthusiasm, maintaining professional and ethical standards, cultivating a climate of trust and adapting creatively to change (Oktadiana & Chon, 2017). Thus, a combi- nation of skill sets is viewed as desirable by many scholars. For instance, Gursoy, Rahman, and Swanger (2012) proposed three sets of skills should be delivered – hospitality industry knowledge, operational processes and behavioural and manage- rial skills. Similarly, Choy and Sappa (2010) suggested four learning conceptions should be delivered moving from lower-order to higher-order skills. As such, Busby and Gibson (2010) argued that hospitality programmes have traditionally included practical aspects, business knowledge and soft skills to deliver professional, produc- tively trained employees and potential managers (Wang & Tsai, 2014). Frequently, however, such aspirations of providing a balance between practical, business knowledge, soft skills, wider liberal knowledge and managerial skills are not achieved. Industry criticisms often focus on the lack of generic skills and practi- cal skills. Industry reports of employer dissatisfaction with Australian tertiary grad- uates noted graduate skill deficiencies in the practice of work-related skills or actual work experience (Wardle, 2012). Two decades ago, scholars recognised that com- mon curriculum requirements in hospitality provide students with a good 9 The Institutional Context for Experiential Learning Investment in Hospitality… 147

­understanding of the formal techniques associated with business concepts (Feinstein & Mann, 1998; Knutson & Patton, 1992) but were not effective in job preparation. Consequently, action to bridge the gap between deficient hospitality education and the rapidly increasing need for industry labour and talents is required (Hsu, 2005). Yet, today, the student experience remains inadequate in preparing graduates to deal effectively with the many situations they will encounter on the job (Valenzuela et al., 2017). More specifically, Diplari and Dimou (2010) suggest that curricula still lack practical components to meet industry expectations and, furthermore, ‘the existing curriculum seems to be detached from the reality of the labor market’ (Kachniewska & Para, 2017, p. 18). After an extensive review of the literature, Stergiou and Airey (2017) concluded that a tourism or hospitality degree offers no guarantee of a job because of a deep and widespread mismatch between industry and universities in the perceived requirements for skills and knowledge.

9.3 Experiential Learning in Hospitality Education

Experiential learning is, for many institutions, the solution to bridging any industry gap. Experiential learning (EL) has been described as ‘the process whereby knowl- edge is created through the transformation of experience. Knowledge results from the combination of grasping and transforming experience’ (Kolb, 1984, p. 41). The essential notion of experiential learning is that we learn more from doing work activities than reading about them. Furthermore, in this mode of learning, the essence of repetition or practice is implicit. Thus, in a continuum of experiential learning activities, exposure to a workplace activity is no substitute for carrying out the work, and, again, this brief real-world activity is no substitute for doing more of the work. The implication for experiential learning is that a work-based mode of learning at one end of the continuum is substantially different from a text-based, classroom setting at the opposite end. However, experiential learning is a broad field of activities, and classroom role-play activities have been found to be a valuable method of bridging the divide between academic knowledge and practical skills. Such approaches have been found to contribute towards deeper learning by enhanc- ing students’ interest, motivation, participation, knowledge and skill (Ruhanen, 2005). Experiential programmes essentially comprise two aspects: identification of requisite skills, theories or techniques and a delivery mode that mimics the work- place environment and provides workplace authenticity, as far as possible. Some experiential learning methods, with examples, are listed below. • Industry placement – actual, specific employment (paid or unpaid): –– Apprenticeship –– Captive hotel or restaurant (teaching hotel or restaurant) –– Internship experiences (externship) 148 K. B. Dicen et al.

• Industry placement – simulated employment as a balance between work activi- ties and study: –– Service learning experiences in the community –– Volunteer experiences –– Job shadowing –– Laboratory settings where hospitality services are provided –– Field work experiences –– Practicum experiences (seminar, workshop plus work experience) • Classroom-based activities: –– Video –– Industry guest speaker –– Case study –– Virtual environment –– Simulation (e.g. HOTS) Despite a growing consensus that experiential learning has substantial benefits for hospitality education, not all universities seek to implement experiential learn- ing programmes. Even for those that do, many universities offer limited versions of experiential learning. Studies have indicated that the implementation of meaningful experiential learning has several negatives. In pedagogical terms, Moscardo and Pearce (2007) noted general weaknesses that included mismatching learning con- tent with course objectives, poor skill acquisition and teaching inefficiencies. Furthermore, Atkinson (2016) identified core issues that constrained successful out- comes from the conduct of experiential learning activities, including work place- ments. These issues included: • Additional costs for all parties • Lack of time or interest in developing or hosting programmes/students • Ill-defined programme objectives and quality control • Misunderstanding of aims • Lack of understanding of industry constraints The implications of these insights are that a genuine determination is required on the part of universities to be involved in experiential learning. In turn, this involve- ment needs to be strongest in activities that most closely mimic real-world hospital- ity activities, such as captive hotel facilities. According to Pang, Wong, and Wong (2013), running a ‘captive/teaching hotel’ has the advantage of better control of the experiential element of the curriculum; however, there are not many programmes operating with ‘captive’ hospitality facilities. The building and operation of such expensive infrastructure is a bridge too far for most universities. Furthermore, stud- ies have provided evidence that supports the views of administrators who seek to reject the need for such facilities. In 1994, LeBruto and Murray reported that staff and students did not rate captive training facilities as more important than non-­ captive facilities for the delivery of required competencies. While the latter authors 9 The Institutional Context for Experiential Learning Investment in Hospitality… 149 did not compare the outcomes from captive versus non-captive training activities, this study is an example of easy-to-find evidence for those administrators not fully committed to experiential learning ideals.

9.4 Institutional Drivers of Experiential Learning

In this section, a synthesis of issues related to the application of experiential learn- ing in hospitality is examined through the ‘lens’ of institutional theory. According to institutional theory, social, political, and economic pressures influence firms’ strategies and organisational decision-making as firms seek to adopt legitimate practices or legitimise their practices in the view of other stakeholders (Jennings & Zandbergen, 1995). While various approaches – such as resource-based theory, eco- logical theory or agency theory – have been used to understand organisations, insti- tutional theory is arguably the dominant approach to understanding complex organisations and their corresponding networks (Greenwood, Hinings, & Whetten, 2014). Organisational legitimacy relates to the level of cultural support from stake- holders, such that perfect legitimacy would be 100% and no stakeholders would have any serious issues to raise with the organisation’s values, activities or direction (Meyer & Scott, 1983). Sources of legitimacy derive from internal and/or external stakeholders who have the capacity to be aware of the organisations actions and provide an assessment. Institutional theory derives from a deeper and more resilient analysis of social structures and the processes by which rules, norms and routines become established as authoritative guidelines for social behaviour. Thus, organisa- tions are influenced by their institutional context. An institutional context relates to the ‘rules, norms and ideologies of the wider society’ (Meyer & Rowan, 1977, p. 84). A key aspect of institutional theory is ‘imitation’. Firms mostly adapt to or con- form to the institutionalised network of actors. This action is referred to as ‘isomor- phic’ behaviour. Through isomorphic behaviour, organisations avoid social censure and minimise demands for external accountability and, in general, improve their standing in their institutional context. Three types of institutional isomorphism were identified by DiMaggio and Powell (1991, p. 67): 1. Coercive – isomorphism that arises from the need to comply with legal rules, such as standardisation, accreditation or government regulation. 2. Mimetic – isomorphism that results when organisations copy each other as a coping mechanism for environmental uncertainty. It is safer for organisations to mimic successful peers than attempt to undertake novel activities. 3. Normative – form of isomorphism arising as a need to reinterpret the rationale for organisational practice that best fits the organisational posture. Hence, organ- isational members redefine issues to suit their preconceived worldview. Provides legitimisation of current worldviews from key stakeholders within the institu- tional context. 150 K. B. Dicen et al.

Isomorphic behaviour is largely self-interested behaviour, such that isomorphic actions are often largely ceremonial and disguise the actual behaviours within the organisation (Greenwood et al., 2014). This separation of actual policies and prac- tices from the ‘face’ of the organisation is referred to as ‘decoupling’. Hence, the institutionalised context constitutes a high level of desired image formation, which can be quite divorced from the realities of workplace activity. In practice, institu- tional theory predicts that most members of the institutional network will exhibit isomorphic behaviour arising from the need to avoid its behaviour being questioned.

9.5 The Institutional Context of Higher Education

According to Austin and Jones (2015), universities seek to retain or enhance their legitimacy by conforming to perceived pressures from the higher education environ- ment and are driven to adopt policies and practices that can achieve such legitimacy outcomes. Indeed, they assert that if universities are not meeting community stake- holder expectations, then such legitimacy is at risk. One broadscale project exempli- fies the issues faced by university managers. A project to map a national tourism, hospitality and events undergraduate curriculum, paying attention to the balance between professional/vocational education and liberal education, was initiated in Australia. The project authors stated its core focus was on a ‘dynamic curriculum space shaped by internal and external factors from global to local scales, a variety of values and perspectives contributed by a range of stakeholders, and shifting phi- losophies about education policy, pedagogy and teaching practice’ (Dredge et al., 2014, p. 8). At stake in such reviews is configuring the institutional context. Who is doing it right and who is not? To avoid being singled out, and/or censured, univer- sity administrators are more likely to take an isomorphic approach defined by Dimaggio and Powell (1991, p. 66) as a ‘constraining process that forces one unit in a population to resemble other units that face the same set of environmental condi- tions’. Hence, if the same set of environmental forces affects institutional members, then organisations start to look alike (Orru, 1991). For instance, governments world- wide have reduced public funding for universities. In addition, public administrators have introduced greater legislative scrutiny with the goal of pressuring universities into managing their resources more efficiently. Institutional theory predicts that uni- versities will respond to such coercion by engaging in similar and visible activities, such as restructuring and streamlining operations. Restructuring plans at universi- ties mimic many of the visible actions already taken by many businesses during the early part of the 1990s. Furthermore, Greenwood et al. (2014) argued that such restructuring conformity will be emphasised in organisations whose outputs are more abstract or difficult to evaluate. Thus, organisations, such as universities, are more likely to respond in visible and rational ways to provide an appearance of doing something. 9 The Institutional Context for Experiential Learning Investment in Hospitality… 151

Hospitality education delivery has been transforming as student growth increases globally. In the main, hospitality education was delivered in vocational settings at lower-level colleges for many decades. As the tourism/hospitality industry grew and demand for well-trained hospitality labour increased, so did the clamour for univer- sities to offer degrees in hospitality increase. In turn, regulatory forces required universities to move away from vocational or practical training exercises in hospi- tality in order to gain permission to offer university degrees (Oktadiana & Chon, 2017). Hence, coercive pressures were evident in the shift from diplomas, which emphasised practical exercises, to degrees comprising theoretical concepts befitting a university education. This transformation has further accelerated in the last two decades. As more universities took on more hospitality training, the delivery evolved too. No longer were teachers experienced industry persons but, rather, research-­ oriented graduates of the university system. Institution pressures required faculty managers to hire PhD-trained graduates. The profile of hospitality educators trans- formed markedly. It is no surprise that such a pool of PhD-trained, research-oriented educators taught what they knew best and elected to avoid teaching aspects they knew least. Hence, the profile of hospitality educators tended to mimic the univer- sity academic profile. As profiles continued to evolve, universities replaced existing practical compo- nents of courses or whole courses with theoretical alternatives (Dredge et al., 2012; Robinson, Breakey, & Craig-Smith, 2010). In addition, courses were often selected for their lower operational costs, and this policy reduced the numbers of hospitality courses (King & Craig-Smith, 2010). New hospitality departments copied counter- parts that they perceived as being successful. Newer institutions were more likely to model their curriculum and faculty profile on the need to look like a research-­ oriented university. This model attracts research funding and delivers academic publications and associated academic rankings. If the university values academic research standing at an international level, then academics will be recruited to deliver on goals to achieve such international standing. For example, curricula in Taiwan often replicate programmes from other countries that possess such academic standing (Oktadiana & Chon, 2017). Hence, the upgrading of the hospitality educa- tor profile has continued on a global level as university managers sought to upgrade their university rankings through internationally recognised research outputs. Indeed, Petrova (2014) argues that tourism and hospitality educators are now largely out of touch with industry. This separation has been discussed widely in the litera- ture but nonetheless has continued to grow. A further contributing factor to a decline in the practical components of tourism/ hospitality degrees is a widespread belief held by university administrators that hos- pitality programmes lack the academic clout of other occupational programmes (Dredge et al., 2012). The difficulty in this position is that any perceived movement towards more experiential training can be perceived as further diminishing the insti- tution’s status as a university. In this case, hospitality educators are caught between a rock and a hard place. The difficulty in institutionalising an experiential learning programme was illustrated by Austin and Rust (2015). Success factors hinged on making the time and effort required, including the building of centralised 152 K. B. Dicen et al.

­administrative infrastructure. Such a step creates an organisational entity within the university dedicated to experiential learning and not caught out with conflicts of interest. In addition, numerous universities have moved to accelerate their pro- grammes by offering trimesters and graduating students within 2 years. Thus, a stu- dent may complete a 3-year undergraduate degree within 2 years. This shift towards quick completion rates reduces the capacity for long-term experiential learning projects. A two-semester internship/externship is just not feasible within such a pro- gramme structure. At the same time as these tangible changes in education delivery have been occurring, staff receive the psychological message that cost containment and research outputs hold more value than attempting to build long-term relation- ships with industry. This situation contrasts sharply with the institutional context that existed when the first hospitality school was established in Lausanne, Switzerland, in 1893 and the first modern hospitality school was opened at Cornell University in 1922. These first schools were industry driven (Dredge et al., 2012) and remain closely wedded to industry today, while others have drifted away. This separation between industry and university of what constitutes a relevant and appropriate hospitality degree creates a credibility gap with industry. Where a large gap exists, industry will resist being recruited to support such university pro- grammes. Where there is no gap and a close relationship exists, then industry and university will be willing to collaborate. Furthermore, indistinct styles of education among hospitality programmes create uncertainty for graduates and difficulty for employers in discerning what potential competencies may have been delivered at any one institution (Gu, Kavanaugh, & Cong, 2007). Again, the possible solution for such criticism is standardisation in the delivery of course material, which sug- gests normative isomorphic thinking where such action takes place. A more recent trend affecting the credibility of global hospitality education by universities is the unravelling of the worthiness of much-touted international research outputs. At the centre of the international research publication model, which dictates university rankings, is an insatiable academic journal market that publishes material mostly irrelevant to nonuniversity communities in the institutional context. Industry seeks practical and timely advice to improve their businesses and lives. Instead, academic research tends to focus more on achieving statistical significance, not practical significance. Statistical significance hints that a probability of a relationship between two vari- ables exists and relies upon sample size and sampling error. In contrast, practical significance implies the existence of relationships between variables and real-world scenarios. Problems with this academic approach are emerging in all scientific dis- ciplines due to measurement error, model conceptualisation and ‘p-hacking’, where model relationships are manipulated to meet desired probability significance levels (Woodside, 2017). It is conceivable that much of the extant tourism/hospitality lit- erature makes no meaningful contribution, which would largely affirm industry pre- conceptions. The education of aspiring hospitality graduates within this model inspires little confidence within industry. Until academic research proves its genu- ine worth, industry collaboration is a moot point. 9 The Institutional Context for Experiential Learning Investment in Hospitality… 153

9.6 The Thai Institutional Context

In Thailand, the institutional context for universities providing hospitality pro- grammes appears distinct from western-style educational contexts. Four key factors appear to distinguish these institutional contexts. The first factor is the relationship with industry, students and universities. It appears that Thai universities providing hospitality programmes have a close relationship with employers and their students. Thais afford a high level of respect to teachers at all levels and, in turn, respect their work outcomes. This respect is provided without faculty holding doctoral qualifica- tions or working for highly ranked universities. Esteem is given to the profession of teaching. Hence, staff feel no sense of urgency to achieve a different, research-­ oriented status. University academics already hold high status within their impor- tant communities. In 2016, the Thai government introduced legislation that requires university academics to publish more research outcomes. To date, this mandate has had little influence on Thai academic work, but such pronouncements may indicate the beginning of a trend to western-style isomorphism. The second factor is the academic standing of universities in Thailand and the priorities attached to raising academic rankings at an international level. Academic standings of universities in South East Asia are far lower than comparably sized institutions in the West. To date, there has been no concerted effort to get on the rankings treadmill. Most universities in Thailand are not held in high esteem inter- nationally for their academic-oriented research activities. Through community-­ oriented, practical projects, academics in Thailand deploy their expertise to directly benefit the communities within which they interact. This model is sharply contrasted with the high-volume ‘publication’ model that produces large amounts of interna- tional journal material. Third is the priority attached to community service for universities and, thus, individual academics. The notion of community service is strongly embedded within the Thai university system. Such service draws from the collective cultural values Thais hold. Such cultural values contrast with the more self-centred, indi- vidualistic approach of western-oriented academics. Fourth is the structure of degree programmes in Thailand. The programme struc- ture for undergraduate degrees in Thailand provides greater scope for experiential learning activities. An eight-semester degree programme over 4 years allows univer- sity administrators to embed internships and more intensive practical activities into the curriculum more readily. In contrast to the shortening of many western hospital- ity programmes, the mandating of a 4-year curriculum for public universities by the Hong Kong government (degrees were previously 3 years long) has benefited stu- dents by extending the scope for innovative experiential learning (Tse, 2014). Litigation in western legal systems and duty of care factors discourage intensive internship programmes where supervision is difficult. Litigation of criticism of unsatisfactory employer-student arrangements makes such activities problematic. Even field trips require extensive documentation of ‘risk’ factors for many western universities. This bureaucracy limits opportunities for experiential activities directly 154 K. B. Dicen et al. and indirectly by discouraging staff from proposing such activities. However, in Thailand the legal system and duty of care regulations are more flexible. There do not appear to be any constraints around experiential learning activities. A further constraint evident in many western countries relates to the undergradu- ate student profile. As western governments decreased public university funding, university administrators turned to the international market. For this reason, many western hospitality programmes have substantial numbers of international students, especially Chinese, whose native language is not the same as the host university. Cultural and language issues provide further obstacles for large-scale work-­ placement programmes. In contrast, the student profile in Thailand remains almost wholly domestic. The student population is thus homogenous in nature, and core Thai values of hierarchy suggest that students are willing to cooperate without ques- tion in experiential learning programmes. In addition, Thai undergraduate students tend to live in dormitories on campus or close by the university campus. Attendance at university classes is mostly compulsory. Formal attendance in scheduled classes could amount to 18 h per week. Furthermore, a high level of extracurricular activi- ties on campus plus weekend formal curricular activities create a high level of engagement with the university and bonding between peers and staff. This student profile suits the implementation of intensive experiential learning activities far bet- ter than many western-style counterparts.

9.7 Categories of Experiential Leadership

Differences in institutional contexts appear to have an influence on university approaches to an experiential learning investment. These approaches to experiential learning are categorised with their associated characteristics in the following list. This typology includes four approaches to experiential learning investment, and these are listed below, with their distinguishing characteristics. 1. Leadership • Key distinguishing aspect is to ‘lead’ the whole industry sector, including universities. • Likely to be focused institutions, often at college level. • Feelings of community obligation to provide industry-ready graduates. • Historical roots likely to be from industry. • Deep and long-standing relationships with industry. • Longer degree programmes accommodate workplace-based activities. • Higher numbers of work place hours ‘required’ for all students. • High investment in administrative support for internship ‘job matching’. 2. Proactive • Recognises experiential learning as an important investment. • More likely to view student education in a more holistic manner. 9 The Institutional Context for Experiential Learning Investment in Hospitality… 155

• Faculty members have high levels of industry experience. • Substantial number of workplace hours ‘required’. 3. Reactive • Regulatory compliance and ceremonial visibility for appearance of experien- tial learning. • Superficial implementation. • Views experiential learning as a cost. • Minimal or notional numbers of ‘required’ work hours for smaller percentage of students. 4. Avoidance • Distinguished by universities with a strong historical research-oriented position. • Weak relationships with industry. • Faculty members have low levels of industry experience. • Limited scope for workplace-based activities in programmes. • Faculty staff priority is academic research outcomes. • Negligible administrative support for experiential learning programmes. Overall, the western institutional context tends to spread universities across all four approaches, while in the Thai context, universities can be classified solely in the leadership or proactive categories. All Thai universities offering hospitality pro- grammes are committed to a substantial investment in experiential learning. In con- trast, many western universities now fall into the lower categories of experiential learning investment in hospitality. Many such western universities have closed their training facilities, reduced their work-integrated learning programmes, reduced required work experience hours and removed industry ‘liaison’ administration staff or not attempted to build such facilities or practices. A normative isomorphic response is evident in these circumstances. In the current study, website observa- tions of universities that appear to eschew costly and time-consuming experiential investments tend to emphasise the leadership attributes of their programmes and/or development of managerial talent for industry in their promotional material. Leadership in experiential learning investment is not just attributed to ‘college’ level or lower-ranked universities. The top-ranked university in Thailand in research is also recognised as a leader in experiential learning activities. For example, Mahidol University has invested substantially in captive hotel facilities. Likewise, highly ranked, globally recognised universities can combine high levels of experi- ential learning with research excellence, e.g. Cornell University and Hong Kong Polytechnic University. In addition, many universities also attempt to deliver a bal- anced curriculum with a strong focus on experiential learning outcomes, including required workplace hours. In many cases, students are required to undertake over 1000 h of relevant work experience during their degree programme. In Thailand, all universities provide internships as part of their 4-year undergraduate degree pro- grammes. Most internships are for one semester but many programmes provide two 156 K. B. Dicen et al. semesters of internship. In the case of Mahidol and Mae Fah Luang universities, the on-campus hotel facilities provide experiential learning in one semester followed by an externship at a hotel or related company in a subsequent semester. Hence, stu- dents are receiving high levels of training to be job-ready for an external internship. Leading institutions are likely to have invested in substantial training infrastruc- ture that provides a diversity of real-world training opportunities. For instance, at Mahidol University, the four-star Salaya Pavilion Hotel and Training Centre is a fully operational hotel with 43 guest rooms, 2 gourmet restaurants, guest bar, bakery outlet and 5 function rooms. Likewise, the three-star, 60-room Wanasom wellness resort at Mae Fah Luang University provides a range of spa, restaurant and meeting room facilities for students to gain a wide range of experience. Such infrastructure development mirrors facilities provided in other global centres of excellence; for example, by the Hotel Icon for the Polytechnic University in Hong Kong. The dis- tinguishing feature of leading institutions is the comprehensive nature of the expe- riential training they offer. Students tend to be exposed first hand to multiple aspects of a tourism/hospitality career during their degree programme. Leadership appears to comprise an aspiration to showcase university-derived hospitality knowledge to industry, not just meet industry best practice for students. This behaviour mimics traditional faculty advisory services, such as agriculture and health. That is, leaders, such as the Hong Kong Polytechnic, are keen to develop best practices and then to advise industry about such best practice. To fulfil this need, they allocate three rooms in the Hotel Icon for innovation, so that students and industry participants can explore new options for room design and guest service. In Thailand, there is an overall sense of obligation to develop higher standards within the hospitality industry in general. Thus, institutions are in the business of educating not just students but also existing business owners, on a large scale. To enable such delivery requires confidence in faculty staff to have industry best-practice knowl- edge and close relationships with industry. A key facet of those institutions displaying experiential leadership or proactive involvement appears to be the staff profile. At Hong Kong Polytechnic, real-life managers from the Hotel Icon deliver ‘full’ courses to students, not just one guest lecture. This high-level involvement of active executives is in contrast to the posi- tion of universities that advertise high numbers of PhD-trained faculty in their pro- motional materials – staff who have often been hired to meet business accreditation standards. Likewise, in Thailand, hotel executives appear to be willing to offer their services in a more involved way than just a one-off guest lecture. In one instance, a five-star Dusit Hotel general manager in Thailand invited 200 students to visit his hotel for a 3-day field excursion at substantial cost to the hotel. This action was seen by the manager as being part of giving back to the community. 9 The Institutional Context for Experiential Learning Investment in Hospitality… 157

9.8 Conclusion

In a globalising world, the expectation is that individual institutions within an indi- vidual country will exhibit isomorphic behaviour as they seek to join a global com- munity of scholars. Scholars have acknowledged the shifting emphasis over decades in many western contexts to a research-intensive focus with less resources allocated to practical teaching. In turn, this shift has resulted in tensions between industry and university perceptions of job requirements. A typology of characteristics of experi- ential learning approaches was developed for this chapter that highlighted this dis- tinction between practical versus research orientations. Four key approaches were identified: leadership, proactive, reactive and avoidance. It is suggested that many universities in western systems are aligned with the avoidance category for experi- ential learning. Furthermore, many institutional constraints at a national level were identified that restrain global isomorphism for South East Asian university systems, such as the ones existing in Thailand. It was highlighted that in the Thai institutional context: • Both teachers and academic practitioners are well respected. • Degree programmes are longer. • Community service requirements provide a constant bridge from academics to industry and community needs. • University students are largely domestic. • There is no concerted effort to join the rankings competition. If existing sociocultural factors are strong enough within an individual country (or region), then global isomorphism of the role of experiential learning within the university sector may well be delayed or not happen at all within that particular country (or region). Indeed, the current situation suggests that resistance to global isomorphism is growing. For instance, the level of scrutiny placed on global schol- arly research outputs is increasing. It is possible that less value will be placed on academic outputs in future and more value placed on industry-related outputs. That is, the importance placed on the practical significance of hospitality-related research outputs could move from its current subordinate position in western universities to a more dominant role in scholarly work. If it is possible to put a brake on the statisti- cally significant approach to scientific literature, then hospitality educators and scholars in research-oriented universities may develop an increased focus on expe- riential learning. Accordingly, predicted isomorphic behaviour for developing coun- tries, such as Thailand, may be less attractive. Many universities in Asian countries already focus on the practical significance of their research efforts. Furthermore, the global community of scholars may turn their attention to other community aspects, such as those currently valued in Thailand and SE Asia. It is possible that a shift to a more practical and relevant body of literature may result in a system that mimics the Thai situation, rather than vice versa. In turn, the role of experiential learning may develop further as an important community service from 158 K. B. Dicen et al. the higher education sector. Such an outcome could be possible if national and regional university administrations recognise the value inherent in their systems. One could imagine a future where Thai universities are lauded for their hospitality education by emulating the Swiss model, i.e. global rankings of universities tend to include several Swiss hospitality schools at the top, even though their research out- puts may be low. Future research could examine a number of themes related to investment in hos- pitality experiential learning. These could include further exploratory work to develop frameworks, as depicted in this Chapter, together with the testing of such frameworks. Industry needs and university executive motives relating to experien- tial learning investment should be more closely investigated. The use of technology to enhance learning and reduce costs would likely be a fruitful area of research. Finally, Asian-style systems of experiential learning should be more closely inves- tigated across multiple contexts within Asia.

References

Atkinson, G. (2016). Work-based learning and work-integrated learning: Fostering engagement with employers. Adelaide, Australia: National Centre for Vocational Education Research. Austin, I., & Jones, G. (2015). Governance of higher education: Global perspectives, theories and practices. New York: Routledge. Austin, M., & Rust, D. (2015). Developing an experiential learning program: Milestones and chal- lenges. International Journal of Teaching and Learning in Higher Education, 27(1), 143–153. Busby, G., & Gibson, P. (2010). Tourism and hospitality internship experiences overseas: A British perspective. Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sport & Tourism Education, 9(1), 3–12. Chaisawat, M. (2008). Travel and tourism education in Thailand. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 5(3), 197–224. Choy, S., & Sappa, V. (2010). Australian stakeholders’ conceptions of connecting vocational learn- ing at TAFE and workplaces. International Journal of Training Research, 14(2), 88–103. Dale, C., & Robinson, N. (2001). The theming of tourism education: A three-domain approach. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 13(1), 30–34. DiMaggio, P., & Powell, W. (1991). Introduction. In P. DiMaggio & W. Powell (Eds.), The new institutionalism and organizational analysis. Chicago: University of Chicago. Diplari, A., & Dimou, I. (2010). Public tourism education and training in Greece: A study of the necessity for educational restructuring. Industry & Higher Education, 24(2), 115–120. Dopson, L., & Tas, R. (2004). A practical approach to curriculum development: A case study. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 16(1), 39–46. Dredge, D., Airey, D., & Gross, M. (2014). Introduction to the handbook. In D. Dredge, D. Airey, & M. Gross (Eds.), The Routledge handbook of tourism and hospitality education (pp. 1–14). Abingdon, UK: Routledge. Dredge, D., Benckendorff, P., Day, M., Gross, M., Walo, M., Weeks, P. et al. (2012). Building a stronger future: Balancing professional and liberal education ideals in tourism and hos- pitality education [Report]. Sydney, Australia: Office of Teaching and Learning, Australian Government. Feinstein, A. H., & Mann, S. H. (1998). The development and assessment of a foodservice instruc- tional simulation technique (FIST). Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 10(3), 19–27. Greenwood, R., Hinings, C., & Whetten, D. (2014). Rethinking institutions and organizations. Journal of Management Studies, 51, 1206–1220. 9 The Institutional Context for Experiential Learning Investment in Hospitality… 159

Gu, H., Kavanaugh, R., & Cong, Y. (2007). Empirical studies of tourism education in China. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 7(1), 3–24. Gursoy, D., Rahman, I., & Swanger, N. (2012). Industry’s expectations from hospitality schools: What has changed? Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 24(4), 32–42. Hsu, C. H. (2005). Global tourism higher education: Past, present, and future. New York: Haworth Hospitality Press. Hsu, C. H. (2014). Tourism and hospitality education in Asia. In D. Dredge, D. Airey, & M. Gross (Eds.), The Routledge handbook of tourism and hospitality education (pp. 197–209). Abingdon, UK: Routledge. Jennings, P., & Zandbergen, P. (1995). Ecologically sustainable organizations: An institutional approach. Academy of Management Review, 20(4), 1015–1052. Kachniewska, M., & Para, A. (2017). Hospitality employers’ expectations towards the higher edu- cation system in Poland. In P. Benckendorff & A. Zehrer (Eds.), Handbook of teaching and learning in tourism (pp. 17–30). Cheltenham, UK: Edward Elgar. Kay, C., & Russette, J. (2000). Hospitality-management competencies identifying managers’; essential skills. Cornell Hotel and Restaurant Administration Quarterly, 41(2), 52–63. King, B., & Craig-Smith, S. (2010). Tourism and hospitality education in Australia: Emerging issues and future prospects. Hobart, Australia: CAUTHE, University of Tasmania. Knutson, B. J., & Patton, M. E. (1992). “How prepared am I to succeed in the hospitality indus- try?” What the students are telling us. Hospitality & Tourism Educator, 4(3), 38–43. Kolb, D. (1984). Experiential learning: Experience as the source of learning and development. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall. LeBruto, S. M., & Murray, K. T. (1994). The educational value of “Captive Hotels”. The Cornell Hotel and Restaurant Administration Quarterly, 35(4), 72–79. Lin, P., Kim, Y., Qiu, H., & Ren, L. (2017). Experiential learning in hospitality education through a service-learning project. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 29(2), 71–81. Meyer, J., & Rowan, B. (1977). Institutionalized organizations: Formal structure as myth and cer- emony. American Journal of Sociology, 83, 340–363. Meyer, J., & Scott, W. (1983). Organizational environments. Beverley Hills, CA: Sage. Moscardo, G., & Pearce, P. (2007). The rhetoric and reality of structured tourism work experi- ences: A social representational analysis. Tourism Recreation Research, 32(2), 21–28. Munar, A. M., & Montaño, J. J. (2009). Generic competences and tourism graduates. Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sports and Tourism Education (Pre-2012), 8(1), 70–84. Oktadiana, H., & Chon, K. (2017). Vocational versus academic debate on undergraduate education in hospitality and tourism: The case of Indonesia. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 29(1), 13–24. Orru, M. (1991). Organizational isomorphism in East Asia. In P. DiMaggio & W. Powell (Eds.), The new institutionalism in organizational analysis (pp. 361–389). Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. Pang, L. W. L., Wong, S. C. K., & Wong, N. C. M. (2013). School and hotel integration: Practices and experiences from stakeholders. Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sport & Tourism Education, 13, 5–18. Patiar, A., Ma, E., Kensbock, S., & Cox, R. (2017). Hospitality management students’ expecta- tions and perception of a virtual field trip web site: An Australian case study using importance-­ performance analysis. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 29(1), 1–12. Pearce, P. (1993). Defining tourism study as a specialism: A justification and implications. Teoros International, 1(1), 25–32. Petrova, P. (2014). The evolution of the employability skills agenda in tourism higher education. In D. Dredge, D. Airey, & M. Gross (Eds.), The Routledge handbook of tourism and hospitality education (pp. 383–394). Abingdon, UK: Routledge. Raybould, M., & Wilkins, H. (2005). Over qualified and under experienced: Turning graduates into hospitality managers. International Journal of Hospitality Management, 17(3), 203–216. 160 K. B. Dicen et al.

Rimmington, M. (1999). Vocational education: Challenges for hospitality management in the new millennium. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 11(4), 186–192. Robinson, R., Breakey, N., & Craig-Smith, S. (2010). Food for thought: Investigating food and beverage curricular in Australian hospitality degree programs. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 22(1), 32–42. Ruhanen, L. (2005). Bridging the divide between theory and practice. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 5(4), 33–51. Stergiou, D., & Airey, D. (2017). Tourism education and industry expectations in Greece: (Re) Minding the gap. In P. Benckendorff & A. Zehrer (Eds.), Handbook of teaching and learning in tourism. Cheltenham, UK: Edward Elgar. Tse, T. (2014). What makes Hotel ICON a teaching hotel? In D. Dredge, D. Airey, & M. Gross (Eds.), The Routledge handbook of tourism and hospitality education (pp. 505–518). Abingdon, UK: Routledge. Valenzuela, L., Jerez, O., Hasbun, B., Pizarro, V., Valenzuela, G., & Orsini, C. (2017). Closing the gap between business undergraduate education and the organisational environment: A Chilean case study applying experiential learning theory. Innovations in Education and Teaching International. Advance online publication. https://doi.org/10.1080/14703297.2017.1295877 Wang, Y. F., & Tsai, C. T. (2014). Employability of hospitality graduates: Student and industry perspectives. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 26(3), 125–135. Wardle, K. M. (2012). Work integrated learning for tertiary hospitality education. In Proceedings of the 2012 Australian Collaborative Education Network national conference (pp. 307–313). Springvale, Australia: Australian Collaborative Education Network. Woodside, A. (2017). Releasing the death-grip of null hypothesis statistical testing (p < .05): Applying complexity theory and somewhat precise outcome testing (SPOT). Journal of Global Scholars of Marketing Science, 27(1), 1–15. World Travel & Tourism Council. (2015). Global talent trends and issues for the travel & tourism sector [Final report]. London: Author. Retrieved from https://www.wttc.org/-/media/382bb1e9 0c374262bc951226a6618201.ashx Part III Tourism Education of Asian Students Abroad Chapter 10 Outcomes and Challenges of a Cooperative and Intercultural Learning Project: A Critical Analysis

Anya Diekmann, Martin Vincent, and Jyotsna Patwardhan

Abstract Tourism per se is about interactions and relationships with other cultures. Service quality perceptions vary from one culture to another, and cross-cultural host-tourist interactions shape experiences on both sides and inform the develop- ment of emerging markets and products. Encountering another culture through social interaction can contribute significantly to cross-cultural understanding and the development of adapted tourism provision. India and Belgium are historically not countries with close ties. However, India is attempting to increase the number of international visitors to the country, and Belgium aims to attract more Indian visi- tors. In that context, two universities, one from Mumbai in India and the other from Brussels in Belgium, decided to collaborate and develop a joint project aimed at fostering cross-cultural exchanges between their tourism management students. The aim was to sensitise future tourism practitioners, reduce cultural stereotypes and develop adapted, sustainable and responsible tourism products. The programme was initiated in 2014. It consisted of a joint course focussed on profiling the partner universities as well as the development of specifically adapted itineraries. The course was based on direct virtual interactions between the students on a regular basis for a 4-month period. During that time, students interacted through a simula- tion in which they played, alternately, the roles of tourists and hosts. This chapter will look critically into this joint course experience over recent years. After high- lighting the tourism context, the contents of the course and its implementation will be analysed. The learning outcomes and the key challenges of intercultural learning projects are tackled.

A. Diekmann (*) Research Centre LIToTeS (Laboratoire Interdisciplinaire, Tourisme, Territoires, Sociétés), Université Libre de Bruxelles, Bruxelles, Belgium e-mail: [email protected] M. Vincent LIToTeS, Université Libre de Bruxelles, Bruxelles, Belgium e-mail: [email protected] J. Patwardhan Garware Institute of Career Education and Development, University of Mumbai, Mumbai, India

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 163 C. Liu, H. Schänzel (eds.), Tourism Education and Asia, Perspectives on Asian Tourism, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4_10 164 A. Diekmann et al.

Keywords Tourism education · Experiential learning · Intercultural education · Belgium · India

10.1 Introduction

The tourism sector is per se international, and receiving international visitors is one of the core features and challenges when developing tourism in a country. Service quality perceptions vary from one culture to the other, and cross-cultural host-tourist­ interactions shape experiences on both sides and inform the development (or not) of markets and products. The intercultural interactions intrinsic to international tour- ism mean the sector needs graduates with inter- and multicultural skills – people who are able to deal with the needs and demands of visitors from other cultures. Academic tourism programmes need to take responsibility for developing such skills in their students in a reflective manner (Inui, Wheeler, & Lankford,2006 ). One way of doing this is to go beyond the classroom through virtual experiential-­ learning initiatives. In that context, in 2014 a ‘joint course’ was launched by two universities, one from Belgium and the other from India. Multicultural groups, com- posed of postgraduate and master’s students in tourism management programmes from both partner universities, were requested to complete a virtual role-play assignment to share knowledge, know-how, ideas and points of view. The following chapter first outlines the concept and reason behind the project, followed by the method and a description of the assignment. It then examines the students’ percep- tion of the joint course for their professional and personal curriculum. A critical analysis of the outcomes determined by teaching evaluations is also provided, and key challenges in the implementation of new forms of pedagogy and how the latter contributes to tourism education programmes in general are discussed.

10.2 Background Literature

10.2.1 Tourism and Intercultural Experience

Beginning in the second half of the twentieth century, tourism has gradually become a globalised industry and is now one of the contexts in which most people are facing intercultural communication experiences, exceeding even work or migration con- texts (Argyle, 1982). The tourism sector is then deeply connected to intercultural issues. Opportunities for intercultural experiences abound for tourists as culture is expressed in many facets of society, such as architecture, food, education, gover- nance and religion (Reisinger & Turner, 1998). A meal in a restaurant, a public transport trip, a visit to the temple and a discussion with locals are all potential occa- sions at which to experience the local culture. Furthermore, the frequency of these intercultural interactions between tourists and hosts at a global level has been steadily increasing for decades, a trend which should continue as statistics show 10 Outcomes and Challenges of a Cooperative and Intercultural Learning Project… 165 continued growth in global international tourist arrivals. The total number of inter- national tourists grew from 500 million in 1995 to 1235 million in 2016 (United Nations World Tourism Organisation [UNWTO], 2017). Tourist experiences of cultural differences on the one hand and cultural differ- ences in consumption behaviours on the other hand have both been explored in the tourism field since the 1960s. From the tourist-experience perspective, several con- cepts such as ‘culture shock’ (Oberg, 1960) or more recently ‘culture confusion’ (Hottola, 2004) have been used to describe the cultural adaptation process affecting travellers arriving in a new cultural environment. This process is known for causing periods of stress, anxiety and unpleasant feelings in visitors, and understanding and managing this phenomenon are therefore an important issue for destinations’ man- agers and service suppliers aiming at providing a satisfying tourism experience. Differences between the hosts’ and the tourists’ cultures play a significant role (Reisinger & Turner, 1998, p. 84): The greater the differences, the greater the probability that encounters will lead to friction and misunderstanding (Sutton, 1967) because the more likely they will distort the meaning of each other’s behaviour (Triandis, 1977). Indeed, the behaviour that is regarded as desir- able in one culture may be regarded as inappropriate in another culture. (Brislin, 1981) Studies of the cultural differences in consumption behaviours further increase comprehension of the needs and expectations of tourists from specific regions of the world. These studies have shown how tourist’s cultural affiliations influence them at all stages of their tourism experience. While the following examples are not exhaus- tive, cultural differences have been identified in: • Motivations (Crompton, 1979; Kim & Lee, 2000) • Expectations (Armstrong, Mok, Go, & Chan, 1997) • Destination risk perceptions (Fuchs & Reichel, 2004; Reisinger & Mavondo, 2006) • The quest for tourist information (Ortega & Rodriguez, 2007) • Satisfaction and service quality perceptions (Kozak, 2001; Reisinger & Turner, 1998; Tsaur, Lin, & Wu, 2005) These findings imply that tourism professionals and tourism students, as future active stakeholders in the sector, must acquire adequate knowledge about the cul- tural behaviours of their guests – as well as those of their partnering practitioners in other countries. Moreover, tourism is both a major agent of change at a destination as well as being subject to change itself in terms of its practices, both of these in a rather continuous way. From that perspective, tourism education needs to be rethought and reengineered constantly (Sheldon, Fesenmaier, & Tribe, 2011). Future tourism practitioners need to have practical skills, but, at the same time, they need cooperative and cultural competences that go beyond their own culture. 166 A. Diekmann et al.

10.2.2 Intercultural Experiential Learning

A way to learn practical skills has been found in experiential learning. This method involves role plays that allow participants to immerse themselves in a learning envi- ronment. Students act out the role of a character or part in a simulated scenario and can practice behaving as they would be expected to if the circumstances were real (Ruhanen, 2005). The method motivates students as they play an active part in the assignment. The role-play learning experiences are enriching because ‘they repli- cate a real-life situation as closely as desired; wherein the students have to assume roles as they analyse situations and make decisions’ (Tiwari, Nafees, & Krishnan, 2014, p. 261). This type of learning is beneficial for deep learning and allows stu- dents to better assimilate knowledge and its future applications (Gannon, Rodrigo, & Santomà, 2016). It helps students to develop creative and critical thinking skills in addition to improving their interpersonal skills and self-confidence (Papamarcos, 2002; Ruhanen, 2005). Furthermore, cultural competences need to be developed to operate in the increasingly international environment, particularly in the tourism sector composed of a large number of different cultures. Training in cultural competence teaches students to analyse people as distinct and multifaceted individuals and moves beyond natural stereotyping and clichés (Gannon et al., 2016, p. 20). The aim of the training is to escape stereotypes and reduce prejudice (if existing) and to teach stu- dents to understand individuals as unique, complex combinations of visible and invisible dimensions1 (Egan & Benedik, 2008). In summary, the project wishes to go beyond cultural general representations and to provide students with a deeper insight into cultural characteristics, such as lifestyle, traditions, social habits and ‘dos and don’ts’, and to understand the underlying reasons for these behaviours. It should, however, be underlined that most intercultural projects are part of business and management courses, with only a few examples in hospitality studies (Gannon et al., 2016); to our knowledge, none exist in tourism studies. One core feature of the development of intercultural skills is the ability to actively collaborate within a multicultural group. The project, therefore, forms groups com- prised of a mix of students from both countries tasked with delivering a common presentation. While multicultural group work gives students an opportunity to assess, process and react to unfamiliar values and ideas, research has shown that the skills and knowledge required for collaboration between diverse cultures within a group are not self-evident but must be learned (Cotton, George, & Joyner, 2013; Levin, 2005). Indeed, in the context of receiving students from other cultures, local students may be ill-prepared for the internationalisation agenda. Intercultural con- tact can only be successful if both parties put in conscious efforts (Cotton et al., 2013) and contest representations of the other culture based on stereotypes and

1 Dimensions include the demographic characteristics (e.g. race/ethnicity, gender, age, disability) and the ‘invisible’ dimensions of diversity (professional background, multiple intelligences, employers’ corporate cultures) (Egan & Benedik, 2008, p. 391). 10 Outcomes and Challenges of a Cooperative and Intercultural Learning Project… 167

­clichés that are often conveyed by social media. These difficulties are equally observed when students from different countries are asked to form one group.

10.3 Case Study: Indian and Belgium Students in a Cooperative and Intercultural Learning Project

India and Belgium are two countries that aim to increase their numbers of interna- tional visitors. So far, both countries reached around 8 million Foreign Tourism Arrivals in 2015 (Ministry of Tourism, 2016; UNWTO, 2017). For both countries, these results leave them behind their direct neighbours and regional competitors with, for example, 15 million visitors in the Netherlands and around 30 million in Thailand in the same year (UNWTO, 2017). Both countries, particularly India, present a growing outgoing market with 20 million Indians travelling (Ministry of Tourism, 2016). With Europe as one of the first destinations in the world, the poten- tial to attract Indian visitors to Belgium is high due to direct flight connections between Brussels and India.2 Belgium nationals also increasingly choose long-haul trips. The total number of long-haul trips to Asia undertaken by Belgians for holiday purposes have more than doubled in the last decade, from 83,000 in 2006 to 205,000 in 2015 (Statbel, 2017). Belgian tourists constitute an increasing potential for India. Yet both countries have a distinct cultural background and generate numerous stereotypes and clichés about the other country. In that context, the tourism departments of a Belgian and an Indian university chose to set up a cross-cultural experiential-learning experience with their master’s students, the future tourism stakeholders of both countries. As it was not possible to relocate students, communications were based on interactive tools such as Skype, Facebook and WhatsApp. The first ‘joint course’ started in September 2014 and, by the time of writing, has entered its fourth iteration. Averages of 80 students (40 from each country) participate each year in the experience, supervised by 4 academic staff. Every repetition of the course is followed by an individual evaluation by the students. In Belgium, it is a compulsory course during the second year of their mas- ter’s degree studies; however, in 2015/2016 ‘first-year’ students could choose the course voluntarily. This year was the most ‘successful’ year in terms of student numbers and learning outcomes, as students were highly motivated. In India, the course is a compulsory part of the senior post-graduate module.

2 Until March 2016, the European Hub of the Indian airline Jet Airways was in Brussels. Since March 2017, Brussels Airlines offers direct flights from Brussels to Mumbai. 168 A. Diekmann et al.

10.3.1 Study Method

The joint course is designed, through multicultural teamwork, to facilitate intercul- tural exchange between students in tourism management, to sensitise future tourism practitioners and to counter stereotyping of the other culture. The learning objec- tives are for students to achieve effective collaboration and obtain innovative results as well as being able to apply the experience in a professional environment. Students are organised in groups comprising people from both cultures and asked to com- plete a progressive assignment. Every group is composed of two national sub- groups – one from each country. The course is set up as a role play and includes the following components: • An introduction on the theory and practice of cross-cultural collaboration • A presentation on effective group collaboration, including communications tools • Several hours of presentation of information about the partner country (its his- tory, society, culture and tourism) • A 2-hour virtual meeting of all participants (students and supervisors) during an online presentation session • A final 3-hour virtual presentation of developed products by all students • Regular, virtual group meetings • Regular follow-up by supervisors with national subgroups, followed by an exchange and discussions between the supervisors to enhance communication In addition to the course, readings about theoretical concepts such as tourism destination (Saraniemi & Kylänen, 2011), cross-cultural behaviours (Reisinger & Turner, 2003) and service quality perception (Furrer, Liu, & Sudharshan, 2000) are suggested. As aforementioned, to improve the experience and learning outcomes, every par- ticipating student has to evaluate and report several times during the course on com- munication, content and any other issues that have arisen. In addition, a short online survey to assess students’ learning outcomes is sent out to the students directly after the course has been completed.

10.3.1.1 Course Content and Assignments

The core idea is that the group members from each partner university form two subgroups that each develop an adapted tourism product for their home city (Mumbai or Brussels) based on the needs and expectations of the ‘consumers’, who are the students from the partner university (the other subgroup). During the role play, a first step is the profiling of the clients. Each national subgroup explains their travel habits. They express what they like doing on holiday in general and their preferences and fears for the trip to the partner country – and suggests an innovative city trip and a 1-day excursion of 72 h (3 days and 2 nights) including all facilities, such as transport, attractions, visits, accommodation and restaurants, i.e. to Belgium 10 Outcomes and Challenges of a Cooperative and Intercultural Learning Project… 169 or India. According to the established profile, each subgroup designs a tour while also considering sustainability aspects in developing the products. The Indian stu- dents design the product for Mumbai and the Belgium students for Brussels. One challenge is to make the product attractive and to design a quality product that dif- fers from more traditional trips, which means students are invited to be creative. Table 10.1 details the tasks involved in the product development. Each national subgroup must play two concurrent ‘roles’ in order to perform the tasks: (a) As the incoming agency of a destination, the local subgroup has to prepare a trip to their city for their counterparts in the partner country. (b) In their concurrent role as consumers (clients), each subgroup has to reflect on their wishes, needs and expectations for a trip to the partner country. Attention is drawn to the fact that it is of the highest importance and a condition of the success of the project that, at all stages, Indian and Belgium students collabo- rate. Moreover, supervisors have to insist that the project is not a competition but, rather, aims at allowing students to better understand and appreciate the needs and expectations of potential consumers and allows the development of adapted, attrac- tive, high-quality products.

Table 10.1 The project tasks No. Task Content of task 1. Profiling Role play: students are consumers (outgoing) and tour operators (incoming) at the same time. They pay particular attention to cultural specificities in the development of the tourism product in both cities. Students are invited to consider and debate within the joint group meetings to reflect on differences as well as on commonalities in consumption and visiting practices, expectations and needs. That collaborative process will lead to the profiling of the clients, allowing the development of an adapted and innovative tour in tasks 2 and 3 2. Product Role play: as an incoming tour operator and based on the profile of their development clients, each national subgroup will design a trip to their local city, including all services and facilities, starting with the arrival at the airport in either Brussels or Mumbai. Students are invited to be creative and innovative in their suggestions and to design a heterogeneous programme 3. Final product After receiving feedback from the teaching staff and agreeing on the tour with the partner group, students from both countries have to develop the final product including marketing tools such as videos, brochures or slide shows according to their preference. The final product is presented by students to the partner group and teaching staff during a video conference that takes place at the end of the course 170 A. Diekmann et al.

10.3.2 Learning Outcomes of the Joint Course

This section gives a critical analysis of the outcomes resulting from the teaching evaluation of the last two times the course has been run at the time of writing (2015 and 2016) and discusses key challenges in the implementation of new forms of pedagogy. The teaching evaluation aimed at improving and reflecting on methods and assessing if the course objectives had been achieved. It was based on individual written evaluations by the student participants, on the short online survey sent to all students and on direct feedback given by student participants during classes. Course coordinators and teaching assistants also contributed to the evaluation through group discussion and through direct observation. Since it was first introduced, the course has generated positive feedback from students who have enjoyed the direct contact with students from another culture and the innovative approach employed by both universities. The project is a very innovative project and I found it very exciting from starting. We learn a lot while communicating with Belgium students, we share information about our cultures with each other and all that I found out is very unique and new for me. (Indian student) One reason is clearly the experiential learning, as a lot of students considered it ‘rewarding to work on something concrete, together with another culture’ (Belgian student). The fact that we had ‘real’ clients with their wishes and expectations gave us certainly more motivation and perhaps more involvement than if it had been purely theoretical. Indeed, we wanted our Indian partners to be glad of the trip we designed for them. (Belgian student) Another positively felt aspect of the experience was the group work. Indeed, many participants appreciated the teamwork and the complementarities found within their teams. In contrast to other group work, they felt better engagement and motivation from all participants (none of the ‘free-rider’ complaints generated by other group assignments). One reason might be that students meet another culture they hardly know, which means their curiosity is higher than in local/national group work. There was general positive feedback about the human aspect of the project. The social exchanges (some continuing after the project had finished) with students from a different country were considered to be extremely positive. The distance between the two countries and the fact that almost no student from either side had ever visited the partner country might have increased this feeling. It is questionable if a similar project with a neighbouring country would have generated the same enthusiasm. Students mentioned that they not only developed the skills to understand another culture, but they also reassessed their own culture. The evaluation from both univer- sities showed that the profiling of the ‘clients’ and the preparation of an itinerary not only contributed to improved intercultural learning and encounters but also helped students to get to know their own environment better, an aspect that was emphati- cally deemed positive by most participants. 10 Outcomes and Challenges of a Cooperative and Intercultural Learning Project… 171

Another outcome was the overcoming of stereotypes and clichés, often in oppo- sition to each other, that come from media and other narratives of the partner coun- try (Fig. 10.1). A recurrent example is that Europe is perceived as safe and, in opposition, India as unsafe. These clichés are integrated by most students, indepen- dent of their nationality. Indeed, the Indian and Belgian students had similar stereo- types of one country and tended to over-/underestimate the generalised stereotypes and prejudices of the other country. In the first phase of profiling, both sides were convinced of certain general cultural behavioural attitudes of the partners, but the exercise of ‘profiling’ changed their perceptions significantly. Students determined differences and similarities, notably due to the personal contact and exchange that allowed not only a better understanding of the partners’ visible and invisible char- acteristics (Egan & Benedik, 2008) but also a better grasp of the personality of the partner. The results (Fig. 10.1) of the online survey in 2016 show that most of the 54 respondents (30 from Belgium and 24 from India) declared that the project has changed their perception of the stereotypes of the partner country: 19 students declared that their perception of the country had changed ‘significantly’; 32 stu- dents reported change ‘to a certain extent’, in opposition to only 3 out of 54 who declared that their perception had changed ‘very little’ or ‘not at all’.

10.3.2.1 Key Challenges

However, difficulties do exist. Group work as such, particularly in a multicultural environment, can be complex. Due to the diverse cultural backgrounds and educa- tional experiences of participants, the learning attitudes and expectations can

Fig. 10.1 Change of perception of partner country (online survey 2016) 172 A. Diekmann et al. sometimes be challenging, and negative perceptions are not uncommon within such groups (Woods, Barker, & Hibbins, 2011). The major issue between the Indian and Belgium students was one of communi- cation. Non-responsiveness, lack of engagement and feeling of non-listening were the core problems highlighted at the beginning of each exercise. Exchanges between subgroups were often limited to one or two members of the partner group. Some reasons were related to organisational issues: the time difference between Belgium and India and the various geographical locations of the students. Moreover, some students were doing internships at the time of the project and had difficulty joining group members during the day. Other reasons were related to language skills, per- sonality and contrasting cultural learning styles. None of the participants had English as their first language. Moreover, Indian and Belgian English accents some- times constituted a challenge to the language comprehension of the partner group. Depending on fluency and personality, some conscientious and introverted people were perhaps less willing to publicly express themselves (Caligiuri, 2006, p. 222). Shy personalities might prefer to leave the communication tasks to others, prevent- ing themselves from having direct contact with another culture. Personality is indeed a key feature in intercultural group work. Woods et al. (2011, p. 3) include personality attributes in the multicultural context ‘such as: emo- tional stability, extraversion, agreeableness, openness to experience and conscien- tiousness; cultural empathy, open-mindedness, emotional stability, social initiative and flexibility; and patience’. In almost all groups, some members with stronger personalities imposed themselves as leaders of the group and managed the discus- sions. One-to-­one relationships, however, developed in parallel through exchanges on personal matters, such as families, life expectations, hobbies and travel experiences. In addition, contrasting cultural learning styles can lead to different learning atti- tudes, misunderstandings and false expectations. Related to this, differing cultural expectations of group-work outcomes and processes (including ‘social loafing’) can also be problematic (Park, 2002). There also are some things that disappointed me. They also have a different way of working and so it was complicated. (Belgian student) Furthermore, the intense use of technologies in an academic framework was challenging. Most students were familiar with the use of instant messaging such as WhatsApp, Skype or Facebook in informal contexts. Consequently, some of the students from both countries tended to discuss irrelevant topics instead of focussing on the assignment. It was necessary to remind them that the project was part of their curriculum. This reinforces observations made by Liburd, Hjalager and Christensen (2011) highlighting the need to be clear with students about the distinction between the use of social media in academic and informal contexts. In addition, technical factors, such as the compatibility of communication systems between the two uni- versities, played a key role at the time of using technologies. In this respect, the project faced several difficulties. Poor sound quality or repeated connection failure 10 Outcomes and Challenges of a Cooperative and Intercultural Learning Project… 173 during a video conference clearly led to frustration, particularly when the prepared work could not be shared due to technical issues. Finally, this type of pedagogy was new for most of the teachers, and it was the first time that they had had discussions with teachers from another culture on courses objectives, methods and evaluations. This pedagogical approach lead to negotia- tions to find a compromise as teaching habits and institutional contexts were differ- ent in India and Belgium. For example, teaching periods are not divided the same way in Belgium and India, which meant the project was started a few weeks earlier in India. Hierarchical relationships between coordinators, teaching assistants and students were also subject to adaptation as the role of status in interpersonal com- munication varies from one culture to another. Regular meetings and exchange of emails before and during the project were necessary to ensure the successful con- duct of the project and to avoid misunderstandings.

10.4 Conclusion

Given the current growth of international tourist arrivals at global level and the emergence of new tourism markets such as India and China (UNWTO, 2017), there is a growing need for the acquisition of intercultural skills among tourism students. The intercultural dimension is indeed a key factor in the tourist experience as it may lead to failures such as misunderstanding and disappointment. Moreover, tourism education and higher education, as a whole, are coping with a transition period where traditional methods and the roles of students and teachers are being ques- tioned. The omnipresence of the use of new technologies disrupts traditional teach- ing methods by giving new forms of learning opportunities. In addition, the often passive role played by students is challenged by emergent active teaching methods that sometimes turn out to be better alternatives (Sivan, Leung, Woon, & Kember, 2000). In that context, the experience of the joint project shared in this chapter pro- poses an innovative group approach with the combination of experiential teaching methods, requirements for creativity and a significant use of communication and technologies. As mentioned above, the joint project aims at providing students with strong intercultural skills that will enable them to reproduce successful exchanges in professional contexts marked by the presence of other cultures. With regard to the outcomes, the supportive and globally positive feedback given by students from both Belgium and India for this teaching format should be high- lighted. The students appreciated the experiential learning as an effective way to simulate concrete cases that might be useful for their future working life. They argued the joint project allowed them to challenge the stereotypes and clichés they had held about the partner country. The groups’ dynamics seem to have played a significant role in the successful execution of the assignments as it facilitated exchanges inside national groups and between international partners. In this respect, students have directly benefited from the internationalisation of their respective tourism programmes. As not all students can travel, such an experience can, at least 174 A. Diekmann et al. partially, provide intercultural encounters that will contribute to increasing the offering of customised tourism products and lead to greater consumer and provider satisfaction. As international tourism becomes a major lever for development in Asian countries such as India, the improvement of intercultural skills is a central issue. Key challenges related to the implementation of such an intercultural learning project have also been addressed in the chapter. The main difficulties and problems encountered by students and teachers during the project include dealing with com- munication, the use of technologies and cultural differences in teaching practices. Personality and relational aspects played a significant role in the functioning of groups and needed to be managed by supervisors. As mentioned in the learning outcomes of the joint project, the analysis is based on students’ answers to a short survey and on direct observations made by teachers during the project. This teach- ing evaluation process has some limitations within which the results must be inter- preted. The analysis cannot be generalised to other similar projects. It aims rather at sharing with a larger audience the learning outcomes and challenges from a specific experience. As each year the project is evaluated by the students, every new iteration of the course is reviewed to improve the experience and learning outcomes. Another out- come, not fully part of the project, is that some students become friends and, to date, on average two or three Belgian students travel to India each year as a consequence. Up to now, due to financial reasons, Indian students have not visited Belgium. However, actively looking for funding schemes, we hope that in the near future Indian students will also get the opportunity to travel to Belgium.

References

Argyle, M. (1982). Inter-cultural communication. In S. Bochner (Ed.), Cultures in contact: Studies in cross-cultural interactions (pp. 61–79). Oxford, UK: Elsevier. Armstrong, R. W., Mok, C., Go, F. M., & Chan, A. (1997). The importance of cross-cultural expec- tations in the measurement of service quality perceptions in the hotel industry. International Journal of Hospitality Management, 16(2), 181–190. Brislin, R. W. (1981). Cross-cultural encounters: Face to face interaction. New York, NY: Pergamon Press. Caligiuri, P. (2006). Developing global leaders. Human Resource Management Review, 16(2), 219–228. Cotton, D. R., George, R., & Joyner, M. (2013). Interaction and influence in culturally mixed groups. Innovations in Education and Teaching International, 50(3), 272–283. Crompton, J. L. (1979). Motivations for pleasure vacation. Annals of Tourism Research, 6(4), 408–424. Egan, M. L., & Bendick Jr., M. (2008). Combining multicultural management and diversity into one course on cultural competence. Academy of Management Learning & Education, 7(3), 387–393. Fuchs, G., & Reichel, A. (2004). Cultural differences in tourist destination risk perception: An exploratory study. Tourism (Zagreb), 52(1), 21–37. 10 Outcomes and Challenges of a Cooperative and Intercultural Learning Project… 175

Furrer, O., Liu, B. S. C., & Sudharshan, D. (2000). The relationships between culture and ser- vice quality perceptions: Basis for cross-cultural market segmentation and resource allocation. Journal of Service Research, 2(4), 355–371. Gannon, J., Rodrigo, Z., & Santomà, R. (2016). Learning to work interculturally and virtually: Developing postgraduate hospitality management students across international HE institutions. The International Journal of Management Education, 14(1), 18–27. Hottola, P. (2004). Culture confusion: Intercultural adaptation in tourism. Annals of Tourism Research, 31(2), 447–466. Inui, Y., Wheeler, D., & Lankford, S. (2006). Rethinking tourism education: What should schools teach? Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sport and Tourism Education, 5(2), 25–35. Kim, C., & Lee, S. (2000). Understanding the cultural differences in tourist motivation between Anglo-American and Japanese tourists. Journal of Travel & Tourism Marketing, 9(1–2), 153–170. Kozak, M. (2001). Comparative assessment of tourist satisfaction with destinations across two nationalities. Tourism Management, 22(4), 391–401. Levin, P. (2005). Successful teamwork. New York, NY: McGraw-Hill Education. Liburd, J., Hjalager, A. M., & Christensen, I. M. F. (2011). Valuing tourism education 2.0. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 11(1), 107–130. Ministry of Tourism. (2016). India tourism statistics at a glance. New Delhi, India: Government of India. Oberg, K. (1960). Cultural shock: Adjustment to new cultural environments. Practical Anthropology, 7(4), 177–182. Ortega, E., & Rodriguez, B. (2007). Information at tourism destinations: Importance and cross-­ cultural differences between international and domestic tourists. Journal of Business Research, 60(2), 146–152. Papamarcos, S. D. (2002). The “next wave” in service-learning: Integrative, team-based engage- ments with structural objectives. Review of Business, 23(2), 31–38. Park, C. C. (2002). Crosscultural differences in learning style of secondary English learners. Bilingual Research Journal, 26(2), 443–459. Reisinger, Y., & Mavondo, F. (2006). Cultural differences in travel risk perception. Journal of Travel & Tourism Marketing, 20(1), 13–31. Reisinger, Y., & Turner, L. (1998). Cross-cultural differences in tourism: A strategy for tourism marketers. Journal of Travel & Tourism Marketing, 7(4), 79–106. Reisinger, Y., & Turner, L. W. (2003). Chapter 1: Culture. In Cross-cultural behaviour in tourism: Concepts and analysis (pp. 3–33). Oxford, UK: Butterworth-Heinemann. Ruhanen, L. (2005). Bridging the divide between theory and practice: Experiential learning approaches for tourism and hospitality management education. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 5(4), 33–51. Saraniemi, S., & Kylänen, M. (2011). Problematizing the concept of tourism destination: An anal- ysis of different theoretical approaches. Journal of Travel Research, 50(2), 133–143. Sheldon, P. J., Fesenmaier, D. R., & Tribe, J. (2011). The tourism education futures initiative (TEFI): Activating change in tourism education. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 11(1), 2–23. Sivan, A., Leung, R. W., Woon, C. C., & Kember, D. (2000). An implementation of active learn- ing and its effect on the quality of student learning. Innovations in Education and Teaching International, 37(4), 381–389. Statbel. (2017). Direction générale Statistique – Statistics Belgium. Rapports et Statistiques annu- els: Enquêtes voyages 2006–2015. Retrieved September 6, 2017, from http://statbel.fgov.be/ fr/modules/publications/statistiques/marche_du_travail_et_conditions_de_vie/enquete_voy- ages_-_overview.jsp Sutton, W. A. (1967). Travel and understanding: Notes on the social structure of touring. International Journal of Comparative Sociology, 8, 218–223. 176 A. Diekmann et al.

Tiwari, S. R., Nafees, L., & Krishnan, O. (2014). Simulation as a pedagogical tool: Measurement of impact on perceived effective learning. The International Journal of Management Education, 12(3), 260–270. Triandis, H. (1977). Subjective culture and interpersonal relations across cultures. Annals of New York Academy of Sciences, 285, 418–434. Tsaur, S. H., Lin, C. T., & Wu, C. S. (2005). Cultural differences of service quality and behavioral intention in tourist hotels. Journal of Hospitality & Leisure Marketing, 13(1), 41–63. United Nations World Tourism Organization. (2017). UNWTO, tourism highlights 2016. Madrid, Spain: UNWTO Press. Woods, P., Barker, M., & Hibbins, R. (2011). Tapping the benefits of multicultural group work: An exploratory study of postgraduate management students. International Journal of Management Education, 9(2), 59–70. Chapter 11 Career Goals of Chinese International Tourism and Hospitality Students in Australia

Katrine Sonnenschein

Abstract Research on the career aspirations of university students has typically focused on general career expectations rather than specific goals such as job posi- tions and salaries. In particular, there is a lack in the body of knowledge regarding the career goals of Chinese international students studying tourism and hospitality. In Australia, hospitality management was the sixth most popular degree among Chinese international university students within business and commerce in 2016. Due to the popularity of the tourism and hospitality programmes among Chinese international students and the booming tourism and hospitality job market in China, it is necessary to undertake research into the career goals of these students. Evidence from 15 semi-structured interviews with Chinese international students enrolled in an Australian tourism and hospitality degree is presented. The findings demonstrate that most students changed their career goals during their studies. Some students also developed clearer career aspirations during their enrolment. The study has found that in order to provide students with more realistic insights into work require- ments in the tourism and hospitality industry, a strong collaboration between uni- versity and industry is crucial. Finally, the findings show that academics play an important role in assisting students to develop realistic expectations about their future careers and to discover where their genuine interests lie.

Keywords Career goals · Career aspirations · Tourism and hospitality manage- ment education · Chinese international students · Generation Y · Work-integrated learning

K. Sonnenschein (*) Department of Learning and Philosophy, Aalborg University, Nathan, Australia e-mail: [email protected]

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 177 C. Liu, H. Schänzel (eds.), Tourism Education and Asia, Perspectives on Asian Tourism, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4_11 178 K. Sonnenschein

11.1 Introduction

The transition from school to work is a crucial milestone in a young person’s life, and it plays an important role in the development of their future career (Ng Yin-ling, 2016). Most of the career literature in hospitality focuses on students’ general atti- tudes towards working in the industry (Wan, King, Wong, & Kong, 2014). While research on the career goals and expectations of university students has typically explored general career expectations, specific expectations (e.g. job positions and salaries) are rarely explored (Lu & Adler, 2009). In particular, there is a scarcity of research on the career goals of Chinese students studying tourism and hospitality anywhere (Lu & Adler, 2009). According to Zhang and Wu (2004), there are many human resource challenges facing China’s hospitality industry. The main problems are the lack of qualified employees, high staff-turnover rates, lack of interest among university graduates in entering the industry and the gap between the curriculum of the educational provid- ers and the realities of the industry itself. Tourism and hospitality graduates often do not have realistic expectations of the job market, which often leads to graduate disil- lusionment in their employment (Kokt & Strydom, 2014; Nachmias & Walmsley, 2015). In general, organisational commitment in tourism and hospitality is particularly low, and the turnover rate is higher among Generation Y employees when compared to previous generations (Brown, Thomas, & Bosselman, 2015). According to Solnet and Hood (2008), members of Generation Y (people born between 1979 and 1994) wish to work for managers who will empower them and grant them flexibility. On the one hand, it is crucial for employers to understand the career goals and expecta- tions of their future workforce (Generation Y) in order to recruit and retain qualified staff in the current competitive labour market (Lu & Adler, 2009). Employers will then be able to develop successful human resource strategies and gain a competitive advantage (Baum, 2007). On the other hand, it is crucial for students to have work experience during their studies in order to develop more realistic expectations about their future careers (Robinson, Ruhanen, & Breakey, 2016). Since the early 2000s, Australia has been a major destination of choice for Chinese international students (Davis & Mackintosh, 2011). Hospitality manage- ment was the sixth most popular degree among Chinese international students within business and commerce in Australian higher education in 2016 (Australian Government Department of Education and Training, 2016). Davidson and King (2008) claim that Chinese international students pursuing a tourism and hospitality degree in Australia generally consider the tourism and hospitality industry as a sec- tor offering dynamic employment opportunities. In particular, the number of hotels in China has increased in recent years (B. Chan & Yeung, 2009; D. Chan, Ye, & Xu, 2016). The number of Chinese graduates returning to China has rapidly grown in recent years because of significant job opportunities in a booming economy (“Georgia on their mind”, 2015). According to The Economist (“Georgia on their mind”, 2015), more than 350,000 Chinese graduates returned in 2013, compared 11 Career Goals of Chinese International Tourism and Hospitality Students in Australia 179 with 20,000 only 10 years earlier. Given the number of Chinese students enrolled in tourism and hospitality programmes in Australia, the booming tourism and hospital- ity job market in China (Saurine, 2013) and the high number of returning Chinese international students, it seems timely to undertake research into the career goals of Chinese international students enrolled in Australian tourism and hospitality programmes.

11.2 Purpose of the Study

The study seeks to investigate Chinese international students’ change of career goals during their studies and the reasons behind these changes. There are three research questions, as follows: 1. To what extent do Chinese international students change their career goals within the hospitality industry? 2. To what extent do Chinese international students change their career goals out- side the hospitality industry? 3. What are the reasons behind the changes? Because of the explorative nature of the research, this study included an analysis of 15 semi-structured interviews with Chinese international students all enrolled at one university in south-east Queensland. The participants were second-year (N = 9) and third-year students (N = 6) enrolled in a Bachelor of Business (International Tourism and Hotel Management and Hotel Management) programme.

11.3 Literature Review

11.3.1 Career Expectations of Generation Y

A generation is defined by Kupperschmidt (2000) as “an identifiable group (cohorts) that shares birth years, age location and significant life events at critical develop- mental stages (times), divided by 5–7 years in the first wave, core group and last wave” (p. 66). As Solnet and Hood (2008) argued, the work-related characteristics of Generation Y are worthy of consideration, because this generation is now reach- ing adulthood and will become the leaders, managers and consumers of tourism by 2020 (Cairncross & Buultjens, 2010). Their work ethic and attitudes are very differ- ent from those of previous generations (David, Rune Todnem, & Kate, 2007). Solnet and Hood (2008) claim that Generation Y may be motivated by the ability to dem- onstrate initiative in their work rather than by constantly following directions from a manager. According to Martin (2005), members of Generation Y are entrepreneur- ial, and they appreciate challenging work and creative expression. Barron, Maxwell, 180 K. Sonnenschein

Broadbridge and Ogden (2007) add that some students are inspired to start their own business due to their experiences of management in the hospitality industry, gained during part-time jobs. Generation Y members also desire jobs that provide fair compensation, positive company culture and training (Morton, 2002). However, Brown et al. (2015) claim that students lack a realistic understanding of careers in the tourism and hospitality industry in relation to salary and working conditions. The authors add that academic staff need to teach students about the realities of careers in this industry by using current examples in the classroom. Not much research has been located on Generation Y in relation to the Chinese context. However, in Lynton and Thøgersen’s (2010) study, Generation Y in China is characterised “as ambitious and demanding, hypersensitive, and almost allergic to criticism” (p. 1). The authors argue that Generation Y does not accept hierarchical rules as well as the previous generation did, which may cause conflicts between young employees and their managers. Managers in China thus need to find new strategies for managing Generation Y employees (Lynton & Thøgersen, 2010). Evidently, China’s Generation Y expects immediate promotion; even though they are willing to start at a lower level, they expect to advance quickly (Zhao & Liu, 2008).

11.3.2 The Influence of Internships on Students’ Career Goals

Research shows that students who have worked during their tourism and hospitality studies have more realistic expectations than those who have not. According to Robinson et al. (2016), many students enrol in a tourism and hospitality programme without having clear career aspirations about the work they would like to pursue in the industry. The authors explain this by the fact that tourism and hospitality degrees are often not students’ first preferences (Robinson et al., 2016). Therefore, to better manage the career expectations of students, university and industry need to collabo- rate more closely to inform potential students about the opportunities and employ- ment conditions they can expect after graduating; this could potentially be achieved through open days, information sessions with the industry and internships (Robinson et al., 2016). Work-integrated learning (WIL) has been identified as a way to equip graduates with attributes that make them work ready by developing their generic skills (Crebert, Bates, Bell, Patrick, & Cragnolini, 2004; Mutereko & Wedekind, 2015). It includes initiatives such as internships, practicums, field work, cooperative projects operated through industry and/or community connections and simulations (Smith, 2012; Wardle, 2014). For consistency, this study uses WIL interchangeably with internships. According to Ko (2008), internship experiences may help students benefit more in future careers. Wan et al. (2014) agree that students working part-time or under- taking internships in the hospitality industry are considerably more inclined to con- tinue to work in the industry upon graduation. D. Chang and Chu (2009), S. Chang and Tse (2015), Seyitoğlu and Yirik (2015) and Li and Li (2013) also highlight the 11 Career Goals of Chinese International Tourism and Hospitality Students in Australia 181 critical importance of internships in preparing students to join the hospitality indus- try and in developing their motivation to stay in the industry. However, some research has demonstrated that students might change their career goals following their work experience (Robinson et al., 2016). For example, some students who undertake work experience are more inclined to decide not to work in the tourism and hospitality industry (Richardson, 2008). Others claim that most changes in students’ career aspirations relate to a change of direction within the industry (Kim, 2014; Robinson et al., 2016). For example, some students might wish to change to establishing a career in tourism instead of a career in hospitality (Robinson et al., 2016). Wardle (2014) argues that even though there is increasing awareness of the importance of WIL in Australian university education, there is still a lack of an effective framework to incorporate it into the curriculum so that it benefits a maxi- mum of students, industries and universities. Policies and procedures should be developed by the university together with other stakeholders regarding the criteria for host organisations, selection processes and external funding (Zopiatis & Constanti, 2012). Many international students have high expectations of gaining professional employment in the host country during their studies (Lawrence, 2014). However, they often do not gain relevant work experience during their overseas studies (Jackson, 2017). One reason is that some employers do not accept interna- tional students because there is a limited return on investment in offering interna- tional students workplace training and supervision when they are unlikely to remain in Australia after graduation. Other reasons are the students’ poor English language skills and lack of knowledge of the Australian workplace culture, their lack of con- nections and their visa restrictions (Gribble, 2014; Mackaway, Winchester-Seeto, & Carter, 2014; Patrick et al., 2008). Mackaway et al. (2014) recommend special sup- port for international students seeking internships, given their difficulties gaining positions in companies in their host country. There is a lack of research regarding the specific career aspirations of students, including Chinese students studying tourism and hospitality (Lu & Adler, 2009). Furthermore, there is not much research on Generation Y’s job expectations in the Chinese work context (Lynton & Thøgersen, 2010). While a considerable amount of research has been undertaken regarding the benefits of internships for students’ development of their career aspirations (D. Chang & Chu, 2009; S. Chang & Tse, 2015; Robinson et al., 2016; Seyitoğlu & Yirik, 2015), research also demonstrates that international students face particular challenges finding internships in their host countries.

11.4 Methodology

This study used a qualitative interpretative methodology. Researchers using an interpretive paradigm tend to rely on respondents’ views of the phenomenon being studied (Mackenzie & Knipe, 2006). The essence of the interpretive paradigm is “to understand the subjective world of human experience” (Cohen & Manion, 1994, 182 K. Sonnenschein p. 36). This research relies on the perceptions of the interviewees in relation to changes in their career goals during their studies. A social constructionist episte- mology has been applied. Social constructionism refers to the mode of meaning generation, where one’s culture teaches one how to view phenomena. Social con- structionism emphasises that culture has an influence on the way people perceive the world (Crotty, 1998). The overall sampling strategy of the research was a combination of purposive and snowball sampling. The study included an analysis of 15 semi-structured inter- views with Chinese international students, all enrolled at one university in south-­ east Queensland. They were second-year (N = 9) and third-year students (N = 6) enrolled in the Bachelor of Business programme (International Tourism and Hotel Management and Hotel Management). Five were male and ten were female. The students were between 18 and 31 years of age; however, exact ages of all the inter- viewees were not available as the interview guide grouped the ages into categories, such as 18–25 and 26–31. This was done to avoid being too intrusive. Sometimes the interviewees mentioned their age voluntarily, in which case it was recorded. The interviews were conducted on campus in English and audio-recorded. All inter- views were transcribed verbatim. Coding was used as a method of data reduction (Glaser & Strauss, 1967). Open codes were developed at the beginning of the data analysis. After the open coding, the same characteristics were regrouped into categories that represented more abstract concepts (i.e. axial coding). After both open and axial codes were grouped and labelled, the categories were integrated into a core category through selective coding. Selective codes use the same principles as axial coding, but the integration of categories is made at a higher level of abstraction (Strauss & Corbin, 1998). The coding process was undertaken with NVivo10 software. This program enables the importation of transcriptions and coding of selected quotes. A thematic analysis of the interview data was undertaken, and, through it, repeated “patterns of meaning” in the data were examined (Braun & Clarke, 2006, p. 86). The researcher identified themes in an inductive way, which means that the “themes identified were strongly linked to the data themselves” and not coloured by theory (Braun & Clarke, 2006, p. 83). The thematic analysis was undertaken when all data had been coded. The various codes were analysed and collated into an overarching theme at a higher level of abstraction. In Table 11.1, a summary of the open, axial and selective codes and central theme is provided. The central theme “Career goals of Chinese international tourism and hospitality students” was developed inductively by connecting selective codes. In turn, these selective codes were formed inductively from various axial codes, which were developed from several open codes that emerged in the interview data (see Table 11.1). This chapter will only discuss the two selective codes “Change of career goals during studies” and “Reasons for change of career goals”, since most students had changed their career goals (N = 10) during their studies. Only four students did not change their career goals, and one student did not express any goals. Abbreviations of the students’ names (e.g., SKE) are used after quotes from 11 Career Goals of Chinese International Tourism and Hospitality Students in Australia 183

Table 11.1 Summary of open, axial and selective codes and central theme according to the career goals of Chinese international tourism and hospitality students Central theme: Career goals of Chinese international tourism and hospitality students Selective codes Axial codes Open codes Change of career goals Career change within the tourism From food and beverage manager during studies and hospitality industry to general manager From HR manager to general manager From department manager to general manager From owner of a coffee shop to human resources in a hotel Students gaining a clear idea of From no career goals to their career goals becoming a food and beverage manager From no clear idea to opening a hotel or tourism agency From no career goal to opening own restaurant From no clear ideas to developing a vegetarian restaurant Career change outside the tourism From working in a travel agency and hospitality industry to becoming an accountant From working in a hotel to becoming a salesperson for a big brand Reasons for change of External factors Lecturers/courses career goals Work experience/lack of work experience Parents/friends Religion Internal factors Maturity Exposure to Australia No change of career Own business Take over father’s hotel goals during studies Open own hotel Employee Advertising manager in the tourism and hotel industry Hotel manager 184 K. Sonnenschein respondents to protect their anonymity. Furthermore, original expressions by the respondents have been retained in this chapter.

11.5 Findings

11.5.1 Change of Career Goals During Studies and the Reasons Behind These Changes

Ten of the interviewees claimed that they had changed their career goals during their overseas studies. Each of their responses are detailed below. First are responses from four students who modified their career goals from one position in the hospi- tality industry to another. Second are those from four students who went from hav- ing no clear career aspirations to developing clear career goals. Third are responses from two students who changed from wanting a career within the hospitality indus- try to one outside this industry altogether.

11.5.2 Career Change Within the Hospitality Industry

Four students (SR, SKE, SA, SKI) developed higher career goals within the tourism and hospitality industry during their overseas studies in Australia, with all of them expressing their desire to become general managers in the long term. SR explained how he had developed more confidence during his studies. In the beginning, he had wanted to become a food and beverage manager, but later he became more ambi- tious due to a course he undertook on how to run a restaurant. He also gained work experience in a hotel in Australia during his studies: Okay, it’s very simple because for this semester we are studying like we’re going to study how to run a restaurant, how to run a hotel. And I have read some overviews of the course, and I think I got a little bit ambitious like I may be the general manager because you have to like … just I want to be more challenged like that. (SR) Similarly, SKE had become inspired to be a general manager through the courses she had completed during her degree. She worked as a housekeeper, waitress and cashier during her studies, which might have helped her gain knowledge about the industry and to develop her ambitions about becoming a general manager: Maybe because my course, my courses. Just, you know, my course is getting like harder to me and I will know more professional knowledge in the hotel industry. I find that really interesting to study the knowledge. I really enjoy that. (SKE) SA explained that he had matured and learnt that he needed to work his way up the hierarchy in the hotel industry. He understood that he could not realistically expect a high-level position at the beginning of his career. Furthermore, he had 11 Career Goals of Chinese International Tourism and Hospitality Students in Australia 185 completed some work experience during his studies, which might have helped him better understand the industry: Yeah, [my opinion] changed a little bit because before I started my university, that time I was young and I was expected to like higher positions. But now I understand I have to start from a low position and step by step, yeah, do the work, get promoted, do the work. (SA)

I had some work experience, a part-time job in a restaurant. So when I just had that job, I totally don’t understand anything. And I have to learn I think, learn how to, you know, set the table, how to serve, serve dishes, take orders, I have to learn it. (SA) One student (SKI) had changed career goals from wanting to own a coffee shop to working with human resources in a hotel. She reported that her career goals had changed due to being inspired by her tutor in the Human Resource Management teaching unit. The tutor was also working as a human resource manager in a com- pany. She was further motivated to pursue this line of work because she had per- formed well in this course: Her job [the tutor’s] is HR manager but she said something about like her experience from the HR. And I think this is one thing that changed my career goals. Other thing is according to my grades … So the other course, the HR, the course from HR, I got distinction, high distinction or something like this. (SKI)

11.5.3 Students Gaining a Clear Idea of Their Career Goals

Four students (SJA, SJE, SHE, SEL) explained that they did not have any clear career goals before starting their overseas studies in Australia but that they had developed career goals as they progressed in their studies. One student (SJE) explained that his original career goal of becoming a clothing designer, like his father, could not be fulfilled once his twin brother had chosen that path. Therefore, he chose tourism and hospitality management instead. Now he is interested in open- ing a hotel or tourism agency. Before I started, I just want to [do the] same [as] my father, his job, just design the clothes … My father is just doing design. But my family just twins, I am twins and my brother is just doing design and my father just told me doing the other job. (SJE) SJE’s career goals had become clearer during his overseas studies through courses that he found interesting. In particular, he enjoyed a course about sustain- ability, which made him aware of the problem of pollution in China. Another student (SHE) explained how she had developed clearer career goals during her overseas studies. She felt that she had matured during her stay overseas through the people she had met and the environment she was in. I think I have grown up a lot in Australia. [It] is the people that I meet in Australia and actu- ally the environment that influenced me a lot. (SHE) 186 K. Sonnenschein

A third student (SJA) claimed that her career goals about opening a vegetarian restaurant had developed through her work experience. She explained: The first job, part-time job, like I said, working in the vegetarian restaurant opening [in] the [Fortitude] Valley, I get very good experiences there. And the owners of the restaurants are [a] couple. They are all vegetarian. Their families are vegetarian. (SJA)

Before I come here it’s not that clear. But after I come here, it is more clear, like in vegetar- ian, yeah. (SJA) She added that she had gained a deeper understanding of the Buddhist religion, which had helped her understand what she wanted to do in her career: Yeah, because I’m a Buddhist. And I become a Buddhist after I studied abroad actually although I have this religion before. But I studied abroad by myself so I get more like under- stand about the religion more and then getting more clear about what I really want to do. (SJA)

11.5.4 Career Change Outside the Hospitality Industry

Two students (SAL, SJO) initially wanted to work in the tourism and hospitality indus- try but had changed their career goals to another industry during their overseas studies. One student explained that she was not sure anymore if she wanted to work in a travel agency. Through her accounting lecturer at the Australian university, she had gained an interest in accounting and was inspired to potentially change her career path: And I really liked the teacher. And she explained everything very clearly and I was inter- ested in accounting so I think, oh, maybe I can choose accounting as my minor. (SAL) Another student found out after studying tourism and hospitality in Australia that she preferred working in sales for a large luxury brand company. One reason for her change of career goals was her friends’ negative work experience in the industry. Another reason was that she had had trouble becoming familiar with the industry herself during her studies, due to the lack of internship opportunities. I know some friends who have experience in the work in the hotel because I know some friends here. They’ve been here a long time and also they did a job like part-time, full-time in the hotel. They told me hotel is really tight … They should wake up 4:30, 5 o’clock, really tight. And the pay is not really high compared to others. (SJO)

Also I tried to find an internship. I found hotel internship is really hard to find. (SJO)

11.6 Discussion

The findings demonstrate that most of the students (N = 8) changed career goals within the tourism and hospitality industry or developed clearer career aspirations during their studies. Kim (2014) agrees that the changes in the students’ career 11 Career Goals of Chinese International Tourism and Hospitality Students in Australia 187 goals mostly relate to a change of direction within the industry. Four of the students in the current study had changed career goals from a lower to a higher level (general manager) within the hotel industry. These findings correspond with the literature on Generation Y that states it is ambitious (Lynton & Thøgersen, 2010). The students explained that their goal of becoming a general manager was a long-term one and that they were aware of the need to work their way up a company. None of the stu- dents interviewed claimed that they wanted a quick promotion. This is contrary to Zhao and Liu (2008), who claimed that even though Generation Y know they have to start at a lower level, they expect to advance quickly. One reason for the more realistic expectations held by the students in the current study may be that they had matured during their studies in Australia, as explained by the student (SA). Another reason could be that they all had hotel work experience during their overseas stud- ies, which might have provided them with more accurate ideas about the industry. This concurs with Robinson et al. (2016), who argue that students who have had work experience during their studies normally develop more realistic expectations than those who have not. In order to assist Chinese international students to develop more accurate ideas about their future career, universities should provide them with more assistance in gaining internship opportunities (Jackson, 2017). These students often encounter difficulties in finding an internship in Australia due to employers’ perceptions of their poor English language skills and lack of knowledge of the Australian workplace culture (Gribble, 2014; Mackaway et al., 2014; Patrick et al., 2008). Four students changed from having no clear career aspirations to having clear ideas about what future positions they would like to hold in the tourism and hospi- tality industry. According to Robinson et al. (2016), many students enrol in a tour- ism and hospitality programme without having well-defined career goals for working within the industry and offering no commitment. This can be explained by the fact that tourism and hospitality degrees are often not students’ preferred choice (Robinson et al., 2016). Therefore, to better manage the career expectations of stu- dents, universities and industry need to collaborate better to inform students about opportunities in the tourism and hospitality job market (Robinson et al., 2016). Interestingly, some of the students in the current study formed entrepreneurial career aspirations after beginning their studies, in that they wished to start their own restaurant/hotel. Martin (2005) has also argued that entrepreneurship is a character- istic of Generation Y. The entrepreneurial aspirations of the students in the current study had developed due to their work experience and the general maturity they had gained during their overseas studies. Similarly, in a study by Barron et al. (2007), several students expressed their desire to start their own business after their work experience. Only two students had changed their minds from initially wanting to work in the tourism and hospitality industry to a position in another industry. One student claimed that she had gained a particular interest in accounting since she had started her studies because of her inspirational accounting lecturer. Previously, she had wanted to work in a travel agency. Another student expressed her preference to work within sales in a large luxury brand company instead of tourism and hospitality after 188 K. Sonnenschein having started her studies. One important reason for this change of career goal was her failure to secure an internship in the industry, which might have given her rele- vant insights. This statement corresponds with Wan et al. (2014) and S. Chang and Tse (2015) who claim that students who are prepared for the industry through work experience during their studies are more inclined to look for a position in the indus- try after graduation.

11.7 Conclusions

The data demonstrate that most of the Chinese international students interviewed in the current study modified their career goals during their overseas studies. Four students changed career goals within the hospitality industry, and four students changed from having no clear career aspirations to having clear ideas about what future positions they would like to hold in the tourism and hospitality industry. Two students had changed their minds from initially wanting to work in the tourism and hospitality industry to wanting a position in another industry. Only two students did not change career goals during their studies. The reasons for changes in the stu- dents’ career goals were external factors, such as lecturers’ and parents’ influence, and lack of work experience. Also, the maturity that the students had developed during their studies overseas had helped them become more aware of their career goals. Some of the students interviewed had changed their career goals through being inspired by their tutors/lecturers. Therefore, academics need to spend more time with their students to assist them in better understanding the industry and helping them develop realistic expectations about salary and working conditions. Furthermore, in order to help students develop their career goals, universities and industry need to cooperate better to inform students about the work available, for example, through WIL. WIL needs an effective framework through which it can be incorporated into the university curriculum so that a maximum number of interna- tional students can use it to develop more realistic expectations about their future careers. This study adds to the body of knowledge by exploring specific career goals of university students instead of the more general investigations on the topic. Furthermore, there is a lack of research into the career goals of Chinese interna- tional students enrolled in Australian tourism and hospitality programmes. Since the tourism and hospitality industry in China is booming and a large number of Chinese international students are returning to their home country, research into this particu- lar topic is pertinent. For future research, it is relevant to investigate how Chinese international students are different from their western counterparts in choosing career goals. 11 Career Goals of Chinese International Tourism and Hospitality Students in Australia 189

11.8 Limitations

One limitation of the study is its sampling method. This study cannot claim to be representative of Chinese international students in all the tourism and hospitality degree programmes in Australia, as it only focuses on in-depth interviews of stu- dents from one Australian university. Teichler (2000) claimed that there is a lack of qualitative data in the literature on graduate employment, as most of it consists of large-scale quantitative studies. Johnston (2003) added that qualitative data, such as interviews, enable researchers to focus more in-depth on human perceptions com- pared to large-scale quantitative data. Therefore, the relatively small sample used in this study has still produced in-depth data. Like the interviewees, English is not my first language. Language differences might therefore increase the potential for the misinterpretation of interviews. By ensuring that all respondents received transcriptions of their interviews and were able to check for misunderstandings, I have sought to overcome these linguistic limitations.

References

Australian Government Department of Education and Training. (2016). Chinese student enrol- ments in hospitality and tourism (Unpublished raw data). Barron, P., Maxwell, G., Broadbridge, A., & Ogden, S. (2007). Careers in hospitality management: Generation Y’s experiences and perceptions. Journal of Hospitality and Tourism Management, 14(2), 119–128. Baum, T. (2007). Human resources in tourism: Still waiting for change. Tourism Management, 28(6), 1383–1399. Braun, V., & Clarke, V. (2006). Using thematic analysis in psychology. Qualitative Research in Psychology, 3(2), 77–101. Brown, E. A., Thomas, N. J., & Bosselman, R. H. (2015). Are they leaving or staying: A qualitative analysis of turnover issues for Generation Y hospitality employees with a hospitality education. International Journal of Hospitality Management, 46, 130–137. Cairncross, G., & Buultjens, J. (2010). Generation Y and work in tourism and hospitality: Problem? What problem? In P. Benckendorff, G. Moscardo, & D. Pendergast (Eds.), Tourism and Generation Y (pp. 143–154). Cambridge, MA: CABI. Chan, B., & Yeung, S. (2009). Hotel development in China: The hoteliers’ perspective. Journal of China Tourism Research, 5(2), 210–223. Chan, D., Ye, T., & Xu, H. (2016). Localization of senior managers of international luxury hotels in China: The current situation and influencing factors. Journal of China Tourism Research, 12(1), 126–143. Chang, D. Y., & Chu, P. Y. (2009). University-industry cooperation in action: A case study of the integrated internship program (IIP) in Taiwan. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 21(1), 6–16. Chang, S., & Tse, E. C.-Y. (2015). Understanding the initial career decisions of hospitality gradu- ates in Hong Kong: Quantitative and qualitative evidence. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Research, 39(1), 57–74. 190 K. Sonnenschein

Cohen, L., & Manion, L. (1994). Research methods in education (Vol. 4). New York, NY: Routledge. Crebert, G., Bates, M., Bell, B., Patrick, C. J., & Cragnolini, V. (2004). Developing generic skills at university, during work placement and in employment: Graduates’ perceptions. Higher Education Research & Development, 23(2), 147–165. Crotty, M. (1998). The foundations of social research: Meaning and perspective in the research process. St Leonards, Australia: Allen & Unwin. David, M., Rune Todnem, B., & Kate, H. (2007). Towards a model of human resource solutions for achieving intergenerational interaction in organisations. Journal of European Industrial Training, 31(8), 592–608. Davidson, M. C., & King, B. (2008). The purchasing experiences of Chinese tourism and hospital- ity students in Australia. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 20(1), 30–37. Davis, D., & Mackintosh, B. (2011). Making a difference: Australian international education. Sydney, Australia: University of New South Wales Press. Georgia on their mind. (2015, February 19). The economist. Retrieved from http://www.economist. com/news/china/21644222-yearning-american-higher-education-has-driven-surge-overseas- study-georgia-their Glaser, B. G., & Strauss, A. L. (1967). The discovery of grounded theory: Strategies for qualitative research. Hawthorne, NY: Aldine De Gruyter. Gribble, C. (2014). Employment, work placements and work integrated learning of interna- tional students in Australia (Research Digest 2, IEAA). Melbourne, Australia: International Education Association of Australia. Jackson, D. (2017). Exploring the challenges experienced by international students during work-­ integrated learning in Australia. Asia Pacific Journal of Education, 37(3), 344–359. Johnston, B. (2003). The shape of research in the field of higher education and graduate employ- ment: Some issues. Studies in Higher Education, 28(4), 413–426. Kim, N. (2014). Employee turnover intention among newcomers in travel industry. International Journal of Tourism Research, 16(1), 56–64. Ko, W.-H. (2008). Training, satisfaction with internship programs, and confidence about future careers among hospitality students: A case study of universities in Taiwan. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 7(4), 1–15. Kokt, D., & Strydom, A. J. (2014). Reflecting on industry and student expectations for working in the tourism and hospitality industry: A case study. South African Journal for Research in Sport, Physical Education & Recreation, 36(1), 119–130. Kupperschmidt, B. R. (2000). Multigeneration employees: Strategies for effective management. The Health Care Manager, 19(1), 65–76. Lawrence, R. (2014). Understanding Generation G: An Australian perspective and the impact upon future international education demand. Melbourne, Australia: Prospect Research and Marketing. Li, L., & Li, J. (2013). Hospitality education in China: A student career-oriented perspective. Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sport & Tourism Education, 12(1), 109–117. Lu, T., & Adler, H. (2009). Career goals and expectations of hospitality and tourism students in China. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 9(1–2), 63–80. Lynton, N., & Thøgersen, K. H. (2010). Working with China’s Generation Y. Insight, 10, 1–3. Mackaway, J., Winchester-Seeto, T., & Carter, L. (2014). Work-integrated learning and the ‘inclu- sive’ challenge of preparing a diverse student cohort for the world beyond the academy. In A. Kwan, E. Wong, T. Kwong, P. Lau, & A. Goody (Eds.), Research and development in higher education: Higher education in a globalized world (Vol. 37, pp. 226–236). Hong Kong, China: Baptist University. Mackenzie, N., & Knipe, S. (2006). Research dilemmas: Paradigms, methods and methodology. Issues in Educational Research, 16(2), 193–205. Martin, C. A. (2005). From high maintenance to high productivity: What managers need to know about Generation Y. Industrial and Commercial Training, 37(1), 39–44. 11 Career Goals of Chinese International Tourism and Hospitality Students in Australia 191

Morton, L. P. (2002). Targeting Generation Y. Public Relations Quarterly, 47(2), 46. Mutereko, S., & Wedekind, V. (2015). Work integrated learning for engineering qualifications: A spanner in the works? Journal of Education and Work, 29(8), 1–20. Nachmias, S., & Walmsley, A. (2015). Making career decisions in a changing graduate labour market: A hospitality perspective. Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sport & Tourism Education, 17, 50–58. Ng Yin-ling, T. (2016). A qualitative study of the post-80 generation in career development realm in Hong Kong, China. Pertanika Journal of Social Sciences & Humanities, 24, 973–992. Patrick, C. -J., Peach, D., Pocknee, C., Webb, F., Fletcher, M., & Pretto, G. (2008). The WIL (Work Integrated Learning) report: A national scoping study [final report]. Brisbane, Australia: Queensland University of Technology. Richardson, S. (2008). Undergraduate tourism and hospitality students attitudes toward a career in the industry: A preliminary investigation. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 8(1), 23–46. Robinson, R. N., Ruhanen, L., & Breakey, N. M. (2016). Tourism and hospitality internships: Influences on student career aspirations. Current Issues in Tourism, 19(6), 513–527. Saurine, A. (2013). Hotels on the rise in China tourism boom. The Sunday Mail, August 4, p. 18. Seyitoğlu, F., & Yirik, S. (2015). Internship satisfaction of students of hospitality and impact of internship on the professional development and industrial perception. Asia Pacific Journal of Tourism Research, 20(sup1), 1414–1429. Smith, C. (2012). Evaluating the quality of work-integrated learning curricula: A comprehensive framework. Higher Education Research & Development, 31(2), 247–262. Solnet, D., & Hood, A. (2008). Generation Y as hospitality employees: Framing a research agenda. Journal of Hospitality and Tourism Management, 15(1), 59–68. Strauss, A. L., & Corbin, J. M. (1998). Basics of qualitative research: Techniques and procedures for developing grounded theory. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. Teichler, U. (2000). New perspectives of the relationships between higher education and employ- ment. Tertiary Education & Management, 6(2), 79–92. Wan, P., King, Y., Wong, I. A., & Kong, W. H. (2014). Student career prospect and industry commitment: The roles of industry attitude, perceived social status, and salary expectations. Tourism Management, 40, 1–14. Wardle, K. (2014). An assessment of work integrated learning (WIL) in hospitality tertiary educa- tion (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). University of Western Sydney, Australia. Zhang, H., & Wu, E. (2004). Human resources issues facing the hotel and travel industry in China. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 16(7), 424–428. Zhao, E., & Liu, L. (2008). China’s Generation Y: Understanding the workforce. In Proceedings of the 4th IEEE international conference on management of innovation and technology (pp. 612– 616). New York, NY: IEEE. Zopiatis, A., & Constanti, P. (2012). Managing hospitality internship practices: A conceptual framework. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 24(1), 44–51. Chapter 12 The Push-Pull Model of Motivation: An Analysis of Chinese Polytechnic Students’ Motivation to Pursue Degree Completion in Canada

Eugene Thomlinson and Rebecca Wilson-Mah

Abstract This study applied a push-pull model of motivation to analyse push-pull factors that support and encourage a student at a Chinese Polytechnic to continue his or her studies in Canada at a Canadian university. Without first understanding the push-pull factors that impact student motivations, institutions may find their international twinning agreements are less successful than anticipated. A survey was shared in-class, in Years 1, 2 and 3 in a Chinese Polytechnic, with 202 students (100%) completing the survey. The study suggested that, at this Chinese Polytechnic, the tourism and hospitality diploma students are not primarily motivated by applied studies in tourism and hospitality; furthermore, only 10% of students reported a desire to continue degree studies in China or Canada. These findings present signifi- cant implications for the future viability of the twinning programme arrangement. Student data on push-pull factors provide useful knowledge about motivational influences that can, in turn, support decision-making and recruitment forecasting between transnational higher education partners. In particular, this study contributes to our understanding of the micro-level push-pull factors that affect student motiva- tion to continue offshore studies in one specific agreement context.

Keywords Push-pull model · Higher education · Student motivation · China · Canada

E. Thomlinson (*) · R. Wilson-Mah Royal Roads University, Victoria, BC, Canada e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 193 C. Liu, H. Schänzel (eds.), Tourism Education and Asia, Perspectives on Asian Tourism, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4_12 194 E. Thomlinson and R. Wilson-Mah

12.1 Introduction

Canadian public universities and colleges, faced with lower domestic enrolment and declining government funding, are prioritising new programming for internation- ally mobile students (Canadian Bureau for International Education [CBIE], 2015). Propelled by economic, social, political and academic forces, internationally mobile students have a range of opportunities for their education, both at home and abroad. While the East Asia market may seem attractive to Canadian institutions looking to internationalise or to attract new students, the localised characteristics associated with a potential twinning institution are significant. Attracting an international stu- dent segment with a twinning agreement necessitates careful analysis of student motivation. While recognising the significance of the macro social and economic policy reforms that are driving educational reform and participation in transnational education in China (Yang, 2008), this study aims to understand the micro-level push-pull factors that affect student motivation to continue offshore studies in one specific agreement context. Without first understanding the push-pull factors that impact student motivations, institutions may find student recruitment and the match- ing of programmes to prospects is less successful than anticipated. In 2014, students from East Asia represented 46% of the international student population in Canada (CBIE, 2015), highlighting the importance of this region. Within the broad significance of this market, this study takes a local, institutional level perspective to examine Chinese students’ impressions of the push-pull factors that inform their decisions to either pursue or not pursue degree studies with a part- ner university in Canada. This study aims to provide insights to contribute to capac- ity building at the local, institutional level and support further mutual cooperation between the onshore and offshore partners. The tourism and hospitality management school at a Canadian University (CU), in the province of British Columbia, formalised a twinning programme agreement in 2011 with a school of tourism in a Chinese Polytechnic (CP) in Zhejiang prov- ince. The 3-plus-2-year twinning programme includes 21 new courses developed by the CU for their 3-year diploma. Eleven of the 21 courses are taught in English by visiting CU associate faculty in China with Chinese translation, and 10 courses are taught by CP faculty in Chinese. On successful completion of the 3-year tourism and hospitality diploma at the CP, students are eligible to apply to complete a 2-year hotel management degree in Canada. Between 2014 and 2016, upon completion of their tourism and hospitality man- agement diplomas at the CP, only 3 students from a possible 262 had transferred to the CU to pursue a degree in hospitality management; original targets had been set at 10 students per year, representing a dramatic shortfall (one tenth of the target). The lower-than-expected transfer to the Canadian twinning programme led to some thoughtful discussion between the partners about potential causes and a desire to investigate further. To support the development and growth of the twinning agreement between the international partners, the researchers chose to apply a push-pull model of ­motivation 12 The Push-Pull Model of Motivation: An Analysis of Chinese Polytechnic Students… 195 to better understand the factors that may influence a student’s choice to continue degree studies in Canada. While the push-pull model is commonly connected to other tourism topics such as destination choice, the findings and discussion demon- strate the value of this model. However, before investigating the push-pull model and its application for choosing higher education institutions, the concept of moti- vation is explored.

12.2 Understanding Motivation and Push-Pull Factors

Examining motivation as an underlying foundation involves the exploration of social psychology and the notion that motivation is an internal driver that stimulates and directs a person’s behaviour (Murray, 1964). The stimuli from the surrounding environment (economic, social and ecological) interact with the individual to encourage a singular or series of activities. “Motivation is the need that drives an individual to act in a certain way to achieve the desired satisfaction” (Beerli & Martin, 2004, p. 626). Depending upon the outcome and resulting satisfaction, the individual may or may not be inspired to continue to act. Two motivational influencers, escape (push) and attract (pull), are important fac- tors in determining the amount of satisfaction derived from the activity (Iso-Ahola, 1982). While their relative importance for the individual may vary, both factors are worth exploring to explain the decisions made. Crompton (1979) identified nine potential push motives for travel, including escape from a perceived mundane envi- ronment, exploration and evaluation of self (self-discovery), relaxation, prestige, regression (puerility, foolishness), enhancement of kinship relationships, facilita- tion of social interaction, novelty (adventure, curiosity) and education. While it is likely that not all of these elements apply, the choice of an international tourism or hospitality school is not strictly based upon the desire for an education. Pull factors are generally associated with the characteristics of the destination (or school) attracting the visitor and relate to the perceived attributes and features of the loca- tion such as the physiography, culture and history, activities, events and infrastruc- ture (Ritchie & Crouch, 2003). In the case of an educational institution, these “attractants” may comprise of the location, the school’s status, programmes offered, class structure, campus activities, the reputation of instructors and cost of instruction.

12.3 Choosing an Education or Career

Examining the question of choice for educational institutions and careers further reveals that several elements have already been explored. Choi and Kim (2013) identify four key areas of behavioural considerations, including cultural constructs, learning motivations, academic achievement and self-efficacy. Kim, Jung and Wang 196 E. Thomlinson and R. Wilson-Mah

(2016) also note several similar driving factors for students choosing educational and career paths, such as self-efficacy (self-determination), curiosity or interest in the foreign country, a desire to learn languages and future job prospects. They dis- covered that an interest in actually “studying” was one of the least important moti- vations for students. Understanding cultural differences can be a key foundation when looking at career preparation behaviours and educational considerations. Individualism vs. collectivism may help to explain some of the behaviours, motivations and expecta- tions of students. Hartung, Fouad, Leong and Hardin (2010) note that individualism and collectivism seem to be polar opposites in societies, with groups that are high on one factor tending to be low on the other. People in collectivist societies are inclined to be less autonomous and work more within and for the group; group norms and traditions play a larger role in explaining individual behaviours. Even within a collectivist-individualist perspective, however, those constructs can mean different things in different societies (e.g. individualistic actions in the United States are not necessarily the same as individualistic acts in Japan), motivating people (e.g. students) towards certain academic and professional experiences. Learning motivation can be guided either internally (intrinsic) or externally (extrinsic) (Kim et al., 2016). Intrinsic motivation is rewarded by the fun or enjoy- ment of the activity itself. Extrinsic motivation looks to achieve certain goals or outcomes, often influenced by rewards, prompts or approvals, such as increased salaries, opportunities for promotion and improved job security. Choi and Kim (2013) suggest that while intrinsic motivation is important in academic decisions, the importance of extrinsic rewards grows as students move to higher levels of edu- cation; furthermore, students who prefer hierarchies tend to be more motivated by extrinsic rewards. The desire for academic achievement is also vital in explaining student behav- iours. According to Choi and Kim (2013), it is important to determine the expected and achieved level of education as a measure of success; the likelihood of attaining the desired academic credential is a key consideration. Student decisions are, in part, impacted by how well they feel that they have met or exceeded their goals. Finally, self-efficacy, or belief in one’s ability to be successful, can drive educa- tional or career choices (Choi & Kim, 2013). Self-efficacy can help to explain why some people will take opportunities and challenge themselves, while others may avoid actions that could result in negative outcomes. Recommendations from other students can also impact the expectation for success, highlighting the role that word of mouth can play in these educational decisions (Kim et al., 2016). 12 The Push-Pull Model of Motivation: An Analysis of Chinese Polytechnic Students… 197

12.4 Globalisation and the Internationalisation of Higher Education

In addition to understanding the micro-level motivations of students, it is also important to recognise the current global trends in higher education. This research focused specifically on transnational higher education (TNHE). TNHE agreements are a specific internationalisation response that institutions pursue to adapt to glo- balisation. These arrangements take time to nurture on an ongoing basis through regular communications between partners with an emphasis on shared goals and mutual trust (Smith, 2009). As well, processes are required to facilitate the smooth transition of students between significantly different institutions and education systems. Since the mid-1980s, transnational higher education (TNHE), or cross-border education, has developed rapidly in China (R. Yang, 2008). Canadian TNHE part- nerships have also expanded over the same time period. In an Association of Universities and Colleges of Canada (AUCC) survey of Canadian universities in 2014, 81% of responding universities offered some kind of international programme with international partners. Of those, 63% offered dual or double-degree pro- grammes, and 45% offered joint degree programmes; 78% of the institutions offered at least one of those types, a striking increase of over 48% compared with 2006 (AUCC, 2014, p. 16). Clearly, the implementation of TNHE through twinning degree programmes is a significant strategic activity for Canadian and Chinese insti- tutions and also arguably at the forefront of major change in higher education (Yang, 2007). Altbach (2015) argues that in internationalising education, institutions should respond to the educational needs and perspectives of all partners (Altbach, 2015). This study gathered and analysed data that presents the interests and perspectives of the students – who are arguably the most significant participants in twinning programmes.

12.5 Transnational Higher Education and Student Preferences

There are several studies that seek to understand what students’ rate as important when they consider transnational education. This study offers an opportunity for interdisciplinary perspectives, as push-pull factors are complex. The following sum- mary provides a brief overview of the interdisciplinary perspectives that informed the development of the push-pull factors for this study. 1. The Chinese context and cultural perspectives (R. Yang, 2008). Yang argues that TNHE is “under-researched and often even misunderstood” (p. 272) and encour- ages the development of a more comprehensive appreciation of the Chinese 198 E. Thomlinson and R. Wilson-Mah

­context for TNHE within the broader macro area of social and economic policy and educational reforms. Yang’s study of factors that influence students from mainland China to choose Australia as a study destination suggests that the most important reasons for choosing to study in another country are to gain an inter- nationally recognised qualification and to have access to continued education (push factors). Additionally, 85% of respondents noted that they did not get accepted into their university of choice in China (Yang, 2008). 2. Characteristics and preferences of Chinese students. Kim et al. (2016) suggest it is necessary to understand Chinese hospitality and tourism students’ motivations and the cross-national educational differences between home and host institu- tions. Furthermore, Choi and Kim (2013) argue that a positive career disposition for hospitality and tourism (push factors) is a foundation for successful educa- tional outcomes and that this perspective necessitates a deeper intercultural understanding of learning motivation, career motivation and academic achievement. 3. Motivation to study tourism and hospitality. Jamnia and Pan (2017) argue that there is a dearth of research to investigate why Chinese students choose to major in tourism and hospitality. If we use our western assumptions on student motiva- tion to study hospitality and tourism, though, it is possible that we will misunder- stand the perceptions, interests, motivations and goals of Chinese students studying in western countries. A related question is the motivation to study abroad (push factors); motivations may include personal development goals, intercultural development goals, disciplinary development goals (M. Yang, Webster, & Prosser, 2011) or vocational/career goals, with the literature suggest- ing that there are also regional differences within China (Jung, Kim, & Schuckert, 2014). Students may be influenced by a wide range of push-pull factors, and it was important to ensure the study design did not inappropriately place any limits on them. 4. International and institutional marketing. The international marketing of higher education is a pull factor that may influence how Chinese students perceive off- shore studies and, specifically, their studies in a particular western institution (Chen, 2008). In a Canadian-based study, Chen (2008) suggests that twinning programmes combine internationalisation with international marketing and gen- erate a significant influence on undergraduate students’ choices. In Chen’s study, internationalisation is reflected in undergraduates’ desire to learn a foreign lan- guage and also their perception that work experience abroad is connected to improved job prospects. 12 The Push-Pull Model of Motivation: An Analysis of Chinese Polytechnic Students… 199

12.6 Understanding Push-Pull Factors of Students at a Chinese Polytechnic

The complex layers that are inherent in this inquiry were assessed by discovering and analysing the push-pull factors (Mazzarol & Soutar, 2002) that support and encourage a Chinese student at the CP to continue his or her studies in Canada. The push factors originate in the home country, China, the Chinese institution and in the student; the pull factors originate in Canada and at the Canadian institution. Push factors relate to various macro (economic, social and political) and micro forces (student interest in career opportunities, family pressures, etc.). Additionally, pull factors are macro and micro factors that make the twinning programme in Canada attractive to students from the CP (Mazzarol & Soutar, 2002). The push-pull factors were categorised beyond simply micro and macro distinctions to develop a more refined and context-specific analysis. This development of a more refined push-pull analytical framework specifically focused on student perceptions. It is anticipated that understanding the views of students in mainland China, and specifically Zhejiang province, contributes a deeper and more accurate insight into student con- siderations on push-pull factors.

12.6.1 Methods

12.6.1.1 Research Questions

This research developed and applied an analytical lens to understand the push-pull factors that influence the student perspective on offshore twinning arrangements. This study investigated the following questions: 1. What are the push-pull factors that influence a Chinese hospitality and tourism diploma student’s perception of offshore studies in Canada? 2. How do these push-pull factors affect students’ decision-making steps and their choices? 3. What can institutions do to positively impact the push-pull motivations of stu- dents in their decision-making to potentially increase their likelihood for contin- ued study in Canada? The students in this study were at different stages in their tourism and hospitality diploma programme (Year 1, Year 2 and Year 3) at the CP. One significant consider- ation is the mindful engagement to ensure this study is culturally informed (Liamputtong, 2010). The researchers were cultural outsiders to the political, socio- cultural and economic context of mainland China. It was necessary to work closely with a faculty member from the CP to ensure the research methods for the study were culturally sensitive and that data interpretations were culturally accurate (Liamputtong, 2010). Navigating these questions necessitated the mentorship and 200 E. Thomlinson and R. Wilson-Mah guidance of an insider to the Chinese education system and culture and mindful intercultural communication. This study contributes a Chinese student perspective (from Zhejiang province, mainland China) on push-pull factors that may impede or promote twinning aca- demic programmes in Canada. Our understanding of the factors that influence stu- dent decision-making may enable partner institutions to proactively discuss pushes and pulls to student participation and to make any necessary interventions and adjustments informed by student needs and perceptions.

12.6.1.2 Survey Design

To better understand why the twinning partnership was not attracting students as originally anticipated, the researchers focused on the push-pull factors of offshore transfers from a student perspective. The survey design was descriptive (Cohen, Manion, & Morrison, 2007) providing choice options of interest that were informed by the literature review. These factors related to and included: • The reputation of the Canadian University and the specific school • Student career aspirations • Family expectations • Level of knowledge regarding the pathway to degree studies at the University • Previous travel abroad • Self-perception of English language proficiency • Word of mouth from other students who have studied abroad • Awareness of Canada and Canadian culture • Perception of Canadian teaching approaches • Perception regarding the level of difficulty for degree completion studies • Perception of the cost of studies • Associated living expenses and personal safety in Canada • Emotional attachment to family and friends The survey design included a combination of Likert-type scales, dichotomous questions and open-ended questions. The open-ended questions were included to ensure the survey design explored push-pull factors that might be revealed when students were given the opportunity to share their personal comments (Cohen et al., 2007). Demographic information was not gathered as it was not deemed relevant to the study. However, the students were all Chinese Polytechnic students, in Years 1, 2 and 3 of their programmes.

12.6.1.3 Data Collection

CP administrators were consulted regarding the goals of the research, and data col- lection was coordinated with the CP. The CP administrators translated the survey and consent letter into Chinese, and then these were tested with a sample of 12 The Push-Pull Model of Motivation: An Analysis of Chinese Polytechnic Students… 201 students. It was anticipated that a pen-and-paper survey would be more universally accessible to the group and that an in-class opportunity to complete the survey would increase participation rates. Furthermore, all the students completed the sur- vey in the same week of classes, thus increasing the consistency of the completion date. The survey was handed out in class to 202 Polytechnic tourism and hospitality diploma students in Years 1, 2 and 3. The classroom administration of the pen/paper survey resulted in a 100% completion rate by the students. The high response rate is attributable to the in-class distribution. The data was later entered into Lime Survey in Canada for analysis.

12.6.2 Findings

The students revealed several push-pull factors that seemed to have affected their choice of career, CP diploma and pursuit of a degree with the CU twinning partner.

12.6.2.1 Push Factors

The study first sought to understand the students’ initial motivation to pursue a tour- ism and hospitality diploma in China. Grouping the various elements into the differ- ent categories would suggest that “prestige” is one of the key push motivators for these students, especially at the diploma level. As seen in Table 12.1, in seeking to understand why the students chose the CP for their diploma studies, the responses suggest that while approximately 40% believed that it was “Very important” to complete their diploma at CP, only 21% felt it was “Very important” in developing hotel/tourism management skills. This suggests that the applied diploma studies in tourism and hospitality management is not the push factor expected; in fact, the

Table 12.1 Push and pull motivations for pursuing the hospitality/tourism diploma “Very likely” outcome from diploma “Very important” to the decision (push) (pull) 40% able to complete a diploma at CP 43% improved English 27% able to gain global awareness 43% hotel/tourism management skills and knowledge 24% opportunity to improve English 25% improved global awareness 21% opportunity to develop hotel/tourism management 18% job in hospitality/tourism industry skills and knowledge 17% interest in pursuing a career in tourism/hospitality 15% job in industry other than hospitality/tourism 14% wanting to meet family expectations 10% complete degree from Chinese university 8% opportunity to pursue degree at CU 202 E. Thomlinson and R. Wilson-Mah students seemed to be more interested in attaining a diploma, period, and less inter- ested in the actual focus of study. This finding is further supported by the student’s career interests: only 17% were interested in pursuing a career in tourism/hospital- ity. The “novelty” of gaining global awareness was considered “Very important” by 27% of the students, indicating a moderately strong desire to understand more about the world around them. This was almost matched by the 24% who considered the diploma as an important opportunity to learn English. This factor likely has ele- ments of both education and prestige, as students in China often find understanding English to be a career advantage. Meeting family expectations was one of the least important factors driving their choice of the CP for the diploma, with only 14% concerned about this obligation.

12.6.2.2 Pull Factors

The relative importance of some factors shifted when considering them as pull fac- tors, motivating them to complete their diplomas, instead of push factors urging them to begin their studies. Table 12.1 shows that both improving English and gain- ing hotel/tourism management skills were seen as “Very likely” outcomes for 43% of the students. This might suggest that their expected satisfaction with those moti- vations would be high, with the anticipated outcomes rated higher than their level of importance. The perceived results for other motivating aspects tended to be close to the identified importance, implying an equal level of expected satisfaction. For example, 18% expected (“Very likely”) a job in hospitality/tourism, and 17% chose the CP because they were interested in pursuing a job in hospitality/tourism. Interestingly, 15% expected a job in an industry other than tourism/hospitality. This further supported the observation that the field (tourism/hospitality) appears to be less important than the academic achievement of completing a diploma. Improved global awareness was expected (“Very likely”) by 25% of the students, compared with 27% being “Very interested” in it. Ten percent or less of the students expected to complete some type of degree after their diploma (10% from a Chinese university and 8% from the CU), demonstrating the limited perceived value of this higher accomplishment for these students at that time.

12.6.2.3 Sources and Timing of Information

The research explored ways of changing the conversation or expectations of the students by examining when students would like to learn more about their degree options and their preferred methods of communication. These possible “pulls” towards the university could potentially be turned into “pushes” if carefully crafted and delivered at the optimum time. Students felt that conversations with either CP faculty (39% “Very useful”) or CU faculty (34%) would be most effective, closely followed by an information session at the CP (31%). Other forms of communication included a personalised letter (22%) or information on a website (20%). Only 12% 12 The Push-Pull Model of Motivation: An Analysis of Chinese Polytechnic Students… 203 thought that a brochure for the family would be “Very useful”. This apparent lack of consideration for family concerns was validated by respondents reporting 70% parental support for a tourism/hospitality career, as well as the earlier noted motiva- tion regarding meeting parental expectations. These channels were most desired in Year 1 of their diploma – chosen by 41% of the students. Year 2 (26%) or before the CP diploma programme (23%) was the next desired time, followed by Year 3 (11%). It would seem that the option of obtaining a degree from the CU partner would not be an important pull for students to go to the CP diploma programme, since most did not feel the need for this information before choosing the CP. This also supports the observation that completion of a degree was not a high priority for these students at the time of the survey.

12.6.2.4 Motivation Towards Degree Completion

Connected to the students’ various push factors, driving them towards their educa- tional pursuits, the research found many elements that might pull the students towards the degree programme at the CU. The most important pull motivation for these students was the opportunity to improve their English skills (prestige/educa- tion), with approximately 44% believing that this was a “Very important” reason for proceeding to the CU for a degree. Social aspects were the next two most important drivers, with 36% of students rating experiencing a multicultural environment as “Very important” and 32% rating having the opportunity to meet new people as “Very important”. After these three factors, educational elements were rated the next most important, including receiving excellent teaching (31%) and studying in Canada in general (30%). It is important to note that these factors are more about the general experience of the education than the education itself – the interest was in the journey and not the destination. Having the opportunity to travel was considered “Very important” for 29% of the students. Least important for these students was actually completing the bachelor’s degree (27%). Again, the academic outcome was not the top motivator for these students. Students were asked about various services that might pull them towards con- tinuing their studies at the CU. Supporting the importance of language, 84% of the students were interested in English assistance. Potentially reflecting their noted con- cerns over Canadian teaching styles and academics (mentioned earlier), 78% were hoping for friendly instructors, 58% wanted guidance on assignment requirements, 53% looked for helpful staff and 46% desired a student counsellor. All of these ele- ments could ease their academic experience at the CU and increase their level of satisfaction with their decision. Also assisting their academic achievement while facilitating a multicultural environment, 66% desired a student “buddy” to help them. Socialisation could be further supported by homestay families, which was of interest to 71% of the students. To round out their time at the CU and satisfy their adventure seeking, students wanted to explore the area (51%) and take part in cul- tural (50%) and recreational (50%) activities. 204 E. Thomlinson and R. Wilson-Mah

12.6.2.5 Demotivation Towards Degree Completion

When asked about possible demotivators (anti-pulls) for pursuing the bachelor’s degree at the CU, financial considerations topped the list. Students regarded course fees (58% “Very large concern”) and living costs (50%) as the largest deterrents. Language problems were the next most important issue, identified by 42% of the students. This is particularly noteworthy since improving English is critical for them. Security concerns were very large for 36%, pointing towards the importance of safety and the potential influence of news media and other sources. Missing fam- ily/friends and distance from home were both seen as significant issues for 31%, demonstrating the value of social ties. Almost a quarter of the students rated differ- ences in Canadian teaching styles and culture as “Very large concerns” (24% and 21%, respectively). With 31% hoping for excellent teaching (noted above), the over- all educational process is a key area of focus for these students. An unexpected observation was that while experiencing a multicultural environment and meeting new people may be important for some, 16% of the students felt that studying with students from other countries was a “Very large concern”. Clearly, some students are hesitant about this part of the process. Open-ended responses centred on many of the key themes identified in other areas of the research, including: • Concerns about the difficulty in graduating or difficulty of courses • Costs, scholarships, and tuition fees • Safety and security of the campus and country • Courses involved/covered • Transportation, accommodation, and size of the school • Friendliness of classmates/instructors • Job opportunities afterwards New concerns or areas of interest did not arise through the open-ended questions, providing a degree of confidence that the research had adequately covered the topics of importance for the students.

12.6.2.6 Key Observations

Through this work, the researchers noted some discoveries regarding the CP stu- dents, their pursuit of a diploma at CP and their possible quests for a degree with the CU. Possibly most important for the twinning relationship was the realisation that a career in tourism/hospitality or even a bachelor’s degree were not strong motivators for these students. As such, information regarding professional opportunities in tourism/hospitality or the distinction of obtaining a degree would not likely be strong motivators for these students. Similar to Kim et al. (2016), the academic prestige associated with degree completion did not seem to be an important “pull” to the CU. Prestige at the diploma level, however, did appear to be an important motivator, although it was directed more at the academic achievement (i.e. 12 The Push-Pull Model of Motivation: An Analysis of Chinese Polytechnic Students… 205 obtaining a diploma) than the field of study (i.e. tourism and hospitality). The quest for a degree may come later in their career, but other pull factors were more impor- tant in propelling these students towards higher levels of education. As suggested earlier, pull factors could be aspects such as the Canadian university’s location, the school’s status, campus activities, the reputation of instructors, and the cost of instruction; although, contrary to Chen (2008), the connection to the CU did not appear to be a significant motivating (pull) factor. Further qualitative research may deepen our understanding of these pull factors and the relationship between the pull factors and student choice. Not surprising was the consistent interest and importance placed on English lan- guage. Kim et al. (2016) highlighted the desire to learn languages, and, throughout the research, students expressed an interest in learning English, a desire to improve their English and a need for assistance with their English. Choi and Kim (2013) also noted the importance of self-efficacy, and students strongly believed that they would improve their English, adding to their motivation towards the diploma. Not only does this suggest the strong need for English resources at the CU, but it also sug- gests that messaging should emphasise the level of support available for students and the high success rate of students. The list of potential services and assistance desired by the students is moderately long and reflects many of the “pushes” that are motivating them. While not all of these requests would need to be fulfilled, it does indicate the level of commitment and resources required by any institution chasing after this international market, as offered by Smith (2009). Given the importance of socialisation in motivating the students, though, the CU (and other institutions) should consider directing resources to promoting and facilitating opportunities for multicultural interaction inside and outside of classrooms.

12.6.2.7 Future Considerations

After completion of the survey data analysis, the results will be used to plan the further development of this study with a particular emphasis on better understand- ing students’ experiences and their motivations. For example, the researchers feel the need to better understand the students’ perspectives on their studies, their per- sonal circumstances, academic achievements, career interests, general goals, per- ceptions of degree studies and perceptions of Canada and Canadian universities. The research would involve qualitative group interviews, focusing on students from each of the years. After consultation with the CP colleagues, this design may change; however, the intention with this proposed format is to make students feel comfort- able sharing their perspectives with a small group of fellow students. It is antici- pated that this research would include observations, a review of related CP and CU documents, interviews with the CP faculty and administration and analysis of the local economy, the reputation of the tourism and hospitality industry in the region and other related macro and micro factors. 206 E. Thomlinson and R. Wilson-Mah

12.7 Conclusions

The researchers would characterise the internationalisation experience at CU as emergent. The transnational agreement that is the focus of this study was a pioneer- ing arrangement in 2011, and despite the low student enrolment into the CU from the CP for degree studies completion, the partners have renewed their contract through to 2021. Therefore, there is a significant commitment to this arrangement and partnership, and a sincere interest from the CU to understand the low enrolment and to make improvements. This research suggests how the CU can advance the twinning relationship, including ideas for marketing to students at the CP. The quality and sophistication of marketing and promotion should be further developed; any marketing adjust- ments should also go hand in hand with capacity building within the BA degree programmes at the CU to consider the push-pull data and analysis and the potential implications for the BA programme design, curriculum and pedagogy. For example, there is one assumption made by this Canadian University’s tour- ism and hospitality programme that certainly requires examination and deconstruc- tion. Past experience has led to the perception that students who choose an applied degree in tourism or hospitality have made an early career commitment to the sec- tor. Typically, these Canadian students have work experience in tourism and hospi- tality and also a similar, vocationally oriented diploma from the Canadian college system. Their degree choice is intentional, and they have a commitment to further- ing their careers in the sector. However, the research suggests that the Chinese stu- dents from the CP are not similarly focused, instead being more concerned about the credential than the career. What are the pull factors that motivate this group to pursue their studies in Canada? Their motivations for potentially studying in Canada are centred around improving English, experiencing a multicultural environment and meeting new people. Moving beyond their diploma to complete a degree is the least important motivator for these students, in sharp contrast to typical Canadian students or the expectations of the CU. This impacts on several areas at the CU including programming, curriculum, applied content, student services and pastoral support. Marketing messages and activities need to consider this different perspec- tive when attempting to attract these students to the CU, as a career-focused pursuit-­ of-­higher-education communication would not be well received. Furthermore, understanding push-pull factors should influence the CU to proactively ensure that the multicultural mixing of these students with Canadian students is successful and positive for all. Looking forward, this study should expand with a second comparative study of Canadian student push-pull factors to provide a more definitive and illuminating analysis of the similarities and differences between these two broad student markets and their corresponding needs and motivations. For example, the research would imply that a required industry internship is not suitable for all of the students, since many are not necessarily interested in pursuing tourism and hospitality opportuni- ties once they have graduated. For students not motivated by a tourism or hospitality 12 The Push-Pull Model of Motivation: An Analysis of Chinese Polytechnic Students… 207 career, regardless of their origin, the internship could be replaced with course-based options. These and other alternatives would be better informed by additional student data on the push-pull factors that motivate students to complete their degree studies with the CU, without relying on past assumptions or “business as usual”.

References

Altbach, P. (2015). Knowledge and education as international commodities. International Higher Education, 28, 2–5. Association of Universities & Colleges in Canada. (2014). Canada’s universities in the world: AUCC internationalisation survey. Ottawa, Canada: Author. Retrieved from https://www.univ- can.ca/wp-content/uploads/2015/07/internationalisation-survey-2014.pdf Beerli, A., & Martin, J. D. (2004). Tourists’ characteristics and the perceived image of tourist destinations: A quantitative analysis – A case study of Lanzarote, Spain. Tourism Management, 25(5), 623–636. Canadian Bureau for International Education. (2015) Canada’s performance and potential in inter- national education. Retrieved December 16, 2016, from http://cbie.ca/media/facts-and-figures/ Chen, L. H. (2008). Internationalization or international marketing? Two frameworks for under- standing international students’ choice of Canadian universities. Journal of Marketing for Higher Education, 18(1), 1–33. Choi, K., & Kim, D. Y. (2013). A cross cultural study of antecedents on career preparation behav- ior: Learning motivation, academic achievement, and career decision self-efficacy. Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sport & Tourism Education, 13, 19–32. Cohen, L., Manion, L., & Morrison, K. (2007). Research methods in education. London, UK: Routledge. Crompton, J. L. (1979). Motivations for pleasure vacations. Annals of Tourism Research, 6(4), 408–424. Hartung, P. J., Fouad, N. A., Leong, F. T. L., & Hardin, E. E. (2010). Individualism-collectivism: Links to occupational plans and work values. Journal of Career Assessment, 18(1), 34–45. Iso-Ahola, S. E. (1982). Toward a social psychological theory of tourism motivation: A rejoinder. Annals of Tourism Research, 9(2), 256–262. Jamnia, M., & Pan, W. (2017). Motivations to study among tourism and hospitality students. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 29(1), 35–43. Jung, J., Kim, S., & Schuckert, M. (2014). Why do Asian students go to Swiss hotel schools? Their motivations, perceptions of service quality, and preferences. Journal of Teaching in Travel & Tourism, 14(1), 22–52. Kim, S. S., Jung, J., & Wang, K. C. (2016). Hospitality and tourism management students’ study and career preferences: Comparison of three Asian regional groups. Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sport & Tourism Education, 19, 66–84. Liamputtong, P. (2010). Performing qualitative cross-cultural research. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press. Mazzarol, T., & Soutar, G. N. (2002). ‘Push-pull’ factors influencing international student destina- tion choice. International Journal of Educational Management, 16(2), 82–90. Murray, E. J. (1964). Motivation and emotion. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. Ritchie, J. R. B., & Crouch, G. I. (2003). The competitive destination: A sustainable tourism per- spective. Oxfordshire, UK: CABI. Smith, L. (2009). Sinking in the sand? Academic work in an offshore campus of an Australian university. Higher Education Research & Development, 28(5), 467–479. Yang, M. (2007). What attracts mainland Chinese students to Australian higher education? Studies in Learning, Evaluation, Innovation and Development, 4(2), 1–12. 208 E. Thomlinson and R. Wilson-Mah

Yang, M., Webster, B. J., & Prosser, M. T. (2011). Exploring the variation in first year undergradu- ates’ induction into their academic disciplines. International Journal for the Scholarship of Teaching & Learning, 5(1), 13. Yang, R. (2008). Transnational higher education in China: Contexts, characteristics and concerns. Australian Journal of Education, 52(3), 272–286. Part IV Transnational Tourism Education in Asia Chapter 13 Research Performance of Tourism Education Quality Accredited Programmes in Greater China

Libo Yan

Abstract The relationship between research and teaching has long been recog- nised and in recent decades has been the subject of some debate. The issues are relevant to tourism and hospitality education programmes, which have two systems in existence for performance assessment: one is the evaluation of teaching quality; and the other ranks programmes based on their research outputs. Despite the inter- connection between teaching and research, the two related evaluation systems have seldom been considered together. Among the hospitality and tourism programmes in the world, those in Greater China (referring to Mainland China, Hong Kong, Macau and Taiwan) have shown the strongest interest in Tourism Education Quality (TedQual) Accreditation, with 13 programmes accredited by 2017. This study aims to compare the research performances of Chinese programmes with TedQual accreditation by computing the overall and per capita research outputs of the rele- vant institutions. The comparison of certified programmes leads to a revisitation of the old issue, namely, whether education quality is related to the research perfor- mance of the faculty.

Keywords Teaching quality · Research performance · Tourism education · Accreditation

13.1 Introduction

Quality is at the heart of hospitality and tourism education. To satisfy public interest and meet the faculties’ marketing needs, various accreditation systems were estab- lished in the last quarter of the twentieth century (Horng, Teng, & Baum, 2009). Among these systems, the Tourism Education Quality (TedQual) Accreditation developed by the United Nations World Tourism Organisation (UNWTO) has received wide attention from institutions across the world. A preliminary

L. Yan (*) Faculty of Hospitality and Tourism Management, Macau University of Science and Technology, Macau, China e-mail: [email protected]

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 211 C. Liu, H. Schänzel (eds.), Tourism Education and Asia, Perspectives on Asian Tourism, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4_13 212 L. Yan examination of the list of institutions with TedQual-certified programmes disclosed some areas of concern. Despite the indifference of many high-ranking universities and programmes, the list has been expanding beyond reputable universities to include courses from low-profile colleges and training organisations. This situation arouses concern about the credibility of these certified programmes, as well as the credibility of the accreditation system per se. A review of the quality standards adopted by TedQual and its counterparts shows that staff research is seldom adopted as a criterion for education quality (see Horng et al. (2009)). In other words, these accreditation systems assume that there is no relationship between the education/ teaching quality on a programme and the research performance of its faculty. This assumption neglects the complex relationship between teaching and research. Thus, this study addresses the following three research questions: • What is the relationship between research and teaching? • What is the research performance of hospitality programmes in Greater China with TedQual certification? • How effective is TedQual accreditation? The first question is explored through a comprehensive literature review; the second is investigated via analyses of information collected from the database ‘Hospitality and Tourism Complete’; and the third will be answered in the discussion of research results.

13.2 Literature Review

13.2.1 The Research-Teaching Nexus

Ball and Taleb (2010) discussed the necessity of understanding the interaction between research and teaching. Actively researching teachers keep the curriculum updated with the latest knowledge in the discipline, kindle students’ motivation to study at a university, enhance students’ learning experience and, through their example, encourage them to be independent and lifelong learners. The teaching-­ research interactions are indirect, complex and manifold (Smeby, 1998). As noted by Neumann (1992), the research-teaching nexus can exist at three levels: tangible, intangible and global (departmental). The tangible level is embodied in the positive perceptions of students and staff on exposure to recent research on the subject. The intangible level is reflected in the research staff’s enthusiasm for the subject or dis- cipline. The departmental level refers to the impact of staff research on student experience. Regarding the nature of the research-teaching link, it should be noted that delivering subject knowledge through lectures is not the only way of linking the two activities, as students can be involved in other ways of learning, such as project-­ based learning or inquiry-based learning (Ball & Taleb, 2010). The relevance to 13 Research Performance of Tourism Education Quality Accredited Programmes… 213 effective learning of staff research conducted ‘by specific teachers, or at least in the same department or university’ (Ball & Taleb, 2010, p. 92), is worthy of attention. Based on an extensive review of academic evidence on the relationship between research and teaching, Zaman (2004) found that, in the minds of academics, the two activities are mutually supportive, although research contributes more to teaching than vice versa. Correlation analysis has been extensively used to measure the link between research and teaching, and three meta-analyses of existing studies revealed a modest positive correlation (Zaman, 2004). The existence of mediating variables explains why a strong correlation has not been found between the two activities (Hattie & Marsh, 1996; Zaman, 2004). At a macroscopic level, programmes in the United Kingdom showed a positive association of research with teaching, with the institutions scored high in research having good performances in teaching (Thomas & Harris, 2001). Thomas and Harris (2001) offered a critique of the quantitative studies on the research-teaching relationship. They pointed out that, first, the correlation is not a cause-and-effect relationship; second, the measurement of research and teaching can be problematic; and third, there are multiple dimensions in the relationship rather than one single dimension as assumed in many studies. Furthermore, the assumption of a linear relationship is questionable as a non-linear relationship can exist between research and teaching (Zaman, 2004). This non-linear relationship can be explained as below: It is possible that initially the roles of research and teaching may enhance each other until a threshold level is reached where increasing effort spent on one operates to reduce the qual- ity of the other due mainly to the limitation of time. A single study examining this proposi- tion using U.S. faculty data finds that up to 8 hours per week of teaching are indeed facilitative of research. (Zaman, 2004, p. 5) The impacts of staff research on teaching are twofold (Thomas & Harris, 2001): the positive aspects include staff being up to date and having credibility and enthusi- asm; and the negative aspects cover non-availability and preoccupation with research, as well as students’ feeling of being excluded from staff research. Thomas and Harris (2001) suggested that doing research can enhance the credibility of staff as educators and minimise students’ complaints in this regard. They concluded that staff can retain their own enthusiasm through continuous engagement in research, which can enhance the student experience. Some measures can be taken to strengthen the link between staff research and teaching, such as sharing staff’s own research results with students and involving students in research (Jenkins, Blackman, Lindsay, & Paton-Saltzberg, 1998). 214 L. Yan

13.2.2 Different Schools of Thoughts on the Research-­ Teaching Relationship

Hattie and Marsh (1996) offered a comprehensive discussion of the different schools of thoughts on the negative, positive or zero relationships between research and teaching. The negative school emphasises the conflicts between the time allocated to teaching and that to research. The positive school proposes that research perfor- mance is a precondition for quality teaching, and the two activities share some com- mon qualities such as creativity, investigativeness and critical analysis. The zero school denies that common qualities underlie the two activities. Hattie and Marsh (1996) commented that studies of the research-teaching relationship neglect the mediating variables. For instance, ability and time are two key contributors to effec- tiveness in both teaching and research. However, abilities in the two areas are posi- tively correlated, in contrast to the negative correlation between the times, respectively, spent on the two activities. This situation finally leads to a non-­ significant relationship between teaching and research. Hattie and Marsh’s (1996) study used the method of meta-analysis of quantita- tive studies on the research-teaching link and concluded that there is no relationship between the two activities. However, they found that staff research correlated with a specific aspect of teaching, namely, presentation. They explained that researchers are likely better prepared as teachers and possess better presentation competencies than non-researchers. They also found that domain of study affects the relationship between teaching and research, and the correlation coefficient is larger for social sciences than for humanities and natural sciences. This conclusion was supported by Allen’s (1995) meta-analysis of the communication discipline, which concluded that research productivity positively correlated to teaching effectiveness based on an examination of more than 40 quantitative studies on the research-teaching nexus. Arnold’s (2008) study of the discipline of economics reported a positive relation- ship between research and teaching. Apart from discipline, other factors influencing the research-teaching relationship include ‘national context, academic context (institutional type, and departmental practices), and individuals’ characteristics (motivations, skills and dispositions)’ (Healey, 2005, p. 9). Furthermore, stage of academic career, class size, department size and gender can also affect the link between research and teaching (Zaman, 2004). Course level can influence students’ perceptions of the research-teaching nexus (Arnold, 2008; Thomas & Harris, 2001). In contrast with undergraduates, postgrad- uate students were more aware of staff research and believed that it engendered credibility and enthusiasm (Thomas & Harris, 2001). Even among undergraduate students, perceptions vary with course levels: undergraduates in the first 2 years hold a negative opinion, and their counterparts in the latter 2 years hold a positive opinion (Arnold, 2008). From the perspective of students, the nature of relation- ships between the two activities can change from negative to positive as their length of time within the higher education system increases. Study motivation is another factor influencing students’ perceptions of the research-teaching nexus (Breen & 13 Research Performance of Tourism Education Quality Accredited Programmes… 215

Lindsay, 1999). Students who were intrinsically motivated and interested in knowledge-­seeking had a positive attitude; and those who were extrinsically moti- vated and lacked interest in communication with lecturers had an indifferent attitude.

13.2.3 Relevance to Hospitality and Tourism Education

The purpose of hospitality research includes updating and improving the manage- ment of the industry and guaranteeing that hospitality educators understand the state-of-the-art in the field (Taylor & Edgar, 1999). In other words, research should inform teaching. In this way, academic staff’s research can enhance the educational experience of their students (Thomas & Harris, 2001). Ball and Taleb’s (2010) study found that hospitality students had a positive perception of staff research and thought their lecturers could balance the time spent teaching and researching. It is insufficient for tourism curricula to train students to cater for current indus- try needs. Instead, the curricula should consider the skills required for possible future demands at both societal and industry levels (Egger & Maurer, n.d.). Thus, forging and enhancing students’ critical and creative thinking ability are necessary to equip them to face future challenges brought about by socio-economic, political and environmental changes (Egger & Maurer, n.d.). The increasing use of robots in the hospitality and tourism industries has brought challenges for teaching and research on such topics as customer acceptance, influence on the workplace, impact on hospitality design and facilities layout (Murphy, Hofacker, & Gretzel, 2017). Pantelidis and Woodward (2012) offered a case study of transforming a teaching restaurant into a research laboratory and pointed out that such transformations increase the perceived value of teaching restaurants and benefit both the teaching and learning of food and beverage management.

13.2.4 Evaluating the Quality of Hospitality and Tourism Programmes

Various accreditation systems, applied on a voluntary basis, have been used to examine the quality of hospitality and tourism programmes, for example, the TedQual certification by the United Nations World Tourism Organisation (UNWTO) and the Accreditation Commission for Programmes in Hospitality Administration (ACPHA; Horng et al., 2009). These accreditation systems were welcomed by some institutions across the world. Participants of ACPHA include 65 American institu- tions and 2 international ones. Participants of TedQual include 72 institutions worldwide. However, these accreditation systems are not without their critics. As 216 L. Yan shown in the following quotation, scholars have already noticed some accreditation-­ related problems, which are still applicable to today’s accreditation scenario: Van Kleek criticized the accreditation process, stating that the result would be lowered standards to please as many programs as possible. Waskey suggested that in the attempt to achieve academic stature, hospitality education was seeking to serve itself, and not students or the industry. (Bosselman, 1996, p. 78) The criteria of existing accreditation systems lack theoretical and empirical bases, and ‘the measures are often used on an ad hoc basis and do not conform to system- atic procedures for construct development’ (Horng et al., 2009, p. 40). Furthermore, the vague standards and the purpose and outcome of accreditation systems can cause complaints and criticisms (Bosselman, 1996), not to mention the time-­ consuming nature (Tribe, 2003) and the expensive cost of the accreditation process (Widarsyah, Ghiselli, & Adler, 2017). In addition to these perceived faults, another problem associated with the accreditation systems is their failure to consider the role of research in enhancing the quality of teaching. The previous extensive discus- sion of the research-teaching relationship suggests a positive link between hospital- ity and tourism staff performing research and the quality of their teaching in the field, thus answering the first research question. The following discussion addresses the remaining two questions posed in this study: the research performance of hospi- tality and tourism programmes with TedQual certifications and the effectiveness of TedQual accreditation.

13.3 Study Context: The Distribution of TedQual-Certified Programmes

In terms of region, Europe accommodates the largest number of institutions with TedQual-certified programmes, closely followed by the Asia Pacific region and the Americas (Table 13.1). In contrast, the Middle East and Africa accommodate the least number of institutions with TedQual-certified programmes. In terms of coun- tries, Greater China stands out as having the largest number of institutions with TedQual-certified programmes: six in Mainland, four in Hong Kong, and three in Macau. At present, no Taiwan-based institutions have sought TedQual accreditation. Data on the distribution of TedQual-certified programmes across the world were linked to another set of data on the performance of research in the field of hospitality and tourism by country (Park, Phillips, Canter, & Abbott, 2011). This linkage offers a glimpse into the interest of those countries with a good record of research in tour- ism and hospitality in TedQual accreditation. Among the 30 top researching coun- tries and regions, 47% have not sought TedQual accreditation (Table 13.2). Excluding Hong Kong, Macau and Taiwan, China still ranks first in terms of interest in TedQual accreditation among the top 30 countries and territories for research performance. At second place are Hong Kong, the United Kingdom and Portugal. 13 Research Performance of Tourism Education Quality Accredited Programmes… 217

Table 13.1 Number of TedQual-certified programmes per country or region (regions in italics) Country/ Number of Country/ Number of Country/ Number of region institutions region institutions region institutions Europe 25 Asia Pacific 23 Americas 18 Austria 1 Australia 1 Argentina 1 France 1 Greater China 13 Canada 1 Italy 2 India 2 Chile 1 Kazakhstan 1 Indonesia 4 Colombia 2 Latvia 1 Japan 1 Ecuador 1 Macedonia 1 Lao 1 Honduras 1 Portugal 4 New Zealand 1 Mexico 6 Serbia 1 Middle East 4 Peru 3 Slovenia 1 United Arab 1 Puerto Rico 1 Emirates Spain 3 Jordan 2 United 1 States Switzerland 2 Sultanate of 1 Oman The 1 Africa 2 Netherlands Turkey 2 Kenya 1 United 4 Zambia 1 Kingdom Data source: http://themis.unwto.org

Despite the relatively high interest by these few regions in the accreditation system, the overall situation is that most territories have shown little or very low interest in TedQual accreditation.

13.4 Research Methods

To understand the research performance of TedQual-certified programmes in Greater China, listed in Table 13.3, data were collected via the database of Hospitality and Tourism Complete (EBSCOhost). The number of each institution’s academic journal publications was counted. Counting publications is a method of assessing the research performance of programmes or institutions; however, existing studies tend to focus on the overall research outputs and neglect the average output per faculty member (Law, Fong, & Fong, 2015). For this reason, in the present study, the average research output per staff member was computed. The period within which institutional publications were counted was set from January 2012 to May 2017 to enable a fair comparison, as the latest programme under discussion was established in 2011 at the City University of Macau. Only publications in English were counted. As retrieving publications using author affiliation as a search 218 L. Yan

Table 13.2 Top 30 countries and territories of hospitality and tourism research and number of institutions with TedQual-certified programmes Number of Number of Research Country/ TedQual-certified Research Country/ TedQual-certified ranking territory institutions ranking territory institutions 1 United States 1 16 Austria 1 2 United 4 17 France 1 Kingdom 3 Australia 1 18 Greece 0 4 Hong Kong 4 19 Switzerland 2 5 Spain 3 20 Denmark 0 6 Taiwan 0 21 Sweden 0 7 Canada 1 22 Germany 0 8 South Korea 0 23 Italy 2 9 New Zealand 1 24 South Africa 0 10 Turkey 2 25 Portugal 4 11 Israel 0 26 Japan 1 12 Norway 0 27 Finland 0 13 Netherlands 0 28 Thailand 0 14 Singapore 0 29 Slovenia 1 15 Chinaa 6 30 Brazil 0 Data source: Park et al. (2011); http://themis.unwto.org aMainland China criterion is not possible, institution name was searched for in the full text, and then results were checked in terms of author affiliations at both university and school levels. The confirmation of institution is insufficient – for instance, at Jinan University most of the research outputs on tourism and hospitality are from the School of Management, rather than the Tourism School – so authors’ schools or departments were further confirmed. For the Institute for Tourism Studies (IFT), City University of Macau (CUM) and Macau University of Science and Technology (MUST), the words ‘Macao’ and ‘Macau’ were used for searching and the associ- ated results combined. Size refers to the number of full-time faculty, excluding vis- iting, adjunct, emeritus and honorary professors (Table 13.3). Four colleges and training organisations with TedQual accreditation were excluded from analysis; meanwhile, a university which is no longer on the list of accredited programmes was included for analysis. The Hong Kong Institute of Vocational Education and the Hospitality Industry Training and Development Centre are two member institutions of the Vocational Training Council. The Vocational Training Council is a vocational and professional education and training provider in Hong Kong; it is not an academic institution comparable to the universi- ties and colleges listed in Table 13.3. Accordingly, despite their TedQual certifica- tions, the two organisations associated with the Vocational Training Council were excluded from further analysis. Similarly, the Chengdu Polytechnic and the Tourism College of Zhejiang Province are vocational training institutes and for this reason 13 Research Performance of Tourism Education Quality Accredited Programmes… 219

Table 13.3 TedQual-certified programmes in Greater China Year Year Institution Name of programme founded certified Sizea PGb Type The Hong Kong School of Hotel and 1982 2002 67 Yes Public Polytechnic University Tourism Management (HKPU) Institute for Tourism Tourism College, Tourism 1995 2000 116 No Public Studies (IFT) and Hotel School Sun Yat-sen University School of Tourism 2004 2009 34 Yes Public (SYSU) Management Macau University of Faculty of Hospitality and 2003 2007 34 Yes Private Science and Tourism Management Technology (MUST) Beijing International School of Hospitality 1981 2011 33 Yes Public Studies University Management, School of (BISU)c Tourism Management City University of Faculty of International 2011 2014 21 Yes Private Macau (CUM) Tourism and Management Chinese University of School of Hotel and 1998 2009 18 Yes Public Hong Kong (CUHK) Tourism Management Jinan University (JNU) Shenzhen Tourism College 1993 2001 28 Yes Public Guilin Tourism Tourism, Leisure, Hotel, 1985 2011 80 No Public University (GTU) and Tour Leader Huangshan University School of Tourism 1985 2015 50 No Public (HSU) Data source: Hospitality and Tourism Complete (HTC) (EBSCOhost), accessed on May 22–23, 2017 aSize = number of full-time faculty bPG = postgraduate programme cCertified in 2011, but not renewed afterwards were excluded from further analysis. Furthermore, the Beijing International Studies University was added to the list of institutions with TedQual-certified programmes for further analysis. This university was certified in 2011 for 4 years but did not renew the certification at the end of the time period. This nonrenewal could indicate a changing interest in TedQual certification among those programmes which had been certified. Having the certification or not, the tourism education quality of the Beijing International Studies University is widely recognised domestically, and for this reason the university was included for further analysis. In terms of programme size, the Guilin Tourism University ranks first, with 13 academic divisions and 529 full-time teachers (49 professors and 138 associate pro- fessors). However, the analysis counted staff in the tourism and hospitality depart- ments based only on information available from the university’s official website. Excluding those non-tourism and non-hospitality staff, the size of the Guilin Tourism University is secondary to that of the Institute for Tourism Studies (Table 13.3). In the third place is the Hong Kong Polytechnic University, followed 220 L. Yan by Huangshan University. Programme size of the remaining institutions featured numbers of staff in the 20s to 30s.

13.5 Results

A comparison of research performances of the TedQual-accredited programmes in Greater China is shown in Fig. 13.1. The number of overall research outputs of the Hong Kong Polytechnic University (HKPU) was significantly higher than that of any other institution. The Institute for Tourism Studies (IFT) ranked second, fol- lowed by the Sun Yat-sen University (SYSU) and Macau University of Science and Technology (MUST). Starting from the Beijing International Studies University (BISU), the number of outputs decreased from 22 to 8, and the last two universities seldom publish in English journals (Fig. 13.1). These discrepancies can be explained by the hierarchy of higher educational systems: the research universities are devoted to international recognition; the teaching universities focus on vocational training; and most universities fall somewhere between these extremes and seek a balance between teaching and research (Fang, 2012). As a representative of vocational uni- versities, the Guilin Tourism University (GTU) contributes very few research publi- cations. This low output can be regarded as a sign of a ‘lack of qualified hospitality educators’ at the university (Shen, Luo, & Lam, 2015, p. 16), which also applies to the considerable number of vocational institutes developed in recent decades to cater for industry needs.

450 390 400

350

300

250

200

150 101 100 75 Overall number of publications 43 50 22 15 10 8 22 0 HKPU IFT SYSU MUST BISU CUM CUHK JNU GTU HSU

Fig. 13.1 Overall research outputs of the TedQual-certified programmes in Greater China (January 2012–May 2017) 13 Research Performance of Tourism Education Quality Accredited Programmes… 221

7.00

5.82 6.00

5.00

4.00

3.00 2.21 2.00 1.26 erage number of publications 0.87 Av 1.00 0.67 0.71 0.56 0.29 0.03 0.04 0.00 HKPU IFT SYSU MUST BISU CUM CUHKJNU GTU HSU

Fig. 13.2 Average research output per faculty member of the TedQual-certified programmes in Greater China (January 2012–May 2017)

The average research performance of institutions was computed by dividing the total output by the number of academic staff (Fig. 13.2). The institutional research performance at the average level shows some difference from that at the aggregate level, although the performance of HKPU was still much higher than the other insti- tutions (Fig. 13.2). At the second place is SYSU, followed by MUST. The distance between the first and second places has decreased. The average outputs of IFT, BISU, CUM and CUHK were less than one and very similar. The average output of JNU achieved the minimum of visibility in the figures of aggregate and average output, in contrast to the invisibility of GTU and HSU.

13.6 Discussion

The extensive review of literature on the research-teaching link showed that in social science disciplines such as tourism and hospitality, the two academic activi- ties – research and teaching – have a positive relationship. Staff research informs teaching or enhances the quality of teaching by maintaining academics’ enthusiasm and making them aware of the cutting edge of subject knowledge. Students tend to have a positive attitude toward staff research, and this attitude can be strengthened as their length of study in the higher education system increases (Arnold, 2008; Thomas & Harris, 2001). Apart from the direct contribution to teaching effective- ness, staff research can also enhance students’ learning by instructors involving students in research projects and adopting research-/problem-based learning. 222 L. Yan

Assignments with a research element can be a favourite of students who love the challenges and the knowledge and skills acquired in the process of completing projects. The research performance of faculty adds to the reputation of the entity, and reputable programmes or institutions are more appealing to potential students (Daily, Farewell, & Kumar, 2010; Kabak & Dağdeviren, 2014). A university’s suc- cess in attracting good students is critical to the quality of its teaching: teaching is not a one-sided process that is completely determined by the faculty; instead, the quality of students is an important influential factor on teaching quality. This point appears to be missing in the literature on the research-teaching nexus. Recently, Quacquarelli Symonds (QS) has begun to rank the hospitality and leisure manage- ment programmes offered by universities around the world. Among three indicators, two are used to measure research performance, respectively, on academic reputation and citations per paper, with the third being employers’ perceptions of the reputa- tions of the institutions (QS, 2017). The 2017 ranking of hospitality and leisure programmes show that HKPU and IFT are the top two institutions in Asia. This is consistent with the findings on the research performance of TedQual-certified pro- grammes in Greater China, where these two institutions had the most overall out- puts (Fig. 13.1). The research performance of the institutions with TedQual-certified programmes in Greater China is one of the research focuses of the present study. However, the results should not be understood as ranking the relevant programmes. Ranking of tourism and hospitality programmes or the relevant universities based on research publications has already been criticised as having issues of validity and neglecting ‘the overall contribution to knowledge development publications’ (Law et al., 2015, p. 220). The discussion of research performance of TedQual-certified programmes leads to the inquiry into the issue of teaching quality and the link between research and teaching. Faculty size and the numbers of full professors (together with the availability of doctoral programmes) are predictors of the research productivity of hospitality and tourism programmes (Lee & Law, 2011). However, these predictors do not apply to the Guilin Tourism University and Huangshan University, despite their large sizes. In this study, the two vocational training institutions form the opposite of the world-­ class programmes offered at HKPU, IFT, SYSU and CUHK. The continuum of TedQual-certified programmes in Greater China range from those having high pro- files internationally to those having low profiles domestically. A concern arising from comparing the research performances of these programmes is to what extent the conception of tourism education (quality) has the same denotation for these institutions with largely different performances in terms of tourism and hospitality research. The large discrepancies between the high-profile institutions and the low-­ profile ones create doubts about the criteria adopted by the TedQual accreditation system. The neglect of research performance in evaluating the quality of education is a weakness of the assessment process. The research performance of faculty can directly or indirectly contribute to the quality of their teaching. Furthermore, the research performance of an institution/programme largely accounts for its reputation­ 13 Research Performance of Tourism Education Quality Accredited Programmes… 223 or prestige, which is critical in attracting good and outstanding students. The calibre of students is an influential factor on teaching effectiveness. The TedQual accreditation system does not differentiate between the three terms ‘training’, ‘teaching’ and ‘education’. Zagonari (2009) noted that vocational train- ing focuses on meeting the current needs of the tourism and hospitality industry, while tertiary education aims at future needs. Frendo (2005) mentioned the different orientations of the two activities: education is person-focused and training job-­ focused. Theoretically, training and education can coexist in an institution with a balance between the two aspects; however, in practice the vocational schools tend to adopt a training approach, and universities tend to adopt an education approach (Zagonari, 2009). Regarding teaching and education, the philosopher Johann Friedrich Herbart stated that the goals of the former are specific and those of the latter broad (Hilgenheger, 1993). Herbart further explained that teaching is mainly concerned with the imparting of knowledge and skills, and education pays attention to charac- ter development and student improvement (Hilgenheger, 1993). The two terms are linked to different approaches for teaching and learning: teaching is educator-centric­ and education learner-centric (Mina, 2002). Mina found that the first-year under- graduate who has been accustomed to a teacher-centric style in high school can have difficulties in adapting to university education, because: The universities are in the business of education, not necessarily teaching …. Teachers and educators try hard to provide the best environment with the best presentation and up-to-date information available, but it is the responsibility of the students to do the required reading and problem solving. The students are supposed to keep up with the class work, much more so out of class than in class, to read, learn, practice, and cooperate with others to make sure they understand the material. Such environments that exist in almost all of the universities are learner centric. It is the learners’ (students’) responsibility to make sure they work hard, ask questions, see reference material, do research, and get what they need to learn …. The goal of the universities is to provide an environment that trains life-long learners – indepen- dent professionals who are self-motivated and know how to learn new material. (Mina, 2002, p. 2) The previous discussions show that although the three terms ‘training’, ‘teaching’ and ‘education’ are sometimes used interchangeably, there are substantial differ- ences between them. However, the TedQual accreditation system neglects the dis- tinctions and regards both vocational training and subject teaching as equivalents of tourism education. This practice is not without doubt. A limitation of this study is the inclusion of some vocational universities, thus comparing apples and oranges. For instance, the Guilin Tourism University and Huangshan University might fall into the category of vocational training institu- tions, thus being inappropriate for comparison with other universities. An implica- tion for future studies on teaching or education quality evaluation is that the construct of research performance should be included in the assessment framework. After all, teaching and research are two sides of a coin, and the dissemination of knowledge should not be separated from the production of knowledge (Blakey, Khachikian, & Lemus, 2017). Furthermore, future empirical studies can consider adopting a 224 L. Yan

­logistic regression model to explore the complex, non-linear relationship between research and teaching.

13.7 Conclusion

This study addressed the three questions of the research-teaching relationship, the research performances of the TedQual-certified programmes in Greater China and the effectiveness of TedQual accreditation. A comprehensive review of existing studies revealed that in social science disciplines such as tourism and hospitality, staff research contributes to teaching quality. This understanding leads to an inves- tigation of the research performance of the TedQual-certified programmes to further explore the link between staff research and teaching quality. Data analyses showed that the certified tourism and hospitality education programmes in Greater China have very different research performances: from those frequently publishing in top journals in tourism and hospitality to those seldom publishing in international jour- nals. The assessment framework of TedQual fails to include research performance as a criterion for evaluation of tourism education quality. The neglect of research performance is associated with an indiscriminative understanding of the three peda- gogic concepts: training, teaching and education. By contrast, the QS subject rank- ing of hospitality and leisure management adopted two criteria closely related to faculty research performance, namely, academic reputation and research impact (QS, 2017). Based on the previous discussions, the TedQual accreditation system is supposed to incorporate research performance into the assessment criteria.

References

Allen, M. (1995, February). Research productivity and positive teaching evaluations: Examining the relationship using meta-analysis. Paper presented at the Annual Meeting of the Western States Communication Association, Portland, OR. Arnold, I. J. (2008). Course level and the relationship between research productivity and teaching effectiveness. The Journal of Economic Education, 39(4), 307–321. Ball, S., & Taleb, M. A. (2010). Insights on how students perceive the research-teaching nexus: A case study of hospitality management students. Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sports and Tourism Education, 9(2), 89–101. Blakey, E., Khachikian, C., & Lemus, D. (2017). Increasing research requirements for tenure at teaching universities: Mission creep or mission critical? Teacher-Scholar: The Journal of the State Comprehensive University, 8(1), 43–64. Bosselman, R. H. (1996). Current perceptions of hospitality accreditation. Hospitality Review, 14(2), 77–84. Breen, R., & Lindsay, R. (1999). Academic research and student motivation. Studies in Higher Education, 24(1), 75–93. Daily, C. M., Farewell, S., & Kumar, G. (2010). Factors influencing the university selection of international students. Academy of Educational Leadership Journal, 14(3), 59–75. 13 Research Performance of Tourism Education Quality Accredited Programmes… 225

Egger, R., & Maurer, C. (n.d.). Considerations on the research-teaching relationship in higher education tourism programmes. Retrieved from http://academia.edu Fang, W. (2012). The development of transnational higher education in China: A comparative study of research universities and teaching universities. Journal of Studies in International Education, 16(1), 5–23. Frendo, E. (2005). How to teach business English. Essex, England: Pearson Longman. Hattie, J., & Marsh, H. W. (1996). The relationship between research and teaching: A meta-­ analysis. Review of Educational Research, 66(4), 507–542. Healey, M. (2005). Linking research and teaching: Exploring disciplinary spaces and the role of inquiry-based learning. In R. Barnett (Ed.), Reshaping the university: New relationships between research, scholarship and teaching (pp. 67–78). New York, NY: McGraw Hill/Open University Press. Hilgenheger, N. (1993). Johann Friedrich Herbart. In Prospects: The quarterly review of compara- tive education (pp. 649–664). Paris, France: UNESCO International Bureau of Education. Horng, J. S., Teng, C. C., & Baum, T. G. (2009). Evaluating the quality of undergraduate hos- pitality, tourism and leisure programmes. Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sport and Tourism Education, 8(1), 37–54. Jenkins, A., Blackman, T., Lindsay, R., & Paton-Saltzberg, R. (1998). Teaching and research: Student perspectives and policy implications. Studies in Higher Education, 23(2), 127–141. Kabak, M., & Dağdeviren, M. (2014). A hybrid MCDM approach to assess the sustainability of students’ preferences for university selection. Technological and Economic Development of Economy, 20(3), 391–418. Law, R., Fong, L. H. N., & Fong, D. K. C. (2015). How useful are university rankings in tourism? Annals of Tourism Research, 54, 219–221. Lee, H. A., & Law, R. (2011). Research productivity and institutional characteristics of hospitality and tourism programs. Journal of Travel & Tourism Marketing, 28(4), 432–450. Mina, M. (2002, October 10–12). Teaching technology to web-affected computer-game-influenced students in the early 21st century: Hopes and despairs. Paper presented at ASEE Midwest Fall Conference, Madison, WI. Murphy, J., Hofacker, C., & Gretzel, U. (2017). Dawning of the age of robots in hospitality and tourism: Challenges for teaching and research. European Journal of Tourism Research, 15, 104–111. Neumann, R. (1992). Perceptions of the teaching-research nexus: A framework for analysis. Higher Education, 23(2), 159–171. Pantelidis, I., & Woodward, K. (2012, May 9–10). Hospitality learning, teaching and research: From teaching restaurant to research lab. Paper presented at the 21st Annual conference Council for Hospitality Management Education, Birmingham, UK. Park, K., Phillips, W. J., Canter, D. D., & Abbott, J. (2011). Hospitality and tourism research rank- ings by author, university, and country using six major journals: The first decade of the new millennium. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Research, 35(3), 381–416. Quacquarelli Symonds. (2017). World university rankings by subject 2017. Retrieved from https:// www.topuniversities.com/subject-rankings/methodology Shen, H., Luo, J. M., & Lam, C. F. (2015). Evaluating the quality of hospitality and tourism educa- tion in vocational institute in China. International Journal of Marketing Studies, 7(3), 12–18. Smeby, J. C. (1998). Knowledge production and knowledge transmission: The interaction between research and teaching at universities. Teaching in Higher Education, 3(1), 5–20. Taylor, S., & Edgar, D. (1999). Lacuna or lost cause? Some reflections on hospitality manage- ment research. In R. Brotherton (Ed.), The handbook of contemporary hospitality management research (pp. 19–38). Chichester, England: Wiley. Thomas, R., & Harris, V. (2001). Exploring connections between teaching and research in hospi- tality management. International Journal of Hospitality Management, 20(3), 245–257. 226 L. Yan

Tribe, J. (2003). Delivering higher quality: A comparative study of lecturers’ perceptions and QAA subject review in tourism. Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sport and Tourism Education, 2(1), 27–47. Widarsyah, R., Ghiselli, R. F., & Adler, H. (2017). Quality assurance in hospitality and tour- ism higher education: Administrators’ view of ACPHA accreditation–An exploratory study. Journal of Quality Assurance in Hospitality & Tourism, 18(2), 235–257. Zagonari, F. (2009). Balancing tourism education and training. International Journal of Hospitality Management, 28(1), 2–9. Zaman, M. Q. (2004). Review of the academic evidence on the relationship between teaching and research in higher education. London, England: Department for Education and Skills. Chapter 14 Patterns of Tourism and Hospitality Education in India and Malaysia: A Critical Reflection

Sudipta Kiran Sarkar and Babu George

Abstract This chapter presents a comparative analysis of tourism higher education in India and Malaysia, two developing countries located in Asia. Based on an exten- sive review of literature and in light of the experiences of the authors as tourism educators in the countries selected for this study, the trends of past, present and future development, curriculum design, pedagogical innovations, popular demand for tourism and hospitality programmes, industry-academia gaps and government higher education policies are analysed. The chapter also examines public versus private institution-led tourism education in terms of differences in policy, faculty expertise and the scope of their activities. Finally, the socio-political, socio-­ economic and government ideology influences on tourism and hospitality education in these countries are discussed. While tourism education in India needs a boost in terms of professionalism and market orientation, Malaysian tourism education suf- fers from the overemphasis of these very same things – an extreme focus on employ- ment can lead to the neglect of some of the exalted ideals that should be part of the objectives of a university education.

Keywords Asian subregions · Tourism education · India · Malaysia · Comparison

14.1 Introduction

Education in tourism encompasses the fields of travel and tourism, hospitality and events. Since the inception of the world’s first hotel school in 1922 by the Cornell School of Hotel Administration, there has been tremendous growth in tourism and hospitality education provision on a global scale. The development of education in tourism and hospitality in the Asian context has developed along with the growth of

S. K. Sarkar (*) Sol International Hospitality Management Department, Woosong University, Daejeon, South Korea B. George Fort Hays State University, Hays, KS, USA e-mail: [email protected]

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 227 C. Liu, H. Schänzel (eds.), Tourism Education and Asia, Perspectives on Asian Tourism, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4_14 228 S. K. Sarkar and B. George tourism, both inbound and outbound, over the last two to three decades. The emer- gence of dynamic new economies, especially those of China and India, has provided a major impetus to the growth of tourism at famous Asian destinations such as Thailand, Malaysia, Singapore, Hong Kong, Dubai and Doha. These destinations continue to grow and attract more tourists. This has, in turn, necessitated the growth of tourism education programmes, both vocational and academic, as the tourism industries of this region seek more qualified and skilled candidates to meet the needs emanating from increasing tourist mobility and consumption. Although many coun- tries in Asia experienced the inception of hotel and catering vocational education as early as the 1970s, the popularity of tourism as a discipline in higher education has increased only in the last few decades. This popularity can be attributed to the unprecedented growth of tourism in Asia as a result of the economic successes it has experienced since the 1990s (World Travel and Tourism Council [WTTC], 2017a). Today, some of the best tourism education providers in the world are from Asia. The School of Hotel and Tourism Management at the Hong Kong Polytechnic University has become one of the most elite institutions of high-quality tourism education and research in the world. Other prominent Asian institutions of tourism higher education, such as the Institute for Tourism Studies (IFT), Macao, and the Emirates Academy of Hospitality Management (EAHM), Dubai, have joined the ranks of top global schools imparting quality tourism and hospitality education. Against these phenomenal achievements in tourism education in Asia, there have also been considerable challenges in terms of curriculum design, pedagogical inno- vations, popular demand for programmes, industry-academia gaps and government higher education policies. Socio-economic and technological changes occurring at a global level have also contributed to the above challenges and trends in tourism education in Asia. India and Malaysia are two Asian countries that have experienced commendable growth in tourism and hospitality education provision in the last two to three decades, making them important education destinations in South Asia and Southeast Asia, respectively. India is a developing country with one of the fastest GDP growth rates, averaging 6–7% in the last 6 years (“India regains title of world’s fastest-­ growing major economy”, 2017). According to the World Travel and Tourism Council, in 2016, tourism accounted for 9.6% (INR14.1 trillion/USD208.9 billion) of India’s total GDP, making it the seventh largest in the world in terms of absolute size (WTTC, 2017a). India was the second largest in the world in terms of generat- ing employment in travel and tourism with 40.3 million jobs (share of 9.3% of total jobs created) in 2016 (WTTC, 2017a). Malaysia has an annual economic growth rate of 5–6% and falls into the category of a high-middle-income country with a GDP per capita of 9502.57 USD in 2016. In 2016, tourism accounted for 13.7% of the total GDP of the country (WTTC, 2017b). Jobs generated from tourism for 2016 were 1.7 million, comprising 12% of the total jobs created (WTTC, 2017b). While both these countries are fast-developing economies with considerable progress made in tourism in terms of GDP and employment generation, India and Malaysia are placed differently in their race to become developed nations. India is considered a low-middle-income country, while Malaysia is positioned in the lower 14 Patterns of Tourism and Hospitality Education in India and Malaysia: A Critical… 229 ranks of high-middle-income nations in the world (World Bank, 2018). Growth in tourism, especially in terms of wealth and employment generation, can make a sub- stantial contribution towards the progress of both these countries becoming eco- nomically advanced. Employment generation through tourism entails the creation of a competent workforce – the responsibility of which largely lies with the tourism and hospitality education sectors of both countries. A tourism and hospitality education sector that imparts both vocational/technical and management-oriented training can produce the skilled workforce needed for the generation of employment in tourism. Based on an extensive review of literature and in light of the experiences of the authors as tourism educators in the countries of India and Malaysia, this chapter will focus on how tourism and hospitality higher education has developed in both these countries, and provide a critical reflection on the issues and challenges they respec- tively face. Moreover, this chapter will enable the audience to understand the cul- tural, pedagogical and socio-economic implications of the current situation of tourism and hospitality education in both India and Malaysia. India and Malaysia share a lot of similarities but also provide sufficient contrast to examine how tour- ism education can develop different trajectories by responding to different cultural assumptions, institutional constraints and market forces. A comparative examina- tion will help tourism education policy makers to draw the positive aspects of prac- tice from each country and potentially implement them.

14.2 Tourism and Hospitality Education in India

14.2.1 Background

In India, tourism and hospitality education dates back to the early 1950s when the Institute of Hotel Management, Catering Technology and Applied Nutrition was set up in Bombay (now Mumbai). It was claimed to be the first of its kind in South Asia and was founded by the All India Women’s Central Food Council (Kumar, 2014). This was followed by the setting up of the Institute of Hotel Management Catering & Nutrition (IHM), Pusa, in New Delhi in 1962. Since then, IHMs have been set up in multiple cities in India to meet the needs of the hotel industry across the country. In addition, several food crafts institutes were set up in different regions to meet the immediate industry operational requirements for skilled hotel workers. Towards the late 1980s and early 1990s, the first bachelor degree programmes in hotel manage- ment were introduced. Since the 1990s, an increasing number of universities have developed degree programmes in hospitality management, both at bachelor and master’s levels (Jithendran & Baum, 2000; Singh, 1997). Tourism-specific education had its origin in 1983 when the Indian Institute of Tourism and Travel Management (IITTM) was established as a registered society in New Delhi under the Ministry of Tourism. It was set up with the objective of devel- oping and promoting education, training and research in the field of travel and tour- 230 S. K. Sarkar and B. George ism. At the beginning of the 1990s, master’s degree programmes were beginning to be offered by various universities in India (Jithendran & Baum, 2000; Singh, 1997). One of the earliest university-run tourism programmes to start in India was at the Centre for Tourism Studies, Pondicherry University in 1991. One of the first mas- ter’s degree programmes in Tourism was the Master of Tourism Administration started by Kurukshetra University in the province of Haryana in 1991 (Jithendran & Baum, 2000). Towards the late 1990s, about 30 universities were offering post- graduate programmes in tourism management across the country (Singh, 1997).

14.2.2 Tourism and Hospitality Education Scenario in India

Today, some prominent institutions of higher education offering high-quality educa- tion and training in the fields of tourism and hospitality have emerged. Some of the notable institutions in India today are: • The Oberoi Centre for Learning and Development (OCLD), Pune • The Welcomgroup Graduate School of Hotel Administration, Manipal • Kohinoor-IMI School of Hospitality Management, Indore • The National Institute of Tourism and Hospitality Management, Hyderabad • Institute of Hotel Management, Aurangabad, run in collaboration with the Taj Group of Hotels • The federal government-run IHMs as well as the IITTMs These institutions have been able to impart high-quality vocational and opera- tional training and education to produce an increasing number of graduates suitably equipped to meet the practical-operational needs of the hotel and tourism industry in India. Being practice-oriented, these institutions have improvised effective meth- ods of training students in hospitality operational processes, hospitality business and delivery. Faculty in these institutions are normally made up of people who have held senior positions in and have extensive experience of the hotel and tourism industries and maintain close collaborative relationships with them. All these fac- tors have contributed towards making these institutions some of the most highly competent in tourism and hospitality education and training (Jithendran & Baum, 2000; Singh, 1997).

14.2.3 Issues and Challenges

Tourism and hospitality education in India has progressed considerably in the last two decades, but there remain a number of challenges in terms of compatibility with global standards, skills requirements as demanded by the industry and innovative- ness. The expanse and maturity of the global hospitality industry make it necessary for tourism and hospitality education to be based on an insightful theoretical and 14 Patterns of Tourism and Hospitality Education in India and Malaysia: A Critical… 231 scholarly assessment of industry workforce requirements (Rao, 2014). Given that several bachelor and master’s degree programmes in tourism and hospitality have been introduced and successfully run by several universities across the country in the last three decades, the outcomes in terms of graduate competency have not been encouraging. These programmes have failed to provide the expected levels of intel- lectual and scholarly oriented skills among the graduates they produce (George, 2017; Siddhanti & Agadi, 2011). Historically, these programmes have also fallen short in imparting technical, hands-on trades-level skills, making graduates less employable for the industry at large (Ernawati, 2003). Moreover, many institutions and universities offering such programmes have either lacked proper in-house prac- tical-training facilities or lack collaboration with the industry in providing engaging internships for students to compensate for the lack of in-house training infrastruc- ture (Rao, 2014). The Indian hospitality industry has grown manifold in the last two decades, and there is an increasing demand for skilled graduates. These workforce demands can- not be met solely by elite hospitality education institutions, which are more focused on imparting training and in vocational and operational skills. Universities, which are meant to focus on scholarly (and critical thinking) skills and transferable skills as well as operational/technical skills, must strive to offer programmes that provide a solid foundation (based on these skills) to cater to the challenges that are emerging in the hospitality industry. These challenges are related to the Fourth Industrial Revolution, also known as the Industry 4.0, which is an industrial movement driven by emerging Internet, digital and operational technologies involving automation, data exchanges, cloud, cyber-physical systems, robots, big data, artificial intelli- gence, the Internet of Things and (semi-)autonomous industrial systems (Davis, 2016). The unprecedented transformation of industrial processes this era brings with it - is radically reshaping our socio-economic landscape, most significantly in terms of human resource needs as well as the educational systems that shape those human resources (OECD, 2017). The hospitality and tourism industry, being a vital part of this socio-economic landscape, is also undergoing gradual transformation in the era of Industry 4.0 (Shamim, Cang, Yu, & Li, 2017). Tourism and hospitality education providers, therefore, must reconfigure themselves to create human resource that can cope with these challenges.

14.2.4 Workforce

As mentioned earlier, there have been an increasing number of universities and smaller institutions offering degree and diploma programmes that often lack ade- quate levels of technical-practical quality as well as scholarly quality compared to the fewer competent vocational and training-based institutions. Owing to this, a fast-growing Indian hospitality industry is struggling to find sufficient skilled work- ers (Km & Sharma, 2011). The proliferation of university degree programmes in tourism and hospitality since the 1990s seems to have reflected only the growth of 232 S. K. Sarkar and B. George the business of hospitality education, not the accomplishment of the objective of meeting the increasing needs of the hospitality industry, i.e. a highly skilled work- force in terms of technical, analytical and leadership abilities (Kumar, 2013). Connections with industry in terms of research collaborations and consultancy are evident largely in the elite tourism and hospitality vocational and training-based institutions like the IITTMs, the IHMs and the OCLD. Most of the universities and institutions outside the elite hospitality education circle have failed to incorporate competent personnel into their faculties – teachers who have had substantial expo- sure and experience in different critical and strategic hospitality industry-related practices (Nair & George, 2016). Incorporation of such competent professionals into the academic workforce can enable universities to transform the quality of edu- cation and training they impart to their graduates in terms of the technical-­operational and strategic know-hows required in the tourism and hospitality industry. When it comes to hiring competent academic professionals for the enhancement of quality in education, pay scales present another major challenge. The pay scales offered to the academic workforce at different academic levels are prescribed by the University Grants Commission (UGC) and the All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE). Although these pay scales are recommended by the Pay Commission of the Federal Government, and are periodically adjusted for inflation rates and cost of living, they are well below international standards. Most of the Indian universities offering tourism and hospitality programmes that come under the regulatory jurisdiction of the UGC and AICTE lack the resources to train their academic workforce and improve their infrastructure. This prevents them from imparting quality hospitality education at global standards (Kumar, 2014; Subbarao, 2008). However, recently, the UGC granted full autonomy to some universities in the country based on their overall performance. This is expected to enable these universities to independently source channels of revenue by allowing flexibility in student recruitment procedures, introducing new programmes in collaboration with recognised overseas universities and reaching out to different agents of funding for pedagogical development and research (“UGC grants full autonomy”, 2018).

14.2.5 The Industry Perspectives of Tourism and Hospitality Education

Another dimension of this scenario is the tourism and hospitality industry view of the tourism and hospitality education in India. The industry’s lack of understanding of the potential for university programmes in hospitality and tourism to bring inno- vation and resilience is another obstacle in the growth of tourism and hospitality education in India. Many industry players have the view that intellectual, scholarly and high-level analytical skills have no compatibility with the nature of work in the industry, as the skills required are primarily operational and technical (George, 2013, 2017). When the industry requires skills involving analysis and strategy, elite 14 Patterns of Tourism and Hospitality Education in India and Malaysia: A Critical… 233 management schools, such as the Indian Institute of Management, are usually con- sulted. The nurturing of a high-quality workforce with strategic and analytical skills, required for complex and strategic decision-making is thus absent from both the academic and industry hospitality circles of India (George, 2017; Kumar, 2013; Singh, 1997). Moreover, the Indian tourism and hospitality industry has for a long time been resistant to recruiting personnel with postgraduate qualifications. In fact, the IHMs, which are perceived to be offering the most skills-oriented hospitality training in the country, took a long time to elevate their diploma in Hotel and Catering Technology programmes to degree programmes (Jauhari, 2006; Khan & Narayanan, 1998).

14.3 Tourism and Hospitality Education in Malaysia

14.3.1 Background

In the 1960s and 1970s, Malaysia depended on exports of tin and rubber; however, these two traditionally thriving industries declined as demand for the resources faded in the global market. The country considered diversifying into other lucrative as well as emerging economic sectors, such as petroleum, manufacturing and tour- ism. Realising the prospects for growth in the tourism industry, Malaysia has placed emphasis on it in their economy (Thitthongkam & Walsh, 2011). The earliest tour- ism institute dates back to 1967 when the MARA Institute of Technology or ITM (School of Hotel and Tourism Management) was set up. Since the 1970s, an increas- ing emphasis has been placed on tourism in terms of expanding tourism infrastruc- ture and efforts to create more employment through tourism (Mosbah & Khuja, 2014). This has led to the need for a skilled workforce and thus, universities and institutions. However, it was not until the 1990s that both the private and public Malaysian education sectors started to offer programmes in tourism and hospitality (Goldsmith & Zahari, 1994). The advent of private educational institutions and their significant role in higher learning was substantiated when the Private Higher Educational Institutions (PHEI) Act was passed in 1996. There had been a prolifera- tion of higher education institutions, especially ones offering tourism and hospital- ity education. These institutions have attracted many students from all over the world and, in turn, contributed towards the growth of education tourism in Malaysia (Mosbah & Khuja, 2014). Moreover, the internationalisation policy of the Malaysian government, in the context of higher education, has provided a reasonable impetus for international students, especially from Middle Eastern countries, to opt for Malaysia as a destination of choice for higher education (Shariff, 2013; Singh, Schapper, & Jack, 2014). Furthermore, Malaysia’s lower costs of higher education, diversity, safe environment and medium of instruction being English are some of the other prime factors that play a major role in making it a preferred destination for international students (Shan, Shah, & Suat, 2013). 234 S. K. Sarkar and B. George

14.3.2 Hospitality and Tourism Education Scenario in Malaysia

Malaysia has pursued an aggressive neo-liberal education policy that has allowed transnational higher education (TNHE) services to become a part of Malaysia’s private education environment. Government policy has allowed a number of inter- national universities to set up their campuses in Malaysia, as well as the growth of both profit- and non-profit-oriented private educational institutions and the various hospitality/tourism programmes offered by them (Morshidi, 2006). Examples are Taylor’s College (now Taylor’s University) and Sunway College (now Sunway University), both of which eventually became universities along with other institu- tions such as UCSI, APIT, Nilai University College and Berjaya University College of Hospitality. In terms of transnational educational pursuits, international cam- puses of Australian universities such as Monash University, Swinburne University of Technology and Curtin University as well as Nottingham University, UK, have been set up in Malaysia in the last two decades. However, only Curtin University offers programmes in tourism now. Malaysian private universities, such as Taylor’s University, have achieved some degree of excellence in vocational-technical train- ing and education as well as in research and scholarly activities in the field of hos- pitality and tourism. In the Quacquarelli Symonds (QS) World University Rankings by Subject 2017 and 2018 for the category of hospitality and leisure management, Taylor’s University was ranked among the top 50 hospitality and tourism institu- tions in the world (Menon, 2018; “Top 30 in the world”, 2017). For a young institu- tion, this ranking is evidence of Taylor’s University’s excellence in imparting high-quality tourism and hospitality education in Malaysia. Among the public universities, Universiti Utara Malaysia, Universiti Science Malaysia, Universiti Teknologi MARA and Universiti Putra Malaysia have shown commendable levels of excellence within the country in imparting quality higher education in tourism and hospitality. Universiti Utara Malaysia and Universiti Teknologi MARA, Shah Alam, provide programmes from undergraduate to PhD in the fields of tourism, hospitality and events (Shariff, 2013). These institutions have produced a significant amount of research and scholarly output over the years. Tourism education in Malaysia has attracted students from across the ASEAN region, Middle East and South Asia. In 2010, Malaysia attracted 87,000 interna- tional students including students that came for hospitality and tourism programmes (Mosbah & Khuja, 2014). By 2016, it was estimated that 172,886 international students were enrolled in Malaysian higher education institutions, both private and public (Jusoh, 2017). Affordable tuition fees and living costs, international intern- ship opportunities, high-quality hospitality training and education and ­commendable pedagogical methods used by experienced and qualified faculty have been the prime drivers in attracting international students to tertiary tourism and hospitality educa- tion institutions in Malaysia (Shan et al., 2013; Thitthongkam & Walsh, 2011). Malaysia being primarily an Islamic country has attracted students from Muslim countries in the Middle East, South Asia and many other parts of the world (Shariff, 14 Patterns of Tourism and Hospitality Education in India and Malaysia: A Critical… 235

2013; Singh et al., 2014). This has been a major driver in bringing in many Muslim students to Malaysia in the field of hospitality and tourism as the country’s Islamic-­ centric environment assures Halal compliance and hospitality pedagogical methods that strictly consider Islamic cultural values and norms (Ghani, 2016; Mahmud, Amat, Rahman, & Ishak, 2010). Most tertiary universities and institutions in Malaysia have Muslim prayer rooms, provide Halal food and offer flexible class hours during Ramadan and on Fridays (Singh et al., 2014). Another major advantage of Malaysia as a regional educational hub in tourism and hospitality is that it offers an English-speaking education environment. Malaysia is believed to be a high-proficiency country in terms of its use of English, as per the latest edition of the English Proficiency Index by Education First (Shan et al., 2013). English being one of the most widely used global languages and the medium of instruction of most Malaysian tertiary institutions has put the country in an advanta- geous position compared to many countries like China, Japan or Taiwan.

14.3.3 Issues and Challenges

Malaysia’s tourism educational environment faces many challenges. Some of these challenges are: • Curricula lacking the ability to meet changing hospitality industry needs • Falling student enrolment in tourism and hospitality programmes in private ter- tiary institutions • Pedagogical quality • Cultural issues (Liu & Liu, 2008; Shariff & Abidin, 2014) Compared to many other countries, the tourism and hospitality curricula offered by tertiary institutions in Malaysia often fall short of meeting changing industry needs. There are often issues such as a lack of professionalism and operational inef- ficiency arising because of staff with insufficient training and skills (Goldsmith & Zahari, 1994; Shariff, 2013). Ahmed and Scott (2014) observed in their study on staffing issues in Malaysian hotels that a shortage of problem-solving, communica- tion and operations-based IT skills was clearly evident among the workforce of front office departments. Younger generation staff (Generation Y) have been observed to have a different attitude towards honing the skills necessary for hotel operations compared to older generations (Ahmed & Scott, 2014; Shariff & Abidin, 2014). Moreover, leadership competencies as well as teamwork abilities have also been found to be lacking among younger generations working in the tourism and hospitality industry in Malaysia (Shariff, 2013; Shariff & Abidin, 2014). This can lead to difficulties in hotel operational and service efficiencies. Malaysian higher education institutions in hospitality and tourism, therefore, have to cope with the challenges arising out of generational changes by revisiting their curricula and instruction methods, to ensure they can produce competent and adequately skilled new graduates (Shariff, 2013; Shariff & Abidin, 2014). 236 S. K. Sarkar and B. George

Apart from the issues of curricula, further problems with student enrolment in programmes of hospitality and tourism, pedagogical models and issues of culture and ethnicity have been found to affect the environment in both public and private higher education institutions in Malaysia. These issues are discussed in the sections that follow.

14.3.3.1 Student Enrolment Issues

Student enrolment in hospitality and tourism programmes offered by Malaysian tertiary institutions, particularly in the private sector, depends on employment pros- pects and the scenario in the hospitality and tourism industry. While hotel, culinary arts and events programmes have maintained steady enrolment numbers over the years, tourism and travel programmes have struggled considerably. This ongoing trend in tourism enrolment was observed a decade ago by Nair and Whitelaw (2008) in their research that focused on hospitality and tourism programme selection by students in private higher education institutions in Malaysia. The study found that only 11% of its total respondents chose tourism management as their specialisation, while 59% and 30% of respondents chose hospitality and restaurant management and culinary arts, respectively (Nair & Whitelaw, 2008). However, this trend, though presented as part of the profile of the research respondents, was not addressed as an issue by the authors. One of the reasons for low enrolment numbers in tourism and travel programmes in private higher education institutions of Malaysia is the lack of international job and career growth opportunities, as the hotel industry in Malaysia lacks a global presence. The travel and tourism sector is largely represented by local, small and medium enterprises and correspondingly few medium to large enterprises (Liu & Liu, 2008). Due to their smaller sizes, Malaysian travel and tourism enterprises do not offer the robust career growth opportunities and mobility that can be found in the hotel industry. Along with low career growth prospects, the pay structures of entry to mid-level staff in the Malaysian travel sector have also been on the lower side (Joo-Ee, 2016). Transnational travel corporations such as Kuoni, Carlson Wagonlit, TUI, FCM, Expedia or Thomas Cook hardly have any presence in Malaysia. These transna- tional companies are sizable organisations with a global presence offering ample career advancement opportunities and mobility across the world. Compared to this, the hotel industry in Malaysia involves major hotel chain brands, such as Novotel, Hilton, Marriot, Hyatt, Le Méridien and Accor. The perception generated by the presence of such transnational hotel chain brands, and their exotic properties in terms of size and features, have an overwhelming impact on students opting to enrol in hospitality rather than tourism programmes in Malaysia. Adding to this, the high fee structures of tourism degree and diploma programmes offered by Malaysian private tertiary institutions, low-entry-level pay scales prevalent in the travel indus- try and the lack of career growth opportunities and mobility, have made tourism programmes less attractive to prospective students (Liu & Liu, 2008). These factors 14 Patterns of Tourism and Hospitality Education in India and Malaysia: A Critical… 237 compel prospective students to choose programmes in hotel/hospitality manage- ment, culinary arts and events instead. In addition, because of the generally small size of Malaysian travel enterprises, the expertise of university graduates in tourism management, especially bachelor’s degree holders, are perceived by the industry as less useful. A combination of all these factors has left Malaysian private tertiary institutions struggling to attract students for enrolment in tourism and travel pro- grammes over the years (Liu & Liu, 2008).

14.3.3.2 Culture and Ethnicity Issues

In Malaysia, students’ culture and ethnicity influence their enrolment choices, lead- ing to segregation in tourism and hospitality higher education (Raman & Sua, 2010). Culture and ethnicity play a major role because some higher education funding schemes and scholarships are only extended to Malay/Bumiputera students (Pak, 2013). Until 2002, Malaysian universities had ethnic quotas reserved for Malays/ Bumiputera candidates. Although the quota system was abolished in 2002, most government schemes for university students are still being extended to Malay ethnic students. This has made it difficult for other ethnicities to pursue higher education in public universities (Pak, 2013; Raman & Sua, 2010). These Malay-favourable schemes have meant that Malay-speaking aspirants enrol mostly in the public uni- versities, while their Chinese and Indian counterparts largely enrol in private ter- tiary institutions or travel overseas for higher education (Raman & Sua, 2010). Fee structures in Malaysian private higher education institutions are higher than their public counterparts. This creates another major difficulty for Chinese and Indian students pursuing higher education in tourism and hospitality, especially those from lower income families.

14.3.3.3 Pedagogical Models

Another issue that is often overlooked is the originality and applicability of the pedagogical and instructional models adopted by tertiary institutions offering hos- pitality and tourism programmes in Malaysia. Malaysian tertiary institutions, espe- cially in the private sector, often offer joint programmes or twinning with western universities. Taylor’s University has been offering twinning programmes in tourism and hospitality with the University of Toulouse in France for almost three decades. There is an overwhelming tendency in the Malaysian tertiary education environ- ment, especially in the fields of hospitality and tourism, to simply replicate models, processes and methods from western contexts and apply them in Malaysia without judging their effectiveness, relevance or degree of applicability. There has been a lack of effort to develop effective and scientifically credible indigenous models or an adapted implementation of western models of education in the Malaysian con- text. The Malaysian Qualifications Agency (MQA) which oversees the quality and standardisation of programmes offered both at public and private universities in 238 S. K. Sarkar and B. George

Malaysia has initiated an independently developed monitoring and quality assur- ance mechanism (Bouchon, Hussain, & Konar, 2015). Yet, the tendency to uncriti- cally replicate foreign models leaves the pedagogical systems fundamentally weak and less credible (Khalil, Tajudin, Tajuddin, Mamat, & Hadi, 2014). The nuances surrounding a country’s education system should be taken into account in designing quality models, as observed by Sallis (2014). Definitions of higher education qual- ity should not be passively drawn from elsewhere (Becket & Brookes, 2008). Pedagogical models developed indigenously, and incorporating elements like coop- erative learning, have the potential to bring satisfactory results among small yet diverse groups of students (Khalil et al., 2014).

14.3.4 Conclusion

This analysis of tourism and hospitality education in India and Malaysia has showed that the two countries differ in their challenges; however, two issues the countries hold in common are an industry-academic skills gaps and the lack of an adequately qualified and trained workforce. While tourism and hospitality programmes in India do not face the same enrolment challenges as Malaysia, Indian tourism and hospi- tality higher education has not been able to attract students from overseas – an area in which Malaysia has been immensely successful. Although it has a culturally diverse education environment, India has failed to promote itself as a higher educa- tion hub for international students. Malaysia, in comparison, has been able to develop a credible image as an education destination attracting students from all over the world. Malaysia, though also a developing country, has a well-developed infrastructure, an efficient civil system and a safer environment compared to India. Because of these and further advantages, like the internationalisation of its higher education, favourable cultural factors and affordable education costs, Malaysia has been able to emerge as a significantly more attractive destination for higher educa- tion compared to India. Malaysia’s emergence as a successful tourism destination has also contributed towards its attractiveness as a prominent destination for higher education in tourism and hospitality (Shan et al., 2013). On the positive side in India, the presence of transnational corporations in both the travel and hotel sectors has brought credible career advancement opportunities. Moreover, due to high volumes of outbound travel by India’s large population, these transnational corporations have brought immense scope and work opportunities for Indian tourism graduates. India, being among the fastest-growing and largest econo- mies in the world, has the potential to become a leading hospitality and tourism education hub. To support the expanding hospitality and tourism industry, Indian tertiary education must produce hospitality and tourism graduates who are well-­ trained and technologically able as well as skilled in strategic and critical thinking. As the impending ramifications of the Fourth Industrial Revolution start to be felt in terms of automation and the incorporation of new technological innovations, a capa- ble and proactive tourism and hospitality education sector in India must meet the 14 Patterns of Tourism and Hospitality Education in India and Malaysia: A Critical… 239 challenging needs of this new era of industrialisation. The blurring boundaries between the physical and digital mean the advent of newer categories of tourist experiences (e.g. virtual reality tourism) and management practices (e.g. crowd-­ sourced product development). Human resource development in tourism is not cur- rently prepared to meet these work demands of the future (Airey, Tribe, Benckendorff, & Xiao, 2015). The Malaysian higher education sector in the fields of hospitality and tourism, both public and private, must find innovative ways to sustain the competitive advan- tage the country currently enjoys as an affordable hub of high-quality education. Indigenously developed educational models are required. These should address racial, cultural and ethnic issues as well as assist in scientifically and methodologi- cally sound pedagogical systems that will produce home-grown hospitality talent for the future (Jithendran & Baum, 2000). Government policies need to be formu- lated that will open new avenues of employment for Malaysian graduates in the travel and tourism sector. A new tourism workforce infrastructure needs to be devel- oped that takes into consideration the challenges from the Fourth Industrial Revolution and the concerns arising out of cultural segregation due to institutionally racialised state policies. This will ensure a smoother transition to the new era of industrialisation, which will bring large changes to the operational processes in the hospitality and tourism industry and, in turn, new kinds of jobs in an increasingly multicultural setting. Examples of the operational processes possible as a result of the new industrial revolution include the use of Software as Service (Sas) for busi- ness analytics and data storage, “self-concierge” using smartphone-enabled guid- ance, smart rooms that adapt to the guest profile and use of wearable technologies as a single replacement for various standalone technologies, among others. Such anticipated changes will potentially induce radical changes in pedagogical methods and curriculum structures in the tourism and hospitality higher education sector in Malaysia. The observations made in this study – of academic-industry skills gaps, enrol- ment issues, cultural diversity aspects and pedagogical issues – have implications for other Asian countries. Academic-industry gaps in the hospitality and tourism fields exist in many other Asian contexts. The enrolment issues in the tourism pro- grammes of private higher education institutions in Malaysia could also be evident in other Asian countries where privately run hospitality and tourism higher educa- tion institutions are proliferating. However, the cultural and ethnic issues in higher education, particularly those of Malaysia, may not be prevalent in other Asian con- texts due to their more culturally homogenous populations. The faculty competency issues arising from low rates of remuneration, as evident in India, could also be occurring in other low-income Asian countries. Like Malaysia, other Asian coun- tries, for example, South Korea and Japan, are moving towards the ­internationalisation of their higher education systems, making the strengths and issues discussed in this study with regard to Malaysia’s higher education scenario in tourism and hospitality education, potentially more widely relevant. As mentioned earlier, Malaysia and India have some similarities in their respec- tive hospitality and tourism higher education sectors. Based on this premise, this 240 S. K. Sarkar and B. George study has attempted a comparative analysis of the sector in the two countries by looking into their respective strengths and the issues significant to their further growth and development. On the foundation of the lived experiences of the authors, some contrasting issues in the two developing countries have been highlighted in terms of culture, diversity and developments in tourism. Researchers and scholars working on pedagogical issues in tourism and hospital- ity education in developing countries in Asia need to focus on the issues identified in this study. Further research can encompass specific issues such as student enrol- ment within the sectors of the hospitality industry. Other issues that need to be focused on by future studies are government policies and their impact on the educa- tion sector in these fields. The resilience factors and strategies required from tour- ism and hospitality educators in both these countries to meet the challenges arising out of the unpredictable economic and technological changes brought about by the advent of the Fourth Industrial Revolution will be a key area to explore. Furthermore, future studies need to focus on how indigenous, yet effective, pedagogical models can be devised by tourism and hospitality education sectors in both India and Malaysia, and what kind of positive outcomes they can bring.

References

Ahmed, R., & Scott, N. (2014). Managing the front office department: Staffing issues in Malaysian hotels. Anatolia: A Multi-Disciplinary Journal, 25(1), 24–38. Airey, D., Tribe, J., Benckendorff, P., & Xiao, H. (2015). The managerial gaze: The long tail of tourism education and research. Journal of Travel Research, 54(2), 139–151. Becket, N., & Brookes, M. (2008). Quality management practice in higher education: What qual- ity are we actually enhancing? Journal of Hospitality, Leisure, Sports and Tourism Education, 7(1), 40–51. Bouchon, F., Hussain, K., & Konar, R. (2015). Event management education and event industry: A case of Malaysia. Malaysian Online Journal of Education Management, 3(1), 1–17. Davis, N. (2016). What is the fourth industrial revolution? Retrieved March 2, 2018, from https:// www.weforum.org/agenda/2016/01/what-is-the-fourth-industrial-revolution/ Ernawati, D. (2003). Stakeholders’ views on higher tourism education. Annals of Tourism Research, 30(1), 255–258. George, B. P. (2013). A critical peep into tourism education in India: An ex-insider’s reflections. Retrieved 8 Aug 2017, from https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=2227986. George, B. P. (2017). Innovation and change in tourism education with special focus on India. In P. Benckendorff & A. Zehrer (Eds.), Handbook of teaching and learning in tourism (pp. 575– 590). Cheltenham, UK: Edward Elgar Publishing. Ghani, G. M. (2016). Tourists arrivals to Malaysia from Muslim countries. Tourism Management Perspectives, 20, 1–9. Goldsmith, A., & Zahari, M. S. M. (1994). Hospitality education in Malaysia: Filling the skill gap. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 6(6), 27–31. India regains title of world’s fastest-growing major economy (2017, March 1). Financial Times. Retrieved May 20, 2018, from https://www.ft.com/content/ cb5a4668-1c84-11e8-956a-43db76e69936 Jauhari, V. (2006). Competencies for a career in the hospitality industry: An Indian perspective. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 18(2), 123–134. 14 Patterns of Tourism and Hospitality Education in India and Malaysia: A Critical… 241

Jithendran, K. J., & Baum, T. (2000). Human resources development and sustainability – The case of Indian tourism. International Journal of Tourism Research, 2, 403–421. Joo-Ee, G. (2016). Minimum wage and the hospitality industry in Malaysia: An analysis of employee perceptions. Journal of Human Resources in Hospitality & Tourism, 15(1), 29–44. Jusoh, D. S. I. (2017). Turning the world towards Malaysian education. Retrieved 4 Mar 2018, from https://www.nst.com.my/opinion/columnists/2017/05/237032/ turning-world-towards-malaysian-education. Khalil, H., Tajudin, A., Tajuddin, A. F. A., Mamat, N. H., & Hadi, N. F. A. (2014). The impact of cooperative learning for academic achievement among Malaysian hospitality students. International Journal of Humanities and Social Science Invention, 3(1), 43–50. Khan, M. B., & Narayanan, S. V. (1998). Human resource development for the promotion of domestic tourism in India. Domestic Tourism in India, 1(1), 169–177. Km, K., & Sharma, P. (2011). Gap analysis of skills provided in hotel management education with respect to skills required in the hospitality industry: The Indian scenario. International Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Systems, 4(1), 31–51. Kumar, M. (2014). Hospitality education in India – Present status, challenges and opportunities. African Journal of Hospitality, Tourism and Leisure, 3(2), 1–12. Kumar, S. (2013). Tourism and hospitality education: Issues, challenges and opportunities in India. International Journal of Management Research and Review, 3(56), 2881–2889. Liu, A., & Liu, J. H. (2008). Tourism employment issues in Malaysia. Journal of Human Resources in Hospitality & Tourism, 7(2), 163–179. Mahmud, Z., Amat, S., Rahman, S., & Ishak, N. M. (2010). Challenges for international students in Malaysia: Culture, climate and care. Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, 7, 289–293. Menon, S. (2018). Four Malaysian varsities do us proud. Retrieved March 31, 2018, from https://www.thestar.com.my/news/nation/2018/03/01/ four-malaysian-varsities-do-us-proud-they-make-it-to-worlds-top-50-rankings-by-subjects/ Morshidi, S. (2006). Transnational higher education in Malaysia: Balancing benefits and concerns through regulations. In F. Huang (Ed.), Transnational higher education in Asia and the Pacific region (pp. 109–126). Hiroshima, Japan: RIHE International Publication. Mosbah, A., & Khuja, M. S. A. A. (2014). A review of tourism development in Malaysia. European Journal of Business and Management, 6(5), 1–9. Nair, R., & George, B. P. (2016). E-learning adoption in education: An analysis with special focus on Singapore. Journal of Tourism, Heritage & Services Marketing, 2(1), 3–13. Nair, V., & Whitelaw, P. A. (2008). Hospitality & tourism vocation: Program selection in a private institution of higher learning in Malaysia. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 20(3), 30–34. Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development. (2017). The next production revolu- tion: Implications for governments and business. Paris: OECD Publishing. Pak, J. (2013). Is Malaysia university entry a level playing field? Retrieved February 26, 2018, from http://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-23841888 Raman, S. R., & Sua, T. Y. (2010). Ethnic segregation in Malaysia’s education system: Enrolment choices, preferential policies and desegregation. Paedagogica Historica: International Journal of the History of Education, 46(1–2), 117–131. Rao, S. (2014). Emerging trends in hospitality and tourism. International Journal of Research – Granthaalayah, 1(1), 1–8. Sallis, E. (2014). Total quality management in education. London: Routledge. Shamim, S., Cang, S., Yu, H., & Li, Y. (2017). Exploring the feasibilities of industry 4.0 for the hospitality sector with the lens of management practice. Energies, 10(4), 1–19. Shan, B. Y., Shah, N. A. R. T., & Suat, O. B. (2013). International student’s perception on Malaysia as a destination for hospitality and tourism education. Interdisciplinary Journal of Contemporary Research in Business, 5(5), 435–456. Shariff, N. M. (2013). Reforming the hospitality education to fulfill the industry expectations: A case of Universiti Utara Malaysia. Social Sciences and Humanities, 4, 243–251. 242 S. K. Sarkar and B. George

Shariff, N. M., & Abidin, A. Z. (2014). Malaysian tourism and hospitality graduates’ competencies: Exploring the human resource managers’ perceptions. Educational Research International, 3(3, June). Siddhanti, V. V., & Agadi, R. (2011). Tourism in India: Vision 2020. International Journal of Research in Commerce and Management, 2(6), 39–42. Singh, J. K. N., Schapper, J., & Jack, G. (2014). The importance of place for international students’ choice of university: A case study at a Malaysian university. Journal of Studies in International Education, 18(5), 463–474. Singh, S. (1997). Developing human resources for the tourism industry with reference to India. Tourism Management, 18(5), 299–306. Subbarao, P. S. (2008). Issues and constraints in manpower supply in Indian hospitality industry (Working Paper Series No. 2008-02-03). Ahmedabad, India: Indian Institute of Management. Thitthongkam, T., & Walsh, J. (2011). Tourism education at the tertiary level and competitive advantage: A comparison between Thailand and Malaysia. Journal of Education and Vocational Research, 1(1), 26–35. Top 30 in the world for hospitality. (2017, March 15). New Straits Times. Retrieved March 30, 2018, from https://www.nst.com.my/news/2017/03/221006/top-30-world-hospitality UGC grants full autonomy to 62 higher educational institutes. (2018, March 20). The Times of India. Retrieved March 20, 2018, from https://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/home/education/ news/ugc-grants-full-autonomy-to-62-higher-educational-institutes-jnu-bhu-amu-in-the-list/ articleshow/63387456.cms. World Bank. (2018). World Bank country and lending groups. Retrieved February 28, 2018, from https://datahelpdesk.worldbank.org/knowledgebase/articles/906519-world-bank-country-and- lending-groups World Travel and Tourism Council. (2017a). India is the world’s 7th largest tourism econ- omy in terms of GDP, says WTTC. Retrieved February 28, 2018, from https://www.wttc. org/media-centre/press-releases/press-releases/2017/indias-is-the-worlds-7th-largest- tourism-economy-in-terms-of-gdp-says-wttc/ World Travel and Tourism Council. (2017b). Malaysia: How does travel & tourism compare to other sectors (Benchmark report). London: Author. Chapter 15 Hospitality, Tourism and Global Education in Asia: A Transnational Conundrum? Current Thoughts and Anecdotes

Andrew Jones

Abstract This chapter aims to review and evaluate the growth of hospitality and tourism programmes offered through transnational education and global partner- ships from ‘exporting’ countries such as the UK to countries such as China, Hong Kong (China), Malaysia, Singapore, Japan and India. The research is focused on qualitative research methods using a sample framework from international collab- orative institutions across Asia. The purposes of the research are to highlight impor- tant contemporary issues and future challenges for international collaborative provision and to identify the benefits, the operational demands and the hazards and pitfalls of such provision. The paper concludes with an overview of strategies that should and can be learned to ensure that hospitality and tourism international col- laborative ventures are mutually successful for all stakeholders, including the host university, the collaborative partner and all the students concerned.

Keywords Global education · Hospitality education · Tourism education · Transnational education

15.1 Introduction

Transnational education, primarily at the tertiary level, has been growing rapidly, bringing with it high hopes and expectations of benefits to institutions in the countries of origin and destination. However, these potential benefits come with a set of challenges that must be overcome. These challenges include the need to reconcile the often-conflicting objectives of the stakeholders involved, bridge learning traditions/styles and cultural divides, and harmo- nise cross-national standards. (Hill et al. 2014, p. 1) As Hill et al. (2014) suggested, the growth in transnational education vis-á-vis edu- cation that is provided by higher education providers that allow students to study wholly oversees at collaborative centres away from host institutions has grown exponentially over the last 10 years. A relatively recent report by the British Council

A. Jones (*) Institute for Tourism Travel and Culture, University of Malta, Msida, Malta e-mail: [email protected]

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 243 C. Liu, H. Schänzel (eds.), Tourism Education and Asia, Perspectives on Asian Tourism, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4_15 244 A. Jones

(2013) suggested that transnational education (TNE) has grown significantly and that the greatest growth has occurred where host countries have clear ambitions and strategies to encourage access to overseas education and provision (British Council, 2013). The report also suggested that both Asia and the Middle East, particularly Hong Kong, Malaysia, Singapore and the United Arab Emirates, are the regions and countries offering the most favourable environments for the development of TNE. The report also suggested that ‘hubs’ such as Botswana and Korea may have the potential to become TNE hotspots in the future. Hong Kong, Malaysia, Singapore and the UAE were placed at the top of the list largely because of their well-estab- lished ‘quality assurance’ processes based upon well-established procedures and processes, which have been widely recognised and accepted by collaborative Her Majesty’s (HM) institutions from, for example, the UK, USA and Australia. This growing phenomenon is also supported by a parallel report at this time by the UK Government entitled International Education – Global Growth and Prosperity (HESA, 2013), which highlighted the continuing and unrivalled international growth of TNE sectors. Recent statistics published by the Higher Education Statistics Agency (HESA, 2017) for the UK illustrated that almost three-quarters (72.2%) of all offshore provi- sion was concentrated within 20 key countries and that the largest numbers of stu- dents were registered from Malaysia, China, Singapore and Pakistan, which, combined, accounted for over one-third (34.2%) of all UK higher education off- shore students. In this respect, only two EU countries appeared within the top 20: Ireland and Greece (Figs. 15.1 and 15.2).

Education level Postgraduate Postgraduate First Other Country (research) (taught) degree undergraduate Total Malaysia 465 6200 67,640 4545 78,850 China 475 3130 60,055 900 64,560 Singapore 110420545,055 600 49,970 Pakistan 25 48545,380 755 46,640 Nigeria 150 6465 28,365 35 35,015 Hong Kong 300 4260 24,480 185 29,220 Sri Lanka 55 6220 13,955 680 20,910 Egypt 75 1335 18,380 45 19,840 Oman 35 2205 16,045 655 18,940 Ghana 40 2335 14,875 120 17,370 United Arab Emirates 255 6610 9670 555 17,090 Greece 120 3625 11,945 145 15,835 Mauritius 40 96014,040 135 15,175 India45216012,360 265 14,830 Kenya 45 1415 11,155 40 12,655 Trinidad and Tobago 55 2965 8385 475 11,880 Ireland 125 2520 8645 305 11,595 Saudi Arabia 105 2005 6775 30 8915 Zimbabwe 15 745813058890 Zambia 55 1055 7135 15 8260

Total top 20 countries 2590 60,905 432,465 10,485 506,440

Fig. 15.1 Number of UK higher education students studying overseas in 2015/2016, by location (top 20 countries) and education level. (HESA, 2017) 15 Hospitality, Tourism and Global Education in Asia: A Transnational Conundrum… 245

Fig. 15.2 The students studying wholly overseas by location of top countries of provision 2015/2016. (HESA, 2017)

In a similar vein, an earlier report by the Australian education organisation ‘Tourism and Hospitality Education’ (International Centre of Excellence in Tourism and Hospitality Education [ICE], 2012) highlighted some of the most common trends in global hospitality and tourism education to date. These issues have con- firmed current growth in the sector and highlighted the following trends for TNE: • An increase in user pays for tertiary education • Rising demand for international education • English as the global education language • The rise of emigration visas/policies • The need for credential recognition • The continued rise of transnational education • An increase in collaboration initiatives These trends have clearly provided the impetus, justification and desire for inter- national collaborative initiatives between host universities and collaborative part- ners, especially to promote transnational education opportunities. Hospitality and tourism programmes, particularly those offered by universities in the UK, USA, Australia, New Zealand and Canada, have very much been at the forefront of these growth trends. Despite this, however, there remain substantial knowledge gaps with regard to collaborative partnership – particularly relating to hospitality and tourism education. It is these knowledge gaps that this chapter aims to bring into focus. 246 A. Jones

15.2 Background Literature

15.2.1 Transnational Education Today

Clearly, the globalisation of higher education, including the expansion of tourism and hospitality programmes, has become an increasing global trend. These, as sug- gested already, include ‘education exports’ primarily from the USA, UK, Canada, Australia and New Zealand but also from a growing number of other European institutions particularly from countries such as the Netherlands, Finland and Switzerland. As such, individual universities from all these countries seek to diver- sify their portfolio of hospitality and tourism programmes, which now increasingly target and rely upon new emerging international markets for their future growth, sustainability and prosperity. The Asia markets, as already evidenced by HESA sta- tistics, have been a key target in this respect (Healey, 2012; HESA, 2017; Huang, 2007; Lane, 2007; Visser, Visser, Amirault, & Simonson, 2012). Indeed, hospitality and tourism growth trends highlighted between 2012 and 2016 by HESA (2017) and the Higher Education Academy (2012) illustrated that such programmes in the UK continue to show growth trends, with growth across the sector over the last decade averaging 28%. In this context, postgraduate provision showed even higher growth averaging a 78% increase over the same period. Despite these growth trends, the days when international students aspired to come and study for traditional programmes provided at established higher education insti- tutions – usually termed ‘overseas students’ – may not be over, but they are changing. The dynamics are increasingly shifting to more ‘localised’ ‘home-focused’­ forms of higher education provision based in a student’s ‘home or domiciled’ country (Mathews, 2012a). There are many contributing factors for such trends, as already suggested in the ICE (2012) study. These can be focused, for example, on factors such as a response to increasing financial and regulatory demands, i.e. increase in overseas tuition fees and ever-stringent immigration and visa regulations (the UK Boarder Agency or US Homeland Security as examples) or fluctuations in currency exchange rates (as with recent upward trends with the Australian and US Dollar). In response to these challenges, universities are increasingly ‘exporting’ their academic programmes and establishing agreements at a number of levels with international collaborative partners. These processes have been increasingly labelled or consolidated by many universities and are commonly termed ‘transnational education’ (TNE) (Chen, 2015; Mathews, 2012a; Miller-Idriss­ & Hanauer, 2011; Montgomery, 2014). An interesting indicator of such trends, in this respect, is statistics published by HESA (2017). These show that the number of students studying overseas for a com- plete British higher education qualification rose by 23 percent in 2012 and now equate to over 15 percent of all students taking UK awards. Such courses are typi- cally cheaper than those delivered in the UK and allow students to stay closer to home while typically avoiding the UK’s ever-stricter visa regime. According to the figures released by HESA (2017), 503,795 students at British institutions ‘studied wholly overseas’ in 2010–2011, and this increased to over 876,000 between 2016 and 2017 (Fig. 15.3). 15 Hospitality, Tourism and Global Education in Asia: A Transnational Conundrum… 247

Fig. 15.3 Region of domicile of non-UK domicile students 2014/2015 and 2015/2016. (Source: HESA 2017)

There are many key players in such activities. The top UK providers in the last 5 years include the University of London (36,425), Open University (26,715), University of Wales (11,335), University of Leicester (11,110), Heriot-Watt University (8570), Middlesex University (7050), University of Bradford (6575), University of Nottingham (5635), University of Derby (4770) and Staffordshire University (4690). It is estimated that such collaborations have contributed over half a billion pounds annually to British university budgets. In turn, this has provided an increasingly valuable source of funding, especially within a climate of ever-­ decreasing financial support from central government. According to figures from Australia Education International (2013), almost one-third (104,678) of interna- tional students studying for an Australian higher education qualification were doing so ‘offshore’ in 2010. To a large extent, the reasons and motivations for this growth have mirrored the UK experience. Such operations can bring key benefits to each partner, both for the provider and for the end user. McBurnie and Ziguras (2006), Healey (2012), Alama, Alamb, Chowdhurya and Steinera (2013) and Shams (2016), in their recent work on the issues and sustain- ability of TNE operations, give some insights. In this respect, benefits often tend to be both financial and economic in nature but can also deliver less tangible benefits. For example, collaborative partnerships can offer global reach for an institution, thus enhancing reputation and, in turn, new marketing and branding opportunities. Such initiatives can provide additional income through franchising and validation of existing academic programmes internationally. Partners can often offer cheaper operational costs. They can assist in avoiding or reducing compliance with immi- gration and study visa controls. In turn, collaboration can open opportunities to ‘grow’ educational markets that might have more competition and constraints on home territory. From a user or student perspective, such partnerships can reduce educational costs by studying at a collaborative institution rather than funding study 248 A. Jones at expensive overseas campuses. In this context, TNE initiatives can help avoid visa and immigration restrictions and costs and help obtain internationally recognised and credited qualifications. In some respects, such partnerships can also offer less tangible but still advantageous offerings. This might include notions of global social inclusion and cross-cultural exchange, thus giving opportunities for students to study internationally recognised programmes and have ‘international’ experiences that would not have been available to them without global partnership arrangements (Alama et al., 2013; Healey, 2012; Shams, 2016). The clamour for universities to claim an increasing portion of this growing mar- ket has become increasingly competitive and perhaps even increasingly divisive (McBurnie & Pollock, 2000; McBurnie & Ziguras, 2006; Wilkins & Stevens-­ Balakrishnan, 2013). There is a regulatory framework within which such overseas collaboration must function. In this context, the UK Quality Assurance Agency (QAA) has direct responsibility for maintaining quality standards and ensuring that overseas collaborative partners adhere to UK higher education norms (Knight, 2016; QAA, 2014). Similar norms are also practised in, for example, Australia with the Universities Australia Tertiary Education Quality Standards Agency (TEQSA) quality assurance processes. On a smaller scale, organisations such as Malaysian Qualifications Agency (MQA) in Malaysia, Hong Kong Quality Assurance Agency (HKQAA), and the Hong Kong or Ministry for Education – Higher Education Division (MoE – HED) Singapore provide a more localised additional dimension for further quality control.

15.3 Current Challenges for Transnational Education

Despite the growth and general success of such ventures, media and news headlines over the last few years have been increasingly targeting these collaborative ventures and highlighting some of the pitfalls that can occur when partnerships and collab- orative operations do not function as both local and external quality assurance requirements demand (Mathews, 2012b; McBurnie & Ziguras, 2006). This has led to much controversy and accusations that some overseas British and other ‘global’ universities are putting profit before quality, which in turn has put the quality of some transnational collaborative provision ‘on the line’. Mathews (2012b) has referred to this as the cash cow disease and the economics of boom or bust. McBurnie and Ziguras (2006) refer to westernising tendencies, arrogance, imperialism and restrictive practices. As a consequence, the UK’s general good reputation in this field has not always been immune to such controversy. A number of authors have already expressed some disquiet at the level and range of transnational education provision and the questionable motivations of many providers (Huang, 2007; Lane, 2007; Observatory on Borderless Higher Education [OBHE], 2011; Shams, 2016). Criticism has tended to centre on sustainability issues and the ability of collabora- tive partners to match and mirror acceptable quality and regulatory processes required by home institutions. For example, many UK universities have had much 15 Hospitality, Tourism and Global Education in Asia: A Transnational Conundrum… 249 criticism levelled at them in this regard (Australia Education International, 2013; British Council, 2013; Mathews, 2012b). Other criticisms have questioned the pro- vision of ‘holistic’ or ‘fully rounded’ student university experiences and whether local partner institutions can offer the replication or ‘like for like’ experiences of ‘home’ university institutions – notions that Heffernan, Morrison, Basu and Sweeney (2010) and Montgomery (2014) have explored in the literature. Some criticism has also been levelled at the ‘experience’ of students and whether the study experience at a collaborative partner institution can match ones offered at a home institution. The areas where concern has often been expressed are now well docu- mented (McBurnie & Ziguras, 2006; OBHE, 2011; Wilkins and Stevens-­ Balakrishnan, 2013). In summary, the most common criticisms have been levelled at a number of areas. These include problems associated with the following aspects: • Financial profit motivation – this tends to reflect the need to maximise student numbers in order for collaborative partnerships to maintain financial sustainabil- ity; it may not always be in the best interests of teaching and learning or adhere to acceptable academic principles. • Student admissions – again, strict matriculation requirements required at home institutions are sometimes applied more flexibly at partner institutions where the qualifications of students entering a programme might be less than those required at a home institution. • Enforcement of academic procedures – in a similar vein to student admissions, a local partner institution may offer a more flexible approach to academic proce- dures or may not have the resources, particularly in trained personnel, to deliver acceptable administrative or academic processes required by a home institution. The qualification of teaching staff at some partner institutions has, on occasions, been identified as being deficient in this respect. • Learning support – library and teaching resources are often not identical or simi- lar in nature and, where access to home institution resources and facilities are not available, teaching and learning facilities (particularly library resources) for stu- dents studying at collaborative partner institutions can often be sub-standard. • Student engagement – often, the student experience can be quite different at a collaborative partner institution, particularly where these are small in scale. Student support and access to such things as graduation opportunities may also be limited or non-existent. • Publicity and marketing – use of logos and false representation of home institu- tions has occurred on a number of occasions. At its worst, programmes have been marketed and sold with false representation or through the second franchising of programmes to third parties. • Meeting student expectations – this issue particularly relates to classroom deliv- ery and the teaching and learning experiences of students. Again, these can be quite different from the expectations of the home institutions and may not always meet desired aims or objectives. The physical distance and the sometimes ­‘hands-­off’ approach of some home institutions do not always meet the often 250 A. Jones

desired ‘partnership’ approach to programme provision that perhaps was envisaged. • Financial collapse and fraud – at its worst, the financial collapse or fraudulent activities of partner institutions (the majority of which are privately funded) can lead to a situation where many students are unable to complete their programme of study. In turn, this can lead to financial insecurity and additional substantial legal and operational costs for a home institution. It may also bring such institu- tions into disrepute with local and international media and local politics. These are clearly pertinent issues for the execution of successful TNE opera- tions. Hospitality and tourism TNE education is also not exempt in this respect. Statistics for specific TNE hospitality and tourism programmes are not easily sepa- rated from general business aggregated numbers for students studying through TNE operations. These lessons, however, remain the same, and the implementation of hospitality and tourism TNE programmes will generally share the common issues and challenges associated with the development and implementation of TNE opera- tions wherever they occur.

15.4 The Research Design and Approach

The research associated with this study aimed to review and evaluate such manifes- tations – in other words, the research aimed to investigate the key perceptions of transnational education from the users’ or collaborative partners’ perspectives using qualitative research methods from a sample framework of international collabora- tive institutions in Asia. This study focused upon an inductive approach using quali- tative and case study research methodologies. In this context, secondary data were used to provide the contextual background. At a macro level, global higher educa- tion growth and TNE development provide the main ‘backdrop’ for the study. At a micro level, the evaluation of local collaborative partnership development provided a more focused framework for the detailed assessment and analysis of current issues for establishing and running hospitality and tourism TNE operations locally at col- laborative centres. In addition to this, primary research was used to collect qualita- tive data, which is based on a purposeful sample selection of interviews from TNE partners in Singapore, Malaysia, Hong Kong, Japan, India and China. The sampling comprised of a purposeful sample that consisted of small- (2000–3000 students), medium- (3000–7000 students) and larger-scale (>7000 students) private and public institutions that offered both undergraduate and postgraduate collaborative hospital- ity and tourism degree programmes from the UK, US and Australian higher educa- tion institutions. The aim of such an approach was to provide a balanced set of opinion and discourse that reflected and represented a good sample of collaborative institutions. In all, approximately 15 collaborative partner interviews were con- ducted with key senior members of staff at each institution. Personal and group interviews with both senior administrative and academic staff members were 15 Hospitality, Tourism and Global Education in Asia: A Transnational Conundrum… 251 conducted in order to seek answers to the research questions and research objectives set. This was further supplemented by compiling and evaluating a number of com- ments made by staff and student representatives at exam boards and academic board of study meetings during examination and assessment meetings. Both provided an insightful and, although confidential for each individual institution, a rich collection of general data for this research. The four key research objectives set out to: 1. Evaluate the current perceptions of TNE operations at a local level. 2. Analyse motivations for collaborative partnerships. 3. Evaluate current challenges for operating collaborative partnerships. 4. Analyse future opportunities for collaborative partnerships. The data were analysed through discourse analysis techniques utilising grid matrices to evaluate and ascertain common themes and responses from the discus- sions and questions asked. The results of the research identified clear issues expressed from the collaborative partners. These tended to mirror some of the issues raised in the existing literature (Alama et al., 2013; British Council, 2013; McBurnie & Ziguras, 2006; OBHE, 2011; Shams, 2016) and summarised the general critical issues that can arise when establishing collaborative partnerships for hospitality and tourism programmes. This tended to confirm some of the commonly known, posi- tive and negative outcomes. What became apparent from the research, however, was the differentiation between the different types of institutions offering collaborative provision. In this context, the perceptions of what collaboration meant for individ- ual institutions, such as between small or larger institutions vis-á-vis public or pri- vate institutions or the differing cultural values – South Asia vis-á-vis Southeast Asia or East Asia – provided quite different perspectives.

15.5 Key Findings: Current Issues and Challenges for Transnational Education Operations

15.5.1 The Positives

The majority of the respondents from all the institutions and regions sampled gener- ally illustrated positive experiences for the TNE operations that they had been involved with. The building of relationships between partners was generally viewed as a positive, which allowed collaborative institutions opportunities to develop both undergraduate and postgraduate tourism and hospitality programmes in line with accepted and fully recognised international standards. This was a key factor in pro- viding both attractive and economically sustainable hospitality and tourism pro- grammes, which were seen, in turn, as very marketable and appealing for the recruitment of local students. This was a key motivation for most collaborative part- ners. However, the results showed little differentiation between the different Asian 252 A. Jones regions in this respect, although in Singapore, Malaysia and Hong Kong, financial imperatives appeared to be stronger motivational ‘push and pull’ factors. Cultural factors, such as cross-cultural integration and cultural exchange, or peer/cultural collaboration and the sharing and exchanging of social values and experiences, appeared to be more important for collaborative partnerships in China, Japan and to some extent India. The strength of being part of an internationally recognised col- laboration between ‘West and East’ institutions was certainly a key value in this respect. In particular, Chinese institutions expressed very positive sentiments, iden- tifying the ‘value of cultural exchange, shared values and promoting mutual under- standing’ as a key motivator for collaboration. Indian and Japanese institutions also expressed the desire for ‘mutual understanding and a desire for cross-cultural exchange’. Nearly all the respondents indicated that they had benefited from learning new academic procedures and quality processes that were recognised fully as interna- tional educational standards. This, in turn, helped with staff professional develop- ment and exposure to internationally accepted educational norms. Again, there was some slight differentiation in this context, and it was clear that staff associated with tourism and hospitality programmes in, for example, India and China ascribed greater value and showed a greater degree of appreciation for this. The results show that perceptions were generally positive across all institutions. Ancillary benefits, although evidence suggested that these were not fully capital- ised upon, also included aspirations for educational research, student and staff exchanges and internship opportunities – especially from India and China. In this respect, the benefits of cross-cultural exchange should not be ignored here. Clearly, the research showed that the cross-cultural value of exchange and the creation of mutual understanding were very positive. This notion was expressed by many of the interviewees despite them being from quite different cultural backgrounds or having diverse behavioural norms. All participants saw the greater value in coop- eration and partnership, which helped develop and deliver truly transnational edu- cational experiences for hospitality and tourism students. This was particularly of value to institutions in China and Japan where possibly colonial and postcolonial experiences and expertise remained different from other Asian nations and regions such as Hong Kong, Malaysia and Singapore. For example, Chinese participants highly valued the ‘expertise and highly thought of quality’ of the internationally recognised programmes provided for their students. Japanese institutions also expressed ‘the benefit of added cultural value and mutual understanding’ in this respect. Hong Kong, Malaysia and Singapore institutions, on the other hand, val- ued the ‘competitive and academic advantage of collaborative engagement’ with ‘fellow partners’ in the UK, USA and Australia. The positive aspects are presented in Table 15.1. 15 Hospitality, Tourism and Global Education in Asia: A Transnational Conundrum… 253

Table 15.1 The positives of hospitality and tourism transnational education provision Establishing greater economic and market advantage for the recruitment of local students on hospitality and tourism programmes Providing internationally recognised hospitality and tourism programmes attractive to local students ‘The creation of equals’ – the majority of collaborative partners expressing positive relationships and positive proactive partnership experiences and arrangements Enhancement of teaching and learning processes through a friendly ‘critical eye’ approach from most home institutions The introduction of rigorous internationally recognised quality assurance processes enhancing academic processes and recognition at a local level At some level – but still in the minority of cases – facilitating staff and or student exchange and research opportunities Providing internship opportunities across partnership institutions Potential opportunities to develop research and postgraduate study Engagement and staff development opportunities amongst the ‘family’ of collaborative partnership institutions linked to the home institution Providing new academic business opportunities and the further development of existing hospitality and tourism programmes for further transnational education opportunities

15.5.2 The Challenges

Perceptions that were less positive tended to focus on administrative and opera- tional processes and procedures rather than the more significant sentiments expressed for long-term partnership relationships. This might be caused by the mis- understanding or mismatch between institutions and their local operational needs and requirements. Often, however, collaborative partners expressed some disquiet and frustration with regard to a number of operational technicalities, especially delays in communication or slow responses to enquiries or requests. At some insti- tutions, particularly those with less academic experience, the time it took to obtain matriculation/graduation certificates or approval for matriculating students was a key concern. The financial modus operandi of many collaborative partners, particu- larly in Hong Kong, Singapore, Malaysia and India, is a key to their success, and, consequently, timely decisions are essential in order to maintain viability. The slow responses, in some circumstances, and the impact this had on local students’ impres- sions, remained a key frustration for many in this respect. Again, perceived differing cultural and socio-economic values seem to be at play here. For example, the work- ing ethic of many of the privately run collaborative partners and their often financial imperatives seemed, at times, to clash with the slower academic quality processes that are often the key imperatives of publicly funded home institutions. 254 A. Jones

Although the financial imperatives on both sides of TNE operations have merged more closely over the last decade, there remain some real gaps in cultural under- standing between the primarily publically funded university sector and the predomi- nantly privately funded collaborative partner sector where clear differences in priorities and functions are evidenced. As an adjunct to this, however, many collab- orative partners saw themselves as ‘cash cows’ for host universities who, in worst case scenarios, primarily see collaborative opportunities as purely commercial enterprises with little opportunity to develop deeper partnership relationships based upon mutual dialogue and partnership exchange. Although not evident in the cases researched for this study, respondents did note a cause for concern. In this context, it was generally perceived that hospitality, tourism and business programmes were particularly vulnerable to so-called cash cow economic exploitation, and where competition was most fierce (Hong Kong and Singapore), this caused additional risks for bone fide hospitality and tourism TNE operations, especially when pitched against less morally astute competitors. At a more social and cultural level, the concept of ‘postcolonial imperialism’ was expressed by a small number of partners who felt that dictates, circulars and decrees from the ‘mother’ university were not always expressed or passed on in the spirit of collaboration or partnership. In this respect, some felt that the relationship at the institutional level was very much a top-down approach to management with little opportunity for collaborative partners to have a say in developing programmes, pro- cedures or operations. These were particular sentiments expressed by partners in Hong Kong and Singapore who wished to be more proactive and encourage more inclusive processes between institutions. Other partners were more deferential, for example, those from China and Japan, which might, again, reflect the differences in colonial and postcolonial experience between Asian nations. For example, institu- tions from the less developed nations of Asia seemed to be more accepting of a ‘top-down’ approach to collaborative arrangements rather than the more ‘partner- ship’ or ‘collaborative’ approach often expected as the norm from the more devel- oped centres and regions sampled. The negatives are presented in Table 15.2.

Table 15.2 The negatives of hospitality and tourism transnational education provision Lengthy and often delayed communication (particularly administrative) processes between collaborative partners and home institutions Delayed matriculation and certification processes Perceived ‘autocratic’ dictates (often associated with changed regulations – at short notice) from home institutions Lack of meaningful exchange opportunities for staff and students from partner institutions The ‘cash cow’ syndrome ‘business’ priority versus ‘cross-cultural educational exchange’ motivations from home institutions Lack of meaningful ‘partnership’ dialogue – dialogue often perceived as ‘one way’ from partner institutions Postcolonial manifestations – perceived colonialist management approaches (based upon ideals of supremacy) from home institutions Mistrust and hegemony between home institutions and collaborative partners 15 Hospitality, Tourism and Global Education in Asia: A Transnational Conundrum… 255

Despite these negatives, hospitality and tourism education delivered through TNE operations has been viewed by the partners of this study as generally a positive and rewarding experience for both staff and students at both ends of TNE operations linking universities to collaborative partners. The case of hospitality and tourism is not a unique one and only forms a small part in the multiplicity of TNE collaborative programmes offered globally. Indeed, in the greater picture, despite the popularity of such programmes, hospitality and tourism remain a small fraction of the social sciences, particularly business pro- grammes offered by TNE. That said, this small study goes some way to highlight and confirm both notions expressed in the current literature – that TNE is generally a force for good in cultural and cross-cultural exchange with a caveat that things can go wrong. In general terms, however, the collaborative centres and students who have experienced their academic hospitality and tourism studies through TNE oper- ations all see the benefits and rewards that the experience has offered. In summary, one key participant in the research summarised their experience of collaborative partnership as a ‘unique chance for their students to be part of a great opportunity to work with others across the world and to have a truly internationally globally recog- nised qualification and educational experience’. It was a notion and sentiment shared with many of the other participating institutions.

15.6 Conclusion

In conclusion, the results of this study highlight important contemporary issues and future challenges for hospitality and tourism international collaborative provision – the benefits, the operational demands and the hazards and pitfalls of such provision. Several key lessons (highlighted from the research finding in Tables 15.1 and 15.2) can be drawn from the results that can help inform the development of future col- laborative provision through TNE. This, in turn, can ensure that hospitality and tourism international collaborative ventures can be mutually successful for all stakeholders including the home university, the collaborative partner and all the students concerned. These lessons generally relate to a number of factors that might offer insights for future sustainable partnerships. Some implications of the study are as follows: • The need for the collaborative institution to match and mirror the home institu- tion programmes procedures and processes to ensure consistency and quality is maintained between partners. • The need to give attention to both local and home regulatory frameworks and benchmarking in order to maintain international recognition and quality. • The need to ensure appropriate cross-cultural awareness is demonstrated by the home institution, perhaps incorporating diplomacy, flexibility and, if required, compromise. 256 A. Jones

• The need to allow for local cultural differentiation and diversification, i.e. the ‘localisation’ of hospitality and tourism curricula within programmes. • The need to have a frequent (better still, permanent) local presence from the home institution as well as developing personal contacts (staff and students). In essence, maintaining continuity, frequent contact and commitment. • The need to ensure professionalism in operating TNE partnerships, including holistic management, team work, appropriate and adequate centrally adminis- tered (home institution) support and resourcing. • The need to support meaningful ‘partnership’ engagement and ‘collaboration’ including shared-destiny ideals and facilitating and funding research and exchanges opportunities. • The need to ensure that partnerships adopt academic strategies that are flexible and able to respond efficiently and effectively to the challenges inferred from this research. In turn, also to adopt ‘media savvy’ responses to adverse publicity. This should perhaps include elements of risk planning and management and the via- ble/planned use of exit strategies when required. Hospitality and tourism programmes delivered through TNE collaborative part- nerships have clearly demonstrated success and substantial growth over the last decade. Over the coming years, it is clear that universities will continue to strive to diversify their programmes and delivery models in order to maintain academic and economic growth. Hospitality and tourism programmes will continue to offer attrac- tive TNE propositions in this respect. This will increasingly be focussed on new growth strategies based on international collaboration but often with a strong under- lying business agenda. Consequently, the complexity and diverse nature of hospital- ity and tourism TNE provision are set to increase. This will inevitably present new issues and challenges and may also raise more complex collaborative partnership issues, as suggested already by experiences already encountered. Some home insti- tutions will continue to be highly successful with the programmes they offer. Similarly, many collaborative partnership institutions will prosper and grow in stat- ure and maturity, perhaps even offering their own validated or stand-alone hospital- ity and tourism programmes in the future. It is perhaps predictable that there will be casualties along the way. The issues associated with professionalism, management and more meaningful, deeper collaborative partnership and engagement are clear indicators for partnership institutions if they are to remain successful, maintain quality and be fit for purpose. The consequences of failure can be severe (Mathews, 2012b; McBurnie & Ziguras, 2006) if such issues are not addressed. Existing and newcomer institutions to the ‘business’ of international hospitality and tourism edu- cation through TNE operations should not hesitate to embrace the opportunities that can deliver both economic and culturally rewarding outcomes but also need to take heed of the lessons and pitfalls that transnational education can invoke. 15 Hospitality, Tourism and Global Education in Asia: A Transnational Conundrum… 257

References

Alama, F., Alamb, Q., Chowdhurya, H., & Steinera, T. (2013). Transnational education: Benefits, threats and challenges. Procedia Engineering, 56, 870–874. Australia Education International. (2013). Delivery of VET off shore providers 2013. Retrieved September 7, 2017, from http://www.voced.edu.au/content/ngv%3A71665 British Council. (2013). In-depth study surveys trans-national education. Retrieved September 7, 2017, from https://www.britishcouncil.org/organisation/press/trans-national-education Chen, P. Y. (2015). Transnational education: Trend, modes of practices and development. International Journal of Information and Education Technology, 5(8), 634–637. Healey, N. (2012). Overview of the global market in transnational education (8th QS-Apple annual conference). Retrieved September 7, 2017, from http://www.academia.edu/2157449/ Overview_of_the_global_market_in_transnational_education Heffernan, T., Morrison, M., Basu, P., & Sweeney, A. (2010). Cultural differences, learning styles and transnational education. Journal of Higher Education Policy and Management, 32(1), 27–39. Higher Education Academy. (2012). 2011–2012 annual report. York, UK: Author. Higher Education Statistics Agency HESA. (2013). International education – Global growth and prosperity. Retrieved 7 Sept 2017, from http://www.hesa.ac.uk/index.php?option=com_conten t&task=view&id=3103&Itemid=161. Higher Education Statistics Agency HESA. (2017). Higher education student enrol- ments and qualifications obtained at higher education providers in the United Kingdom 2015/16. Retrieved September 7, 2017, from https://www.hesa.ac.uk/news/12-01-2017/ sfr242-student-enrolments-and-qualifications Hill, C., Cheong, K.-C., Leong, Y.-C., & Fernandez-Chung, R. (2014). TNE – Trans-national edu- cation or tensions between national and external? A case study of Malaysia. Studies in Higher Education, 39(6), 952–966. Huang, F. (2007). Internationalization of higher education in the developing and emerging coun- tries: A focus on transnational higher education in Asia. Journal of Studies in International Education, 11(3–4), 421–432. International Centre of Excellence in Tourism and Hospitality Education. (2012). International key trends in education. Retrieved September 7, 2017, from http://the-ice.org/ Knight, J. (2016). Transnational education remodeled: Toward a common TNE framework and definitions. Journal of Studies in International Education, 20(1), 34–47. Lane, J. E. (2007). Transnational education: Issues and trends in offshore higher education. The Review of Higher Education, 31(1), 119–120. Mathews, D. (2012a, October 18). Empires and allies. Times higher education. Retrieved from https://www.timeshighereducation.com/features/empires-and-allies/421485.article Mathews, D. (2012b, January 5). Boom and bust. Times higher education. Retrieved from https:// www.timeshighereducation.com/features/boom-and-bust/418612.article McBurnie, G., & Pollock, A. (2000). Opportunity and risk in transnational education – Issues in planning for international campus development: An Australian perspective. Higher Education in Europe, 25(3), 333–343. McBurnie, G., & Ziguras, C. (2006). Transnational education: Issues and trends in offshore higher education. London: Routledge. Miller-Idriss, C., & Hanauer, E. (2011). Transnational higher education: Offshore campuses in the Middle East. Comparative Education, 47(2), 181–207. Montgomery, C. (2014). Transnational and transcultural positionality in globalised higher educa- tion. Journal of Education for Teaching, 40(3), 198–203. 258 A. Jones

Observatory on Borderless Higher Education. (2011, September 11). Borderless report 2011 (Issue 8). London: Author. Quality Assurance Agency. (2014). Code of practice for the assurance of academic quality and standards in higher education Section 2: Collaborative provision and flexible and distributed learning (including e-learning). Retrieved September 7, 2017, from http://qaqe-sig.net/wp- content/uploads/2010/09/QAQE_Report_final1.pdf Shams, S. R. (2016). Sustainability issues in transnational education service: A conceptual frame- work and empirical insights. Journal of Global Marketing, 29(3), 139–155. Visser, L., Visser, Y. L., Amirault, R., & Simonson, M. (Eds.). (2012). Trends and issues in distance education: International perspectives (2nd ed.). Charlotte, NC: Information Age Publishing. Wilkins, S., & Stevens-Balakrishnan, M. (2013). Assessing student satisfaction in transnational higher education. International Journal of Educational Management, 27(2), 143–156. Glossary

ACPHA Accreditation Commission for Programmes in Hospitality Administration ASEAN Association of Southeast Asian Nations CBIE Canadian Bureau for International Education GNH Gross National Happiness Greater China Mainland China, Hong Kong, Macau and Taiwan HESA Higher Education Statistics Agency HKQAA Hong Kong Quality Assurance Agency IDP International Development Programme JCPOA Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action MQA Malaysian Qualifications Agency MQA The Malaysian Qualifications Agency QAA UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education QS Quacquarelli Symonds World University Rankings RITH Royal Institute for Tourism and Hospitality TedQual Tourism Education Quality Accreditation TEQSA Tertiary Education Quality Standards Agency The ICE The International Centre of Excellence in Tourism and Hospitality Education TNHE Transnational higher education UNWTO United Nations World Tourism Organisation UNESCO United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organisation VET Vocational Education and Training VNAT Vietnam National Administration of Tourism WIL Work-Integrated Learning WTTC World Travel & Tourism Council

© Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd. 2019 259 C. Liu, H. Schänzel (eds.), Tourism Education and Asia, Perspectives on Asian Tourism, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-981-13-2613-4